Series 90-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual PDF

Î
GE Fanuc Automation
Programmable Control Products
t
Series 90 -30 PLC
Installation and Hardware Manual
GFK-0356P October 1999
FANUC CNC Controls

GFL–002
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes

as Used in this Publication
Warning
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that

hazardous voltages, currents, temperatures, or other conditions that
could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or may be
associated with its use.
In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or
damage to equipment, a Warning notice is used.
Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is

not taken.
Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to
understanding and operating the equipment.
This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While
efforts have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not
purport to cover all details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for
every possible contingency in connection with installation, operation, or maintenance.
Features may be described herein which are not present in all hardware and software
systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes no obligation of notice to holders of this
document with respect to changes subsequently made.
GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or
statutory with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness,
sufficiency, or usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of
merchantability or fitness for purpose shall apply.
The following are trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.
Alarm Master Genius ProLoop Series Three

CIMPLICITY Helpmate PROMACRO VersaMax
CIMPLICITY 90-ADS Logicmaster Series Five VersaPro
CIMSTAR Modelmaster Series 90 VuMaster
Field Control Motion Mate Series One Workmaster
GEnet PowerTRAC Series Six
Copyright 1989 - 1999 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.
All Rights Reserved
RFI Standards
t
The Series 90 -30 PLC and its associated modules have been tested and found to meet
or exceed the requirements of FCC Rule, Part 15, Subpart J. The Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) requires the following note to be published
according to FCC guidelines.
NOTE
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not
installed in accordance with this instruction manual, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules,
which are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a
residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will
be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
The following note is required to be published by the Canadian Department of

Communications.
NOTE
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise
emissions from digital apparatus set out in the radio interference regulations
of the Canadian Department of Communications.
t
The following statements are required to appear in the Series 90 -30 Installation Manual
t
and the Series 90 -30 I/O Specifications Manual for Class I Div 2 Hazardous Locations.
1. EQUIPMENT LABELED WITH REFERENCE TO CLASS I, GROUPS A, B, C, and D,
DIV. 2 HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS IS SUITABLE FOR USE IN CLASS I, DIVISION 2,
GROUPS A, B, C, D OR NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS ONLY.
2. WARNING - EXPLOSION HAZARD - SUBSTITUTION OF COMPONENTS
MAY IMPAIR SUITABILITY FOR CLASS I, DIVISION 2:
3. WARNING - EXPLOSION HAZARD - DO NOT DISCONNECT EQUIPMENT
UNLESS POWER HAS BEEN SWITCHED OFF OR THE AREA IS KNOWN TO BE
NON-HAZARDOUS.
4. ALL UNUSED SLOTS IN ALL BASEPLATES MUST BE POPULATED WITH FILLER
MODULES, IC693ACC310, OR EQUIVALENT.
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls iii
Preface
iv Series 90-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual GFK-0356P

Preface
t
This manual describes the GE Fanuc Series 90 -30 Programmable Logic Controller
(PLC). It contains a description of hardware components and provides basic hardware
t
installation procedures. The Series 90-30 PLC is a member of the Series 90 family of
Programmable Logic Controllers from GE Fanuc.
For a list of product standards, refer to data sheet GFK-0867B or later, GE Fanuc Approvals,
Standards, General Specifications which lists all of the standards for GE Fanuc products.
Installation instructions in this manual are provided for installations that do not require
special procedures for noisy or hazardous environments. For installations that must
conform to more stringent requirements (such as CE Mark), see GFK-1179, Installation
Requirements for Conformance to Standards.
What’s New in This Manual

H This manual has been rearranged into 13 chapters, each covering a specific topic
such as Installation, Baseplates, Power Supplies, CPUs, Option Modules, etc.
H Chapter 5 contains information about CPU models IC693CPU363 and IC693CPU364
and CPU firmware release 9.00 features for CPUs 350 – 364.
H Chapter 7 contains information about the IC693DVM300 Digital Valve Driver
module.
H Preliminary information about Option modules IC693DSM314 and
IC693PTM100/101 (Chapter 8), and Power Supply IC693PWR328 (Chapter 4) has
been added.
H Chapter 6 contains information on memory backup strategy and on the backup
battery, including such things as reading battery date codes and estimating battery
life.
H Chapter 10 includes additional information on both new and old cables, including a
cable-to-product cross-reference table.
H Chapter 12 introduces a new subject, System Design, to this manual. It describes
factors to consider and specifications needed for designing a Series 90-30 system.
H Chapter 13 presents information on the subject of maintenance and troubleshooting
and includes information on obtaining technical help and information via the Web
site, Fax Link, and Technical Support telephone numbers.
H Appendix G discusses new port isolator IC690ACC903.
H A new section describing how to calculate Series 90-30 heat dissipation can be found
in Appendix H.
H A product to publication number cross-reference has been added (Appendix I) to
help you find documentation for Series 90-30 products.
H Appendix J includes information on the new Terminal Block Quick Connect
(IC693ACC377) and associated cables for 32-point modules.
H Appendix K covers the subject of SNP Multidrop.
H Appendix L contains data on Ethernet Transceivers IC649AEA102 and IC649AEA103.
H Appendix M contains useful tables and formulas.
Some of the new modules and/or other products referenced above may not be available when
this manual is printed. For current availability of features and products consult your local
GE Fanuc PLC distributor or GE Fanuc sales representative.
FANUC CNC Controls

GFK-0356P Preface v
Preface
Content of this Manual

Chapter 1. Overview of the Series 90-30 PLC: This chapter provides you with an
introduction to the Series 90-30 Programmable Logic Controller products and an
overview of how they fit together into a system.
Chapter 2. Installation: Provides information such as mounting, wiring, and grounding
Series 90-30 components.
Chapter 3. Baseplates: Baseplate types, descriptions, and specifications.
Chapter 4. Power Supplies: Power supply types, descriptions, and specifications.
Chapter 5. CPUs: CPU types, descriptions, and specifications.
Chapter 6. Memory Backup and Backup Battery: Discusses various memory backup
strategies as well as battery issues, such as battery life estimation and date code
interpretation.
Chapter 7. Input and Output Modules: Covers an overview of these modules. This
chapter refers you to the Series 90-30 I/O Module Specifications Manual (GFK-0898) for
details on these modules.
Chapter 8. Option Modules: Covers an overview of these modules. This chapter refers
you to the various manuals that cover these modules in detail.
Chapter 9. State Logic Products: Covers an overview of these modules. This chapter
refers you to the various manuals that cover these modules in detail.
Chapter 10. Cables: Contains a cable-to-product cross-reference table as well as data
sheets for the Series 90-30 cables.
Chapter 11. Programmer Hardware Products. Discusses such things as WSI boards,
PCIF cards, and converters and isolators.
Chapter 12. System Design: Factors to consider when designing a Series 90-30 PLC
system. Includes specifications and layout information needed for the design process.
Chapter 13. Maintenance: Features of Series 90-30 hardware and software that are
useful for troubleshooting. Also contains tables of spare parts and preventive
maintenance suggestions, and a fuse-to-module cross-reference. Includes information
on accessing GE Fanuc technical help resources such as Fax Link and our Web site.
Appendix A. Glossary: Contains terms relevant to the Series 90-30 PLC and to
Programmable Logic Controllers in general.
Appendix B. Commonly used Acronyms.
Appendix C. Serial Port and Cables: Serial port and cable specifications.
Appendix D. IC690ACC900 Converter: Contains detailed information about this obsolete
product.
Appendix E. IC655CCM590 Isolated Repeater/Converter: Contains detailed
information about this obsolete product
Appendix F. IC690ACC901 Miniconverter Kit: Product description and specifications.
Appendix G. IC690ACC903 Port Isolator: Product description and specifications.
vi Series 90-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual GFK-0356P

Preface
Appendix H. Series 90-30 Heat Dissipation: How to calculate heat dissipation for the
purpose of sizing enclosures.
Appendix I. Catalog Number to Publication Cross-Reference: Lists applicable
publications for Series 90-30 product catalog numbers.
Appendix J. Terminal Block Quick Connect. Describes the Terminal Block Quick
Connect system, which consists of an interposing terminal block, faceplate, and cable.
This assembly allows faster wiring of some discrete I/O modules.
Appendix K. SNP Multidrop. Explains how to connect a programming unit to multiple
PLCs and/or Option modules.
Appendix L. Ethernet Transceivers. Data on the two transceivers sold by GE Fanuc.
Appendix M. Tables and Formulas. Contains information such as Fahrenheit to Celsius
temperature conversion, AWG wire sizes to Metric conversion, ASCII codes, Metric to
English units conversions, etc.
Appendix N. 44A720084-001 EMI Line Filter. Describes the optional EMI line filter that
was used on some early versions of the Series 90-30 PLC to meet FCC EMI requirements
for non-industrial applications.
FANUC CNC Controls

GFK-0356P Preface vii
Preface
Related Publications:
For more information on Series 90-30 products, refer to these publications (note: a
publication to product catalog number cross-reference is provided in Appendix H):
GFK-0255 - Series 90 PCM and Support Software User’s Manual
GFK-0256 - MegaBasic Programming Reference Manual
GFK-0293 - Series 90-30 High Speed Counter User’s Manual
GFK-0401 - Workmaster II PLC Programming Unit Guide to Operation
GFK-0402 - Series 90-30 and 90-20 PLC Hand-Held Programmer User’s Manual
GFK-0412 - Genius Communications Module User’s Manual
GFK-0466 - Logicmaster 90 Series 90-30/20/Micro Programming Software User’s Manual
GFK-0467 - Series 90-30/20/Micro Programmable Controllers Reference Manual
GFK-0487 - Series 90 PCM Development Software (PCOP) User’s Manual
GFK-0499 - CIMPLICITY 90-ADS Alphanumeric Display System User’s Manual
GFK-0582 - Series 90 PLC Serial Communications User’s Manual
GFK-0631 - Series 90-30 I/O LINK Interface User’s Manual
GFK-0641 - CIMPLICITY 90-ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual
GFK-0664 - Series 90-30 PLC Axis Positioning Module Programmer’s Manual
GFK-0685 - Series 90 Programmable Controllers Flow Computer User ’s Manual
GFK-0695 - Series 90-30 Enhanced Genius Communications Module User ’s Manual
GFK-0726 - Series 90-30 PLC State Logic Processor User ’s Guide
GFK-0732 - Series 90-30 PLC ECLiPS User ’s Manual
GFK-0747 - Series 90-30 PLC OnTOP User ’s Guide
GFK-0750 - OnTop for Series 90-30 (State Logic) Program User ’s Manual
GFK-0781 - Motion Mate APM300 for Series 90-30 PLC Follower Mode User ’s Manual
GFK-0823 - Series 90-30 I/O LINK Master Module User ’s Manual
GFK-0828 - Series 90-30 Diagnostic System User ’s Manual
GFK-0840 - Motion Mate APM300 for Series 90-30 PLC Standard Mode User ’s Manual
GFK-0867 - GE Fanuc Product Agency Approvals, Standards, General Specifications
GFK-0898 - Series 90-30 PLC I/O Module Specifications
GFK-1028 - Series 90-30 I/O Processor Module User ’s Manual
GFK-1034 - Series 90-30 Genius Bus Controller User ’s Manual
GFK-1037 - Series 90-30 FIP Remote I/O Scanner User ’s Manual
GFK-1056 - Series 90-30 State Logic Control System User ’s Manual
t
GFK-1186 - TCP/IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 -30 PLC Station Manager Manual
GFK-1179 - Series 90 PLC Installation Requirements for Conformance to Standards
t
GFK-1464 - Motion Mate DSM302 for Series 90 -30 PLCs User ’s Manual
t
GFK-1466 - Temperature Control Module for the Series 90 -30 PLC User ’s Manual
GFK-1541 - TCP/IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 t PLC User ’s Manual
viii Series 90-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual GFK-0356P
Preface
We Welcome Your Comments and Suggestions

At GE Fanuc Automation, we strive to produce quality technical documentation. After
you have used this manual, please take a few moments to complete and return the
Reader ’s Comment Card located on the next page.
Thomas W. Myrtle
Senior Technical Writer
FANUC CNC Controls

GFK-0356P Preface ix
Preface
x Series 90-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual GFK-0356P

Contents
Chapter 1 Overview of the Series 90-30 PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

The Basic Parts of a Series 90-30 PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Assembling a Basic Series 90-30 PLC System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
What else would be needed to make this basic system functional? . . . . . 1-6
What if the application requires more than five modules? . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
What if the application requires more than ten modules? . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
What is the Difference Between Expansion and Remote baseplates? . . . 1-8
What if I need to cover more than 700 feet (213 meters) ? . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Chapter 2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Receiving your Products – Visual Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Pre-installation Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Warranty Claims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Working with Series 90-30 Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Baseplate Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Mounting a Baseplate to a Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Mounting a Baseplate to a 19” Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Grounding Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
System Grounding Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Series 90-30 PLC Equipment Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Module Shield Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
General Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Discrete I/O Module Connection Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Connections to I/O Module Terminal Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Terminal Block Quick Connect Installation for 16-Point Discrete Modules 2-19
Installation of 32-Point Discrete, 50-Pin Connector Modules . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Installation of Discrete 32-Point, Dual 24-Pin Connector Modules . . . . . . 2-20
General Wiring Methods for Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Analog Input Module Wiring Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Analog Output Module Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
AC Power Source Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Special Installation Instructions for Floating Neutral (IT) Systems . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Definition of Floating Neutral Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Use These Special Installation Instructions for Floating Neutral Systems 2-26
DC Power Source Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Basic Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
FANUC CNC Controls

GFK-0356P Table of Contents xi
Contents
Chapter 3 Baseplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Baseplate Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Baseplate Terms Explained . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
CPU Baseplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Expansion Baseplates (Figures 3-6 and 3-7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Remote Baseplates (Figures 3-8 and 3-9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Expansion Rack Connection Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Expansion and Remote Baseplates Connection Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Baseplate Mounting Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Load Ratings, Temperature, and Mounting Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Baseplate Adapter Brackets for 19” Rack Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Chapter 4 Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Power Supply Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Power Supply Feature Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
AC/DC Input Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
IC693PWR321 Standard Power Supply, 120/240 VAC or 125 VDC Input . 4-2
IC693PWR330 High Capacity Power Supply, 120/240 VAC/125 VDC Input 4-4
Field Wiring Connections for the AC/DC Input Power Supplies . . . . . . . . 4-5
DC Input Only Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Calculating Input Power Requirements for IC693PWR322 . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
IC693PWR331 High Capacity Power Supply, 24 VDC Input . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Field Wiring Connections to the DC Input-Only Power Supplies . . . . . . . 4-16
Common Series 90-30 Power Supply Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Output Voltage Connections to Backplane (All Supplies) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
xii Series 90-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual – October 1999 GFK-0356P
Contents
Chapter 5 CPUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

CPU Types for Series 90-30 PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Embedded CPUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Modular CPUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
General CPU Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Series 90-30 CPU Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
User Memory Addresses (References) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Difference Between a Memory Address and a Nickname . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
User Memory Reference Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
350 - 364 CPUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Hardware Features of the 350 - 364 CPUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
CPU350 and CPU360 Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
CPU351, CPU352, and CPU363 Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
CPU364 Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
CPU Data Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
CPU313 Catalog Number IC693CPU313 . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Chapter 6 Memory Backup and Backup Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Backup Battery for RAM Memory (All Supplies) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Battery Replacement Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
BatteryReplacement/Memory Protection Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Factors Affecting Battery Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Low Battery Warning Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Operating Without a Memory Backup Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Determining Battery Age Using Battery Date Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
RAM Memory Battery Backup Connection Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Maintaining RAM Memory During Storage or Shipment of a CPU . . . . . 6-7
Batteries in Power Supplies on Expansion or Remote Racks . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
FANUC CNC Controls

GFK-0356P Table of Contents xiii
Contents
Chapter 7 Input and Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Basic I/O Module Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Discrete I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Wiring Methods for 32-Point Discrete I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Analog Module Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Wiring Methods for Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
I/O Module Power Supply Current Draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
I/O Module Wire Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
IC693DVM300 Digital Valve Driver Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Chapter 8 Option Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

IC693CMM301 Genius Communications Module (GCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
IC693CMM302 Enhanced Genius Communications Module (GCM+) . . 8-4
IC693BEM331 Genius Bus Controller (GBC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
IC693BEM340 FIP Bus Controller (FBC) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
IC693BEM330 FIP Remote I/O Scanner Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
IC693APU301/302 Motion Mate Axis Positioning Module (APM) . . . . . . . 8-15
IC693DSM302 Motion Mate Digital Servo Module (DSM302) . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
IC693DSM314 Motion Mate Digital Servo Module (DSM314)
– Preliminary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
IC693APU300 High Speed Counter (HSC) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
IC693BEM320 I/O LINK Interface (Slave) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
IC693BEM321 I/O LINK Master Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
IC693APU305 I/O Processor Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
IC693CMM321 Ethernet Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
IC693PCM300/301/311Programmable Coprocessor Module (PCM) . . . . 8-32
IC693CMM311 Communications Coprocessor Module (CMM) . . . . . . . . 8-34
IC693ADC311 Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor (ADC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
IC693TCM302/303 Temperature Control Modules (TCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
IC693PTM100/101Power Transducer (PTM)– Preliminary . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
Chapter 9 State Logic Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

State Logic Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
State Logic Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
AD693CMM301 State Logic Serial Communications Module (SCM) . . . . 9-2
IC693SLP300 State Logic Processor Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
State Logic CPUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
State Logic CPU Data Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
CSE311 Catalog Number IC693CSE311 . . . . . . 9-14
xiv Series 90-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual – October 1999 GFK-0356P
Contents
Chapter 10 Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Cable Data Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8

IC647CBL704
Workstation Interface to Series 90 CPU (SNP Port) Cable . . . . . . . . . 10-9
IC690CBL701
PCM, ADC, CMM to Workmaster (PC-XT) Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
PCM to Programmer Cable Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
IC690CBL702
PC-AT to PCM, ADC, CMM Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
IC690CBL705
Workmaster II (PS/2) to PCM, ADC, CMM Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
IC690CBL714A Multidrop Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Connection Diagrams for IC690CBL714A Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
IC693CBL300/301/302/312/313/314
I/O Bus Expansion Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Building Custom Length I/O Bus Expansion Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
IC693CBL303
Hand-Hand Programmer and Converter (IC690ACC900) Cable . . . . 10-34
IC693CBL304/305
Port Expansion (WYE) Cables for PCM, ADC, and CMM . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
IC693CBL306/307
Extension Cables (50-Pin) for 32 Point Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
IC693CBL308/309
I/O Cables (50-Pin) for 32 Point Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
IC693CBL310
I/OInterface Cable (24-Pin) for 32 Point Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
IC693CBL311/317/319/320
I/OInterface Cables for Power Mate APM Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
IC693CBL315
I/OInterface Cable (24-Pin) for 32 Point Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
IC693CBL316
Serial Cable, 9-Pin D-Shell to RJ-11 Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
IC693CBL321/322/323
I/OFaceplate Connector to Terminal Block Connector, 24-Pin . . . . . 10-54
IC693CBL327/328
I/O Interface Cables with Right Angle 24-Pin Connector . . . . . . . . . 10-57
IC693CBL329/330/331/332/333/334 Cables
24-Pin I/O Faceplate Connector to Terminal Block Connector . . . . . . 10-62
IC693CBL340/341
PTM Interface Cables –Preliminary Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
FANUC CNC Controls

GFK-0356P Table of Contents xv
Contents
Chapter 11 Programmer Hardware Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Products Discussed in this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
IC640WMI310/320Work Station Interface Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Replacing Workmaster Computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
IC690ACC900 RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
IC690ACC901 Miniconverter Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
IC693PRG300 Hand-Held Programmer (HHP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
HHP Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
HHP Memory Card (IC693ACC303) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
HHP Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
IC693PIF301/400Personal Computer Interface (PCIF) Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
IC655CCM590 Isolated Repeater/Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
IC690ACC903 Port Isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Chapter 12 System Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Step 1: Planning Your System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Step 2: Determining I/O Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Step 3: Selecting Option Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Step 4: Selecting a CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Step 5: Selecting Baseplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Step 6: Selecting Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Reducing PLC Module Count by Using Other GE Fanuc Products . . . . . 12-7
Designing For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Number of Modules Per Series 90-30 PLC System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
Calculating Power Supply Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Scan (Sweep) Time Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Calculating PLC Heat Dissipation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
System Layout Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
Series 90-30 PLC Layout Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20
PLC Mounting Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21
Chapter 13 Maintenance and Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Troubleshooting Features of Series 90-30 Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Module LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Troubleshooting Features of Programming Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Replacing Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Series 90-30 Product Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Module Fuse List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Spare/ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Preventive Maintenance Suggestions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Getting Additional Help and Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
xvi Series 90-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual – October 1999 GFK-0356P
Contents
Appendix A Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

Glossary of Terms for the Series 90-30 PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Appendix B Acronyms and Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Appendix C Serial Port and Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

What this Appendix Contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
RS-422 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Cable and Connector Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Series 90 PLC Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
Workmaster Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
IBM-AT/XT Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
RS-232/RS-485Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
Serial Cable Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
RS-232 Point-to-Point Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
RS-422 Point-to-Point Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10
Multidrop Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11
Appendix D IC690ACC900 Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1

Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Location in System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
Cable Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
Logic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
Jumper Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
Appendix E IC655CCM590 Isolated Repeater/Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1

Description of the Isolated Repeater/Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
Logic Diagram of the Isolated Repeater/Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3
Pin Assignments for the Isolated Repeater/Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4
System Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5
Cable Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-7
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
Table of Contents xvii
Contents
Appendix F IC690ACC901 Miniconverter Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
Appendix G IC690ACC903 Port Isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1
Appendix H Series 90-30 Heat Dissipation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-1
Appendix I Catalog Number to Publication Cross-Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-1
Appendix J Terminal Block Quick Connect Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-1

Terminal Block Quick Connect Components for 16-Point Modules . . . . . . . . J-2
Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-2
Cable Current Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-2
Cable Selection and Cross-Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-3
I/OFace Plate for 16-Point Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-3
I/OFace Plate Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-3
Module Wiring Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-4
Cable Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-4
Connector Pin Orientation and Connection to Module Terminal . . . . . . . J-5
Terminal Block Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-5
Terminal Block Quick Connect Components for 32-Point Modules . . . . . . . . J-11
Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-11
Cable Selection and Cross-Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-12
Cable Current Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-12
Cable Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-12
Terminal Block Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-12
Appendix K SNP Multidrop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-1

SNP Multidrop Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-1
Cable and Connector Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-2
SNP Multidrop Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-4
Configuring and Connecting a Programmer to a Multidrop Network . . K-5
SNP Multidrop Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-6
Appendix L Ethernet Transceivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-1

IC649AEA102 Ethernet 10BASE-T Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-1
IC649AEA103 Ethernet 10BASE2 Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-2
Appendix M Tables and Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-1
Appendix N 44A720084-001 EMI Line Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-1

44A720084-001 Optional EMI Line Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-1
xviii Series 90-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual – October 1999 GFK-0356P
Contents
Figure 1-1. Five-Slot CPU Baseplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Figure 1-2. Power Supply Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Figure 1-3. CPU Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Figure 1-4. I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Figure 1-5. Assembling the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Figure 1-6. A Basic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Figure 1-7. Ten-Slot Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Figure 1-8. I/O Bus Expansion Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Figure 1-9. Connecting Expansion and Remote Baseplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Figure 1-10. Connecting PLCs Using GBC or CMM Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Figure 2-1. Features of Series 90-30 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Figure 2-2. Installing a Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Figure 2-3. Removing a Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Figure 2-4. Installing an I/O Module’s Terminal Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Figure 2-5. Removing a Module’s Terminal Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Figure 2-6. Terminal Board with Holding Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Figure 2-7. IC693ACC308 Front Mount Adapter Bracket Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Figure 2-8. Dimensions for 19I Rack Mounting Using IC693ACC308 Adapter Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Figure 2-9. IC693ACC313 Recessed Mount Adapter Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Figure 2-10. Recommended System Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Figure 2-11. Baseplate Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Figure 2-12. CPU 351 or 352 - Attaching Ground Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Figure 2-13. CPU 351 or 352 - Mounting Grounding Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Figure 2-14. CPU 363 or CPU364 - Attaching Ground Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Figure 2-15. Power Supply Terminal Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Figure 2-16. Overvoltage Protection Devices and Jumper Strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Figure 3-1. Common Baseplate Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Figure 3-2. Models IC693CPU311 and IC693CPU313 (5-Slot) Embedded CPU Baseplates . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Figure 3-3. Model IC693CPU323 (10-slot) Embedded CPU Baseplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Figure 3-4. IC693CHS397 5-Slot Modular CPU Baseplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Figure 3-5. IC693CHS391 10-Slot Modular CPU Baseplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Figure 3-6. IC693CHS398 5-Slot Expansion Baseplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Figure 3-7. IC693CHS392 10-Slot Expansion Baseplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Figure 3-8. IC693CHS399 5-Slot Remote Baseplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Figure 3-9. IC693CHS393 10-Slot Remote Baseplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Figure 3-10. I/O Bus Expansion Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Figure 3-11. Rack Number Selection Switch (Shown with Rack 2 Selected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC ControlsTable of Contents xix
Contents
Figure 3-12. Example of Connecting Expansion Baseplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

Figure 3-13. Example of Connecting Expansion and Remote Baseplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Figure 3-14. Model 311 and 313 5-Slot Baseplate Dimensions and Spacing Requirements . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Figure 3-15. Model 323 10-Slot Baseplate Dimensions and Spacing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Figure 3-16. Modular CPU, Expansion, and Remote 5-Slot Baseplate Dimensions and Spacing
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Figure 3-17. Modular CPU, Expansion, and Remote 10-Slot Baseplate Dimensions and Spacing
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Figure 3-18. IC693ACC308 Front Mount Adapter Bracket Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Figure 3-19. Dimensions for 19I Rack Mounting Using IC693ACC308 Adapter Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Figure 3-20. IC693ACC313 Recessed Mount Adapter Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Figure 4-1. Standard AC/DC Input Power Supply - IC693PWR321 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Figure 4-2. High Capacity AC/DC Input Power Supply - IC693PWR330 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Figure 4-3. Overvoltage Protection Devices and Jumper Strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Figure 4-4. Series 90-30 24/48 VDC Input Power Supply - IC693PWR322 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Figure 4-5. Typical Efficiency Curve for 24/48 VDC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Figure 4-6. Series 90-30 48 VDC Input Power Supply - IC693PWR328 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Figure 4-7. Typical Efficiency Curve for IC693PWR328 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Figure 4-8. Series 90-30 24 VDC Input High Capacity Power Supply - IC693PWR331 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Figure 4-9. 5 VDC Current Output Derating for Temperatures above 50C (122F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Figure 4-10. Overvoltage Protection Devices and Jumper Strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Figure 4-11. Interconnection of Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Figure 4-12. Timing Diagram for all Series 90-30 Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Figure 4-13. Serial Port Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Figure 4-14. Backup Battery for RAM Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Figure 5-1. Models 311 and 313 (5-Slot) Embedded CPU Baseplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Figure 5-2. IC693CHS397 5-Slot Modular CPU Baseplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Figure 5-3. CPU Serial Port Connector on Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Figure 5-4. CPUs 351, 352, and 363 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Figure 6-1. Backup Battery for RAM Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Figure 6-2. Installing the Battery Accessory Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Figure 7-1. Example of Series 90-30 Standard Density Discrete Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Figure 7-2. Example of 32-Point I/O Module (IC693MDL654) With Dual Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Figure 7-3. Example of 32-Point I/O Module (IC693MDL653) With Single Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Figure 7-4. 50-PIN, 32 Point I/O Module Connection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Figure 7-5. Example of Series 90-30 Analog Current Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Figure 7-6. IC693DVM300 Digital Valve Driver Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Figure 8-1. The IC693CMM301 GCM Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
xx Series 90-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual – October 1999 GFK-0356P
Contents
Figure 8-2. Genius Bus Wiring Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Figure 8-3. Example of Genius Communications Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Figure 8-4. Enhanced Genius Communications Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Figure 8-5. Genius Bus Controller Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Figure 8-6. Example of FIP I/O System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Figure 8-7. Series 90-30 FIP Bus Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Figure 8-8. Example of FIP Remote I/O Scanner System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Figure 8-9. FIP Bus Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Figure 8-10. Motion Mate APM Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Figure 8-11. Example of Motion Mate APM Servo System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Figure 8-12. Motion Mate DSM302 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Figure 8-13. Motion Mate DSM314 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Figure 8-14. High Speed Counter (HSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Figure 8-15. Example of a Series 90-30 PLC in a Fanuc I/O LINK Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Figure 8-16. Example of I/O LINK Master System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Figure 8-17. I/O Processor Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Figure 8-18. Ethernet Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Figure 8-19. Programmable Coprocessor Module (PCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
Figure 8-20. Communications Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Figure 8-21. Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor Module (ADC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Figure 8-22. IC693TCM302/303 Temperature Control Module (TCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Figure 8-23. IC693PTM100/101 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
Figure 8-24. IC693PTM100/101 Component Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
Figure 9-1. AD693CMM301 State Logic Serial Communications Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Figure 9-2. IC693CBL305 WYE Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Figure 9-3. IC693SLP300 State Logic Processor Module for Series 90-30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Figure 9-4. State Logic Processor Module User Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Figure 9-5. Model CSE311 or CSE313 5-Slot Embedded CPU Baseplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Figure 9-6. Model CSE323 10-Slot Embedded CPU Baseplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Figure 9-7. CPU Models CSE 331 or CSE 340 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Figure 9-8. Serial Port Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Figure 10-1. Serial Port to Work Station Interface Board Cable Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Figure 10-2. Series 90 PLC to Workmaster II Serial Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Figure 10-3. Example of Multidrop Configuration with Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Figure 10-4. Series 90 PLC to Programmer 8-Wire Multidrop, Serial Data Configuration . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Figure 10-5. PCM, ADC, or CMM to Workmaster or PC-XT Serial Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Figure 10-6. PCM to Workmaster Computer or PC-XT Personal Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC ControlsTable of Contents xxi
Contents
Figure 10-7. PCM, ADC, or CMM to Workmaster or PC-AT Serial Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Figure 10-8. PCM to PC-AT Personal Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Figure 10-9. PCM, ADC, or CMM to Workmaster II or PS/2 Serial Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Figure 10-10. PCM to Workmaster II Computer or PS/2 Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Figure 10-11. Connecting Diagram for Multidrop Cable IC690CBL714A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Figure 10-12. Multidrop Arrangement for Series 90-30 Redundant System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Figure 10-13. Connecting CPU and APM to Programmer with IC690CBL714A Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Figure 10-14. Multidrop Arrangement for Series 90-70 TMR Redundant System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Figure 10-15. Detail of I/O Bus Expansion Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Figure 10-16. How to use Split-Ring Ferrules for Foil and Braided Cable Shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Figure 10-17. Point-To-Point Cable Wiring for Continuous Shield Custom Length Cables . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Figure 10-18. Point-To-Point Cable Wiring Diagram for Applications Requiring Less Noise Immunity 10-29
Figure 10-19. Earlier Versions of Remote Baseplate Custom WYE Cable Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Figure 10-20. Current Remote baseplate (IC693CHS393/399) Custom Wye Cable Wiring Diagram . 10-31
Figure 10-21. Example of Connecting Expansion Baseplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Figure 10-22. Example of Connecting Expansion and Remote Baseplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Figure 10-23. Wiring Connections for IC693CBL303 and Custom-Built Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Figure 10-24. Hand-Held Programmer Cable Connection to a Series 90-30 PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Figure 10-25. Wye Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Figure 10-26. Wye Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Figure 10-27. 32 Point I/O Module to Weidmuller Terminal Block Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Figure 10-28. IC693CBL310 Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Figure 10-29. Dimensions for Depth of Connector in front of PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Figure 10-30. I/O Connector Cable Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Figure 10-31. IC693CBL315 Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
Figure 10-33. IC693CBL316A Serial Cable Illustration and Connector Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
Figure 10-34. Connector Orientation on I/O Faceplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Figure 10-35. I/O Faceplate to Terminal Block Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Figure 10-37. IC693CBL327/328 Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Figure 10-38. Dimension for Depth of Connector for IC693CBL327/328 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
Figure 10-39. Dimensions for Depth of Connector in front of PLC for Custom Built Cables . . . . . . . . 10-61
Figure10-40.IC693CBL329/330/331/332/333/334Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
Figure 10-41. Dimension for Depth of Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
Figure 10-42. IC693CBL340/341 PTM Interface Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Figure 10-43. IC693PTM100 PTM Component Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
xxii Series 90-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual – October 1999 GFK-0356P
Contents
Figure 11-1. WSI Board for the Workmaster II Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

Figure 11-2. Location of WSI in a Series II 90-30 PLC System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Figure 11-3. Example of IC690ACC900 Converter Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Figure 11-4. IC690ACC901 Series 90 SNP Port to RS-232 Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Figure 11-5. Hand-Held Programmer for the Series 90-30 PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Figure 11-6. Example of PCIF Interface to Series 90-30 I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Figure 12-1. Hard-Wired MCR Circuit Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
Figure 12-2. Allowable Location of Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
Figure 12-3. Series 90-30 Example Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20
Figure 12-4. Recommended PLC Mounting Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21
Figure 12-5. Derated PLC Mounting Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21
Figure 13-1. Relationship of Indicator Lights to Terminal Board Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Figure C-1. Series 90 PLC, RS-422 Serial Port Connector Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
Figure C-2. Workmaster RS-232 Serial Port Connector Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
Figure C-3. IBM-AT/XT Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
Figure C-4. IBM-AT (compatibles) Personal Computer to Series 90 PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8
Figure C-5. Workmaster or IBM-XT (compatibles) Personal Computer to Series 90 PLCs . . . . . . . . . . C-9
Figure C-6. Typical RS-422, Host to PLC Connection, with Handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10
Figure C-7. Workmaster II/Series 90 PLC Multidrop Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11
Figure C-8. Workmaster/Series 90 PLC Multidrop Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12
Figure C-9. IBM-AT/Series 90 PLC Multidrop Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12
Figure C-10. IBM-XT/Series 90 PLC Multidrop Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13
Figure D-1. Front and Rear View of Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
Figure D-2. Typical Configuration with Series 90-70 PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
Figure D-3. Typical Configuration with Series 90-30 PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
Figure D-4. RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 Converter Logic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
Figure D-5. Location of Jumpers for User Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
Figure E-1. Isolated/Repeater Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-2
Figure E-2. RS-422 Isolated Repeater/RS-232 Converter Logic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3
Figure E-3. Example RS-422 Isolated Repeater/RS-232 Converter Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5
Figure E-4. Simple System Configuration Using the Isolated Repeater/Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6
Figure E-5. Complex System Configuration Using the Isolated Repeater/Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6
Figure E-6. Cable A; RS-232 CMM To Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-7
Figure E-7. Cable B; RS-422 CMM To Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-7
Figure E-8. Cable C; RS422 Twisted Pair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-8
Figure E-9. Cable D; RS-422 Twisted Pair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-9
Figure E-10. Cable E; RS-232 Converter to CMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-9
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC ControlsTable of Contents xxiii
Contents
Figure F-1. Series 90 SNP to RS-232 Miniconverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1

Figure F-2. Miniconverter to PC-AT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3
Figure F-3. Miniconverter to Workmaster II, PC-XT,PS/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3
Figure F-4. Miniconverter to 9-Pin Workmaster or PC-XT Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3
Figure J-1. Typical TBQC Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-1
Figure J-2. TBQC Faceplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-5
Figure J-3. IC693ACC329 TBQC Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-6
Figure J-8. IC693MDL654 32-Point Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-11
Figure K-1. Series 90-30 Multidrop Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-1
Figure K-2. Multidrop Cable Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-3
Figure K-3. Connecting CPU and APM to Programmer with IC690CBL714A Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-4
Figure K-4. Multidrop Arrangement for Series 90-70 TMR Redundant System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-4
Figure K-5. Multidrop Arrangement for Series 90-30 Redundant System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-5
Figure L-1. IC649AEA102 Ethernet 10BASE-T Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-1
Figure L-2. IC649AEA103 Ethernet 10BASE2 Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-2
Figure N-1. 44A720084-001 Line Filter Connections to Series 90-30 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-1
Figure N-2. Equivalent Circuit for 44A720084-001 Line Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-2
Figure N-3. 44A720084-001 Line Filter Mounting Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-2
xxiv Series 90-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual – October 1999 GFK-0356P
Contents
Table 3-1. Rack Number Selection Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

Table 3-2. Series 90-30 Baseplate Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Table 4-1. Power Supply Comparison Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Table 4-2. IC693PWR321 Power Supply Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Table 4-3. Specifications for IC693PWR321 Standard AC/DC Input Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Table 4-5. Specifications for IC693PWR330 High Capacity AC/DC Input Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Table 4-7. Specifications for IC693PWR322 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Table 4-9. Specifications for IC693PWR328 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Table 4-10. IC693PWR331 Power Supply Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Table 4-11. Specifications for IC693PWR331 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Table 5-1. EPROM and EEPROM Catalog Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Table 5-2. Series 90-30 CPU Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Table 5-3. Range and Size of User References for CPU Models 311–341 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Table 5-4. Range and Size of User References for CPU Models 350 through 364 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Table 5-5. Port 1 (RS-232) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Table 5-6. Port 2 (RS-485) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Table 7-1. IC693DVM300 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Table 7-2. IC693DVM300 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Table 7-3. Series 90-30 Discrete I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Table 7-4. Series 90-30 Analog I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Table 8-1. Comparison of TCM302 and TCM303 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Table 9-1. System Specifications for Series 90-30 State Logic CPUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Table 10-1. Series 90-30 Cable Cross-Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Table 10-2. Expansion Port Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Table 10-3. Wire List for 32 Point I/O Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Table 10-4. Wire List for 24-Pin Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Table 10-5. Catalog Numbers for 24-Pin Connector Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Table 10-6. I/O Cable Wire Coding for IC693CBL311 and IC693CBL319 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Table 10-7. I/O Cable Wire Coding for IC693CBL317 and IC693CBL320 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Table 10-8. Catalog Numbers for 24-Pin Connector Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Table 10-9. Wire List for 24-Pin Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Table 10-10. Catalog Numbers for 24-Pin Connector Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Table 10-11. Wire List for 24-Pin Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
Table 10-12. TBQC Cable Cross-Reference Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC ControlsTable of Contents xxv
Contents
Table 11-1. Personal Computer Interface Card Comparison Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Table 12-1. Power Supply Feature Comparison Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
Table 12-2. Maximum Number of Modules Per System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
Table 12-3. Load Requirements (in milliamps) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
Table 13-1. Fuse List for Series 90-30 Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Table 13-2. Spare/Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Table C-1. Connector/Cable Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Table C-2. Series 90 PLC, RS-422 Serial Port Pin-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
Table C-3. Workmaster RS-232 Serial Port Pins-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
Table C-4. IBM-AT/XT Serial Port Pins-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
Table D-1. RS-232 Interface for Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
Table D-2. RS-422/RS-485 Interface for Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
Table D-3. Jumper Configuration for RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8
Table D-4. Specifications for IC690ACC900 Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
Table E-1. Isolated Repeater/Converter Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4
Table F-1. Miniconverter RS-232 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-2
Table F-2. Miniconverter RS-422 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-2
Table F-3. Miniconverter Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-4
Table J-1. TBQC Terminal Block Selection Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-2
Table K-1. Connector and Cable Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-2
xxvi Series 90-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual – October 1999 GFK-0356P
restart lowapp ARestart oddapp: ARestarts for autonumbers that do not restart in
each chapter. figure bi level 1, reset table_big level 1, reset chap_big level 1, reset1
Lowapp Alwbox restart evenap:A1app_big level 1, resetA figure_ap level 1, reset
table_ap level 1, reset figure level 1, reset table level 1, reset Table 1. these
restarts oddbox reset: 1evenbox reset: 1must be in the header frame of chapter 1.
a:ebx, l 1 resetA a:obx:l 1, resetA a:bigbx level 1 resetA a:ftr level 1 resetA c:ebx, l 1
reset1 c:obx:l 1, reset1 c:bigbx level 1 reset1 c:ftr level 1 reset1 Reminders for
autonumbers that need to be restarted manually (first instance will always be 4)
let_in level 1: A. B. C. letter level 1:A.B.C. num level 1: 1. 2. 3. num_in level 1: 1. 2.
3. rom_in level 1: I. II. III. roman level 1: I. II. III. steps level 1: 1. 2. 3.
Chapter Overview of the Series 90-30 PLC

1
The Series 90-30 Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) is a member of the GE Fanuc
Series 90 PLC family.
The Basic Parts of a Series 90-30 PLC

The Series 90-30 PLC is very versatile because (1) it is programmable, and (2) it is
assembled from a wide variety of modular, plug-together components. Therefore, by
choosing the correct components and developing an appropriate program, the PLC can
be used for an almost unlimited variety of applications. Although there are many
choices of individual hardware components to use in a system, there are just a few basic
categories. Each of these component categories is covered in detail in a separate chapter
in this manual. They are introduced in this chapter so you can see how they fit together:
H Baseplates
H Power Supplies
H CPUs
H I/OModules
H Option Modules
H Cables
Baseplates
The baseplates are the foundation of the PLC system because most other components
mount on them. As a basic minimum, every system has at least one baseplate, which
usually contains the CPU (in which case, it is referred to as “the CPU Baseplate”). Many
systems require more modules than can be mounted on one baseplate, so there are also
Expansion and Remote baseplates that connect together. So, there are three different
categories of baseplates: CPU, Expansion, and Remote. Also, each of these is available in
two sizes, 5-slot and 10-slot, named according to the number of modules they can hold.
Power Supply Modules

Every baseplate, whether a CPU, Expansion, or Remote baseplate, and whether a 5-slot
or 10-slot size, must have its own power supply. The power supply always mounts in a
baseplate’s left-most slot. There are several power supply models available to meet a
variety of requirements.
FANUC CNC Controls

GFK-0356P 1-1
1
CPUs
The CPU is the manager of the PLC. Every PLC system must have one. A CPU uses the
instructions in its firmware and application program to direct the PLC’s operation and to
monitor the the system to make sure there are no basic faults. Some Series 90-30 CPUs
are built into baseplates, but most are contained in plug-in modules. In some cases, the
CPU resides in a Personal Computer using a Personal Computer Interface Card that
interfaces to Series 90-30 Input, Output, and Option modules.
Input and Output (I/O) Modules

These modules enable the PLC to interface with input and output field devices such as
switches, sensors, relays, and solenoids. They are available in both discrete and analog
types.
Option Modules
These modules extend the capability of the PLC beyond the basic functions. These
provide such things as communications and networking options, motion control, high
speed counting, temperature control, interfacing to operator interface stations, etc.
Cables
These connect the PLC components together or to other systems. Many standard
prefabricated cables are available from GE Fanuc. They are primarily used to:
H Interconnect baseplates
H Connect a programmer to the CPU or to an option module
H Connect option modules to field devices or other systems.
Assembling a Basic Series 90-30 PLC System

Let’s assemble, on paper, a basic system using the following components:
H Baseplate
H Power Supply module
H CPU module
H Some I/O modules
We’ll start with the baseplate. To keep it simple, we’ll use a 5-slot size. Note that a 5-slot
baseplate actually has six slots, but the power supply slot is not numbered. Note also,
that this baseplate has a CPU slot, which is slot number 1, and it has an expansion
connector on the right end, which is used for connecting to another baseplate if the
system has more than one baseplate.
1-2 Series 90-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual – October 1999 GFK-0356P
1
a44564
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER
BASE 5–SLOT
E
X
P
A
CAUTION NON-CPU SLOTS N
I/O Bus
USER PROGRAM S
Memory Backup AND REGISTER I Expansion
VALUES MAY BE
Warning Label LOST IF POWER
O
Connector
SUPPLY IS N
C
REMOVED FOR P
LONGER THAN U
1 HOUR
CPU/1 I/O-2 I/O-3 I/O-4 I/O-5

POWER
SUPPLY
CPU Slot (Slot 1)
Figure 1-1. Five-Slot CPU Baseplate
Next, we’ll add a power supply module. It mounts in the unnumbered slot on the left
end of the baseplate. This slot has a unique connector that will only fit a power supply
module.
a45625A
PWR
GE Fanuc OK
Series 90-30 RUN
BATT
HIGH CAPACITY
POWER SUPPLY
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
INPUT
100-240 VAC
50/60 HZ 100VA
125VDC, 50W
+
24 VDC
OUTPUT
0.8A MAX.
B
A
T
T
E
R
Y
Figure 1-2. Power Supply Module
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
Chapter 1 Overview of the Series 90-30 PLC 1-3
1
Then, a CPU module. A CPU module can only mount in baseplate slot 1, next to the
power supply. Slot 1 has a unique connector that will only fit CPU or special Option
ÎÎÎÎ
modules.
ÎÎÎÎ
CPU340
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Figure 1-3. CPU Module
To finish, we will add some I/O modules to baseplate slots 2 through 5.
A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ÎÎÎÎÎ
F
B1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
xxxxxx
xxx xxx xx
ÎÎÎÎÎ
A1
A2
ÎÎÎÎÎ
A3
A4
ÎÎÎÎÎ
A5
ÎÎÎÎÎ
A6
A7
ÎÎÎÎÎ
A8
B1
ÎÎÎÎÎ
B2
ÎÎÎÎÎ
B3
B4
ÎÎÎÎÎ
B5
B6
ÎÎÎÎÎ
B7
B8
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Figure 1-4. I/O Module
1
a44564A
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER
BASE 5–SLOT
E
X
P
A
USER PROGRAM S
AND REGISTER I
VALUES MAY BE
O
LOST IF POWER
SUPPLY IS N
C
REMOVED FOR P
LONGER THAN U
1 HOUR
CPU/1 I/O-2 I/O-3 I/O-4 I/O-5

POWER
SUPPLY
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
PWR
GE Fanuc OK
Series 90-30 CPU340
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
RUN
BATT
HIgh Capacity
Power Supply
ÎÎÎÎ A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
F
B1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ

ÎÎÎ
F
B1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
xxxxxx
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
xxx xxx xx
F
B1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
+ A1
xxxxxx
A2 A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ

ÎÎÎÎ
xxx xxx xx
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
F
A3 B1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A1
A4 A2 xxxxxx

ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
xxx xxx xx
A5 A3
A1
A6 xxxxxx
A4
ÎÎÎÎ
A2 xxx xxx xx
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
A7 A5
A3 A1
A8 A6
A4 A2

B1
A7
A5 A3
B2 A8
A6 A4
B3
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
B1
ÎÎÎÎ
A7 A5
B4 B2
A8 A6
Power Supply B5
B3
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
B1 A7
B6 B4
CPU B7 B5
B2 A8
B1
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
B3
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
B8 B6
B4 B2
B7
B5 B3
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
B8
B6 B4
B7 B5
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
B8 B6
B7
B8
I/O Modules
Figure 1-5. Assembling the System
When assembled, the system will look like ...
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
1
this:
a45616A
PWR CPU
GE Fanuc OK A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
F
A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
F
A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
F
A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
F
SERIES 90–30 RUN B12345678 B12345678 B12345678 B12345678
BATT
HIGH CAPACITY
POWER SUPPLY
PROGRAMMABLECONTROLLER
INPUT
~
100–240 VAC
50/60HZ 100VA
125 VDC, 50W
+
24 VDC
OUTPUT
0.8AMAX.
B
A
T
T
E
R
Y
Figure 1-6. A Basic System
An assembly of baseplate and modules such as this one is called a “Rack.”
What else would be needed to make this basic system functional?

To make this basic system functional, you would need:
H Mounting. Safe, secure mounting for the PLC, preferably in a protective enclosure.
H Wiring. This includes properly installed incoming power to the power supply, as
well as wiring from the I/O modules to field devices such as switches, sensors,
solenoids, relays, etc.
H Program. An application program for the PLC to run. This is developed with GE
Fanuc PLC programming software.
What if the application requires more than five modules?

You could use a 10-slot baseplate, shown in the next picture:
1
a45617
PWR CPU
GE Fanuc OK A12345678 A12345678 A12345678 A12345678 A12345678 A12345678 A12345678 A12345678 A12345678
F F F F F F F F F
SERIES 90–30 RUN B12345678 B12345678 B12345678 B12345678 B12345678 B12345678 B12345678 B12345678 B12345678
BATT
HIGH CAPACITY
POWERSUPPLY
PROGRAMMABLECONTROLLER
INPUT
~
100–240 VAC
50/60HZ 100VA
125 VDC, 50W
+
24 VDC
OUTPUT
0.8A MAX.
B
A
T
T
E
R
Y
I/O Bus Expansion Connector
Figure 1-7. Ten-Slot Rack
What if the application requires more than ten modules?

You can add one or more Expansion or Remote racks to this system. Some CPUs can
support up to seven additional racks. If you added seven additional 10-slot racks, you
could have 70 more modules.
Racks are interconnected in a ”daisy-chain” cabling arrangement. This interconnection
system is called the ”I/O Expansion Bus.” The connections are made from one
baseplate’s I/O Bus Expansion Connector (shown in the figure above) to the next one’s.
The I/O Bus Expansion Cables, shown below, have a double connector on one end to
facilitate these connections.
FEMALE
ÎÎ Î
CONNECTOR
Î Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ MALE
Î MALE
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
Figure 1-8. I/O Bus Expansion Cable
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls Chapter 1 Overview of the Series 90-30 PLC 1-7
1
The next figure shows a system that has a CPU baseplate, one Expansion rack and three
Remote racks. Notice that the last rack, the one at the end of the I/O Expansion Bus,
must be terminated. A convenient way of terminating the bus is with an IC693ACC307
I/O Bus Terminator Plug, as shown.
CPU BASEPLATE a44965A
CPU
C
BASEPLATE P
U
EXPANSION
BASEPLATE
EXPANSION BASEPLATE
MAXIMUM DISTANCE
FROM CPU 50 FEET
(15 METERS)
REMOTE BASEPLATE
REMOTE
BASEPLATE
ÎÎÎÎ
REMOTE BASEPLATE
REMOTE
BASEPLATE
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
REMOTE
BASEPLATE
REMOTE BASEPLATE
I/O BUS
MAXIMUM DISTANCE TERMINATOR
FROM CPU= 700 FEET PLUG
(213 METERS) IC693ACC307
Figure 1-9. Connecting Expansion and Remote Baseplates
What is the Difference Between Expansion and Remote baseplates?

The main factor to consider is distance. How far will the baseplate be from the CPU
baseplate? If the cabling distance from the CPU baseplate is 50 feet (15 meters) or less,
use an Expansion baseplate. The Expansion baseplate is preferable because of its higher
communication speed with the CPU baseplate. However, if a baseplate must be located
where it requires a cabling distance from the CPU rack in excess of 50 feet, an Expansion
baseplate will not work – a Remote baseplate must be used. The limit for a Remote
baseplate is a cabling distance of 700 feet (213 meters) from the CPU baseplate to the
farthest Remote baseplate.
1
What if I need to cover more than 700 feet (213 meters) ?

You can cover much greater distances by using Series 90-30 communications option
modules. For example, Genius Bus Controller Modules (GBC) can communicate at
distances up to 7,500 feet (2,286 meters) over a shielded twisted-pair cable, as shown in
Example 1 below. Or, serial communications with Communications Coprocessor
Modules (CMM) using the RS-485 standard can cover up to 4,000 feet (1,219 meters), as
shown in Example 2 below. And virtually unlimited communication distances can be
attained with modems and telephone lines or radio transmitters. Also, there are
numerous networking options available such as Ethernet or WorldFIP.
Example 1 – GBC Example 2 – CMM
Series 90-30 PLC Series 90-30 PLC

CPU GBC CPU CMM
Shielded, Twisted-Pair Cable, 7,500 Serial Cable, 4,000 Feet (1,219

Feet (2,286 Meters) Maximum Length Meters) Maximum Length

CPU GBC CPU CMM
Figure 1-10. Connecting PLCs Using GBC or CMM Modules
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
Chapter Installation
2
This chapter discusses installation details only. Other information about the products
such as hardware descriptions and specifications, are covered in the applicable chapter.
– Important Note –
The installation instructions described in this chapter apply to PLC installations
that do not require special procedures for noisy or hazardous environments. For
installations that must conform to more stringent requirements (such as CE
Mark), see GFK-1179, Installation Requirements for Conformance to
Standards. Also see GFK-0867, GE Fanuc Product Agency Approvals,
Standards,GeneralSpecifications.
Receiving your Products – Visual Inspection

When you receive your Series 90-30 PLC system, carefully inspect all shipping containers
for damage that may have occurred during shipping. If any part of the system is
damaged, notify the carrier immediately. The damaged shipping container should be
saved as evidence for inspection by the carrier.
As the consignee, it is your responsibility to register a claim with the carrier for damage
that happened during shipment. However, GE Fanuc will fully cooperate with you if
such action is necessary.
Pre-installation Check
After unpacking Series 90-30 PLC racks, cables, modules, etc., record all serial numbers.
Serial numbers are printed on the module packaging. Serial numbers are required to make a
claim during the warranty period of the equipment. All software product registration cards
should be completed and returned to GE Fanuc. See the “Module Features” section in this
chapter for location of module serial numbers. See the “Common Baseplate Features”
section in the “Baseplates” chapter for location of baseplate serial numbers.
You should verify that all components of the system have been received and that they
agree with your order. If the parts received do not agree with your order, call
Programmable Control Customer Service, toll free, in Charlottesville, VA at
1-800-432-7521. A Customer Service representative will provide further instructions.
If you require assistance with your installation, the GE Fanuc Technical Service Hotline
personnel in Charlottesville, VA are available to help you. North American customers
should call toll-free at 1-800-GE FANUC (1-800-433-2682). International customers
should dial direct: 804-978-6036. The GE Fanuc web site support address is
www.gefanuc.com/support/plc. Chapter 13, “Maintenance and Troubleshooting” has
additional telephone numbers and troubleshooting information.
Warranty Claims
Record the serial number of the defective item and contact your distributor for
instructions.
GFK-0356P 2-1
2
Working with Series 90-30 Modules

Module Features
1 13 7 8 12
2 11
IC693CPUXXX
3 CPU MODULE
25 MHZ
LISTED
xxxxxxx
4 123456789
10
14 1234567
6 6 7 8 9
Figure 2-1. Features of Series 90-30 Module

1. Pivot hook
2. Circuit board holding tabs (two on each side of module)
3. Catalog number and description section of label
4. Certification (UL, CE, etc.) section of label
5. Module connector – plugs into baseplate backplane connector
6. Release lever – spring loaded
7. Ventilation openings in module case (top and bottom)
8. Front cover holding tabs (two on each side of module)
9. Front cover (shown) or terminal board (for I/O modules).
10. Front cover faceplate or hinged cover for terminal board.
11. Lens cap (some modules do not have).
12. Lens cap holding tabs (one on each side of module)
13. Module label
14. Serial Number – used to determine module warranty status. Note that on some
modules, the Serial Number may be on a small tag on the back of the module.
2-2
FANUC CNC Controls
Series 90-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual – October 1999 GFK-0356P
2
Installing a Module
Warning
Do not insert or remove modules with power applied. This could

cause the PLC to stop or malfunction. Injury to personnel and damage
to the module or baseplate may result. Also, attempts to force a
module into an improper slot type will result in damage to the module
and/or the baseplate. Modules will mount in the correct slot type
easily, with a minimum of force.
Use the following instructions as a guide when inserting a module into a baseplate slot.
H Check that module catalog number matches slot configuration. Each slot is, or will
be, assigned a particular module type during configuration. A Power Supply
module must be installed in the left end unnumbered slot only, and a CPU module
and some special Option modules can only be installed in Slot 1 of a CPU baseplate.
I/O Modules and most Option modules install in slots numbered 2 and higher.
H Grasp the module firmly with terminal board toward you and with rear pivot hook
facing away from you.
H Align the module with the desired baseplate slot and connector. Tilt the module
upwards so that top rear pivot hook of the module engages the baseplate’s top
module retainer.
H Swing the module downward until the module’s connector engages the baseplate’s
backplane connector, and the release lever on the bottom of the module snaps into
place in the baseplate’s bottom module retainer.
H Visually inspect the module to be sure that it it properly seated.
a43055A
PIVOT HOOK
BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
BOTTOM RETAINER RELEASE LEVER
Figure 2-2. Installing a Module
GFK-0356P Chapter 2 Installation 2-3

2
Removing a Module
Warning
Do not insert or remove modules with power applied. This could
cause the PLC to stop or malfunction. Injury to personnel and damage
to the module or baseplate may result. Also potentially dangerous
voltages from user devices may be present on a module’s screw
terminals even though power to the rack is turned off. Care must be
taken any time that you are handling the module’s removable terminal
board or any wires connected to it.
H If the module has wiring, remove the module’s terminal board (NOTE: You do not
have to unwire the terminal board) or cables. The procedure for removing a
terminal board is described later in this section.
H Locate the release lever at the bottom of the module and firmly press it up, towards
the module.
H While holding the module firmly at its top and fully depressing release lever, swing
(pivot) the module upward (release lever must be free of its retaining slot).
H Disengage pivot hook at the top rear of the module by moving the module up and
away from the baseplate.
a43056
PIVOT HOOK
ÎÎ
Î
Î
PRESS
RELEASE LEVER
Figure 2-3. Removing a Module
Note
Modules in expansion or remote baseplates can be added, removed, or
replaced while the PLC is in RUN mode if power is first removed from
the expansion or remote baseplate. I/O data to/from this baseplate will
not be updated while power is removed.
2-4
FANUC CNC Controls
2
Installing a Module’s Terminal Board

Note: Modules IC693MDL730F (and later) and IC693MDL731F (and later) have special
terminal boards that are equipped with holding screws. For Installation and Removal
instructions, please see the section “Installing and Removing Terminal Boards with
Holding Screws” later in this chapter.
To install a terminal board:
H Hook the pivot hook➀, located on the bottom of the terminal board, to the lower
slot on the module.
H Push the terminal board towards the module➁ until it snaps into place.
H Open the terminal board cover➂ and ensure that the latch on the module is
securely holding the terminal board in place.
Caution
Compare the module catalog number on the label on the back of the hinged
door (see Figure 2-6) and the label on the side of the module (see below) to
ensure that they match. If a wired terminal board is installed on the wrong
module type, damage to the module may occur when the system is powered
up.
a43062
Module
Label
1
REFER TO TEXT FOR
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Figure 2-4. Installing an I/O Module’s Terminal Board

2
Removing a Module’s Terminal Board

To remove a terminal board:
H Open the plastic terminal board cover.
H Push up on the jacking lever to release the terminal block.
ÎÎÎ
a43061
JACKING
ÎÎÎ
LEVER
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
H Grasp pull-tab and pull it towards you until contacts have separated from module
housing and bottom pivot hook has disengaged.
a43715
PULL
TAB
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Figure 2-5. Removing a Module’s Terminal Board
2-6
FANUC CNC Controls
2
I/O Module Terminal Board Posts

Notice that the terminal board has three posts on the left side. The top and bottom posts
hold the terminal board cover in place. The purpose of the middle post is to keep the
terminal board wiring in place. This middle post can be easily snapped off if you do not
require it to hold the wiring in place.
Since minimal force is required to snap off the middle post, you should be careful that
you do not inadvertently snap it off if you are using it to keep your wiring in place.
Installing and Removing Terminal Boards with Holding Screws

Discrete output modules IC693MDL730F (and later) and IC693MDL731F (and later)
have a special terminal board that is equipped with holding screws, shown in the figure
below. These screws prevent the terminal board-to-module connections from
deteriorating in applications where the PLC is subjected to severe vibration .
a43082B
A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
F
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
B1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Hinged Cover
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
2 A1
A2
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Holding Screw 4 A1
A3
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
A4
6 A2
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Removeable Terminal Board
A3
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
8
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
10 A4 +
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ 12 A5 –
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
14 A6
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
16 A7
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Holding Screw
18 A8
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
20
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ IC693MDL730F Module Catalog Number
Figure 2-6. Terminal Board with Holding Screws

D Removing: To Remove these terminal boards, first loosen the two holding screws on
the front of the terminal board, then follow the standard removal instructions in the
section “Removing an I/O Module’s Terminal Board.” The holding screws are held
captive in the terminal board and do not have to be completely removed.
D Installing: To install these terminal boards, follow the standard installation
instructions in the section “Installing an I/O Module’s Terminal Board,” then tighten
the two holding screws to 8 to 10 inch pounds (1 Newton-meter) of torque.

2
Baseplate Mounting
Warning
Be sure to follow baseplate grounding instructions in this chapter.

Failure to properly ground the PLC can result in improper operation,
damage to equipment, and injury to personnel.
Mounting a Baseplate to a Panel

D Use four good-quality 8-32 x 1/2 (4 x 12 mm) machine screws, lock washers and flat
washers. Install the screws in four 8-32 tapped holes. The “Baseplates” chapter has
the applicable dimensions and mounting clearances. Alternately, 10-slot baseplates
can be mounted in standard 19-inch racks by using the appropriate adapter. This is
also discussed in the “Baseplates” chapter.
D A vertical mounting orientation is preferred for maximum heat dissipation. Other
mounting orientations will require derating the Power Supply current capabilities.
See Chapter 12, “System Design,” for details.
D All baseplates must be grounded. The “Baseplate Safety Grounding” section of this
chapter has details.
D The Rack Number Selection switch must be set on each Expansion or Remote
baseplate. A CPU baseplate does not require this switch. Rack numbers should be
assigned by the system designer. Failure to set the Rack Number Selection switches
properly will result in system malfunction. See the “Baseplates” chapter for details
on setting these switches.
Mounting a Baseplate to a 19” Rack

Two optional Baseplate Adapter Brackets allow a 10-slot baseplate to be mounted in a 19
inch rack. Each baseplate installation requires only one of the adapter brackets.
D IC693ACC308 Front Mount Adapter Bracket. Used to mount a baseplate to the
front face of a 19” rack. Install the adapter bracket by inserting the tabs at the top
and bottom of the adapter bracket into the corresponding slots at the top and
bottom of the plastic baseplate cover. NOTE: Although the figure below shows the
plastic baseplate cover removed, this is for illustration purposes only. It is not
necessary to remove the cover to install the bracket. With the bracket in place, insert
and tighten the two screws (included with the bracket) through the back of the
baseplate holes into the threaded holes in the bracket.
D IC693ACC313 Recessed Mount Adapter Bracket. Used to recess mount a baseplate
inside a 19” rack. A baseplate mounts on the rear panel of this adapter bracket using
four 8-32 (4 mm) screws, nuts, lockwashers and flat washers. The Adapter Bracket
bolts through its four slotted holes to the face of the 19” rack using applicable
hardware (lockwashers recommended).
2-8
FANUC CNC Controls
2
RIGHT SIDE OF a43726A

BASEPLATE
Insert two screws (1 at top; 1 at bottom)
from back of base unit through base unit
and bracket. Tighten screws to secure
bracket to base unit.
Note: Baseplate is shown with cover removed for illustration purposes. It

is not necessary to remove the baseplate cover to install the bracket.
Figure 2-7. IC693ACC308 Front Mount Adapter Bracket Installation
Dimensions for rack mounting a 10-slot baseplate with the IC693ACC308 Front Mount
Adapter Bracket are shown in the following figure.
a45047
18.89
(480)
18.47
(469)
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
DIMENSIONS IN INCHES (MILLIMETERS IN PARENTHESES)
Figure 2-8. Dimensions for 19I Rack Mounting Using IC693ACC308 Adapter Bracket

2
0.160 (4.06) dia. x 4
0.280 (7.1)
3.540 (90) 4.000 (101.6)
1.630 (41.4) 1.368 (34.7)

0.842 (21.4)
0.346 (8.8)
Inside 16.850 (428)
18.122 (460.3)
0.439 (11.2)
Figure 2-9. IC693ACC313 Recessed Mount Adapter Bracket
2-10
FANUC CNC Controls
2
Grounding Procedures
System Grounding Procedures
Warning
In addition to the following grounding information, we strongly urge
that you follow all applicable codes that apply to your area. For
example, in the United States, most areas have adopted the National
Electrical Code standard and specify that all wiring conform to its
requirements. In other countries, different codes will apply. For
maximum safety to personnel and property you must follow these
codes. Failure to do so can mean injury or death to personnel, damage
to property, or both.
All components of a programmable logic control system and the devices it is controlling
must be properly grounded. This is particularly important for the following reasons.
H A low resistance path from all parts of a system to earth minimizes exposure to
shock in the event of short circuits or equipment malfunction.
H The Series 90-30 PLC system requires proper grounding for correct operation.
The importance of a proper grounding cannot be over-emphasized.
GroundConductors
H Ground conductors should be connected in a tree fashion with branches routed to a
central earth ground point, shown in the figure below. This ensures that no ground
conductor carries current from any other branch. This method is shown in the
following figure.
H Ground conductors should be as short and as large in size as possible. Braided
straps or ground cables (typically green insulation with a yellow tracer - AWG #12
(3.3 mm2) or larger) can be used to minimize resistance. Conductors must always be
large enough to carry the maximum short circuit current of the path being
considered.
a43059
SERIES 90-30 MOTOR DRIVES MACHINERY

PLC CABINET AND OTHER
ELECTRICAL
RACK CONTROL
EQUIPMENT
PROGRAMMING RACK
DEVICE
NOTE
SIGNAL AND POWER
EARTH CENTRAL CONNECTIONS
GROUND GROUND POINT ARE NOT SHOWN
Figure 2-10. Recommended System Grounding

2
Series 90-30 PLC Equipment Grounding

Equipment grounding recommendations and procedures are listed below. These
grounding procedures must be properly followed for safe, proper operation of your Series
90-30 PLC system.
Baseplate Safety Grounding

The following recommendations are offered, but applicable safety codes for your area or
equipment type should also be consulted. The baseplate’s metal back must be grounded
using a separate conductor; the baseplate mounting screws are not considered to an
acceptable ground connection by themselves. Use a minimum AWG #12 (3.3 mm2) wire
with a ring terminal and star lock washer under the head of one of the baseplate’s two
lower mounting holes. These two holes have openings to the side to allow connecting a
wire and ring terminal under the head of a mounting screw. Connect the other end of this
ground wire to a tapped hole in the panel that the baseplate is mounted to, using a machine
screw, star lock washer, and flat washer. Alternately, if your panel has a ground stud, it is
recommended you use a nut and star lock washer for each wire on the ground stud to
ensure adequate grounding. Where connections are made to a painted panel, the paint
should be removed so clean, bare metal is exposed at the connection point. Terminals and
hardware used should be rated to work with the aluminum baseplate material.
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER
BASE 5–SLOT
E
X
P
A
USER PROGRAM S
AND REGISTER I
AWG #12 or VALUES MAY BE
LOST IF POWER O
Larger Wire SUPPLY IS N
REMOVED FOR
LONGER THAN
1 HOUR
CPU/1 I/O-2 I/O-3 I/O-4 I/O-5

POWER
SUPPLY
Alternate location
for Ground connection
Screw, Star Lock washer,
Flat Washer, Ring Terminal,
installed in tapped hole.
Paint Removed
From Panel Here
Figure 2-11. Baseplate Grounding
Warning
All baseplates must be grounded to minimize electrical shock hazard.

Failure to do so can result in severe personal injury.
2-12
FANUC CNC Controls
2
All baseplates grouped together in a Series 90-30 PLC system must have a common ground
connection. This is especially important for baseplates that are not mounted in the same
control cabinet.
Grounding 19” Rack-Mounted Baseplates

There are two Adapter Brackets used for mounting a 10-slot Series 90-30 baseplate to a
19” Rack. Regardless of which of the two Adapter Brackets is used, the 19” Rack should
be grounded as per the instructions in “System Grounding Procedures,” including Figure
2-10. (For details on the Adapter Brackets, see the “Mounting a Baseplate to a 19” Rack”
section earlier in this chapter.)
Nineteen-Inch Rack-mounted PLC baseplates should be grounded according to the
guidelines in the “Baseplate Safety Grounding” section, using a separate ground wire
from the PLC baseplate as shown in the previous figure (Fig. 2-11).
H If using the Recessed Mount Adapter Bracket (IC693ACC313), the ground wire can
be installed as shown in Figure 2-11 with the ground attached to the Recessed
Mount Adapter Bracket. An additional ground wire connecting the Adapter Bracket
to a solid chassis ground on the 19” Rack should be installed. Use the same or
equivalent hardware and paint removal scheme as shown in Figure 2-11.
H If using the Surface Mount Adapter Bracket (IC693ACC308), the ground wire
should be run from the baseplate as shown in Figure 2-11, to a solid chassis ground
on the 19” Rack. Use the same or equivalent hardware and paint removal scheme as
shown in Figure 2-11.
Programmer Grounding
For proper operation, the computer (programmer) running the PLC software must have
a ground connection in common with the CPU baseplate. Normally, this common
ground connection is provided by ensuring that the programmer’s power cord is
connected to the same power source (with the same ground reference point) as the
baseplate. If it is not possible to ensure this common ground scheme, use a port isolator
(IC690ACC903) between the programmer and PLC serial connection. If the programmer
ground is at a different potential than the PLC ground, a shock hazard could exist. Also,
damage to the ports or converter (if used) could occur when the programmer serial cable
is connected between the two.
Warning
Failure to follow programmer grounding recommendations could

result in personal injury, equipment damage, or both.

2
Module Shield Grounding

In general, the aluminum PLC baseplate is used for module shield grounding. On some
Series 90-30 modules, shield connections to the user terminal connector on the module
are routed to the baseplate through the module’s backplane connector. Other modules,
such as CPUs 351, 352, 363, and 364, require a separate shield ground. These are
discussed in the next several sections.
Shield Grounding Information for CPUs with External Port Connections

CPUs with external port connections, the 351, 352, 363, and 364, must have a separate
shield ground connection which provides shielding for these ports. The design of the
ground connection for the CPU351 and 352 is different from that of the CPU363 and 364,
so each grounding method is discussed in a separate heading.
CPU351 and 352 Shield Grounding

The CPU 351 or 352 module must be connected to frame ground at the slot where it is
installed. Two methods are provided for making this ground connection. Each CPU
comes with an EMC Grounding Kit (44A737591-G01) that contains a ground wire,
grounding bracket, and screws.
1. The connection from the CPU to frame ground can be made using the ground wire
(part number 44A735970-001R01) that comes with the module in the EMC
Grounding Kit. This wire has a stab-on connector on one end for connection to a
mating terminal on the bottom of the CPU, and a ring terminal on the other end for
connection to a grounded enclosure. Where the ring terminal contacts a painted
enclosure panel, either a star lock washer can be installed between the terminal and
the panel to cut through the paint, or the paint can be scraped away down to clean,
bare metal to ensure a good contact. Note: The star lock washer method is
suitable for a shield ground, but not suitable for a safety ground.
CPU351 or 352
#6 TAPPED HOLE
REMOVE PAINT UNDER

BOTTOM OF RING TERMINAL OR INSTALL
CPU MODULE STAR LOCK WASHER BETWEEN
USE 1 #6
MACHINE SCREW TERMINAL AND PANEL
STAB–ON
CONNECTOR
MOUNT ON
44A735970–001R01 GROUNDED
ENCLOSURE
Figure 2-12. CPU 351 or 352 - Attaching Ground Wire
2-14
FANUC CNC Controls
2
2. The second method, which can be used for systems in noisy environments consists
of installing the green ground wire and the optional grounding bracket (part
number 44C715646-001R01). This bracket attaches to the CPU using two #4
thread-rolling screws (part number N666P9004B6) and to the grounded enclosure
using two #6 thread-rolling screws (part number N666P13006B6). Two holes must
be drilled in the enclosure for mounting this bracket. Also, if the bracket will be
attached to a painted surface, the paint should be removed down to bare metal
under the bracket to ensure good contact between the bracket and the surface. See
the next figure.
a45514A
CPU351 or 352
44C715646–001R01
BRACKET PAINT REMOVED WHERE
BRACKET MOUNTS TO PANEL
MOUNT ON
GROUNDED
ENCLOSURE
USE 2 #4
USE 2 #6
THREAD ROLLING SCREWS
THREAD ROLLING SCREWS
(N666P9004B6)
(N666P13006B6
Figure 2-13. CPU 351 or 352 - Mounting Grounding Bracket
Note: When the grounding bracket is used, pin 1 of the cable connector that plugs into
the Port 2 connector should not be connected. A metal connector shell must be used on
the cable for this port, and the cable shield must be terminated at the metal shell instead
of pin 1 of the connector.
CPU363 and CPU364 Shield Grounding

The CPU363 and CPU364 modules must be connected to frame ground at the slot where
they are installed. Each module comes with a grounding wire for this purpose. These
modules do not support or require the use of a grounding bracket. If the ring terminal
on the grounding wire is to be mounted to a painted surface, remove the paint under
the ring terminal to ensure good contact, or place a star lock washer between the ring
terminal and the painted surface. See the next figure. Note: The star lock washer
method is suitable for a shield ground, but not suitable for a safety ground.

2
CPU363 or 364
STAB–ON
CONNECTOR
#6 TAPPED HOLE
REMOVE PAINT UNDER

BOTTOM RING TERMINAL OR INSTALL
OF CPU MODULE STAR LOCK WASHER BETWEEN
USE 1 #6
RING TERMINAL AND PANEL
MACHINE SCREW
MOUNT ON
44A735970–001R01 GROUNDED
ENCLOSURE
Figure 2-14. CPU 363 or CPU364 - Attaching Ground Wire
Additional Modules with Shield Grounding Requirements

Some of the Series 90-30 Option modules, such as the FIP Remote I/O Scanner
(IC693BEM330), and DSM modules (IC693DSM302 and IC693DSM314) also have shield
grounding requirements. These modules come equipped with suitable grounding
hardware. Please refer to each module’s user’s manual for grounding instructions.
Appendix I contains a product to publication cross-reference to help you identify the
correct manual.
2-16
FANUC CNC Controls
2
General Wiring Guidelines
Warning
In addition to the following wiring suggestions, we strongly urge that
you follow all wiring and safety codes that apply to your area or your
type of equipment. For example, in the United States, most areas have
adopted the National Electrical Code standard and specify that all
wiring conform to its requirements. In other countries, different codes
will apply. For maximum safety to personnel and property you must
follow these codes. Failure to do so can lead to personal injury or
death, property damage or destruction, or both.
Color Coding Wires

These color codes are commonly used in industrial equipment manufactured in the
United States. They are cited here as a reference. Where they are in conflict with codes
that apply to your area or your type of equipment, you should follow your applicable
codes instead. Besides satisfying code requirements, wire color coding makes testing
and troubleshooting safer, faster, and easier.
D Green or green with stripe– Ground
D Black – Primary AC
D Red – Secondary AC
D Blue – DC
D White – Common or neutral
D Yellow – Secondary power source not controlled by the main disconnect. Alerts
maintenance personnel that there may be power present (from an external
source) even if the equipment is disconnected from its main power source.
Wire Routing
To reduce noise coupling among PLC wires, it is recommended you keep electrically
noisy wiring, such as AC power wiring and Discrete Output Module wiring, physically
separated from low-level signal wiring such as DC and Analog Input module wiring or
communications cables. This can be accomplished by grouping separately, where
practical, the following categories of wiring:
D AC power wiring. This includes the AC input to the PLC power supply, as
well as other AC devices in the control cabinet.
D Analog Input or Output Module wiring. This should be shielded to further
reduce noise coupling. See the Series 90-30 I/O Module Specifications Manual,
GFK-0898 for details.
D Discrete Output Module wiring. These often switch inductive loads that
produce noise spikes when switched off.
D DC Input Module wiring. Although suppressed internally, these low-level
inputs should be further protected against noise coupling by observing
these wiring practices.

2
D Communications Cables. Wiring such as Genius Bus or serial cables should

be kept away from noise-producing wiring.
Where AC or Output wiring bundles must pass near noise-sensitive signal wiring
bundles, avoid running them beside each other. Route them so that, if they have to
cross, they do so at a right angle. This will minimize coupling between them.
Grouping Modules to Keep Wires Segregated

If practical, grouping similar modules together in the PLC racks can help keep wiring
segregated. For example, one rack could contain only AC modules, and a different rack
only DC modules, with further grouping in each rack by input and output types. For
smaller systems, as an example, the left end of a rack could contain Analog modules, the
middle could contain DC modules, and the right end could contain AC modules.
Discrete I/O Module Connection Methods

D For modules with 16 points or less, the standard method is to use the removable
terminal board which comes with these modules. The removable terminal
board makes it easy to prewire field wiring to the user supplied input and
output devices, and to replace modules in the field without disturbing existing
field wiring.
D Some discrete 16-point I/O modules can be used with an optional Terminal Block
Quick Connect (TBQC) assembly. This assembly contains a module faceplate,
with built-in connector, that replaces the removeable terminal board. The
assembly also contains a DIN-rail mounted terminal block and a cable to connect
the module to the terminal block. The advantage of this method is that it saves
about two hours of wiring time per module compared with hand wiring from a
module’s removable terminal board to a user-supplied, panel-mounted terminal
block or strip.
D Older 32-point I/O modules have one 50-pin connector on the front of the
module that is either connected by a cable with a connector on each end to a
Weidmuller panel-mounted terminal block (Weidmuller catalog no. 912263), or is
connected by a cable with stripped, tinned leads to a user-supplied terminal
block or strip.
D Newer 32-point I/O modules have two 24-pin connectors on the front of the
module. These module may be wired in one of three ways. (1) Use a pair of
cables (IC693CBL327/328 – see data sheet in “Cables” chapter) to connect the
module to a user-supplied, panel-mounted terminal block or strip. These cables
have a 24-pin connector on one end, and stripped, tinned leads with wire
markers on the other end. (2) Use a pair of dual-connector cables to connect the
module to a Terminal Block Quick Connect (TBQC) terminal block
(IC693ACC377). See Appendix J for details. (3) Make your own custom cables.
Instructions are found in the IC693CBL327/328 data sheet in Chapter 10.
Connections to I/O Module Terminal Boards

Series 90-30 PLC I/O terminal boards have either 10 or 20 screw terminals that will
accept from two AWG #22 (0.36 mm2) to two AWG #16 (1.3 mm2), or one AWG #14 (2.1
mm2) copper 90_C (194_F) wire(s). Each terminal can accept solid or stranded wires, but
the wires into any given terminal should be the same type (both solid or both stranded)
2-18
FANUC CNC Controls
2
to ensure a good connection. Wires are routed to and from the terminals out of the
bottom of the terminal board cavity. The suggested torque for the I/O terminal board
connection screws is from 9.6 in-lbs to 11.5 in-lbs (1.1 - 1.3 Newton-meters).
For 24 volt DC input modules, an internal 24 volt power connection is provided on the
terminal board to supply a limited number of input devices. Also, a 24 volt DC output
is available on the power supply module’s terminal board to supply a limited number of
output devices.
Terminal Block Quick Connect Installation for 16-Point Discrete Modules

The Terminal Block Quick Connect (TBQC) Assembly is an option for certain Series 90-30
discrete I/O modules. See Appendix J for more information.
H Remove standard terminal board from module.
H Install TBQC faceplate (it has a 24-pin connector).
H Mount the TBQC terminal block. It has a 24-pin connector and a terminal strip, and
mounts on a standard 35 mm DIN-rail.
H Connect a TBQC cable between the TBQC faceplate connector on the module and
the connector on the TBQC terminal block.
H Wire I/O devices to the terminal block.
Installation of 32-Point Discrete, 50-Pin Connector Modules

These 50-Pin modules are an older design and are not generally used on new systems,
unless to fulfill standardization requirements. They are mainly used as replacements for
existing installations. For new installations, we recommend the dual 24-pin connector
style because they have additional features not found on the older modules (LED
indicators, TBQC), and it is much easier to fabricate custom-length cables for them.
Installation information is provided here for the convenience of those still using these
modules.
Using Weidmuller #912263 Terminal Block

Note: The TBQC is not available for these modules, but you may purchase a Weidmuller
#912263 from your electronics distributor for this application.
H Mount the Weidmuller#912263 terminal block. It has a 50-pin connector and a
terminal strip, and mounts on a standard 35 mm DIN-rail.
H Connect an IC693CBL306/307 cable between the module’s faceplate connector and
the connector on the Weidmuller terminal block. See Chapter 10 for cable data.
H Wire I/O devices to the terminal block. See the Series 90-30 PLC I/O Module
Specifications Manual, GFK-0898, for pin-out information.

2
Using Generic Terminal Block or Strip

H Mount terminal block/strip to the enclosure panel.
H Connect an IC693CBL308 or 309 cable, or a custom made cable, to the module’s
faceplate connector and wire the stripped ends of the cable to the terminal
block/strip. See Chapter 10 for cable data.
H Wire I/O devices to the terminalblock/strip.
Direct Method
H Connect an IC693CBL308 or 309 cable, or a custom made cable, to the module’s
faceplate connector and wire the stripped ends of the cable directly to the field
devices. See Chapter 10 for cable data. See the Series 90-30 PLC I/O Module
Installation of Discrete 32-Point, Dual 24-Pin Connector Modules
Using a TBQC
H Mount two TBQC terminal blocks. Each has a 24-pin connector and a terminal strip,
and mounts on a standard 35 mm DIN-rail.
H Connect a pair of TBQC cables (IC693CBL329 – 334) between the module’s
faceplate connector and the connectors on the two TBQC terminal blocks. Note that
both a right side and left side cable is required. See Appendix J for a list of cables.
H Wire I/O devices to the terminal blocks. See the Series 90-30 PLC I/O Module
The Terminal Block Quick Connect (TBQC) Assembly is an option for certain Series 90-30
discrete I/O modules. See Appendix J for more information.
With a Generic Terminal Block/Strip

H Mount terminal block/strip to the enclosure panel.
H Connect an IC693CBL327/328 cables, or a custom made cables, to the module’s
faceplate connectors, and wire the stripped ends of the cables to the terminal
block/strip. Note that both a right side and left side cable is required. See Appendix
J for a list of cables. See Chapter 10 for cable data sheets.
H Wire I/O devices to the terminal block/strip. See the Series 90-30 PLC I/O Module
Direct Method
H Connect an IC693CBL327/328 cables, or a custom made cables, to the module’s
faceplate connectors, and wire the stripped ends of the cable directly to the field
devices. See Chapter 10 for cable data. See the Series 90-30 PLC I/O Module
2-20
FANUC CNC Controls
2
General Wiring Methods for Analog Modules

Twisted, shielded instrumentation cable is strongly recommended for analog module
input or output signal connections. Proper grounding of the shield is also important.
For maximum electrical noise suppression, the cable shield should only be grounded at
one end of the cable. For Input modules, ground the end that is in the noisiest
environment (which often is at the field device end). For Output modules, ground at the
module end. See GFK-0898, Series 90-30 PLC I/O Module Specifications, for more shield
grounding information.
Analog Input Module Wiring Methods

Correcting electrical noise problems can sometimes be a trial-and-error routine.
However, in general, it is generally best to ground the cable shield as close to the source
of the noise as possible, which is usually at the device end. In troubleshooting noise
problems, sometimes it is beneficial to experiment with the shield grounding point
location. Remember, the cable shield should be grounded at one end only. Also, it is best
to keep the length of stripped cable leads as short as possible to minimize the length of
unshielded conductors that will be exposed to the noisy environment. See the Series
90-30 PLC I/O Module Specifications Manual, GFK-0898 for additional details.

H Mount a terminal strip inside the control enclosure and run a shielded cable from
the terminal strip to each input circuit on the module’s terminal board terminals.
H Connect each cable’s shield to the metal panel next to the terminal strip. Do do not
connect the shields at the module end (cut shield off at module end of cable and
insulate with shrink tubing).
H Wire the field device to the terminal strip with a shielded cable, grounding the shield
at the device end only (cut shield off at terminal strip end of cable and insulate with
shrink tubing). Also, keep the length of exposed (outside of shield) leads at the
terminal strip and device ends as short as possible.
Direct Method
H Run a shielded cable from the field device (transducer, potentiometer, etc.) directly
to the module.
H Connect the conductors to the applicable screws on the module’s terminal board.
H Ground the shield at the field device end, exposing a minimum amount of
conductor to the noisy environment. Do not connect the shield at the module end
(cut shield off at module end of cable and insulate with shrink tubing).
TBQC
The Terminal Block Quick Connect (TBQC) Assembly is not recommended for use with
analog modules due to cable shielding requirements.

2
Analog Output Module Wiring
General
Each output should be connected using a good quality shielded wire with the cable
shield grounded at the module end. See GFK-0898, Series 90-30 PLC I/O Module
Specifications, for more information.

H Mount a terminal strip inside the control enclosure and run a shielded cable from
the terminal strip to each output circuit on the module’s terminal board terminals.
H Ground each cable’s shield at the module end only. Do do not connect the shields at
the terminal strip end (cut shields off at terminal strip end of cables and insulate
with shrink tubing).
H Wire the field device to the terminal strip with shielded cables, grounding the
shields at the terminal strip end only (cut shields off at field device end of cables and
insulate with shrink tubing). Also, keep the length of exposed (outside of shield)
leads at the terminal strip and device ends as short as possible.
Direct Method
H Run a shielded cable from each field device (transducer, potentiometer, etc.) directly
to the module.
H Connect the conductors to the applicable screws on the module’s terminal board.
H Ground the shield at the module end only, exposing a minimum amount of
conductor to the noisy environment. Do not connect the shield at the device end
(cut shield off at device end of cable and insulate with shrink tubing).
TBQC
The Terminal Block Quick Connect (TBQC) Assembly is not recommended for use with
analog modules due to cable shielding requirements.
2-22
FANUC CNC Controls
2
AC Power Source Connections
AC Input Wiring to AC/DC Power Supplies
Warning
If the same AC power source is used to provide AC power to other baseplates

in a Series 90-30 PLC System, ensure that all AC input connections are
identical at each rack. Do not cross Line 1 (L1) and Line 2 (L2). A resulting
difference in potential can injure personnel or cause damage to equipment.
Each baseplate must be connected to a common ground.
Ensure that the protective cover is installed over all terminal boards. During
normal operation with an AC power source either 120 VAC or 240 VAC is
present on the AC Power Supply. The cover protects against accidental
shock hazard which could cause severe or fatal injury to the operator or
maintenance personnel.
Both the Standard (IC693PWR321) and High Capacity (IC693PWR330) AC/DCpower
supplies currently have six terminals for user connections. Early versions of some Series
90-30 power supplies had five terminals (see next figure). The wiring methods for both
five-terminal and six-terminal types is similar, except that step 3 below does not apply to
the five-terminal type.
The power supply terminal boards will accept one AWG #14 (2.1 mm2) or two AWG #16
(1.3 mm2) copper 75_ C (167_ F) wires. Each terminal can accept solid or stranded wires,
but the wires in any given terminal should be the same type. The suggested torque for
the power supply terminal board is 12 in-lbs (1.36 Newton-meters). Open the door
protecting the terminal board and make the following connections from the AC power
source, and ground connections (system grounding requirements are described in detail
later in this chapter).
1. These are wide range supplies that can operate from an AC power source within the
nominal range of 100 VAC to 240 VAC at 50/60 Hz. This may vary –15% to +10%
for a total maximum range of 85 VAC to 264 VAC. These are auto-ranging supplies
that do not require jumper or switch settings for selection of power source voltage.
2. Connect the hot and neutral wires or lines L1 and L2 to the upper two terminals on
the terminal board. Connect the safety ground wire to the ground terminal, which
is the third terminal from the top, and is marked with a ground symbol.
3. For power supplies with six terminals, the factory jumper between the 3rd and 4th
terminals (see figure below), should be left in place for normal installations.
However, this jumper must be removed and external surge suppressors installed in
installations with a “Floating Neutral” input. Please see the section “Special
Instructions for Floating Neutral (IT) Systems” later in this chapter for details.
4. After all connections to Power Supply terminal board have been completed, the
protective cover plate should be carefully reinstalled.

2
INPUT INPUT
100–240 VAC 100–240 VAC

50/60HZ 90VA 50/60HZ 90VA
Input Power 125 VDC, 50W Input Power 125 VDC, 50W
Factory Jumper
+
24 VDC Output 24 VDC
For I/O Modules OUTPUT
+ 0.8A MAX.
24 VDC Output 24 VDC
For I/O Modules OUTPUT
0.8A MAX.
Six-Terminal Board Five-Terminal Board
Figure 2-15. Power Supply Terminal Boards
Power Supply Overvoltage Protection Devices

The overvoltage protection devices for this power supply are connected internally to pin 4
on the user terminal board. This pin is normally connected to frame ground (pin 3) with
the supplied jumper strap which is installed at the factory. If overvoltage protection is not
required or is supplied upstream, this feature can be disabled by leaving pin 4 unconnected
by removing the jumper strap. Also, this jumper must be removed and external surge
suppressors installed in installations with a “Floating Neutral” input, please see the
following section “Special Instructions for Floating Neutral (IT) Systems” later in this
chapter.
If you want to Hi-pot test this supply, overvoltage protection must be disabled during the
test by removing the terminal board strap. Re-enable overvoltage protection after
testing by reinstalling the strap.
a47086
3 Frame Ground
Jumper Strap Connects
Overvoltage Protection
Devices to Frame Ground
4
Screw Terminals on Terminal Board
Figure 2-16. Overvoltage Protection Devices and Jumper Strap
2-24
FANUC CNC Controls
2
Special Installation Instructions for Floating Neutral (IT) Systems

When the AC input power supplies listed below are installed in a system where the
Neutral line is not referenced to Protective Earth Ground, these special installation
instructions must be followed to prevent damage to the power supply.
IC693PWR321S (or later version)
IC693PWR330A (or later version)
Definition of Floating Neutral Systems

A Floating Neutral System is a system of power distribution wiring where Neutral and
Protective Earth Ground are not tied together by a negligible impedance. In Europe this is
referred to as an IT system (see IEC950). In a Floating Neutral System, voltages measured
from input terminals to protective earth ground may exceed the 264 Volts AC maximum
input voltage specified in the power supply specifications in Chapter 24in this manual.
Example of Floating Neutral System
L1
PE
This system must be installed using the special installation instructions on the following
page.
Systems in which one leg of the power distribution wiring is tied to Protective Earth or a
tap between two legs of the power distribution wiring is tied to Protective Earth are not
Floating Neutral Systems.
Examples of Non-Floating Neutral System
L1 L L1
N N/PE L2
PE PE
These non-floating neutral systems do not require these special installation instructions.

2
Use These Special Installation Instructions for Floating Neutral Systems

1. The input power terminals should be wired according to the instructions in the “AC
Power Source Connections” section of this chapter.
2. The factory installed jumper between terminals 3 and 4 of the Power Supply module
must be removed if using one of the Power Supplies that have this feature. See the
“Overvoltage Protection Devices” section of the “Power Supplies” chapter for details.
3. Voltage surge protection devices, such as MOVs, MUST be installed between the
following terminals:
H From L1 to earth ground
H From L2 (Neutral) to earth ground
The voltage surge devices must be rated such that the system is protected from power
line transients that exceed Line voltage + 100V +(N–PE)MAX.
The expression N–PE refers to the voltage potential between neutral and Protective
Earth (PE) ground.
For example, in a 240 Volt AC system with neutral floating 50V above earth ground, the
transient protection should be rated at:
240V + 100V +50V = 390V
2-26
FANUC CNC Controls
2
DC Power Source Connections
DC Input Wiring to AC/DC and DC-Only Power Supplies

DC Input power can range from 12 to 30 VDC for the 24 VDC supply, 18 to 56 VDC for
the 24/48 VDC supply or 100 to 150 VDC for the 125 VDC supply. All Series 90-30 power
supplies have DC input capabilities. The following connection information applies to all
of them:
Connect the + and – wires from the power source to the top terminals on the terminal
board (+ to the top terminal, – to the second terminal). Connect the third terminal
from the top to system ground.
+24 VDC Output (All Supplies)

The bottom two terminals are connected to the isolated 24 volt DC output that can be
used to supply power to input circuits (within power limitations of the supply).
Warning
If the same DC input power source is used to provide power to two or

more power supplies in a Series 90-30 PLC System, ensure that
connection polarity is identical at each rack (top terminal + and second
terminal –). Do not cross the Positive (+) and Negative (–) lines. A
resulting difference in potential can injure personnel or cause damage
to equipment. Also, each baseplate must be connected to a common
system ground, described earlier in this chapter.

2
Basic Installation Procedure

The system design, which includes producing the layout and wiring drawings, should be
completed before beginning the installation procedure. This section offers a basic
step-by-step approach to installing a Series 90-30 PLC system. Some steps refer to earlier
sections of this chapter for additional details. An attempt was made to place the steps in
an order that will make the process as efficient as possible. However, due to the wide
variance in system designs, this order may not be the most efficient for your system, so
you may wish modify this procedure to fit your needs.
1. Gather the schematics, layouts, prints, and other information for the job.
Warning
To avoid the possibility of electrical shock to personnel or damage to
your PLC, we recommend that you shut off all power to the system
before mounting and wiring the PLC. Also, keep all electronic
components away from the area while drilling and tapping to keep
metal chips and filings out of these sensitive components.
2. From the layout drawing, determine where the baseplate(s) will be mounted. Lay
out the hole locations, either using the dimensions given on your layout drawing or
from the “Baseplates” chapter of this manual.
3. Mark the hole locations for the baseplate safety ground wire (see “Baseplate Safety
Ground” in this chapter).
4. Mark the hole locations for module shield ground connections (if any). See “Module
Shield Ground” (and accompanying sections) in this chapter for instructions.
5. Finish laying (marking hole locations) out the rest of the system. This includes any
terminal blocks you will be using. DIN-rail mounted terminal blocks for some of the
32-point I/O modules are manufactured by Weidmuller. DIN-rail mounted GE
Fanuc Terminal Block Quick Connect (TBQC) assemblies are optional for some of the
16-point and 32-point discrete I/O modules. If using these TBQCs, refer to Appendix
J for data. Also, APM and DSM modules use DIN-rail mounted terminal blocks.
Note
We recommend drilling and tapping all holes before mounting any
components. This will avoid getting chips and filings in the
components.
6. Drill and tap the marked holes. For baseplate mounting, use 8-32 or 4mm size.
7. Mount the baseplates. Use good quality 8-32 x 1/2 inch or 4 x 12mm size screws. We
recommend using star lock washers and flat washers under the screw heads (star
lock washer should be located between screw head and flat washer) to ensure a
tight baseplate ground connection, and to keep the screws from loosening. Connect
each baseplate ground wire as shown in the “Baseplate Safety Ground” section of
this chapter.
8. If you have Expansion or Remote racks, determine the correct rack number for each
one, then set the rack numbers using the Rack Number Selection DIP switch on the
baseplate. Please refer to the “Baseplates” chapter for details on setting these DIP
switches. Rack numbers should be assigned by the system programmer because
they correspond to system configuration settings and program memory addressing.
2-28
FANUC CNC Controls
2
9. If you have more than one baseplate (rack), connect the I/O Bus Expansion Cables
between the I/O Bus Expansion Connectors, which are located on the right end of
the baseplates. The cables are connected in a “daisy-chain” arrangement from one
baseplate to the other. This is made possible by the fact that the cables have a dual
connector on one end. Therefore, when the cable is plugged into a baseplate
connector, the second connector on that end of the cable provides a socket for
connecting to the next cable. The data sheet for the I/O Bus Expansion cables
(IC693CBL300 etc.) in the “Cables” chapter has sample wiring figures.
10. On the last I/O Bus Expansion Connector, plug in an I/O Bus Expansion Terminator,
Catalog Number IC693ACC307 (unless using a cable with built-in terminator
resistors, which would either be GE Fanuc cable IC693CBL302, or your own
custom-built cable).
11. Install the modules in their correct slots using your system layout drawings. (The
label on the side of each module identifies the module type and catalog number.)
Refer to the section “Installing Modules” if you are not familiar with how to do this.
12. Connect cables to Option modules. Route cables away from noise-producing wires.
See the ”Wire Routing” section of this chapter.
13. Be sure to follow the information in the “Wiring Guidelines” section of this chapter
to protect the system from electrical noise. Install the power wires to the Power
Supply and I/O modules:
D I/O modules with removeable terminal boards. You can wire the terminal
boards in-place on the modules or remove them from the modules before
wiring. Although removing them may help make wiring easier (a previous
section “Working with Removeable Terminal Boards” shows how to remove a
terminal board), care should be taken to avoid mixing them (each terminal
board has the catalog number of the module printed on it, and the hinged cover
has a wiring diagram for that module type). If you are using wire duct, routing
each module’s wires through the opening in the duct directly under the module
will help to keep each terminal board in its correct position.
D I/O Modules with terminal blocks. Some modules use terminal blocks that
mount to the enclosure panel. This includes all 32-point modules and, can
include other I/O modules if they are fitted with the optional Terminal Block
Quick Connect Assembly. Connect the terminal blocks to the connectors on the
modules with the provided cables.
14. Connect the signal (switches, sensors, solenoids, etc.) wires to the terminal boards, or
terminal blocks/strips. If wiring to terminal boards, these can be removed for ease of
wiring, if desired. See the section “Removing a Module’s Terminal Board.”
15. When finished wiring the I/O terminal boards (if used and if you removed them for
ease of wiring), re-install them on the modules, being careful to match each one with
the correct module.

Chapter Baseplates
3
Baseplate Types
A baseplate is composed of three main parts: (1) a circuit board mounted to (2) a metal
back-plate with (3) a plastic cover. The circuit board, called the ”backplane,” contains
sockets for plug-in modules. The metal back-plate has four holes for mounting the
baseplate, and retainers for mounting the modules. The plastic cover provides
protection for the circuit board, slotted holes for the module connectors and retainers,
and printed labels such as the baseplate description, serial number, and slot number
labels. There are three basic types of baseplates discussed in this chapter:
D CPU
D Expansion
D Remote
Common Baseplate Features

The callouts in the following picture show the items that are common to all Series 90-30
baseplates. Note that a modular CPU baseplate is shown.
FANUC CNC Controls

GFK-0356P 3-1
3
1 10
9
2
PROGRAMMABLE 2
CONTROLLER
3 BASE 5–SLOT
E
X
P
A
CAUTION N
NON-CPU SLOTS S
USER PROGRAM
AND REGISTER I
VALUES MAY BE
O
LOST IF POWER
SUPPLY IS N
C
REMOVED FOR P
LONGER THAN U
1 HOUR
4 4
CPU/1 I/O-2 I/O-3 I/O-4 I/O-5
POWER
SUPPLY
6 1 7 8
1. Module retainers
2. Upper mounting holes
3. Baseplate description
4. Lower mounting holes. The plastic cover is slotted at these two holes to facilitate a
ground connection. See the “Baseplate Safety Grounding” section of the
“Installation” chapter for ground connection details.
5. Backplane connector for Power Supply
6. Serial number label
7. Backplane connectors for I/O or Option modules (slots 2–4) . Note that the slot
labeled CPU/1 is the backplane connector for a CPU module; however, on
Embedded CPU, Expansion, and Remote baseplates, this would be another I/O or
Option module slot.
8. Slot number labels
9. Compliance label
10. Catalog number and certification (UL, CE, etc.) label. On an Embedded CPU
baseplate, this label will be located between Slots 4 and 5.
Figure 3-1. Common Baseplate Features
Two Baseplate Sizes

Series 90-30 baseplates come in two sizes: 5-slot and 10-slot. Be aware that the Power
Supply slot is not numbered, and is not considered to be one of the 5 or 10 slots. So a
5-slot baseplate has slots for a Power Supply and five other modules, and a 10-slot
baseplate has slots for a Power Supply and ten other modules.
3
Baseplate Terms Explained
Backplane: Refers to the circuit board in the baseplate. It contains the baseplate
circuitry and sockets for the plug-in modules.
Rack: This term applies to an assembly consisting of a baseplate, power supply, and
other modules.
Rack Number: In systems that require more than one rack, each rack is given its own
unique number, which enables the CPU to distinguish one rack from another.
Slot Number: Each module location (called a ”slot”) on a baseplate has a unique
number (except for the unnumbered left slot which is for the Power Supply). The slot to
the right of the Power Supply slot is always called Slot 1. These slot numbers are marked
on the baseplate’s plastic cover. Each slot has a connector for module connections and
top and bottom retainers for holding the module in place.
Module Location: Since each rack is assigned a unique number, and since each slot in a
rack’s baseplate has a unique slot number, each individual module’s location in a system
can be identified by its rack and slot numbers. For example, a module could be referred
to as ”the module in Rack 1, Slot 4.” This numbering method enables the CPU to
correctly read from and write to a particular module, and report the location of a faulted
module.
CPU Baseplate: A baseplate that either has a CPU built-in to its backplane circuit board
(embedded CPU) or one that has a slot for a plug-in CPU module (modular CPU). There
can only be one CPU baseplate in a Series 90-30 PLC system and it will always be called
Rack 0 (zero). A CPU module can only mount in Slot 1 of a CPU baseplate. A special
Option module, such as the FIP Remote I/O Scanner module (IC693BEM330) can also be
used in Slot 1 of a CPU baseplate. I/O, Power Supply, and most Option modules cannot
fit in a CPU slot.
Expansion Baseplate: One that does not contain a CPU and which can be mounted up
to 50 cable-feet from the CPU baseplate. An Expansion baseplate cannot operate on its
own. It must be used in a system that has a controlling CPU.
Remote Baseplate: One that does not contain a CPU and which can be mounted up to
700 cable-feet from the CPU baseplate. A remote baseplate cannot operate on its own. It
must be used in a system that has a controlling CPU.
Power Supply Slot: Each baseplate must contain its own Power Supply module, which
must mount in the Power Supply slot. It is the slot located on the left end of the
baseplate, it is not numbered, and it has a unique size and shape so that only a Power
Supply module can mount in it.
Note
Attempts to force a module into an improper slot type will result in
damage to the module and/or the baseplate. Modules will mount in
the correct slot type easily and with a minimum of force.
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
Chapter 3 Baseplates 3-3
3
CPU Baseplates
There are two basic kinds of CPU baseplates, embedded and modular. The embedded
types fulfill the need for a good low cost PLC, but lack the power, expandability, and
versatility of the modular systems.
Embedded CPU Baseplate: This type has CPU and memory integrated circuit chips
soldered to its backplane circuit board.
Modular CPU Baseplate: This type does not have CPU and memory chips on its
backplane. Instead, it has a connector in Slot 1 for a plug-in CPU module which contains
the CPU and memory chips on an internal circuit board.
Embedded CPU Baseplates (Figures 3-2 and 3-3)

There are three models of embedded baseplates, the 311, 313, and 323. These model
numbers are based upon the CPU type that each contains. This chapter discusses only
the baseplate features of these products. CPU specifications for the embedded CPU are
located in Chapter 4. The embedded CPU baseplates have the following features:
D The CPU type cannot be changed.
D They do not support the use of expansion or remote racks, so these racks do
not have an expansion connector like the modular CPU baseplates do.
D The models 311 and 313 are 5-slot baseplates, and the model 323 is a 10-slot
baseplate.
D Since they do not require a plug-in CPU module, all numbered slots,
including Slot 1, can be used for I/O or Option modules.
D The memory back-up battery is located in the Power Supply module; so if
the Power Supply is unplugged from the baseplate, the battery will be
disconnected from the memory circuits, which are located on the backplane
circuit board. However, the backplane circuit board contains a high value
capacitor, sometimes called a ”super capacitor,” that can store enough charge
to maintain the memory circuits for about 1 hour if the Power Supply is
removed or its battery is disconnected. Chapter 6 discusses the
IC693ACC315 Battery Accessory kit that can be used to maintain memory
contents when the Power Supply is removed from an embedded CPU
baseplate.
D There are no configuration switches or jumpers on the Model 311, 313, or
323 baseplates.
D An embedded CPU baseplate is always assigned, by default, Rack Number
Zero (0).
3
a44563A
Replaceable System (firmware) PROM Socket for Optional Program PROM
ÎÎ
SYSTEM PROGRAM
PROM PROM
ÎÎ
PROGRAMMABLE 1
CONTROLLER
ÎÎ
Description Label BASE 5-SLOT
Says ”With CPU” WITH CPU
CAUTION
USER PROGRAM
AND REGISTER
ÎÎ NON-CPU SLOTS
VALUES MAY BE
Memory Backup LOST IF POWER
C
SUPPLY IS P
Warning Label REMOVED FOR U
LONGER THAN
1 HOUR
I/O-1 I/O-2 I/O-3 I/O-4 I/O-5

POWER
SUPPLY
Figure 3-2. Models IC693CPU311 and IC693CPU313 (5-Slot) Embedded CPU Baseplates
a45134
SYSTEM PROGRAM
PROM PROM
1
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER
BASE 10–SLOT
WITH CPU
CAUTION NON-CPU SLOTS NON-CPU SLOTS

USER PROGRAM
AND REGISTER
VALUES MAY BE
LOST IF POWER
SUPPLY IS C
P
REMOVED FOR U
LONGER THAN
1 HOUR.
POWER I/O-1 I/O-2 I/O-3 I/O-4 I/O-5 I/O-6 I/O-7 I/O-8 I/O-9 I/O-10
SUPPLY
Figure 3-3. Model IC693CPU323 (10-slot) Embedded CPU Baseplate
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
3
Modular CPU Baseplates (Figures 3-4 and 3-5)

D A Power Supply module must be plugged into the left slot (which is not
numbered) of these baseplates. The left slot is a unique size and type that
only supports a Power Supply module.
D A CPU module (or a special Option module) must be installed in Slot 1 of
these baseplates. Slot 1 is a unique size and type that only supports a CPU
module or a special Option module like the FIP Remote I/O Scanner
(IC693BEM330). Slot 1 is labeled CPU/1.
D Slots numbered 2 and above are of a unique size and type that only
supports I/O or Option modules.
D Expansion and Remote baseplates are supported, so a 25-pin D-type female
expansion connector is located at the right end of the baseplate for
connecting to an Expansion or Remote baseplate.
D Since the CPU is modular, it can be replaced or changed to a different type if
additional features are desired.
D Only one CPU baseplate is allowed per system. If more than one baseplate
is used in a system, the additional ones must be either Expansion or Remote
types.
D A modular CPU baseplate is always assigned, by default, Rack Number 0.
a44564
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER
BASE 5–SLOT
E
X
P
A
I/O Bus
USER PROGRAM S
VALUES MAY BE
O
Connector
SUPPLY IS N
C
REMOVED FOR P
LONGER THAN U
1 HOUR
CPU/1 I/O-2 I/O-3 I/O-4 I/O-5

POWER
SUPPLY
CPU Slot (Slot 1)
Figure 3-4. IC693CHS397 5-Slot Modular CPU Baseplate
3
a43049
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER
BASE 10–SLOT
E
X
P
A
CAUTION NON-CPU SLOTS NON-CPU SLOTS N
USER PROGRAM S
AND REGISTER I
VALUES MAY BE O
LOST IF POWER C N
SUPPLY IS P
REMOVED FOR U
LONGER THAN
1 HOUR.
CPU/1 I/O-2 I/O-3 I/O-4 I/O-5 I/O-6 I/O-7 I/O-8 I/O-9 I/O-10
POWER
SUPPLY
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
3
Expansion Baseplates (Figures 3-6 and 3-7)

D There can be no more than a total of 50 feet (15 meters) of cable
interconnecting Expansion baseplates and the CPU baseplate.
D An Expansion baseplate cannot stand alone. It must be connected to a

system that has a CPU. The CPU can be in a PLC or in a Personal Computer
that is equipped with a Personal Computer Interface Card (see Chapter 11).
D Maximum number of Expansion baseplates allowed per system depends on

the type of CPU they are used with. For CPUs 331, 340, and 341, the
maximum is 4. For CPUs numbered 350 and higher, the maximum is 7.
D Each Expansion baseplate has a 25-pin female D-type I/O Bus Expansion
connector mounted at its right end for connection to other baseplates.
D Available in two versions; 5-slot (IC693CHS398) and 10-slot (IC693CHS392)
D An Expansion backplane does not support the following intelligent option

modules: PCM, ADC, BEM330, and CMM. These modules must be mounted
in a CPU baseplate. All other I/O and option modules can be mounted in any
type of rack.
D All Expansion baseplates must be connected to a common ground (see the

“Installation” chapter for details).
D Expansion baseplates are the same physical size, use the same type power
supplies, and support the same I/O and option modules as the Remote
baseplates.
D Each Expansion baseplate has a Rack Number Selection DIP switch.
Rack Number Selection

Switch Setting Label
a44565
DIP EXPANSION RACK #

SW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 X X X
PROGRAMMABLE 2 X X X
CONTROLLER 3 X X X
Description Label X CLOSED
BASE 5–SLOT
Says ”Expansion” EXPANSION
E
X
P
A
Rack Number NON-CPU SLOTS N Expansion
Selection Switch S
Connector
I
O
C N
P
U
I/O-1 I/O-2 I/O-3 I/O-4 I/O-5

POWER
SUPPLY
Figure 3-6. IC693CHS398 5-Slot Expansion Baseplate
3
a43050

SW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 X X X
CONTROLLER 3 X X X
BASE 10–SLOT X CLOSED
EXPANSION E
X
P
NON-CPU SLOTS NON-CPU SLOTS A
N
S
I
O
C N
P
U
I/O-1 I/O-2 I/O-3 I/O-4 I/O-5 I/O-6 I/O-7 I/O-8 I/O-9 I/O-10
POWER
SUPPLY
Figure 3-7. IC693CHS392 10-Slot Expansion Baseplate
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
3
Remote Baseplates (Figures 3-8 and 3-9)

D There can be no more than 700 feet of cable connecting all baseplates in a
system that uses Remote baseplates.
D A Remote baseplate cannot stand alone. It must be connected to a system

that has a CPU. The CPU can be in a PLC or in a Personal Computer that is
equipped with a Personal Computer Interface Card (see Chapter 11).
D Remote capability is facilitated by the Remote baseplate’s built-in isolation

between the +5 volt logic supply used by the I/O modules residing in the
Remote baseplate and the supply for the interface circuit associated with the
I/O Bus Expansion Interface. Isolation helps prevent problems associated
with unbalanced ground conditions.
D Maximum number of Remote baseplates allowed per system depends on

the type of CPU they are used with. For CPUs 331, 340, and 341, the
maximum is 4. For CPUs numbered 350 and higher, the maximum is 7.
D Each remote baseplate has a 25-pin female D-type Expansion connector

mounted at its right end for connection to other baseplates.
D Remote baseplates are available in two sizes; 5-slot (IC693CHS398) and 10-slot
(IC693CHS392)
D A Remote backplane does not support the following intelligent option

modules: PCM, ADC, BEM330, and CMM. These modules must be mounted
in a CPU baseplate. All other I/O and option modules can be mounted in any
type of baseplate.
D Remote baseplates are the same physical size, use the same type power
supplies, and support the same I/O and option modules as the Expansion
baseplates.
D Each Remote baseplate has a Rack Number Selection DIP switch.
a44968

SW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 X X X
2 X X X
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER 3 X X X
X CLOSED
Says ”Remote” REMOTE
E
X
P
A
NON-CPU SLOTS N
S
I
O
C N
P
U
I/O-1 I/O-2 I/O-3 I/O-4 I/O-5

POWER
SUPPLY
Figure 3-8. IC693CHS399 5-Slot Remote Baseplate
3
a44969

SW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 X X X
CONTROLLER 3 X X X
BASE 10-SLOT X CLOSED
REMOTE E
X
P
A
NON-CPU SLOTS NON-CPU SLOTS N
S
I
O
C N
P
U
I/O-1 I/O-2 I/O-3 I/O-4 I/O-5 I/O-6 I/O-7 I/O-8 I/O-9 I/O-10
POWER
SUPPLY
Figure 3-9. IC693CHS393 10-Slot Remote Baseplate
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
3
I/O Bus Expansion Cables

Five prewired I/O Bus Expansion cables are available from GE Fanuc. Catalog numbers and
lengths of these cables are listed in the following figure. You can build custom cables to suit
the needs of your application if cable lengths other than those listed are required. Refer to
the “Cables” chapter for detailed information on cable type and connectors. Note that the
same cables can be used with both Expansion and Remote baseplates, however the cables
used in a remote expansion system must use the cable type described in the “Cables”
chapter.
FEMALE
a43853A
ÎÎ Î
CONNECTOR
ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î
Figure A ÎÎÎ ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ MALE
Î .5, 3, 6, 26 FOOT
CABLES
MALE
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
Î Î ÎÎ
Î
Î Î Î
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
Figure B
ÎÎ ÎÎ Î ÎÎ
50 FOOT
CABLE
MALE MALE
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
Catalog Number Length Figure

IC693CBL300 3 feet (1 meter), continuous shield A
IC693CBL301 6 feet (2 meters), continuous shield A
IC693CBL302 50 feet (15 meters), continuous B
shield with built in terminator (this
is not a Wye cable)
IC693CBL312 0.5 feet (.15 meters), continuous A
shield
IC693CBL313 25 feet (8 meters), continuous shield A
Figure 3-10. I/O Bus Expansion Cables
Note
The 3 foot cable (IC693CBL300) can be used as a Wye adapter between
custom-built cables and Remote baseplates.
Differences Between Remote and Expansion Racks

Basically, Remote racks provide the same functionality as Expansion racks, but with the
longer distance (700 feet/213 meters verses 50 feet/15 meters for Expansion racks)
capability. To minimize unbalanced ground conditions, Remote baseplates have extra
3
isolation circuitry. Unbalanced ground conditions can occur when systems are located
long distances from each other and do not share the same ground system. However,
distance is not always the problem; even racks that are mounted near each other can
experience problems if the system is not grounded properly. See Chapter 2 for
The use of Remote racks requires a special consideration pertaining to scan time. In
order to operate at long distances, the I/O Bus runs at a lower clock speed (compared to
that used for Expansion racks) when communicating with Remote racks, which will
have an impact on performance. The impact will be relatively small for discrete I/O and
slightly more for other modules, such as the High Speed Counter or Genius
Communications Module. The increase in time needed to communicate with modules in
a remote baseplate will usually be small with respect to the overall scan time. For more
detailed information on scan time calculations, refer to Chapter 2 of GFK-0467, the Series
90-30/20/Micro PLC CPU Instruction Set Reference Manual.
Another important scan time consideration is the cable type used for communicating at
longer distances. Data propagation delay must be minimized to ensure proper system
timing and margins. Any deviation in cable type may result in erratic or improper
system operation. Suggested cable types are specified in the “Cables” chapter in the
IC693CBL300/etc. data sheet.
Mixing Expansion and Remote Baseplates in a System

Expansion and remote baseplates can be used in the same system as long as certain
requirements are met:
D You do not exceed the 50 foot (15 meter) maximum cable distance from the
CPU to the last Expansion baseplate
D You do not exceed the 700 foot (213 meter) maximum cable distance from
the CPU to the last Remote baseplate.
D The cable type recommended for use with Remote baseplates must be used
throughout the system. The exception to this requirement is that the
prewired 3 foot (1 meter) cable, IC693CBL300, can be used as a Wye adapter
to simplify the custom cable assembly associated with the “daisy chain”
connections between baseplates. Information on building cables for use
with Remote baseplates can be found in the “Cables” chapter in the
IC693CBL300/etc. data sheet..
Termination Requirement for Expansion or Remote System

When two or more baseplates are connected via the I/O Bus Expansion System, the I/O
Expansion Bus must be properly terminated. The most common method of terminating
the I/O Expansion Bus is by installing a termination resistor pack (IC693ACC307) on the
open connector on the last (most distant from the CPU) Expansion or Remote baseplate
in the system. The resistor pack is physically mounted inside of a connector. Although a
termination resistor pack is shipped with each baseplate, only the last baseplate in the
chain needs to have this termination connector installed. Unused termination packs can
be discarded. The prewired 50 foot (15 meter) cable (IC693CBL302) has termination
resistors wired inside the connector on one end of the cable. This cable can be used if
only one expansion rack is needed in a system and a 50 foot cable link is required (the
IC693ACC307 resistor pack is not needed in this case). Also, a custom-built cable with
built-in resistors would eliminate the need for the IC693ACC307 resistor pack.
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
3
Powering Down Individual Expansion or Remote Baseplates

Expansion or Remote baseplates can be powered-down individually without affecting the
operation of other baseplates; however, powering off a baseplate generates a loss of module
(LOSS_OF_MODULE) fault in the PLC Fault Table for each module in the baseplate. When
this fault condition occurs, and until the baseplate is powered back on and all modules
recovered, the lost I/O modules are not scanned. For more information on the power-up
and power-down sequence, see Chapter 2 in the Series 90-30 Programmable Controller
Reference Manual, GFK-0467.
Series 90-30 PLC Backplane

The Series 90-30 PLC backplane (on all three types of baseplates) has a dedicated I/O
communications bus. The signals on the remote baseplate backplane are optically coupled
and an isolated DC-DC power supply converter is provided to isolate the signals from other
backplanes.
D Power bus – connects the power supply outputs to the modules in the
baseplate.
D I/O Communications bus – the CPU communicates with I/O modules over
this bus. This bus is connected to the I/O busses in Expansion and Remote
racks via the I/O Bus Expansion connectors and cables.
D Special Intelligent Module bus – exists only on a CPU baseplate; therefore,
certain special intelligent option modules, such as the PCM, ADC, and CMM
modules, will only work in a CPU baseplate.
Rack Number DIP Switch on Expansion and Remote Baseplates

Each baseplate in a Series 90-30 system is identified with a unique number called a “Rack
Number.” Rack Numbers for Expansion and Remote baseplates are selected by setting a
DIP switch located on each baseplate directly above the connector for Slot 1. Rack number
0 must always be present and is assigned, by default, to the CPU rack (the CPU baseplate
does not have this DIP switch). Racks do not need to be contiguously numbered, although
for consistency and clarity, it is recommended that rack numbers not be skipped (use 1, 2, 3 -
not 1, 3, 5). Rack numbers must not be duplicated within a system. The following table
shows the DIP switch positions for rack number selection.
Table 3-1. Rack Number Selection Switch Settings
Rack Number
DIP Switch 1 2 3 4 5* 6* 7*
1 open closed open closed open closed open
2 closed open open closed closed open open
3 closed closed closed open open open open
* Rack numbers 5, 6, and 7 only valid for CPUs 350 and higher.
3
The particular CPU module used determines how may expansion and remote baseplates
are allowed:
D The 331, 340, and 341 CPUs support a total of 4 Expansion and/or Remote
racks.
D The 350, 351, 352, 360, 363, and 364 CPUs support a total of 7 Expansion
and/or Remote racks.
Each baseplate has a label above the DIP switch that shows the settings for each rack
number. The following figure shows this DIP switch package with an example of rack
#2 number selected.
Note
Use a ball-point pen to set the DIP switches. In general, it is best to
avoid using a pencil to set DIP switches since graphite (a gritty,
conductive material) from the pencil can enter and damage the switch.
a43054
EXPANSION RACK #
G E F an u c DIP
SW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
SERIES 90–30 1 X X X
CONTROLLER 3 X
X X
X = CLOSED
BASE 10–SLOT
EXPANSION
= CLOSED (Switch pushed down on right side)
Figure 3-11. Rack Number Selection Switch (Shown with Rack 2 Selected)
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
3
Expansion Rack Connection Example
The following example shows a system that includes Expansion baseplates.
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
PROGRAMMER CPU BASEPLATE a47057
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
SERIAL
ÎÎC
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
P
U NOTE
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î
TOTAL MAXIMUM
DISTANCE FROM
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î DISCRETE/ANALOG/OPTION CPU BASEPLATE
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
TO LAST EXPANSION
EXPANSION BASEPLATE BASEPLATE IS
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ Î
50 FEET (15 METERS)
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ I/O EXPANSION CABLES
DISCRETE/ANALOG/OPTION
Î Î
EXPANSION BASEPLATE
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
*NOTE
ÎÎ
EXPANSION BASEPLATE
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
Each signal pair on the I/O bus must
be terminated at the end of the I/O
bus with120 ohm resistors. This ter-
mination can be done with the I/O
Bus Terminator Plug (IC693ACC307), DISCRETE/ANALOG/OPTION
by using the 50 foot (15 meter) cable
(IC693CBL302) with built-in terminat-
Î Î
EXPANSION BASEPLATE
Î
ing resistors, or by building a custom I/O BUS
cable with the resistors installed in TERMINATOR
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
the connector at the end of the bus. PLUG (See *NOTE)
IC693ACC307
Figure 3-12. Example of Connecting Expansion Baseplates
3
Expansion and Remote Baseplates Connection Example

The following example shows cable connections in a system that includes both remote
and expansion baseplates. A system can have a combination of remote and expansion
baseplates as long as the distance and cable requirements are followed.
CPU
C
BASEPLATE P
IC693CHS391/397 U
1
EXPANSION
BASEPLATE
EXPANSION BASEPLATE
IC693CHS392/398
Maximum Cable Distance
from CPU = 50 Feet
(15 METERS)
REMOTE BASEPLATE
REMOTE 3
BASEPLATE
IC693CHS393/399
ÎÎ REMOTE BASEPLATE
REMOTE
ÎÎÎÎ 3
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
BASEPLATE
IC693CHS393/399
2
REMOTE
BASEPLATE
REMOTE BASEPLATE
IC693CHS393/399 3
Maximum Cable Distance
from CPU = 700 Feet 4
(213 METERS)
1 Standard Wye Cable
2 Custom Built Point-to-Point Cable
3 IC693CBL300 Standard Wye Cable, Used as Wye Jumper
4 IC693ACC307 Bus Terminator
Figure 3-13. Example of Connecting Expansion and Remote Baseplates
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
3
Baseplate Mounting Dimensions

Series 90-30 PLC baseplates are designed to be panel mounted. Each baseplate has
standard attachment flanges for mounting on an electrical panel. Baseplate dimensions
and proper spacing requirements for installation purposes for both the 5 and 10-slot
baseplates with embedded CPU (Models 311 and Model 313 are 5-slot baseplates; Model
323 is a 10-slot baseplate), and the 5 and 10-slot baseplates for Modular CPUs are shown
in figures 3-1 through 3-4.
Note
All 5-slot baseplates have the same mounting dimensions and all 10-slot
baseplates have the same mounting dimensions. Baseplates must be
mounted in the orientation as shown in the following figures for proper cooling.
Embedded CPU (311, 313, and 323) Baseplate Dimensions

Baseplate dimensions and spacing requirements for installation for Models 311, 313, and
323 baseplates are shown below.
a45422
DIMENSIONS IN INCHES,
* 4.00 10.43 * 4.00
(102) (265) (102) MILLIMETERS ARE IN PARENTHESIS
9.84 * 4.00
(102)
ÎÎ
(250)
8.60 REMOVABLE
5.59
(218) I/O
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÏÏ ÎÎ
(142)
TERMINAL
POWER BLOCK
SUPPLY
.20 DIA.
3.54
(5.08) 5.12
(90)
(TYPICAL) (130)
.79
(20)
FRONT VIEW HINGED
DOOR
ÏÏ SIDE VIEW ÎÎ
* 4.00
(102)
* ALLOWANCE FOR COOLING
Figure 3-14. Model 311 and 313 5-Slot Baseplate Dimensions and Spacing Requirements
3
a45421
* 4.00 17.44 * 4.00
16.85 * 4.00
(428) (102)
15.60 REMOVABLE
Ï Î
5.59
(396) I/O
(142)
TERMINAL
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Ï Î
POWER BLOCK
SUPPLY
3.54
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ .20 DIA.
Ï Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Ï Î
(5.08) 5.12
(90)
(TYPICAL) (130)
.79
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
FRONT VIEW HINGED
Ï SIDE VIEW
Î
(20) DOOR
* 4.00
(102)
Figure 3-15. Model 323 10-Slot Baseplate Dimensions and Spacing Requirements
Modular CPU, Expansion, and Remote Baseplate Dimensions

Baseplate dimensions and spacing requirements for installation for Modular CPU
baseplates are shown below.
a45424
* 4.00 10.43 * 4.00
(102) (265) 9.84 (102) MILLIMETERS ARE IN PARENTHESIS
* 4.00
ÎÎ
(250) (102)
8.60 REMOVABLE
5.59
(218) I/O
(142)
TERMINAL
ÎÎ
POWER
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÏÏ
SEE BLOCK
SUPPLY
NOTE
.20 DIA.
3.54
(5.08) 5.12
(90)
(TYPICAL) (130)
.79
(20)
FRONT VIEW HINGED
ÏÏ SIDE VIEW
ÎÎ
DOOR
NOTE: * 4.00
IF THE CABLE IS USED, ALLOW ABOUT 6 INCH HORIZONTAL CLEARANCE (102)
ON THE RIGHT SIDE OF THE RACK FOR ACCESS TO THE CONNECTOR.
Figure 3-16. Modular CPU, Expansion, and Remote 5-Slot Baseplate Dimensions and
Spacing Requirements
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
3
a45423
* 4.00 17.44 * 4.00
16.85 * 4.00
ÎÎ
(428) (102)
REMOVABLE
15.60 5.59
ÎÎ
I/O
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÏÏ
(396) (142)
TERMINAL
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÏÏ ÎÎ
POWER SEE BLOCK
SUPPLY
NOTE
.20 DIA.
3.54
(5.08) 5.12
(90) CONNECTOR
(TYPICAL) (130) FOR
EXPANSION
CABLE
.79 NOTE:
FRONT VIEW HINGED SIDE VIEW
(20) IF THE CABLE IS USED, ALLOW ABOUT 6 INCH HORIZONTAL CLEARANCE DOOR
ON THE RIGHT SIDE OF THE RACK FOR ACCESS TO THE CONNECTOR. * 4.00
(102)
Figure 3-17. Modular CPU, Expansion, and Remote 10-Slot Baseplate Dimensions and
Spacing Requirements
3
Load Ratings, Temperature, and Mounting Position

The power supply load rating depends on the mounting position of the baseplate and
the ambient temperature.
The load rating with the baseplate mounted upright on a panel is:
H 100% at 60_C (140_F)
ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
Power supply load ratings with the baseplate mounted horizontally are:
H temperature at 25_C (77_F) - full load
H temperature at 60_C (140_F) - 50% of full load
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
3
Baseplate Adapter Brackets for 19” Rack Mounting

Two optional Baseplate Adapter Brackets allow a 10-slot baseplate to be mounted in a 19
inch rack. Each baseplate installation requires only one of the adapter brackets.
Warning
Be sure to follow grounding instructions in Chapter 2 when using

these adaptor brackets. Failure to properly ground the PLC can result
in improper operation, damage to equipment, and injury to personnel.
D IC693ACC308 Front Mount Adapter Bracket. Used to mount a baseplate to the

front face of a 19” rack. Install the adapter bracket by inserting the tabs at the top
and bottom of the adapter bracket into the corresponding slots at the top and
bottom of the plastic baseplate cover. NOTE: Although the figure below shows the
plastic baseplate cover removed, this is for illustration purposes only. It is not
necessary to remove the cover to install the bracket. With the bracket in place, insert
and tighten the two screws (included with the bracket) through the back of the
baseplate holes into the threaded holes in the bracket.
D IC693ACC313 Recessed Mount Adapter Bracket. Used to recess mount a baseplate
inside a 19” rack. A baseplate mounts on the rear panel of this adapter bracket using
four 8-32 (4 mm) screws, nuts, lockwashers and flat washers. The Adapter Bracket
bolts through its four slotted holes to the face of the 19” rack using applicable
hardware (lockwashers recommended).
RIGHT SIDE OF a43726A

BASEPLATE
Insert two screws (1 at top; 1 at bottom)
from back of base unit through base unit
and bracket. Tighten screws to secure
bracket to base unit.
Note: Baseplate is shown with cover removed for illustration purposes. It

is not necessary to remove the baseplate cover to install the bracket.
Figure 3-18. IC693ACC308 Front Mount Adapter Bracket Installation
Dimensions for rack mounting a 10-slot baseplate with the IC693ACC308 Front Mount
Adapter Bracket are shown in the following figure.
3
a45047
18.89
(480)
18.47
(469)
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Figure 3-19. Dimensions for 19I Rack Mounting Using IC693ACC308 Adapter Bracket
0.160 (4.06) dia. x 4
0.280 (7.1)
3.540 (90) 4.000 (101.6)
1.630 (41.4) 1.368 (34.7)

0.842 (21.4)
0.346 (8.8)
Inside 16.850 (428)
18.122 (460.3)
0.439 (11.2)
Figure 3-20. IC693ACC313 Recessed Mount Adapter Bracket
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
3
Baseplate Comparison Table
Table 3-2. Series 90-30 Baseplate Comparison
Series 90-30 Baseplates

Catalog Number Type Size (Slots)
IC693CPU311 Embedded CPU 5
IC693CHS397 Modular CPU 5
IC693CHS398 Expansion 5
IC693CHS392 Expansion 10
IC693CHS399 Remote 5
IC693CHS393 Remote 10
Chapter Power Supplies
4
Power Supply Categories

Series 90-30 power supplies are modular types that plug into the left slot of all 90-30
baseplates. They have been placed into two categories for the purpose of this chapter:
AC/DC Input Power Supplies
H IC693PWR321, Standard 120/240 VAC or 125 VDC input, 30 watts total output
H IC693PWR330, High Capacity 120/240 VAC or 125 VDC input, 30 watts total output
DC Input-Only Power Supplies
H IC693PWR322, 24/48 VDC input, 30 watts total output
H IC693PWR328 48 VDC input, 30 watts total output
H IC693PWR331, High Capacity 24 VDC input, 30 watts total output
Power Supply Feature Comparison

The following table lists the features of the Series 90-30 PLC Power Supplies.
Table 4-1. Power Supply Comparison Table
Catalog Load Nominal

Number Capacity Input OutputCapacities (Voltage/Power [)
IC693PWR321 30 Watts 100 to 240 VAC or +5 VDC +24 VDC Isolated +24 VDC Relay
125 VDC 15 watts 20 watts 15 watts
IC693PWR322 30 Watts 24 or 48 VDC +5 VDC +24 VDC Isolated +24 VDC Relay
15 watts 20 watts 15 watts
IC693PWR328 30 Watts 48 VDC +5 VDC +24 VDC Isolated +24 VDC Relay
[ Total of all outputs combined cannot exceed 30 watts.
FANUC CNC Controls

GFK-0356P 4-1
4
AC/DC Input Power Supplies
IC693PWR321 Standard Power Supply, 120/240 VAC or 125 VDC Input

The IC693PWR321 is a 30 watt supply that can operate from an input voltage source in the
range of 85 to 264 VAC or 100 to 300 VDC. This power supply provides three outputs:
H + 5 VDC output,
H + 24 VDC ”Relay” power output which provides power to circuits on Series 90-30
Output Relay modules.
H “Isolated” +24 VDC, which is used internally by some modules, can also be used to
provide external power for 24 VDC Input modules.
The load capacity for each output of this power supply is shown in the following table.
Table 4-2. IC693PWR321 Power Supply Capacities

a45613
PWR
IC693PWR321
GE Fanuc OK SYSTEM
STATUS
SERIES 90–30 RUN INDICATORS
BATT
STANDARD
POWER SUPPLY
∼
INPUT
100–240 VAC
50/60HZ 90 VA
CONNECTIONS
125 VDC, 50W
FOR
AC/DC POWER
SOURCE
INTERNAL
POWER SOURCE
+
FOR 24 VDC
MODULES REQUIRING OUTPUT
24VDC 0.8A MAX.
RS–485
B
COMPATIBLE
A
T SERIAL PORT
T
E BATTERY
R CONNECTORS
LITHIUM Y
BACK–UP
BATTERY
Figure 4-1. Standard AC/DC Input Power Supply - IC693PWR321
Power supplies must be installed in the leftmost slot in all baseplates.
4
Note
Previous versions of this power supply had five terminals on the
terminal block. The new version (shown above), which has six
terminals, is functionally the same as the previous version. The change
was made to conform to European EC requirements.
Table 4-3. Specifications for IC693PWR321 Standard AC/DC Input Power Supply
Nominal Rated Voltage 120/240VAC or 125 VDC

Input Voltage Range
AC 85 to 264 VAC
DC 100 to 300 VDC
Input Power 90 VA with VAC Input
(Maximum with Full Load) 50 W with VDC Input
Inrush Current 4A peak, 250 milliseconds maximum
Output Power 5 VDC and 24 VDC Relay: 15 watts maximum
24 VDC Relay: 15 watts maximum
24 VDC Isolated: 20 watts maximum
NOTE: 30 watts maximum total (all three outputs)
Output Voltage 5 VDC: 5.0 VDC to 5.2 VDC (5.1 VDC nominal)
Relay 24 VDC: 24 to 28 VDC
Isolated 24 VDC: 21.5 VDC to 28 VDC
ProtectiveLimits
Overvoltage: 5 VDC output: 6.4 to 7 V
Overcurrent: 5 VDC output: 4 A maximum
Holdup Time: 20 milliseconds minimum
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
Chapter 4 Power Supplies 4-3
4
IC693PWR330 High Capacity Power Supply, 120/240 VAC/125 VDC Input

The IC693PWR330 High Capacity Power Supply is rated for 30 watts output. For
applications requiring greater +5V current capacity than is available with the standard supply
(IC693PWR321), this supply allows all 30 watts to be consumed from the +5V supply. It can
operate from an input voltage source in the range of 85 to 264 VAC or 100 to 300 VDC.
This power supply provides the following outputs:
H + 5 VDC output.

a45625
PWR
IC693PWR330 GE Fanuc SYSTEM
OK
STATUS
Series 90-30 RUN
INDICATORS
BATT
HIGH CAPACITY
POWER SUPPLY
ÎÎÎÎ
INPUT
ÎÎÎÎ
100-240 VAC
50/60 HZ 100VA
ÎÎÎÎ
125VDC, 50W
CONNECTIONS FOR
ÎÎÎÎ
AC/DC POWER SOURCE
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
+
INTERNAL POWER SOURCE FOR 24 VDC
ÎÎÎÎ
OUTPUT
MODULES REQUIRING 24VDC 0.8A MAX.
ÎÎÎ B
A
T
RS–485
COMPATIBLE
SERIAL PORT
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
T
E BATTERY
LITHIUM R CONNECTORS
Y
BACK–UP
BATTERY
Figure 4-2. High Capacity AC/DC Input Power Supply - IC693PWR330
4
Table 4-5. Specifications for IC693PWR330 High Capacity AC/DC Input Power Supply
Nominal Rated Voltage 120/240VAC or 125 VDC
Input Voltage Range
AC 85 to 264 VAC
DC 100 to 300 VDC
Input Power 100 VA with VAC Input
(Maximum with Full Load) 50 W with VDC Input
Inrush Current 4A peak, 250 ms maximum
Output Power 5 VDC: 30 watts maximum
24 VDC Relay: 24 to 28 VDC
24 VDC Isolated: 21.5 VDC to 28 VDC
ProtectiveLimits
Overcurrent: 5 VDC output: 7 A maximum
Holdup Time: 20 ms minimum
Field Wiring Connections for the AC/DC Input Power Supplies

The two AC/DC input power supplies have six terminals for user connections. These
connections are described below.
AC Power Source Connections

The Hot, Neutral, and Ground wires from the 120 VAC power source or L1, L2,
and Ground wires from the 240 VAC power source connect to the system
through the top three terminals of the terminal strip on the front of the power
supply.

Connect the + and – wires from the 125 VDC (nominal) power source to the
top two terminals on the terminal connector. These connections are not
polarity-sensitive on an AC/DC input power supply. (However, the DC
Input-only type supplies, which are discussed later in this chapter, are polarity
sensitive.)
Input Overvoltage Protection Devices

This information applies to all Series 90-30 power supplies except IC693PWR322
and IC693PWR328. The overvoltage protection devices for this power supply are
connected internally to pin 4 on the user terminal strip. This pin is normally
connected to frame ground (pin 3) with the supplied jumper strap which is
installed at the factory. If overvoltage protection is not required or is supplied
upstream, this feature can be disabled by removing the jumper strap from pins 3
and 4.
If you want to Hi-pot test this supply, overvoltage protection must be disabled
during the test by removing the terminal strip jumper strap. Re-enable
overvoltage protection after testing by reinstalling the strap.
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
4
a47106
3 Frame Ground
4
Screw Terminals
on Terminal Board
Isolated 24 VDC Supply Output Connections

The bottom two terminals of the power supply terminal strip provide connections
to the Isolated +24 volt DC output which can be used to provide power for
external circuits (within power limitations of the supply).
Caution
If the Isolated 24 VDC supply is overloaded or shorted, the

Programmable Logic Controller will stop operation.
4
DC Input Only Power Supplies
IC693PWR322 Standard Power Supply, 24/48 VDC Input

The IC693PWR322 is a 30 watt output power supply designed for 24 VDC or 48 VDC
nominal inputs. It will accept an input voltage range from 18 VDC to 56 VDC. Although it
is capable of maintaining all outputs within specifications with input voltages as low as 18
VDC, it will not start with initial input voltages of less than 21 VDC. This power supply
provides the following outputs:
H + 5 VDC output.
Catalog Load

a44854
PWR
OK
STATUS
Series 90-30 RUN
INDICATORS
BATT
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STANDARD
POWER SUPPLY
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
+ INPUT
CONNECTIONS
ÎÎÎÎ
24/48 VDC
FOR 50 WATT
DC POWER
ÎÎÎÎ
SOURCE
ÎÎÎÎ
INTERNAL POWER
SOURCE FOR
ÎÎÎÎ
+
MODULES REQUIRING 24 VDC
24VDC OUTPUT
ÎÎÎÎ
0.8A MAX.
ÎÎÎ RS–485
ÎÎÎ
B
A COMPATIBLE
SERIAL PORT
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
T
T
E BATTERY
Y
BACK–UP
BATTERY
Figure 4-4. Series 90-30 24/48 VDC Input Power Supply - IC693PWR322
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
4
Table 4-7. Specifications for IC693PWR322 Power Supply
Nominal Rated Voltage 24 or 48 VDC

Input Voltage Range
Start 21 to 56 VDC
Run 18 to 56 VDC
Input Power 50 watts maximum at full load
Protective Limits
Overcurrent; 5 VDC output: 4 A maximum
Standards Refer to data sheet, GFK-0867B, or later version for
product standards, and general specifications.
Calculating Input Power Requirements for IC693PWR322

The following graph is a typical 24/48 VDC power supply efficiency curve. A basic
procedure for determining efficiency of the 24/48 VDC power supply follows the figure.
a44963
50
45W
40
AVERAGE 30
INPUT
POWER
(WATTS) 20
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
10
5 10 15 20 25 30
TOTAL OUTPUT POWER (WATTS)
Figure 4-5. Typical Efficiency Curve for 24/48 VDC Power Supply
Note
Start-up surge at full load is 4 amps for 250 milliseconds (maximum).
4
Input Power/Current Calculation

H Determine total output load from typical specifications listed for
individual modules in Chapters 2 and 3.
H Use the graph to determine average input power.
H Divide the input power by the operating source voltage to determine the
input current requirements.
H Use the lowest input voltage to determine the maximum input current.
H Allow for start-up surge current requirements.
H Allow margins (10% to 20%) for variations.
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
4
IC693PWR328 Standard Power Supply, 48 VDC Input

The IC693PWR328 is a 30 watt output power supply designed for 48 VDC nominal input. It
will accept an input voltage range from 38 VDC to 56 VDC. This power supply provides
the following outputs:
H + 5 VDC output.
Catalog Load

a44854A
PWR
OK
STATUS
Series 90-30 RUN
INDICATORS
BATT
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STANDARD
ÎÎÎÎ
POWER SUPPLY
PROGRAMABLE CONTROLLER
CONNECTIONS
FOR
+ INPUT
48 VDC
50 WATT
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
DC POWER
SOURCE
INTERNAL POWER
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
SOURCE FOR +
MODULES REQUIRING
ÎÎÎÎ
24 VDC
24VDC OUTPUT
0.8A MAX.
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
RS–485
B
COMPATIBLE
ÎÎ ÎÎ
A
T SERIAL PORT
T
ÎÎ ÎÎ
E BATTERY
Y
BACK–UP
BATTERY
Figure 4-6. Series 90-30 48 VDC Input Power Supply - IC693PWR328
4
Nominal Rated Voltage 48 VDC

Input Voltage Range 38 to 56 VDC
Protective Limits

The following graph is a typical 48 VDC power supply efficiency curve. A basic
procedure for determining efficiency of the 48 VDC power supply follows the figure.
a44963
50
45W
40
AVERAGE 30
INPUT
ÎÎ
POWER
(WATTS) 20
ÎÎ
10
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
5 10 15 20 25 30
TOTAL OUTPUT POWER (WATTS)
Figure 4-7. Typical Efficiency Curve for IC693PWR328 Power Supply
Note
Start-up surge at full load is 4 amps for 250 milliseconds (maximum).
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
4
Input Power/Current Calculation for IC693PWR328 Power Supply

H Determine total output load from typical specifications listed for
individual modules in Chapter 12.
H Use the graph to determine average input power.
H Divide the input power by the operating source voltage to determine the
input current requirements.
H Use the lowest input voltage to determine the maximum input current.
H Allow for start-up surge current requirements.
H Allow margins (10% to 20%) for variations.
4
IC693PWR331 High Capacity Power Supply, 24 VDC Input

The Series 90-30 DC input High Capacity power supply (IC693PWR331) is a 30 watt
wide range supply designed for 24 VDC nominal inputs. For applications requiring greater
+5V current capacity than is available with the standard supply, this supply allows all 30 watts to
be consumed from the +5 V output. It will accept an input voltage range from 12 VDC to 30
VDC. Although it is capable of maintaining all outputs within specifications with input
voltages as low as 12 VDC, it will not start with initial input voltages of less than 18 VDC.
This power supply provides the following outputs:
H + 5 VDC output.
Catalog Load
IC693PWR331 30 Watts 12 to 30 VDC +5 VDC +24 VDC Isolated +24 VDC Relay
a45625A
PWR
OK
STATUS
Series 90-30 RUN
INDICATORS
BATT
HIGH CAPACITY
POWER SUPPLY
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
INPUT
24 VDC
ÎÎÎÎ
50 WATT
CONNECTIONS FOR
ÎÎÎÎ
DC POWER SOURCE
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
+
INTERNAL POWER SOURCE FOR 24 VDC
ÎÎÎÎ
OUTPUT
MODULES REQUIRING 24VDC 0.8A MAX.
ÎÎÎ RS–485
ÎÎÎ
B
A COMPATIBLE
SERIAL PORT
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
T
T
E BATTERY
Y
BACK–UP
BATTERY
Figure 4-8. Series 90-30 24 VDC Input High Capacity Power Supply - IC693PWR331
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
4
Nominal Rated Voltage 24 VDC

Input Voltage Range
Start 18 to 30 VDC
Run 12 to 30 VDC
Inrush Current [
Output Power 5 VDC: 30 watts maximum ]
24 VDC Relay: 19.2 to 28.8 VDC
24 VDC Isolated: 19.2 VDC to 28.8 VDC
Protective Limits
[ Dependent on installation and power supply impedance characteristics.
] Derate per Figure 2-22 at ambient temperatures above 50 C (122 F).
Current Derating for Higher Temperatures
6.1
6.0
5.8
5.6
5.4
5.2
5 VDC
5.0
CURRENT
4.8
4.6
4.4
4.2
4.0
0 10 20 30 40 50 55 60
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE ( C)
Figure 4-9. 5 VDC Current Output Derating for Temperatures above 50C (122F)
4

Use the following procedure to determine input power requirements for the 24 VDC
High Capacity Power Supply:
H Determine total output power load from typical specifications listed for
individual modules at the end of this chapter.
H Multiply the output power by 1.5 to determine the input power value.
H Divide the input power value by the operating source voltage to determine the
input current requirements
H Use the lowest input voltage to determine the maximum input current
H Allow for start-up surge current requirements
H Allow margins (10% to 20%) for variations
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
4
Field Wiring Connections to the DC Input-Only Power Supplies

The + and – wires from the DC power source connect to the top two terminals on
the terminal strip. The + wire should be connected to the top terminal screw, and
the – wire to the second screw (counting from the top down). The ground
connection connects to the third screw. This connection scheme is clearly marked
on the front of these power supplies.
Isolated 24 VDC Supply Output Connections

The bottom two terminals of the power supply terminal strip provide connections
to the Isolated +24 volt DC output which can be used to provide power for
external circuits (within power limitations of the supply).
Caution
If the Isolated 24 VDC supply is overloaded or shorted, the

Programmable Logic Controller will stop operation.
4
Common Series 90-30 Power Supply Features
Status Indicator Lights on all Power Supplies

Four LEDs are located on the upper right front of the power supply faceplate. The
purpose of these LEDs is as follows:
PWR
The top green LED, labeled PWR, provides an indication of the operating state
of the power supply. The LED is ON when the power supply has a correct
source of power and is operating properly, and OFF when a power supply fault
occurs or power is not applied.
OK
The second green LED, labeled OK, is steady ON if the PLC is operating
properly, and OFF if a problem is detected by the PLC.
RUN
The third green LED, labeled RUN, is steady ON when the PLC is in the RUN
mode.
BATT
The bottom red LED, labeled BATT, will be ON if the memory backup battery
voltage is too low to maintain the memory under a loss of power condition;
otherwise it remains OFF. If this LED is ON, the Lithium battery must be
replaced before removing power from the rack, or PLC memory may be lost.
Input Overvoltage Protection Devices

This information applies to all Series 90-30 power supplies except IC693PWR322
and IC693PWR328. The overvoltage protection devices for this power supply are
connected internally to pin 4 on the user terminal strip. This pin is normally
connected to frame ground (pin 3) with the supplied jumper strap which is
installed at the factory. If overvoltage protection is not required or is supplied
upstream, this feature can be disabled by removing the jumper strap from pins 3
and 4.
If you want to Hi-pot test this supply, overvoltage protection must be disabled
during the test by removing the terminal strip jumper strap. Re-enable
overvoltage protection after testing by reinstalling the strap.
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
4
a47106
3 Frame Ground
4
Screw Terminals
on Terminal Board
Output Voltage Connections to Backplane (All Supplies)

The following figure illustrates how these three output voltages are connected
internally to the backplane on the baseplate. The voltage and power required by
modules installed on the baseplate is supplied through the baseplate connectors.
a43845
POWER SUPPLY BACKPLANE USE/COMMENTS
USED INTERNALLY ON ANALOG INPUT,
I 24V
ANALOG OUTPUT, AND DC INPUT MODULES.
ALSO AVAILABLE ON EXTERNAL

TERMINALS ON DC INPUT MODULES AND
IGND ON FRONT OF POWER SUPPLY FOR
USER APPLICATIONS.
R24V
USED INTERNALLY ON
RELAY OUTPUTS
RGND
SINGLE
POINT
CONNECTION
P5V
DC
DC USED INTERNALLY ON CPU,
INPUTS, OUTPUTS, ETC.
LGND
2 POINT
CONNECTION
FGND EXTERNAL CONNECTION
TO EARTH GROUND.
Figure 4-11. Interconnection of Power Supplies
4
Overcurrent Protection (all Supplies)

The 5V logic output is electronically limited to 3.5 amps (7 amps for high capacity
supplies). An overload (including short circuits) is sensed internally and causes the
supply to shut down. The supply will continually try to restart until the overload is
removed. An internal fuse in the input line is provided as a backup. The supply will
usually shut down before the fuse blows. The fuse also protects against internal supply
faults.
Timing Diagram
The timing diagram below shows the relationship of the DC input to the DC outputs
and to the Power Supply OK signal (PSOK) generated by the power supply. When
power is first applied, the PSOK signal goes false. This line remains false for a minimum
of 20 msec after the +5V bus is within specifications, then it becomes true.
If input power is interrupted, the +5V bus will remain within specifications and PSOK
will remain true a minimum of 10 milliseconds. PSOK then goes false. The +5V bus will
remain within specifications for an additional 4 milliseconds minimum to allow an
orderly shutdown of the system.
a44964
INPUT INPUT
POWER MOMENTARY POWER
ON POWER OFF
LOSS
VOLTAGE VOLTAGE
OVERSHOOT OVERSHOOT
5% (MAX) 5% (MAX)
+5V OUTPUT
(5.1V TYP.)
97% (MIN) HOLD HOLD
UP UP
TIME TIME
20MS
z 20MS 10MS
(MIN) (MIN) (MIN)
4MS 4MS
(MIN) (MIN)
PSOK
z HOLD-UP TIME: 20 ms, minimum for IC693PWR321/330

14 ms, minimum for IC693PWR322
10 ms, minimum for IC693PWR331/332
Figure 4-12. Timing Diagram for all Series 90-30 Power Supplies
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
4
CPU Serial Port Connector on Power Supply (All Supplies)

A 15-pin D-type female connector, accessed by opening the hinged door on the right
front of the power supply, provides the connection to a CPU serial port which is used to
connect to:
D A programmer (usually a personal computer) running GE Fanuc PLC
programming software.
D The GE Fanuc Hand-Held Programmer.
D Other serial devices.
a43832
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
SERIAL PORT
Figure 4-13. Serial Port Connector
H The serial port connector is only functional in a power supply that is installed in a
baseplate that also contains the CPU. The serial port is not functional on a power supply
that is installed in an expansion or remote baseplate.
H Any device connected to the serial port that uses +5 VDC power from the Series
90-30 power supply must be included in the calculation for maximum power
consumption (see the heading “Power Supply Loading Calculations” in Chapter 12).
CPU Serial Port Information

The serial port connector on the power supply accesses the CPU serial port, which is a
feature of all Series 90-30 CPUs. See Chapter 5, “CPUs” for infomation on this serial port.
Backup Battery for RAM Memory (All Supplies)

The long-life Lithium battery (IC693ACC301) used to maintain the contents of the
CMOS RAM memory in the CPU is accessed by removing the cover plate located at the
bottom of the power supply faceplate. This battery is mounted on a plastic clip attached
to the inside of this cover.
The battery is wired to a small Berg female connector that connects to either of the two
Berg male connectors mounted on the Power Supply printed circuit board. This battery
can be replaced with power applied to the PLC.
4
a43833
BATTERY
ÎÎÎ
CONNECTORS
ÎÎÎ ÎÎB
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
A
T
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
T
E
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
R
Y
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
LITHIUM
BACK-UP
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
BATTERY
Figure 4-14. Backup Battery for RAM Memory
Caution
If a Low Battery Warning (BATT LED turns ON) occurs, replace the
battery located in the power supplybefore removing power from the rack.
Otherwise, there is a possibility that data will be corrupted or the
application program will be cleared from memory.
Additional Battery Information

For additional information on the memory backup battery, see the chapter, “Memory
Backup and Backup Battery.”
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
Chapter CPUs
5
CPU Types for Series 90-30 PLCs

There are numerous CPU models available for the Series 90-30 PLC which differ in speed,
I/O capacity, size of user memory, and advanced features. This variety of models gives a
system designer considerable flexibility in choosing the one best suited to the system
being designed. There are two basic types of CPUs, Embedded and Modular. The
embedded types fulfill the need for a good low cost PLC, but lack the power,
expandability, and versatility of the modular systems. In the embedded types, the CPU
is built into the baseplate. In the modular types, the CPU is contained inside a plug-in
module.
Embedded CPUs
The embedded CPUs are part of an embedded CPU baseplate. In these products, the
CPU and memory integrated circuit chips are soldered to the backplane board of the
baseplate. This chapter discusses the CPU features of these products. Details about the
baseplate features are located in Chapter 2. There are three different embedded CPUs:
Model 311 (IC693CPU311), Model 313 (IC693CPU313), and Model 323 (IC693CPU323). The
embedded CPUs have the following basic features:
D The CPU type cannot be changed. It is soldered to the backplane board in

the baseplate.
D They do not support the use of Expansion or Remote racks, so an embedded
CPU baseplate does not have an expansion connector like the modular
baseplates do. This means that if you have an application that requires more
than 10 modules, you will have to use a modular CPU system.
D The models 311 and 313 are 5-slot baseplates, and the model 323 is a 10-slot
baseplate. Since they do not require a plug-in CPU module, all numbered
slots, including Slot 1, can be used for I/O or Option modules.
D The memory back-up battery is located in the Power Supply module; so if
the Power Supply is unplugged from the baseplate, the battery will be
disconnected from the memory circuits, which are located on the backplane
circuit board. However, the backplane circuit board contains a high value
capacitor, called a ”super capacitor,” that can store enough charge to
maintain the memory circuits for a short period of time if the Power Supply
is removed or its battery is disconnected. See the section “Super Capacitor
Memory Backup” in Chapter 6.
D These CPUs do not have a time-of-day (TOD) clock.
GFK-0356P 5-1
5
a44563A
Replaceable System (firmware) PROM Socket for Optional Program PROM
ÎÎ
SYSTEM PROGRAM
PROM PROM
ÎÎ
PROGRAMMABLE 1
CONTROLLER
ÎÎ
Says ”With CPU” WITH CPU
CAUTION
USER PROGRAM
AND REGISTER
ÎÎ NON-CPU SLOTS
VALUES MAY BE
Memory Backup LOST IF POWER
C
SUPPLY IS P
Warning Label REMOVED FOR U
LONGER THAN
1 HOUR
I/O-1 I/O-2 I/O-3 I/O-4 I/O-5

POWER
SUPPLY
Figure 5-1. Models 311 and 313 (5-Slot) Embedded CPU Baseplates
Modular CPUs
The modular CPUs consist of a CPU, memory, and associated integrated circuit chips
soldered to circuit board which is mounted in a plug-in module. The modular CPUs
include the model CPU331 and higher. The modular CPUs have the following basic
features:
D A CPU module must be installed in Slot 1 of a modular CPU baseplate. Slot
1 is a unique size and type that only fits a CPU module (or special Option
modules). Slot 1 is labeled CPU/1. Details on modular CPU baseplates are
located in Chapter 2.
D Modular CPUs support expansion and remote baseplates, so A 25-pin
D-type female expansion connector is located at the right end of the CPU
baseplate for connection to an expansion or remote baseplate.
D Since the CPU is modular, it can readily be replaced or changed to a different
type if desired.
D Only one CPU is allowed per system, and it must be mounted in a CPU
baseplate. If more than one baseplate is used in a system, the additional
ones must be either expansion or remote types that do not contain a CPU.
D A modular CPU baseplate is always assigned, by default, Rack Number 0.
D All have a time-of-day (TOD) clock.
5-2
FANUC CNC Controls
5
a44564
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER
BASE 5–SLOT
E
X
P
A
I/O Bus
USER PROGRAM S
VALUES MAY BE
O
Connector
SUPPLY IS N
C
REMOVED FOR P
LONGER THAN U
1 HOUR
CPU/1 I/O-2 I/O-3 I/O-4 I/O-5

POWER
SUPPLY
CPU Slot (Slot 1)
General CPU Features
Microprocessor
The microprocessor type varies by the CPU model:
D 80188 microprocessor for CPU models 311/313/323/331
D 80C188XL microprocessor for CPU models 340/341
D 80386EX microprocessor for CPU models 350–364.
The microprocessor provides all fundamental sweep and operation control, and
execution of all non-boolean (as used here, the term boolean refers to discrete logic such
as contacts and coils) functions. Boolean functions in the modular CPUs are handled by
a dedicated VLSI (Very Large Scale Integration) Instruction Sequencer Coprocessor
(ISCP). All Series 90-30 CPUs use RAM working memory.
CPU Serial Port (Connector on Power Supply)

A 15-pin D-type female connector, accessed by opening the hinged door on the right
front of the power supply, provides the connection to a CPU serial port which is used to
connect to:
H A programmer (usually a personal computer) running GE Fanuc PLC programming
software. The IC690ACC901 Miniconverter/cable kit is a convenient way to access
this port. See Appendix F for details.
H The IC693PRG300 GE Fanuc Hand-Held Programmer. See Chapter 11 for details.
H Other serial devices.
GFK-0356P Chapter 5 CPUs 5-3

5
a43832
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
SERIAL PORT
Figure 5-3. CPU Serial Port Connector on Power Supply
H This serial port is RS-485 compatible, and uses the GE Fanuc SNP (Series Ninety
Protocol) protocol (slave only). Break-Free SNP became the default protocol on all
serial ports on the Series 90-30 CPUs, starting with Firmware Release 9.00 for CPUs
350 - 364, and Firmware Release 8.20 for CPUs 311 - 341. BreakFree SNP is discussed
in a later section of this chapter.
H The serial port connector is only functional in a power supply that is installed in a
baseplate that also contains the CPU. It is not functional on a power supply that is
installed in an expansion or remote baseplate.
H Any device connected to the serial port that uses +5 VDC power from the Series
90-30 power supply must be included in the calculation for maximum power
consumption (see the heading “Power Supply Loading Calculations” in Chapter 12).
H All Series 90-30 CPUs have this serial port arrangement. The 351, 352, and 363 CPUs
have additional serial ports, described in a later section of this chapter.
Caution
Care must be taken that common mode voltage specifications are met
for connections to this serial port. Common mode conditions that
exceed those specified will result in errors in transmission and/or
damage to Series 90 PLC components. Common mode specifications
are discussed in Appendix C. When the common mode voltage
specification is exceeded, a port isolator such as the GE Fanuc
IC690ACC903 must be used. See Appendix G for details on this port
isolator.
Memor y Volatility
The term volatility refers to the issue of whether or not a certain memory type retains or
loses its contents (data) when power is removed from it.
D Volatile memory – memory that loses its contents when power is removed. RAM
memory is inherently volatile. Therefore, when the PLC is turned off, a backup
battery is necessary if data loss in RAM memory is to be prevented.
5-4
FANUC CNC Controls
5
D Non-volatile memory – memory that retains its contents when power is removed.
The various types of PROM (Programmable Read-Only Memory) memory are
non-volatile.
RAM Memory
Every Series 90-30 CPU uses RAM memory for its ”working memory.” The RAM chips
used are of the CMOS type. CMOS RAM is an acronym for Complimentary Metal-Oxide
Semiconductor, Random Access Memory. CMOS RAM is a relatively fast, low power
memory that can be easily examined (read) and changed (written to).
In the embedded CPU models, RAM memory is mounted on the backplane board. In
the modular CPU models, RAM memory is mounted inside the CPU module. A backup
battery is usually used to preserve the contents of RAM memory when power is off.
RAM Memory Backup/Backup Battery Information

Please see Chapter 6 for the following information:
D RAM memory backup recommendations.
D Backup battery information such as estimated life, replacing, determining
battery age using date codes, etc.
D Running without a backup battery.
D Low battery warning methods.
Programmable Read-Only Memory (PROM) Types

There are three types of PROM devices used in Series 90-30 CPUs:
EPROM: An acronym for Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory. It is a plug-in
integrated circuit memory device that can be erased with an ultraviolet light. EPROMs
can be read when installed in the PLC, however in order to write new data to them, they
must be removed from the PLC and written to using an external PROM burning device.
EEPROM: An acronym for Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory. It
is a plug-in integrated circuit memory device that can be erased and written to while
installed in the PLC.
Flash Memory: A variation of the EEPROM type memory. It also is an integrated
circuit device that can be erased and written to while installed in the PLC. One
advantage of CPUs having flash memory storage of firmware, is that firmware can be
updated by writing from a Personal Computer through a PLC serial port to flash
memory. No modules have to be removed for flash firmware upgrade.
Uses of PROM devices in the 90-30 CPUs

PROM-type devices are used in two ways in the 90-30 CPUs:
D To store CPU firmware
D To store user data, which consists of program, configuration, and register data.
The following table shows the types of PROM devices each CPU uses.

5
CPU Firmware and PROM Configurations

CPU Firmware and PROM Table
Firmware EPROM EEPROM Flash
CPU (standard) (for user memory) (for user memory) (for user memory)
CPU311 EPROM Optional Optional N/A

CPU340 EPROM N/A N/A Optional
CPU341 EPROM *Optional * Optional *Optional
CPU350 Flash N/A N/A Standard
* Early versions of the CPU341 support optional EPROM and optional

EEPROM only. Starting with hardware version IC693CPU341-J and
Firmware version 4.61, only optional Flash is supported.
CPU Firmware
The CPU firmware contains the basic operating instructions for the PLC. Firmware is
developed by a GE Fanuc product engineering group. It is stored in either EPROM or
Flash memory, depending on the particular CPU.
CPU Firmware Upgrade (Update)

From time to time, new firmware is released. A new firmware version may contain
support for new features or improvements to existing features. Once a new version of
CPU firmware is released, all new CPU modules will be sold with that version. The
Technical Support section of the GE Fanuc Web site lists CPU revision histories, matching
version numbers to associated features. See Chapter 13 for information on the GE Fanuc
Web site. Users who could benefit from a new firmware release may choose to upgrade
their CPU by installing new firmware. Upgrades come in two formats, depending on
the type of CPU to be upgraded. The ”CPU Firmware and PROM Configuration” table
in this chapter shows which type of firmware storage device each CPU has. The two
types are:
D EPROM – For CPUs with firmware stored in EPROM, the upgrade is done by
replacing the CPU’s EPROM chips(s). The upgrade kit contains new EPROM
chip(s), update labels, and installation instructions. To upgrade the EPROM in an
embedded CPU system, the module in slot 1 must be unplugged to gain access to
5-6
FANUC CNC Controls
5
the PROM socket on the baseplate. In the case of a modular CPU, the CPU must be
unplugged and disassembled.
D Flash – For CPUs with firmware stored in Flash, the upgrade is done by copying a
new firmware file to the CPU’s Flash memory. An upgrade kit may be purchased
from GE Fanuc. The upgrade kit contains the necessary files, update labels, and
instructions. This method does not require disassembling the module. The file
downloading is done either through the port on the power supply, or through a port
on the front of the CPU module (if it has one). The applicable method will be
documented in your upgrade kit instructions. Downloadable firmware upgrade
files are also found in the Technical Support area of the GE Fanuc Web site. See
Chapter 13 for Web site information.
To order an upgrade kit, write down the full catalog number of your module from the
module identification label on the side of the module, determine your current firmware
revision level, then call your PLC distributor. If you are not sure what firmware version
you currently have, see the heading on the next page “Determining CPU Revision
Levels (Versions).”
Flash Firmware Upgrade Procedure

The operating system firmware is updated by connecting a PC compatible computer to
the applicable PLC serial port and running the PC Loader software included with the
firmware floppy disk.
The computer used for this task should be an IBM AT compatible or better PC with a
minimum 640K of RAM, one 3.5” or high density 5.25” floppy drive, MS-DOS version 3.3
or later, a hard drive, and an RS-232 serial port. In addition, a miniconverter/serial cable
is required. The following miniconverter/serial cable kit is available:
H IC690ACC901 Miniconverter Kit (RS-232/RS-485) with cable and 9-pin to
25-pin adapter. (This product is documented in Appendix F.)
Determining CPU Revision Levels (Versions)

If you plan to make changes to your system, you will need to know if your CPU can
support those changes. The features and capabilities of your CPU are determined by its
revision levels (hardware and firmware). This section discusses methods that you can
use to determine your CPU’s revision levels and associated features and capabilities.
Direct Methods
D Obtain the information from the Important Product Information (IPI) sheet that
came with your CPU. However, if your CPU firmware has been upgraded, the IPI
will not indicate the current revision level.
D The surest way to determine a CPU’s firmware revision level is to read it from the
CPU by using your programmer. Your programmer must be connected to the PLC
and be in Online or Monitor mode, and the PLC must be powered up. For example,
on the Logicmaster ”PLC STATUS and CONTROL” screen is an item called
”SOFTWARE REVISION.” The data displayed in that field (such as 6.04) is the
firmware revision level. See the Logicmaster 90-30 Programming Software User’s
Manual, GFK-0466 (or the user’s manual for the programming software you use), for
additional details.

5
Indirect Method
Check the catalog number printed on the module identification label on the side of
the module. On all Series 90-30 modules, this catalog number indicates the module’s
revision level(s). For some CPUs, the catalog number contains a single letter at the
end to indicate the CPU’s overall revision level. For example,
IC693CPU341-J
This tells us that the module has a revision level J. Later CPU modules began to be
produced with two revision letters, such as:
IC693CPU351-EK
The first letter stands for the hardware revision level and the second for the
firmware revision level.
These letters can be cross-referenced to the firmware version. A revison history list
for Series 90-30 products, including CPUs, can be found in the GE Fanuc web site
technical support area (www.gefanuc.com/support/) that cross-references revision
letters, firmware versions, and related features. Also, if you have access to the
progression of IPIs that were issued for the particular CPU (these are available on
the GE Fanuc PLC InfoLink CD-ROM) you can find the desired cross-reference. Of
course, you can also contact your distributor or GE Fanuc for help.
If your firmware has been upgraded in the past, a small label that comes in the
upgrade kit should be attached to the side of the module next to the module
identification label to indicate the current firmware revision level. However, the
label could have been forgotten; so to be sure, you may want to read the
information from the CPU with a programmer as described in the “Direct Method”
above. On models with EPROM firmware, the firmware revision level will also be
printed on the EPROM.
EPROM and EEPROM User Program Storage Options

The Model 311, 313, 323, 331, and an earlier version of the Model 341 CPUs have a User
PROM option for storing user application programs, register data, and configuration
data in non-volatile memory. Application programs are usually developed in a CPU’s
battery-backed RAM memory and executed from this RAM memory. But, if additional
program integrity, or operation of the PLC without a battery is desired, an optional
EEPROM or EPROM can be installed in a spare socket (labeled PROGRAM PROM) on the
embedded CPU baseplates or in a socket inside the Model 331 CPU module (and inside the
early versions of Model 341 CPU prior to hardware version IC693CPU341-J and firmware
release 4.61). The Model 331 CPU module (and the early versions of Model 341) has a
jumper labeled JP1 located next to the EEPROM/EPROM socket to allow you to select either
EEPROM or EPROM. These jumper positions are shown below.
Jumper Selects
3-2 EEPROM
2-1 EPROM
5-8
FANUC CNC Controls
5
Comparing EPROM and EEPROM Features

For one-time applications, an EEPROM is the more practical of the two. It can be created
in the PLC itself and doesn’t require any additional outside equipment. An EPROM is
not as convenient to create. It must be created outside the PLC using an EPROM burner.
However, an EPROM is less expensive than an EEPROM. So, if you need to reproduce
multiple copies of a program to use on a large number of identical controls, it may be
cost effective to use EPROMs, especially if you already have an EPROM burner.
Procedure for Creating an EPROM

These are the steps for creating an EPROM or multiple EPROMs:
D Install an EEPROM in the PROM socket of the PLC you will use to develop
the application program.
D Develop and debug the program in RAM memory, then write it to the
EEPROM.
D Remove the EEPROM from the PLC and install it in the EPROM burner as a
master to make one or more EPROMs.
D Install the blank EPROM in the EPROM burner and copy the program on
the EEPROM to the blank EPROM.
D Install the EPROM in the PLC’s PROM socket, then copy its contents into
RAM memory. The EPROM then serves as an on-board backup to RAM
memory.
Note: Your CPU can be configured to load the the application program stored in the PROM
device automatically into RAM memory when the CPU is powered-up. See the heading
”Running Without a Memory Backup Battery” in Chapter 6 for details.
Caution
If PROM is configured (on the CPU configuration screen) as the

power-up program source and a PROM device is not present in the
PROM socket, or a blank PROM is in the socket, on a power-up cycle, a
blank program will be copied into the CPU’s RAM memory and the
program in RAM memory will be lost. Always keep a backup copy of
your current program files in case of an emergency.
EEPROM and EPROM memory devices are available from GE Fanuc. Catalog numbers
for these devices are listed in the following table.
Table 5-1. EPROM and EEPROM Catalog Numbers

GE Fanuc Third Party Source
Catalog Number Description Part Number Vendor Part Number
IC693ACC305 (Qty 4) 28C256 EEPROM, 350ns 44A725999-000 XICOR X28C256P

XICOR X28C256P25
XICOR X28HC256P-15
IC693ACC306 (Qty 4) 32Kx8 UV EPROM, 150ns 44A723379-000 NEC PD27C256AD-15

Atmel AT27C256-15DC1
Toshiba TC57256AD-15
Hitachi HN27C256AG-15
AMD AM27C256-150DC
Intel TD27C256A-1

5
Flash Memory
The Model 340, 341 (later versions), 350, 351, 352, 360, 363, and 364 CPUs have Flash
memory for user program storage. (Note that versions of the Model 341 CPU prior to
firmware release 4.61 had EEPROM memory.) TheRead/Write/Verify process for user
programs is the same for Flash memory as it is for EEPROM operations. Flash memory
operations (Read, Write, or Verify) are accessed from the Program Utilities Function
menu or from another Program Utilities screen in the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro
programming software.
Series 90-30 CPU Capacities

The following table describes the maximum capacities and operating features for the Series
90-30 PLC CPU models. For State Logic CPUs, see the section “System Specifications for
Series 90-30 State Logic CPUs” in Chapter 9.
Table 5-2. Series 90-30 CPU Capacities
CPU Speed, Input Output Register User Program Floating

Model (MHz) Processor Points Points Memory Memory Point
(Maximum) Math
CPU311 10 80188 160 1 160 1 1K (Bytes) 6K (Bytes) no
CPU331 10 80188 512 512 4K (Bytes) 16K (Bytes) no
CPU340 20 80C188XL 512 512 19.9K (Bytes) 32K (Bytes) no

CPU341 20 80C188XL 512 512 19.9K (Bytes) 80K (Bytes) no
CPU350 25 80386EX 2048 2048 19.9K (Bytes) 32K (Bytes) yes

CPU351 25 80386EX 2048 2048 Note 3 Note 4 yes
CPU352 25 80386EX 2048 2048 Note 3 Note 4 yes5
1 Maximum of 160 combined I + O points.
2 Maximum of 320 combined I + O points.
3 Configurable from 128 to 32,640 words, in 128 word increments.
4 Depends on assigned values for configurable word memory (%R, %AQ, %AI). Maximum is 240K Bytes.
5 CPU352 has hardware-based floating point math. Others CPUs have firmware-based floating point math.
5-10
FANUC CNC Controls
5
User Memory Addresses (References)

Data in the Series 90-30 PLC programs is referenced by its memory address. A reference
indicates the way that data is stored in the PLC. A reference specifies both a memory
type and a precise location (number) within that memory type. For example:
%I00001 specifies address 1 in input memory.
%R00256 specifies address 256 in register memory.
Difference Between a Memory Address and a Nickname

The % symbol is used to distinguish memory addresses from nicknames. For example,
%I17 (or %I000017) is a memory address. The similar term, I17 (it has no % sign), is
viewed by the PLC as a nickname and could be used with most memory addresses. For
example, if you had a motor in your plant called ”Infeed No. 17,” and it was commonly
referred to as ”I17” by the people in your plant, you might wish to use I17 as the
nickname for the output coil (%Q11) that turns on that motor. You are allowed to do so
because the PLC can distinguish between the nickname, I17 (your nickname for memory
address %Q11), and memory address %I17.
User Memory Reference Types

The user references referred to in the following tables are explained in the Series 90-30
PLC CPU Instruction Set Reference Manual, GFK-0467.
Table 5-3. Range and Size of User References for CPU Models 311–341
Model311/313/323 Model331/340/341
Reference (Memory) Type
Reference Range Size Reference Range Size
User program logic Not applicable 6K bytes Not applicable CPU331: 16K bytes
CPU340: 32K bytes
CPU341: 80K bytes
Discrete inputs %I0001 - %I0320 [ 512 bits %I0001 - %I0512 512 bits
Discrete outputs %Q0001 - %Q0320 [ 512 bits %Q0001 - %Q0512 512 bits
Discrete globals %G0001 - %G1280 1280 bits %G0001 - %G1280 1280 bits
Internal coils %M0001 - %M1024 1024 bits %M0001 - %M1024 1024 Bits
Temporary coils %T0001 - %T0256 256 bits %T0001 - %T0256 256 bits
System status references %S0001 - %S0032 32 bits %S0001 - %S0032 32 bits
%SA001 - %SA032 32 bits %SA0001 - %SA0032 32 bits
%SB001 - %SB032 32 bits %SB0001 - %SB0032 32 bits
%SC001 - %SC032 32 bits %SC0001 - %SC0032 32 bits
System register references %R0001 - %R0512 (311) 512 words %R0001 - %R2048 2K words (331)
%R0001 - %R1024 (313) 1024 words %R0001 - %R9999 9999words(340/341)
Analog inputs %AI001 - %AI064 64 words %AI0001 - %AI0128 128 words (331)
%AI0001 - %AI1024 1024words(340/341)
Analog outputs %AQ001 - %AQ032 32 words %AQ001 - %AQ064 64 words (331)
%AQ001 - %AQ256 256words(340/341)
System registers ] %SR001 - %SR016 16 words %SR001 - %SR016 16 words
[ 160 physical I/O maximum with 16 point modules installed; 320 maximum with 32 point modules installed
] May be viewed only with a Hand-Held Programmer (see the Hand-Held Programmer User’s Manual, GFK-0402) ; may not be
referenced in a user’s logic program.

5
Table 5-4. Range and Size of User References for CPU Models 350 through 364
Model 350/351/352/360/363/364 CPU

Re ere e Typee
Reference
Reference Range Size
MaximumUser memory* Notapplicable 240K Bytes, configurable
(CPU350: 32K Bytes, fixed)
Discrete inputs %I0001 - %I2048 2048 bits
Discrete outputs %Q0001 - %Q2048 2048 bits
Discrete globals %G0001 - %G1280 1280 bits
Internal coils %M0001 - %M4096 4096 bits
Temporary coils %T0001 - %T0256 256 bits
System status references %S0001 - %S0032 32 bits
%SA001 - %SA032 32 bits
%SB001 - %SB032 32 bits
%SC001 - %SC032 32 bits
System register references %R0001 - %R32640* 128 - 32,640 words , configurable.
(CPU350: 9999 words, fixed,)
Analoginputs %AI001- %AI32640* 128 - 32,640 words , configurable.
(CPU350: 2048 words, fixed)
Analogoutputs %AQ001-%AQ32640* 128 - 32,640 words,configurable.
(CPU350: 512 words, fixed)
System registers [ %SR001 - %SR028 28 words
[ May be viewed only with a Hand-Held Programmer (see the Hand-Held Programmer User’s Manual,
GFK-0402) ; may not be referenced in a user’s logic program.
* Depends on user-defined value(s) of configurable memory.
Application Program Compatibility

Programs that have been developed on Series 90-30 CPUs 311–341 will automatically
be translated by the programming software when used on CPUs 350–364. Programs
created or translated for CPUs 350–364 will automatically be translated when used with
CPUs 311–341; however, be aware that some CPUs support features, such as
floating-point math or larger memory sizes, that are not supported by other CPUs. In
those cases, attempting to load a program to a CPU not supporting one or more of the
programmed or configured features will result in an error. However, in some cases it
may be possible to edit the program and configuration to make them compatible with
the targeted CPU.
CPU Time-of-Day (TOD) Clock Accuracy

The accuracy of the Series 90-30 time-of-day clock is Ç 9 seconds per day across the rated
operating temperature range of 0–60°C. The accuracy is relatively stable at any fixed
temperature. For applications that require greater accuracy, the following suggestions
are furnished:
D For an installation where the temperature of the CPU is stable, measure the amount
of time drift for a 24 hour period, then program a “correction” factor into the ladder
program to add or subtract seconds periodically to keep the CPU time accurate. The
instruction to use in this case is Service Request #7, “Change/ReadTime-of-Day
Clock.” At the appropriate time, a Service Request would read the TOD clock, an
5-12
FANUC CNC Controls
5
ADD instruction would add the correction value to it, and another Service Request
would write the new value to the TOD clock. A possible drawback to this method is
that if you replace your CPU you will have to determine a new correction factor.
Also, this method is affected by temperature changes, so its success is based on
holding the CPU’s ambient temperature stable.
D If more accuracy is needed, the PLC could be interfaced to a third party solution
such as a radio link or Global Positioning System (GPS) satellite system.
Break-Free SNP Protocol

Break-Free SNP became the default protocol on all serial ports on the Series 90-30 CPUs,
starting with Firmware Release 9.00 for CPUs 350 - 364, and Firmware Release 8.20 for
CPUs 311 - 341. The Break-Free feature makes the protocol compatible with a wider
variety of modems. This feature is compatible with existing SNP master units such as
computers running PLC programming software, or PCM modules. In a few
applicaitons, primarily where a combination of multi-drop SNP communications and
very short PLC sweep times are used, users may desire, for performance reasons, to
disable Break-Free SNP. Break-Free SNP can be disabled and re-enabled via
Communications Request instructions. The Series 90 PLC Serial Communications User’s
Manual, GFK-0582D (when available) will document these Communications Request
instructions. These instructions are currently detailed in Important Product Information
(IPI) publication number GFK-0810W.
350 - 364 CPUs

The 350-364 group of CPUs was developed to meet the needs of customers requiring
increased memory size, faster processing speed, and additional features not available on
the 311-341 CPUs.
Compatibility With Hand-Held Programmer (HHP) and Memory Card

D The user program in CPUs 350–364 cannot be viewed or edited with the Series
90-30 Hand-Held Programmer (IC693PRG300). You must use one of the GE Fanuc
programming software packages to create or edit CPU 350–364 user programs.
D The Series 90 Memory Card (used on the Hand-Held Programmer) is not supported
by CPUs 350–364.
D The only operations supported by the HHP’s PROGRAM mode are writing to and
reading from the CPU’s flash memory.
D Although the HHP’s CONFIG mode can be used to perform basic configuration of
these CPUs, it cannot handle specialized parameters such as those pertaining to the
embedded Ethernet Interface in the CPU364.
D The HHP can be used to change the Time-of-Day Clock unless the Mem Protect
configuration parameter is set to Enabled and the keylock switch is in the ON
(Protect) position.
D The HHP can be used to edit data values in %R registers.
D The HHP can be used to invoke or clear overrides on these CPUs.

5
350 - 364 CPU Advanced Features

Advanced features of 350 - 364 CPUs
Feature CPU350 CPU351 CPU352 CPU360 CPU363 CPU364
Memor y 32K 240K 1 240K 1 240K 1 240K 1 240K 1
fixed Configurable Configurable Configurable Configurable Configurable
Serial Por ts 1 3 3 1 3 1
Floating- Yes1 Yes1 Yes Yes1 Yes1 Yes1
Point Math (Firmware) (Firmware) (Hardware) (Firmware) (Firmware) (Firmware)
Flash Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Memor y
Key Switch Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Sequential Yes1 Yes1 Yes1 Yes1 Yes1 Yes1
Event
Recorder
Embedded No No No No No Yes1
Ethernet
Interface
1 Denotes features supported in CPU firmware release 9.0 and later.
Details of 350 - 364 CPU Advanced Features
Upgrading Older CPUs

Older versions of the CPU firmware do not support some of the features in the table
above (see table footnote). These features may be added to older 350 - 360 CPUs by
upgrading them to CPU firmware version 9.0 or later. (The 363 and 364 CPUs were
equipped with firmware version 9.0 when released as new products.) No hardware
changes are required for this upgrade. For more information on the subject of
upgrading, see the heading “CPU Firmware Upgrades” earlier in this chapter.
Memor y/Configurable Memory

Starting with CPU firmware version 9.0, the 351 - 364 CPUs have 240K of
user-configurable memory. The CPU350 has 32K of fixed memory. The configurable
memory feature lets you specify the amount of %R, %AI, and %AQ word memory.
Discrete memory (%I, %Q, %M, etc.) sizes are not configurable. Word memory can be
configured from 128 to 32,640 words in 128 word increments, which gives 255 possible
sizes. The amount of memory available for a user program depends on how much is
configured for word memory.
Note
Configurable Memory has limited support in Logicmaster Version 9.02
and later (limited to 16K %R words, 8K %AI words, and 8K %AQ
words), and full support in Control (Version 2.2 and later) and VersaPro
(all versions).
5-14
FANUC CNC Controls
5
Additional Serial Ports (CPU351, CPU352, CPU363)

Although all Series 90-30 CPUs have a serial port that is accessed through the connector
on the power supply, the CPU351, CPU352, and CPU363 each have two additional serial
ports. The connectors for these additional serial ports are mounted on the front of each
CPU. These two built-in serial ports eliminate the need for the CPU to access serial ports
across the PLC backplane, resulting in better system performance. These two ports
support the SNP/SNP-X master and slave protocols (see previous section “Break-Free
SNP Protocol”), RTU slave protocol (in Firmware Version 8.0 and later), and the Serial
I/O feature (in Firmware Version 8.0 and later) that lets you create a custom serial
output. Instructions on how to use these ports can be found in the Series 90 PLC Serial
Communications User’s Manual, GFK-0582C or later.
Floating-Point Math
All Series 90-30 CPUs can work with integer numbers. (The set of integer numbers
consists of all positive and negative whole numbers, including zero.) The floating-point
math feature enables a CPU to work with decimal numbers in addition to integer
numbers. It also provides trigonometric, logarithmic, exponential, and radian
conversion functions. Floating-point math is also referred to as “real number” math. The
CPU352 has always had hardware-based floating-point math capabilities due to its
built-in math co-processor chip. Starting with CPU firmware release 9.0, all of the other
CPUs in the 350 - 364 CPU group were provided with firmware-based floating-point
math capability. Although there is a speed difference between the hardware-based
floating-point math of the CPU352 and the firmware-based type, this will not be
significant to many users. For applications where faster performance is important, the
CPU352 is the best choice. The floating-point math instructions are explained in the
Series 90-30 PLC CPU Instruction Set Reference Manual, GFK-0467K (the letter K is the
revision or version indicator) or later.
Flash Memory
All of the 350 - 364 CPUs have built-in Flash memory, which serves two purposes:
D It provides non-volatile storage of the CPU firmware.
D It gives you the option of storing program, configuration, and register data in
non-volatile Flash memory. Two ways of using this memory are: (1) to store an
on-board backup copy of user memory (although we still recommend that you keep
a separate backup copy of your complete program folder), and (2) for running in a
battery-less scheme. For details, please see Chapter 6.
Keyswitch
All 350 - 364 CPUs have a keyswitch; however, some versions of the CPU firmware do
not support all of the keyswitch features (see the section “Determining CPU Revision
Levels” earlier in this chapter). These differences are described in this section. Note that
the keyswitches on some of these CPUs are labeled ON/RUN and OFF/STOP and on
others are just labeled ON and OFF. Regardless of the labeling, all of these keyswitches
work as described below:
D Flash Memory Protection: This standard, hard-wired feature can be used to prevent
Flash memory from being changed by unauthorized people (people without a key).
When the key switch is in the ON position, Flash memory cannot be changed

5
(written to). This keyswitch feature will always be in effect, regardless of how the
next two configurable features are set.
D Run/Stop (configurable): This feature was introduced in CPU firmware release 7.0.
It is, by default, disabled. It is not functional unless the R/S Switch: parameter on the
CPU configuration screen is set to Enabled. This feature, when enabled, lets you stop
the PLC by turning the key switch to OFF, or start the PLC running by turning the
key switch to ON (if there are no faults).
If the PLC has a non-fatal fault, turning the key switch from OFF to ON will
cause the RUN light on the power supply to flash for 5 seconds. If you again
turn the key switch OFF, then ON during the 5 seconds, the fault will clear and
the PLC will go into run mode (and the RUN light will stay ON).
If the PLC has a fatal fault, you will not be able to use the keyswitch to either
clear the fault or put the PLC into run mode. You will have to correct the cause
of the fault before being able to resume operation.
D RAM Memory and Override Protection (configurable): This feature was
introduced in CPU firmware release 8.0. This feature is, by default, disabled. It is
not functional unless the Mem Protect: parameter on the CPU configuration screen is
set to Enabled. If this feature is enabled and the keyswitch is ON, (1) user RAM
memory cannot be changed (2) discrete points cannot be overridden, and (3) the
TOD clock cannot be changed with the Hand Held Programmer (however, the TOD
clock can still be changed using programming software).
Protect your keys. Each new 350 - 364 CPU is supplied with a pair of keys for the key
switch. If you use one or more of the key switch protection features described above, we
recommend you carefully guard your keys. If they are lost, misplaced, or stolen, you
may be locked out from working on your PLC, and unauthorized persons may have
access to it. Replacement keys can be purchased under part number 44A736756-G01.
This kit contains 3 sets of CPU keys. All 350 - 364 CPUs use the same key.
Of course, you can choose to not use any of the keyswitch protection features, in which
case you can leave the keyswitch set to the OFF position, and leave the two configurable
keyswitch features set at their default (disabled) settings. Then, you will not need to use
a key to access the PLC.
Sequential Event Recorder (SER) Instruction

This functional instruction (programmed in ladder logic) was introduced in CPU
firmware release 9.0 and is available in all of the 350 - 354 CPUs that have this firmware.
The purpose of the SER is to provide a dynamic troubleshooting and debugging tool. In
effect, it takes ”snapshots” of the on/off status of groups of discrete points that you
specify. You also specify how many of these snapshots to take, when and how often
they will be taken, and where in memory they will be stored. The stored snapshots can
be analyzed to see the time relationship of the bits sampled. Please see the Series 90-30
PLC CPU Instruction Set Reference Manual, GFK-0467K or later for details on using this
instruction. Some feature highlights:
D An SER function block collects up to 32 contiguous or non-contiguous bits per
sample.
D Each SER function block can capture up to 1024 samples.
D If the SER is embedded in a periodic subroutine, sampling rate is determined by the
periodic subroutine execution rate.
5-16
FANUC CNC Controls
5
D Only the trigger sample is time stamped. The trigger sample can be time-stamped in
BCD (maximum resolution of 1 s) or POSIX format (maximum resolution of 10ms).
The time stamp is only placed once at the trigger point. The SER does not support
more than one time stamp per recording.
D The SER can be configured for pre-, mid-, or post-trigger modes.
Embedded Ethernet Interface (CPU364)

The CPU364 consists of a CPU and an Ethernet Interface combined in one module. This
module offers Ethernet capabilities formerly available only with the separate
IC693CMM321 Ethernet module. The CPU364 offers several advantages compared to
using a separate CPU and Ethernet module:
D It only occupies one slot in the PLC baseplate compared to the two slots required by
separate CPU and Ethernet modules.
D The IC693CMM321 Ethernet module requires an external transceiver. The CPU364
does not require one since it has this functionality built-in. To use this internal
transceiver, connect to the 10BASE-T port. However, if you choose, you may use an
external transceiver by connecting to the CPU364’s AAUI port, which bypasses the
internal transceiver (see Appendix L for GE Fanuc transceiver information).
D Because they both reside in the CPU364 module, the CPU and Ethernet Interface
can communicate without using the PLC backplane. This give faster
communications speed compared to using separate CPU and Ethernet modules,
which have to use the slower path across the PLC backplane.
D Beginning with Firmware Release 9.1, the Ethernet Global Data (EGD) and
configurable Name Resolution features were added to the CPU364. These features
are not supported by the IC693CMM321 Ethernet module. Logicmaster will not
include support for these features. They will only be supported in Control, Version
2.2 or later, and in all versions of VersaPro programming software. For details about
these features, please see publication GFK-1541A or later versions (when available),
TCP/IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 PLC User’s Manual.

5
Hardware Features of the 350 - 364 CPUs
CPU350 and CPU360 Hardware Features

These two modules look identical except for labeling.
D These modules feature an LED light, labeled ”PS Port” that
indicates serial port activity through the serial connector on the
PLC power supply. Typically, this LED will flash while data is
being transferred through the port, and will stay off when the
port is inactive.
D These modules also have the keyswitch, described earlier in this
chapter, that is standard on the 350 - 364 CPUs.
CPU Firmware Upgrade

The CPU firmware, which is stored in Flash memory, is loaded through the serial port
connector on the PLC Power Supply.
PS PS
PORT PORT
CPU 350 CPU 360
ON ON
OFF OFF
5-18
FANUC CNC Controls
5
CPU351, CPU352, and CPU363 Hardware Features

These three modules are similar in features and functionality. The CPU351 and CPU352
look identical except for labeling. The CPU363 has the same features as the other two,
but the orientation of its Port 1 and Port 2 connectors is reversed from those of the
CPU351 and CPU352, and its LED indicator lights, key switch, and shield ground
connector are in different locations. (The shield ground connector is on the front panel
of the CPU363, labeled “FRAME,” but is located on the bottom of the CPU351 and
CPU352 modules.)
PS CPU 351 SNP

P1 PORT
P2 P1
CPU 363
ON
P2
OFF
ON/RUN
OFF/
PORT 1 STOP
RS-232
PIN 1
PORT 1 PIN 1
RS-232
PORT 2
RS-485
PIN 1 PORT 2
RS-485
FRAME
Shield Ground
Connector
Figure 5-4. CPUs 351, 352, and 363
CPU Firmware Upgrade

The CPU firmware, which is stored in Flash memory, is loaded through the Port 1
connector on these modules’ faceplate using Loader software supplied with the
firmware upgrade kit. The IC693CBL316 cable can be used for this purpose (see Chapter
10 for data sheet on this cable).
Keyswitch
This is a standard CPU keyswitch, discussed earlier in this chapter.
Shield Ground Connection Tab

This tab is located on the bottom of the CPU351 and 352 modules and on the front of the
CPU363 module. It is used to make the module’s shield ground connection. A wire with

5
the applicable terminal ends is supplied with the module for this purpose. Please see the
section ”Module Shield Grounding” in Chapter 2 (“Installation”) for details.
Serial Ports
The 351, 352, and 363 CPUs have three serial ports. One is accessed through a connector
on the PLC power supply (standard serial port found on all Series 90-30 CPUs), and the
connectors for the other two are on the modules’ front panel, labeled Port 1 and Port 2.
The CPU351, 352, and 363 serial ports are configurable using the programming software
configurator function. Each port can also be configured using a COMM_REQ. For de-
tails about using these ports and about the COMM_REQ instruction, please see publica-
tion GFK-0582, Series 90 PLC Serial Communications User’s Manual.
Serial Port Front Panel Connectors

H Port 1, the top port is RS-232 compatible. This port has a 6-pin RJ-11 connector. This
connector has female contacts and is similar to modular jacks commonly used for
telephones and modems. The IC693CBL316 can be used to access this port, provid-
ing a direct connection to an RS-232 device without the need for a converter. See
Chapter 10 for a data sheet on this cable.
H Port 2, the bottom port is RS-485 compatible. Access to Port 2 is through a 15-pin D
connector that has female contacts.
Serial Port Status LEDs

The CPU351 and CPU352 have three LEDs that indicate the status of serial port activity
on the CPU.
H The SNP LED on the CPU351 and CPU352 is called PS Port on the CPU363. This
refers to the port that uses the serial connector on the PLC’s power supply. This
LED flashes when data is being transferred through the port. It remains off when
the port is inactive.
H The P1 LED will flash when data is being transferred through Port 1, the RS-232
port. It remains off when the port is inactive.
H The P2 LED will flash when data is being transferred through Port 2, the RS-485
port. It remains off when the port is inactive.
Protocols Supported
Starting with Firmware Release 9.00, Break-Free SNP became the default protocol on the
three Serial Ports on these modules. See previous section “Break-Free SNP Protocol” for
details.
SNP Port (Through Power Supply Connector)

H SNP slave.
H SNP-X slave
Port 1 and Port 2 (Through Module’s Front Panel Connectors)

H SNP master and slave
H SNP-X master and slave
H RTU slave (starting with Firmware Release 8.0)
H Serial I/O – Limited functionality (write only) starting with Firmware Release 8.0,
will have full functionality (read and write) starting with Firmware Release 10.0.
5-20
FANUC CNC Controls
5
Used with autodialer feature to call a pager. To use this feature, configure protocol
as Custom. See GFK-0582, Series 90 PLC Serial Communications User’s Manual for
details.
Pin Assignments for CPU351, CPU352, and CPU363 Serial Ports 1 & 2
The following two tables describe the pin assignments for each of the two front panel
serial ports on the CPU351, CPU352, and CPU363.
Table 5-5. Port 1 (RS-232)
Pin Signal
Number Name Description
1 CTS Clear To Send
2 TXD Transmit Data
3 0V Signal Ground
4 0V Signal Ground
5 RXD Receive Data
6 RTS Request to Send
Table 5-6. Port 2 (RS-485)
Pin Signal
Number Name Description
1 Shield Cable Shield
2 NC No Connection
3 NC No Connection
4 NC No Connection
5 +5VDC Logic Power *
6 RTS(A) Differential Request to Send
7 SG Signal Ground
8 CTS(B‘) Differential Clear To Send
9 RT Resistor Termination
10 RD(A‘) Differential Receive Data
11 RD(B‘) Differential Receive Data
12 SD(A) Differential Send Data
13 SD(B) Differential Send Data
14 RTS(B’) Differential Request To Send
15 CTS(A’) Differential Clear To Send
* Note that Pin 5 provides Isolated +5 VDC power
(100 mA maximum) for powering external options.

5
CPU364 Hardware Features

This module has four LED indicator lights, an Ethernet Restart pushbutton, a standard
CPU keyswitch, three port connectors, and a shield ground connection tab (labeled
“FRAME”).
a47501
PS
EOK PORT
LAN CPU 364
STAT
ON
OFF
Î ETHERNET
RESTART
PORT 1
RS-232
PIN 1
AAUI
10BASE T
FRAME
LED Indicators
There are four LED Indicators. Three relate to the Ethernet interface: EOK, LAN, and
STAT. These can be ON, OFF, FLASHING slow, or FLASHING fast in several different
combinations. The full functionality of these LEDs is detailed in GFK-1541, TCP/IP
Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 PLC User’s Manual.
The fourth LED, PS PORT, is for the CPU’s serial port and is not related to the Ethernet
interface. This LED will flash while data is being transferred through the SNP serial port
connector on the PLC power supply, and will stay off when the port is inactive. (On
some early production 364 CPUs, this LED is labeled “SNP.”) All Series 90-30 CPUs have
this standard serial port.
Ethernet Restart Pushbutton

This pushbutton performs four functions: LED test, Restart, Restart and enter Software
Load state, and Restart and enter Maintenance state. These are detailed in GFK-1541,
TCP/IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 PLC User’s Manual.
Keyswitch
This is a standard CPU keyswitch, discussed earlier in this chapter.
5-22
FANUC CNC Controls
5
Front Panel Connectors

The full functionality of these ports is detailed in GFK-1541, TCP/IP Ethernet
Communications for the Series 90 PLC User’s Manual.
D Port 1, RS-232 - This connector is used for two purposes: (1) To connect a terminal or
terminal emulator to access the Station Manager software on the Ethernet Interface.
(2) To connect to a Personal Computer that will be used to update the Ethernet
Interface firmware (the CPU firmware is updated separately through the connector
on the power supply). This RJ-11 connector has the same pinout as Port 1 of the
CPUs 351, 352, and 353, shown in Table 5-5. The IC693CBL316 cable can be used to
access this port. See Chapter 10 for a data sheet on this cable.
D AAUI port - This 14-pin AAUI port connects via a user-supplied IEEE 802.3
transceiver cable to an external Ethernet-compatible transceiver such as the GE
Fanuc catalog number IC649AEA102 (for 10Base T) or IC649AEA103 (for 10Base 2).
See Appendix L for details on these transceivers.
D 10Base T port - This 8-pin, RJ-45 port provides a direct connection to a 10Base T
(twisted pair) Ethernet network without the need for an external transceiver.
Shield Ground Connection Tab

This tab is used to make the module’s shield ground connection. A wire with the
applicable terminal ends is supplied with the module for this purpose. Please see the
section “CPU363 and 364 Shield Grounding” in Chapter 2 (“Installation”) for details.
Firmware Upgrade
H The CPU firmware, which is stored in Flash memory, is loaded through the serial
port connector on the PLC Power Supply using a personal computer that has been
equipped with the loader and CPU firmware software.
H The Ethernet Interface firmware, stored in Flash memory, is loaded through the
module’s front panel Port 1 connector using a personal computer that has been
equipped with the loader and Ethernet firmware software. Cable IC693CBL316 is
required (see Chapter 10 for details on this cable).

5
CPU Data Sheets

This section provides data sheets describing each of the Series 90-30 CPU modules. For
information on the State Logic CPUs, see Chapter 9, “State Logic Products.”
CPU Model List
H IC693CPU311 5-slot baseplate with embedded CPU, 1K Byte Register Memory
H IC693CPU313 5-slot baseplate with embedded CPU, 2K Bytes Register Memory
H IC693CPU323 10-slot baseplate with embedded CPU
H IC693CPU331 CPU module, 10 MHz
H IC693CPU340 CPU module, 20 MHz, 32K Bytes User Program Memory
H IC693CPU341 CPU module, 20 MHz, 80K Bytes User Program Memory
H IC693CPU351 CPU module, 25 MHz, with two extra serial ports
H IC693CPU352 CPU module, 25 MHz, math coprocessor, two extra serial ports
H IC693CPU363 CPU module, 25 Mhz, with two extra serial ports
H IC693CPU364 CPU module, 25 Mhz, with Ethernet interface
5-24
FANUC CNC Controls
5
CPU311 Catalog Number IC693CPU311

a44563
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
PROGRAMMABLE 1
CONTROLLER
ÎÎ
BASE 5-SLOT
WITH CPU
CAUTION
USER PROGRAM
AND REGISTER
ÎÎSYSTEM
PROM
PROGRAM
PROM
VALUES MAY BE
LOST IF POWER
SUPPLY IS
REMOVED FOR
LONGER THAN
i HOUR
POWER 1 2 3 4 5
SUPPLY
CPU Type 5-slot baseplate with embedded CPU

Total Baseplates per System 1
Load Required from PowerSupply 410 milliamps from +5 VDC supply
ProcessorSpeed 10 MegaHertz
Processor Type 80188
OperatingTemperature 0 to 60 degrees C (32 to 140 degrees F) ambient
Typical Scan Rate 18 milliseconds per 1K of logic (boolean contacts)
User ProgramMemory(maximum) 6K Bytes
Discrete Input Points - %I 160 (maximum - combined inputs + outputs)
Discrete Output Points - %Q 160 (maximum - combined outputs + inputs)
Discrete Global Memory - %G 1280 bits
Internal Coils - %M 1024 bits
Output (Temporary) Coils - %T 256 bits
System Status References - %S 128 bits (%S, %SA, %SB, %SC - 32 bits each)
RegisterMemory - %R 512 words
Analog Inputs - %AI 64 words
Analog Outputs - %AQ 32 words
System Registers (for reference table viewing 16 words (%SR)
only; cannot be referenced in user logic program)
Timers/Counters 170
Shift Registers yes
Built-in Serial Ports 1 (uses connector on PLC power supply). Supports SNP
slave and SNP-X slave protocols.
Communications LAN - Supports multidrop. Also supports Ethernet, FIP,
Profibus, GBC, GCM, GCM+ option modules.
Override no
Battery Backed Clock no
Interrupts no
Type of Memory Storage RAM and optional EPROM or EEPROM
PCM/CCMCompatibility no

5

a44563
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
PROGRAMMABLE 1
CONTROLLER
ÎÎ
BASE 5-SLOT
WITH CPU
CAUTION
USER PROGRAM
ÎÎSYSTEM
PROM
PROGRAM
PROM
AND REGISTER
VALUES MAY BE
LOST IF POWER
SUPPLY IS
REMOVED FOR
LONGER THAN
i HOUR
POWER 1 2 3 4 5
SUPPLY

Typical Scan Rate 0.6 milliseconds per 1K of logic (boolean contacts)
User ProgramMemory(maximum) 12K Bytes (6K bytes prior to release 7)
Timers/Counters 170
Shift Registers yes
Built-in Ports 1 (uses connector on PLC power supply). Supports SNP
Override no
Interrupts no
5-26
FANUC CNC Controls
5

a45134
1
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER
BASE 10–SLOT
WITH CPU
CAUTION SYSTEM PROGRAM

PROM PROM
USER PROGRAM
AND REGISTER
VALUES MAY BE
LOST IF POWER
SUPPLY IS
REMOVED FOR
LONGER THAN
1 HOUR.
POWER 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SUPPLY

User ProgramMemory(maximum) 12K Bytes (6K bytes prior to release 7)
Timers/Counters 340
Shift Registers yes
Built-in Ports 1 (uses connector on PLC power supply). Supports SNP
Override no
Interrupts no

5
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
CPU Type
Total Baseplates per System
Single slot CPU module
5 (1 CPU baseplate + 4 expansionand/orremote) ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
CPU331
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Discrete Input Points - %I 512
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Discrete Output Points - %Q 512
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Analog Outputs - %AQ
System Registers (for reference table
64 words
16 words (%SR)
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
viewing only; cannot be referenced in user
logic program)
Timers/Counters 680
Shift Registers yes
Built-in Ports 1 (uses connector on PLC power supply). Supports
SNP/SNP-X slave protocols. Requires CMM module
forSNP/SNP-X master, CCM, or RTU slave support;
PCM module for RTU master support.
Communications LAN - Supports multidrop. Also supports Ethernet,
FIP, Profibus, GBC, GCM, GCM+ option modules.
Override yes
Battery Backed Clock yes
Interrupts no
PCM/CCMCompatibility yes
5-28
FANUC CNC Controls
5
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
CPU Type
CPU340
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Processor Type 80C188XL
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
256 words
16 words (%SR)
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
logic program)
Timers/Counters >2000
Shift Registers yes
Override yes
Interrupts yes
Type of Memory Storage RAM and optional Flash

5
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
CPU Type
CPU341
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Processor Type 80C188XL
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
256 words
16 words (%SR)
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
logic program)
Timers/Counters >2000
Shift Registers yes
Override yes
Interrupts yes
Type of Memory Storage RAM and optional EPROM or EEPROM for early
versions. Starting with hardware version
IC693CPU341-J and firmware Release 4.61, only
RAM and optional Flash are supported.
5-30
FANUC CNC Controls
5
CPU Type Single slot CPU module

PS
Total Baseplates per System 8 (CPU baseplate + 7 expansionand/orremote) PORT
CPU 350
ON
OFF
Processor Type 80386EX
Typical Scan Rate .22 milliseconds per 1K of logic (boolean contacts)
User ProgramMemory(maximum) 32K Bytes (not configurable)
Discrete Input Points - %I 2,048
Discrete Output Points - %Q 2,048
Discrete Global Memory - %G 1,280 bits
Internal Coils - %M 4,096 bits
RegisterMemory - %R 9,999 words
Analog Inputs - %AI 2,048 words
System Registers (for reference table 28 words (%SR)
viewing only; cannot be referenced in user logic
program)
Timers/Counters >2,000
Shift Registers Yes
Built-in Serial Port 1 (uses connector on PLC power supply). Supports
forSNP/SNP-X master, CCM, or RTU slave protocol
support; PCM module for RTU master support.
Override Yes
Battery Backed Clock Yes
Interrupts Supports the periodic subroutine feature
Type of Memory Storage RAM and Flash
PCM/CCMCompatibility Yes
Floating Point Math Support Yes. Firmware-based in firmware releases 9.0 and
later.

5

Total Baseplates per System 8 (CPU baseplate + 7 expansionand/orremote)
CPU 351 SNP
P1
P2
Typical Scan Rate .22 milliseconds per 1K of logic (boolean contacts) ON/RUN
User ProgramMemory(maximum) Starting with firmware Release 9.0, 240K Bytes. Note: Actual
size of available user program memory depends on the OFF/
STOP
amounts configured for the %R, %AI, and %AQ configurable
word memory types (see below).
For firmware prior to Release 9.0, fixed size is 80K bytes. PORT 1
RS-232
Output (Temporary) Coils - %T 256 bits PORT 2
RS-485
RegisterMemory - %R Starting with firmware Release 9.0, configurable in 128 word
increments from 128 to 16,384 word with Logicmaster and
from 128 to 32,640 words with Control version 2.2. For firm-
ware prior to Release 9.0, fixed size is 9,999 words.
Analog Inputs - %AI Starting with firmware Release 9.0, configurable in 128 word
Analog Outputs - %AQ Starting with firmware Release 9.0, configurable in 128 word
System Registers (for reference table view- 28 words (%SR)
ing only; cannot be referenced in logic program)
Shift Registers Yes
Built-in Serial Ports Three ports. Supports SNP/SNPX slave (on power supply
connector) and RTUslave,SNP/SNPXmaster/slave,Serial
I/O (on Ports 1 and 2). Requires CMM module for CCM;
Communications LAN - Supports multidrop. Also supports Ethernet, FIP, Pro-
fibus, GBC, GCM, GCM+ option modules.
Override Yes
InterruptSupport Supports the Periodic Subroutine feature.
Floating Point Math Support Yes, firmware-based in firmware Release 9.0 and later.
The CPU351 is supported by Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro programming and configuration software Release
6.00 and later releases, and Control programming and configuration software Release 2.0 and later
releases.
5-32
FANUC CNC Controls
5

Total Baseplates per System 8 (CPU baseplate + 7 expansionand/orremote)
CPU 352 SNP
P1
P2
Typical Scan Rate .22 milliseconds per 1K of logic (boolean contacts) ON/RUN
size of available user program memory depends on the OFF/
STOP
word memory types (see below).
For firmware prior to Release 9.0, fixed size is 80K bytes. PORT 1
RS-232
Output (Temporary) Coils - %T 256 bits PORT 2
RS-485
RegisterMemory - %R Starting with firmware Release 9.0, configurable in 128 word
System Registers (for reference 28 words (%SR)
table viewing only; cannot be refer-
enced in logic program)
Shift Registers Yes
Built-in Serial Ports Three ports. Supports SNP/SNPX slave (on power supply
connector) and RTUslave,SNP/SNPXmaster/slave,Serial
I/O (on Ports 1 and 2). Requires CMM module for CCM;
Override Yes
InterruptSupport Supports the Periodic Subroutine feature.
Floating Point Math Support Yes, hardware-based (built-in math co-processor)
The CPU352 is supported by Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro programming and configuration software Release
7.00 and later releases, and Control programming and configuration software Release 2.0 and later
releases.

5

PS
Total Baseplates per System 8 (CPU baseplate + 7 expansionand/orremote) PORT
CPU 360
ON
OFF
size of available user program memory depends on the
word memory types (see below). For firmware prior to Re-
lease 9.0, fixed size is 80K bytes.
Register Memory - %R Starting with firmware Release 9.0, configurable in 128 word
increments from 128 to 16,384 words with Logicmaster and
viewing only; cannot be referenced in
logic program)
Shift Registers Yes
Built-in Serial Ports 1 (uses connector on PLC power supply). Supports SNP
slave and SNP-X slave protocols. Requires CMM module for
SNP/SNP-X master, CCM, or RTU slave protocol support;
fibus, GBC, GCM, and GCM+ option modules.
Override Yes
Interrupts Yes
Floating Point Math Support Yes, firmware-based in firmware Release 9.0 and later.
5-34
FANUC CNC Controls
5

Total Baseplates per System 8 (CPU baseplate + 7 expansionand/orremote) a47500

PS
P1
ProcessorSpeed 25 MegaHertz PORT
P2
Processor Type 80386EX CPU 363
ON
Typical Scan Rate .22 milliseconds per 1K of logic (boolean contacts) OFF
UserMemory (total) 240K (245,760) Bytes. Actual size of available user program
memory depends on the amounts configured for %R, %AI,
and %AQ configurable word memory types (see below).
Discrete Output Points - %Q 2,048 PORT 1
RS-232
RegisterMemory - %R Configurable in 128 word increments from 128 to 16,384
words with Logicmaster and from 128 to 32,640 words with
Control version 2.2.
Analog Inputs - %AI Configurable in 128 word increments from 128 to 16,384 PORT 2
words with Logicmaster and from 128 to 32,640 words with RS-485

Analog Outputs - %AQ Configurable in 128 word increments from 128 to 16,384
viewing only; cannot be referenced in user logic FRAME
program)
Shift Registers Yes
Built-in Ports Three ports. Supports SNP/SNPX slave (on power supply
connector). On Ports 1 and 2, suports SNP/SNPX master/
slave and RTU slave. Requires CMM module for CCM;
Override Yes
InterruptSupport Supports the periodic subroutine feature.
Floating Point Mat h Support Yes, firmware-based in firmware Release 9.0 and later.

5

CPU Type Single slot CPU module with embedded Ethernet Interface
Total Baseplates per System 8 (CPU baseplate + 7 expansionand/orremote) a47501
Load Required from PowerSupply 1.51 Amps from +5 VDC supply SNP
EOK
ProcessorSpeed 25 MegaHertz LAN CPU 364
Processor Type 80386EX STAT
ON
Ethernet fuse, replaceable 2.69x2.69x6.1mm,125V, 1A, slow acting
OFF
Operating temperature 0 to 60 degrees C (32 to 140 degrees F) ambient
UserMemory (total) 240K Bytes. Note: Actual size of available user program
memory depends on the amounts configured for %R, %AI,
and %AQ configurable word memory types (see below).
Î
ETHERNET
RESTART
PORT 1
Discrete Input Points - %I 2,048 RS-232

AAUI
RegisterMemory - %R Configurable in 128 word increments from 128 to 16,384
Analog Inputs - %AI Configurable in 128 word increments from 128 to 16,384
10BASE T
Analog Outputs - %AQ Configurable in 128 word increments from 128 to 16,384
FRAME
only; cannot be referenced in logic program)
Shift Registers Yes
Built-in Serial Ports 1 (uses connector on PLC Power Supply). Supports SNP/
SNPX slave. Requires CMM module for SNP/SNP-X master,
RTU slave, or CCM; PCM module for RTU master support.
Communications Ethernet (internal) – AAUI or 10BASE-T. AAUI requires
external transceiver. 10BASE-T is direct.
Ethernet (additional) – Supports Ethernet option modules.
LAN-Requires option modules for Genius, Profibus, FIP.
Override Yes
InterruptSupport Supports the periodic subroutine feature.
Floating Point Math Support Yes, firmware-based.
Note: On some early modules, the LED labeled “PS PORT” may say “SNP” instead; otherwise,
the modules are identical.
5-36
FANUC CNC ControlsSeries 90-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual – October 1999 GFK-0356P
Chapter Memory Backup and Backup Battery
6
Backup Battery for RAM Memory (All Supplies)

The long-life Lithium battery (IC693ACC301) used to maintain the contents of the
CMOS RAM memory in the CPU is accessed by removing the cover plate located at the
bottom of the power supply faceplate. This battery is mounted on a plastic clip attached
to the inside of this cover.
The battery is wired to a small Berg female connector that connects to either of the two
Berg male connectors mounted on the Power Supply printed circuit board. This battery
can be replaced with power applied to the PLC.
PWR
a43833
OK
RUN
Low Battery
BATT Warning LED BATTERY
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
CONNECTORS
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
B
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
A
T
ÎÎÎ
T
E
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
R
Y LITHIUM
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
BACK-UP
BATTERY
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Battery
Cavity
Battery Cover Removal Notch
Figure 6-1. Backup Battery for RAM Memory
Caution
If a Low Battery Warning (BATT LED turns ON) occurs, replace the
battery located in the power supplybefore removing power from the rack.
Otherwise, there is a possibility that data will be corrupted or the
application program will be cleared from memory.
GFK-0356P 6-1
6
Battery Replacement Instructions
Warning
To avoid the chance of losing the contents of RAM memory, you can
carefully perform the following steps with PLC power ON. This
procedure should only be performed by qualified electrical personnel
who are trained in applicable electrical safety rules and procedures.
Failure to follow standard electrical safety practice can result in injury
or death to personnel, damage to equipment, or both.
H Carefully insert the tip a small pocket-size screwdriver approximately 1/4 inch (6
mm) into the battery cover removal slot, located beneath the battery cover (see
previous figure).
H Gently rotate the screwdriver about 45 degrees to loosen the cover.
H Remove cover with fingers. The battery is mounted in a clip on the back of the
cover. It has a pair of leads with a connector that is plugged-in to a connector on a
circuit board inside the power supply.
H Carefully reach into battery cavity with your fingers (do not use a metal object to do
this) and unplug the battery connector.
H Remove the old battery from the clip on the battery cover and set it aside. Be careful
not to mix it up with the new battery.
H Carefully reach into battery cavity with your fingers (do not use a metal object to do
this) and plug in new battery connector.
H Clip new battery into clip on battery cover.
H Snap battery cover back onto power supply.
6-2
FANUC CNC Controls
6
Battery Replacement/Memor y Protection Factors

Since there are differences in each PLC application, each user will have to determine on
an individual basis what strategy to use. There are several factors to consider when
planning a batteryreplacement/memory protection strategy:
H How critical is the application? Will considerable loss be sustained if the PLC goes
down? If so, frequent replacement of the battery would be a wise choice. For critical
applications, the cost of a battery would be quite low in comparison to the cost of a
PLC shut-down.
H How readily can a backup program be loaded? Are there technicians on-site who
know how to load a backup program? Is the backup program accessible at all times
to those responsible for maintaining the equipment? Is a personal computer or
equivalent equipped with GE Fanuc programming software available at all times for
use in loading the backup program?
H Do you have a preventive maintenance program? A formal program would help
ensure that the battery is replaced on time. Some users replace the backup battery
each year during their annual shut-down period.
H How accessible is the PLC? In some applications, the PLC may be mounted in a
remote location that is not easily accessed.
H Safety codes. Some users may have safety rules that would not allow replacing the
battery with power applied.
H How is the PLC used? Is power left on all the time, or is it shut down every day? See
the heading ”Factors Affecting Battery Life.”
H Some users run without a backup battery by using one of the PROM options. See
the section below called ”Operating Without a Memory Backup Battery” to
determine if this strategy is suitable for your application.
The Importance of Backing up your Program

Experience has shown that regardless of what strategy you use to maintain PLC
memory, you should, additionally, always keep an up-to-date backup copy of your
application program. The effort required to create and maintain a backup copy is very
small compared to the work required to reprogram, or re-key from hardcopy, your entire
application if, due to some misfortune, it was lost. Other suggestions to help minimize
down time:
H Make sure the backup copy is readily accessible to those who may need to use it.
H Train more than one person to load the backup program in case that one person is
not available when needed. Information on creating a backup can be found in GE
Fanuc ’s software user’s manuals. This procedure is also covered in applicable GE
Fanuc programming software training courses.
H Ensure that a suitable computer (usually a laptop type) is equipped with GE Fanuc
PLC programming software and will be readily available to load the backup
program to the PLC.
H Create a written backup procedure. Fortunately, restoring your program from the
backup copy is probably not something you will do very often. As a result, however,
some of the steps could easily be forgotten.
GFK-0356P Chapter 6 Memory Backup and Backup Battery 6-3

6
Factors Affecting Battery Life

Replacing your battery once per year is a good rule of thumb. However, no one can
predict precisely how long a backup battery will last because this depends upon what
CPU is used, what temperature it is subjected to, and how it used. Considering the
following list of factors that affect battery life will help you decide how frequently to
replace the battery in your application:
H A battery that is not in use has an estimated life (called its ”shelf life”) of 5 years at
”room temperature” (25 degrees C, or 77 degrees F).
H A battery that is used continuously (supplying current to memory circuits with PLC
power off) has an average estimated life of one year for CPU models 331 and above,
and 2 years for CPU models 311, 313 and 323, if used at room temperature.
H As long as a PLC is powered up, its battery is not being used; so how often you
power down your PLC has a direct affect on battery life. Some users keep their PLC
powered up all of the time while others turn theirs off every night.
H Temperature has a relatively large affect on battery life. Temperatures considerably
above room temperature (25 degrees C, or 77 degrees F), or below freezing (0
degrees C, or 32 degrees F) will appreciably shorten battery life.
H The type of CPU has a small affect on battery life. Some CPUs have more memory
than others. Also, some CPUs have a clock and some do not. More memory
requires more battery current to maintain its contents; and a clock requires battery
current to maintain its operation.
Low Battery Warning Methods

There are three basic ways that the PLC warns of a low battery:
H The red ”BATT” LED on the Power Supply module lights when the battery is low.
The disadvantage of this method is that the PLC is often mounted in an enclosure,
so this LED might not be easily seen.
H The PLC Fault Table is updated with a battery low message. Viewing the PLC Fault
Table requires that a programmer be connected to the PLC.
H Certain System Reference bits are set to logic 1 when the battery is low. These are
%SA011 (LOW_BAT), %SC009 (ANY_FLT), %S010 (SY_FLT), and %SC012
(SY_PRES). The most specific is %SA011 (LOW_BAT). This bit could be used as a
contact in your ladder logic program to turn on an output that controls a warning
light on an operator panel (as in the example rung below), or to send a warning to
an operator interface terminal.
%SA011 %Qxxx
In the rung shown above, the %SA011 contact will close when a low battery is detected
by the PLC. This will turn on the %Q output coil, which addresses an output module’s
output that will turn on a warning light. An alternate method would be to
communicate the status of the coil (which, in that case, would probably be a %M coil) to
a Human to Machine Interface (HMI) terminal such as a GE Fanuc CIMPLICITY HMI
unit. The HMI could be programmed to display a warning message when that
6-4
FANUC CNC Controls
6
particular bit goes to a logic 1. For more information about System Reference bits and
ladder logic programming, see the the Series 90-30/20/Micro PLC CPU Instruction Set
Reference Manual, GFK-0467.
Operating Without a Memory Backup Battery

Whether it would be to your advantage to use a battery-less scheme depends on your
application. There are various advantages and disadvantages to consider in making
your decision.
Possible Advantage
The obvious advantage of operating without a memory backup battery is that you are
freed from the need to maintain the battery. To be able to run without a battery, you
need to have a PROM device – either an EPROM, EEPROM, or Flash PROM – installed
in your system. These devices can store program logic, configuration, and register
values without the need for a backup battery, and you can configure your CPU to read
the contents of PROM into RAM memory each time the PLC is powered up.
Possible Disadvantages
Information is not stored to your PROM device automatically. To store information, you
must stop the PLC, then use a programming device to tell the CPU to write the current
PLC (RAM) memory contents to the PROM device. This requirement may make
battery-less operation undesirable for many users. For example, in many applications,
important data is gathered and stored in RAM register memory, data such as the current
level of material in a tank that is being filled, or a running count of parts produced, etc.
This constantly changing data is not being copied automatically to the PROM device. It
only exists in RAM memory. Therefore, if power is lost and there is no RAM memory
backup battery, this data will be lost.
However, one way to preserve data in a battery-less system is to send it over a network
to a computer that can store the data on its hard drive. Also, static data (data that
doesn’t change) contained in RAM memory, such as mathematical constants or look-up
table type information, can be stored initially in PROM and automatically written back
to RAM each time the PLC powers up.
Another consideration is that if you change your program (or configuration), someone
will have to remember to write the changed information to the PROM device. If that
step is forgotten, then the change only exists in RAM memory, and in a battery-less
system, it will be lost the next time power is removed from the PLC.
Configuring a Battery-Less System

Here are the basic steps to configure a system to run battery-less:
H Equip your CPU with a PROM device. On some CPUs a PROM device is purchased
as an option; on others, it is a standard feature. The CPU chapter of this manual has
a table that identifies the standard PROM configuration for each CPU.
H There are three CPU configuration parameters involved. Configure them as
follows: Pwr Up Mode: RUN; Logic/Cfg: PROM; Registers: PROM.
H Store your folder (include Program Logic, Configuration, and Register Data) to the
PLC. This places your entire folder into RAM (working) memory.

6
H Write PLC (RAM) memory to the PROM device. Make sure you write all data
(Program Logic, Configuration, and Register Data) to the PROM. Note that the type
of PROM device depends on what model CPU you have and how it is equipped.
H If you are using a 340 or higher CPU (such as a CPU350, CPU351, etc.), read the next
section for an additional requirement.
When configured this way, the contents of PROM memory will be written into RAM
memory each time the PLC powers up.
Operation Without a Memory Backup Battery Using a 340 or Higher CPU

This information is applicable only to CPU model numbers 340 and higher (such as
CPU350, CPU351, etc.). In systems that do not use a memory backup battery, a standard
0.1” Berg jumper should be installed across either of the two power supply battery
connectors to ensure reliable restarting of the CPU after a power cycle. This jumper
should not be installed if a battery is plugged into either the power supply or CPU
battery connector.
Determining Battery Age Using Battery Date Code

Battery age can be determined from the date code stamped on the battery.
The battery, manufactured by Panasonic, will have a four-digit date code. It will be
something like 5615 or 7Y34. Use the following information to determine the date of
manufacture.
D First digit shows the year in a rotating 10-year cycle. For example, 0=1990, 1=1991,
2=1992 ... 9=1999, 0=2000, 1=2001, 2=2002, etc. This seeming duplication should
not be a problem because the shelf life of these batteries is 5 years. Batteries in
inventory that are older than 4 years old should be discarded according to the
manufacturer ’s instructions (since they have less than one year of life remaining we
would not recommend using them in a PLC). This will ensure that outdated
batteries are not mistaken for newer batteries.
D Second digit shows the month. 1=January, 2=February, 3=March, 4=April, 5=May,
6=June, 7=July, 8=August, 9=September, O=October, Y=November, Z=December.
D Third digit shows the week of the month.
D Fourth digit shows the day of the week. 1=Monday, 2=Tuesday, 3=Wednesday,
4=Thursday , 5=Friday, 6=Saturday, 7=Sunday.
For example, the code 7612 is interpreted as:

Manufactured on June 3, 1997
RAM Memory Battery Backup Connection Path

CMOS RAM memory is a volatile type of memory, which means that it can lose its contents
(ladder program, configuration, etc.) if power is removed. To retain RAM memory contents
under no-power conditions, a long-life lithium battery is provided. This battery is normally
mounted in the rack’s Power Supply module. To avoid accidental disconnection of the
memory backup battery, it is beneficial to know the connection path between the battery
and the memory circuits:
6-6
FANUC CNC Controls
6
For embedded CPUs: The battery connection path to RAM memory is through the Power
Supply’s baseplate connector and across the backplane board to the RAM circuits.
For modular CPUs: The battery connection path to RAM memory is through the Power
Supply’s baseplate connector, across the backplane board, and through the CPUs baseplate
connector to the RAM circuits inside the CPU module.
Obviously, removing the Power Supply module from the PLC breaks the connection
between the backup battery and the RAM memory circuits for both embedded and
modular CPUs. Also, in a modular CPU system, removing the CPU module would
disconnect the backup battery from the memory circuits. In addition, to avoid the possible
problems associated with losing the contents of RAM memory, we recommend that you
maintain an up-to-date backup copy of your program folder. Instructions for creating
program folder backups can be found in the Logicmaster 90, Series 90-30 Programming Software
User’s Manual, GFK-0466, Control User’s Guide, GFK-1295, and VersaPro Programming Software
User’s Guide, GFK-1670.
Super Capacitor Memory Backup

Besides the backup battery, the RAM memory circuits in both Embedded and Modular
CPUs are further protected by a ”super capacitor,” which can store enough charge to
maintain memory for a short time if the battery is disconnected. The amount of protection
time provided by the super capacitor depends on the following:
D The PLC power supply supplies 5 VDC to the memory circuits, including the super
capacitor. Therefore, when PLC power is turned off, the super capacitor has an
initial 5 VDC charge. If the battery is also disconnected shortly after PLC power is
turned off, the super capacitor will begin discharging from the 5 VDC level until its
charge reaches 2 VDC, at which time memory contents will be lost. When used this
way, the super capacitor can maintain memory contents for a minimum of 1 hour.
D The memory backup battery supplies 3 VDC to the memory circuits, including the
super capacitor. Therefore, if PLC power has been turned off for an hour or more
and only the battery is powering the memory circuits, the super capacitor has a 3
VDC charge. Then, if the battery is disconnected, the super capacitor will begin
discharging from the 3VDC level until its charge reaches 2 VDC, at which time
memory contents will be lost. When used this way, the super capacitor can maintain
memory contents for a minimum of 20 minutes.
Maintaining RAM Memory During Storage or Shipment of a CPU

Modular CPUs
Modular CPUs have an internal connector for a backup battery so that RAM memory
contents can be retained while the CPU is being stored or shipped. This arrangement
should not to be used when the CPU module is installed in the baseplate and the backup
battery is installed in the power supply. To use a backup battery in the CPU module, it is
necessary to remove the front cover of the CPU module. This can be accomplished by
following these steps:
D To avoid losing memory contents once the CPU is removed from the PLC, we
recommend you install the backup battery into the CPU within 20 minutes. First,
make sure PLC power is off, then remove the CPU module.
D Gently squeeze the front cover of the CPU module and pull it forward, away from
the module case, while gently pressing in on the 4 front cover tabs sequentially with

6
a small screwdriver. The front cover tabs latch into holes on each side of the module
case (refer to Figure 2-1 for location of front cover holding tabs).
D After removing the front cover, plug the memory backup battery into the two-prong
battery connector on the front of the CPU module’s printed circuit board.
D While the battery is connected to the CPU, you will have to leave the CPU’s front
cover off. Also, the battery should be temporarily secured to the module with cable
ties or tape to keep it from being accidentally damaged or disconnected.
The Battery Accessory Kit, described below, may also be used on a Modular CPU
baseplate if the power supply has to be removed. This would require leaving the CPU
module mounted in the baseplate.
Embedded CPUs
Embedded CPU Models 311, 313, and 323 can be stored or shipped with a power supply
installed and the power supply battery connected in order to maintain the contents of
RAM memory. However, another option (that doesn’t require the use of a power
supply) is to use the Battery Accessory Kit, described next.
Battery Accessory Kit (IC693ACC315)

The Battery Accessory Kit (IC693ACC315) lets you maintain RAM memory contents
without using a power supply. It is useful for maintaining memory contents while a
baseplate is being stored or shipped. The Battery Accessory Kit consists of a battery with
an attached connector mounted on a circuit board. The circuit board has a connector
that plugs into the power supply backplane connector (see the figure below). The
Battery Accessory Kit can be used on either Embedded or Modular Series 90-30 CPU
baseplates.
ÎÎ a45076
Î
Î POWER
SUPPLY
CONNECTOR
ÎÎ
BATTERY
PLUG
ÎÎ
Figure 6-2. Installing the Battery Accessory Kit
6-8
FANUC CNC Controls
6
Battery Accessory Kit Installation

1. Insert the plug on the end of the battery cable into the 2-pin connector on the Battery
Accessory board. The battery plug is normally not plugged into the accessory
connector. This prevents accidental discharge of the battery during storage and
handling.
2. Align the backplane connector on the Battery Accessory board with the power
supply connector on the baseplate backplane. Push the Battery Accessory board
toward the baseplate until it is fully seated. See the figure above.
3. If the baseplate is to be shipped with the Battery Accessory board installed, ensure
that the board is held in place by packing material or cable ties. The cable ties can be
installed in holes provided on both ends of the accessory board and secured to the
baseplate.
Caution
To avoid losing CPU data, the Battery Accessory must be installed

within 1 hour after turning off PLC power, or 20 minutes after
removing the memory backup battery. See the section “Super
Capacitor Memory Backup” section for details.
When the Battery Accessory is removed, a power supply module with a

good battery must be installed and/or input power applied within 20
minutes to avoid losing CPU data. See the section “Super Capacitor
Memory Backup” section for details.
Batteries in Power Supplies on Expansion or Remote Racks

Batteries in power supplies on Expansion or Remote racks, are not in use. Only the
battery in a CPU rack supplies backup power to RAM memory. Batteries in non-CPU
racks may be removed and used as spares, if they meet the age requirements stated
previously in this chapter.

Chapter Input and Output Modules
7
The basics of the Series 90-30 Input and Output (I/O) modules are covered in this
chapter for your convenience. A table listing these modules is located at the end of this
chapter. For detailed specifications and installation instructions, please refer to
publication GFK-0898, Series 90-30 PLC I/O Module Specifications. This chapter also
contains a preliminary description of the IC693DVM300 Digital Valve Driver Module.
Basic I/O Module Types

H Discrete Input
Series 90-30 discrete input modules convert AC and DC power levels from user
devices to the logic levels required by the PLC. An optical coupler provides
isolation between the incoming power and the logic circuitry. Discrete input
modules are available that have 8, 16, or 32 points.
H Discrete Output
Series 90-30 discrete output modules convert logic levels into AC or DC power
levels required for driving user supplied devices. Either a power semiconductor
or an electromagnetic relay switches each output point. The discrete output
semiconductor-switched modules are available with 5, 8, 12, 16, or 32 output
points. Relay output modules are available with either 8 or 16 Normally Open
relay contact outputs.
H Discrete Input/Output
Combination discrete input/output modules combine AC inputs and relay
outputs or DC inputs and relay outputs on one module. Each of these modules
have 8 input circuits and 8 relay output circuits on one board.
H Analog Input
Series 90-30 analog input modules provide A/D (Analog to Digital) conversion by
converting an analog input signal into a scaled digital number which will be
transferred into the PLC’s %AI memory. Analog input modules are provided in
four versions, (1) a 4-channel current module, (2) a 4-channel voltage module,
(3) a 16-channel high-density current input module, and (4) a 16-channel
high-density voltage input module.
H Analog Output
Series 90-30 analog output modules provide D/A (Digital to Analog) conversion
by converting a scaled digital number (from the PLC’s %AQ memory) into an
analog output voltage. Analog output modules are provided in three versions,
(1) a 2-channel current module, (2) a 2-channel voltage module, and (3) a
high-density current/voltage module with 8 analog output channels.
FANUC CNC Controls

GFK-0356P 7-1
7
H Analog Combination Module

An analog combination module provides 4 A/D input channels and 2 D/A output
channels on one module. Each of the input and output channels can be
configured individually for current or voltage mode.
H Third-Party Modules
In addition to the modules discussed in this chapter, numerous third-party I/O
modules (and other hardware and software products) for the Series 90-30 PLC
are available to meet a wide variety of needs. Third-party companies that meet
GE Fanuc’s standards may apply for recognition under the GE Fanuc
Accompany Program. Details on this program are found in the GE Fanuc
Automation Solutions Catalog, or on the GE Fanuc web site, both listed below.
For information on third-party modules, consult the following:
H Your GE Fanuc PLC distributor or sales engineer
H The GE Fanuc web site at http://www.gefanuc.com
H The GE Fanuc Automation Solutions Catalog, GFW-0067
7
Discrete I/O Modules
Discrete I/O Module Point Density

There are two density categories for these modules:
D Standard Density Modules: Standard density modules have up to 16
circuits (also called “points”) per module. These modules are equipped with
a removeable terminal board. See the following figure.
D High Density Modules: High density modules have 32 circuits per module.
These modules have either a 50-pin connector, or two 24-pin connectors
mounted on their faceplates. Connection choices are discussed later in this
chapter.
Standard Density Discrete I/O Module Features

Standard Density(16 points or less) Modules have the following features (refer to the
following figure):
H Removeable Terminal Board. You can remove the terminal board from the module
in order to wire it, if desired. Then, when you are finished wiring it, you can easily
reinstall it on the module. However, some prefer to leave it on the module when
wiring. If you ever need to replace a module, you don’t have to do any rewiring if
your old terminal board is still in good condition. Simply remove the wired terminal
board from the old module and install it on the new module. The terminal board
screw terminals are also convenient points for measuring voltages while testing or
troubleshooting.
H Hinged Front Cover. The cover is easily opened to access the terminal board
connections. Normally it’s kept closed to protect personnel from accidentally
touching a hot terminal. Note in the following figure that the back side of the front
cover insert contains a schematic diagram of the terminal board connections. The
module catalog number (IC693MDL940 in the example shown) is printed on the
bottom of the front cover insert. The module catalog number is also printed on the
label on the side of the module. However, in order to see this side label, the module
has to be removed from the PLC
On the front side of the front cover insert are lines that correspond to the module’s
I/O points. You can temporarily remove the insert and write the signal name for
each point on the appropriate line, as shown in the example in the figure.
Also on the front side of the front cover insert, running vertically on the left edge of
the insert, is a color bar that identifies the type of module: Blue = DC, Red = AC,
and Gray = Analog.
H Module Lens Cap. Located on the top front of the module, it covers the LED (Light
Emitting Diode) status lights . These are labeled in the following figure in two
groups, A1 through A8, and B1 through B8. Since this is a figure of a 16-Point
Output module, there are 16 LED status lights. (The number of status lights on any
given module is a function of the number of circuits points on that module.) If you
compare these status lights to the connection diagram on the back of the hinged
cover, you will notice that the outputs on this module are in two groups, labeled
A1–A8 and B1–B8, that correspond to the A and B rows of status LEDs. Note the
additional LED on the right side of the lens cap that is labeled with the letter F. This
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
Chapter 7 Input and Output Modules 7-3
7
is a blown fuse indicator light. This letter F is present on all of the discrete I/O
module lens caps, but is only functional on certain Output Modules that have
internal fuses. It only lights if an internal fuse is blown. A table with a list of
modules having fuses as well as other details about the status LEDs is provided in
Chapter 13 of this manual.
a43082A
Lens Cap
A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
STATUS F Fuse Indicator LED
LEDs B1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Hinged Cover
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Front View
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ OUTPUT Module Type

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
RELAY N.O. 2 AMP
OUTPUT
1 Color Bar
RELAY N.O. 2 AMP
Indicates Type
2 A1
A1 of Module A1 Pilot Light 1
3 A2
A2 V
4 A2 Pilot Light 2
A3
A3
5 A4
A4 A3 Control ON
6 Removable
A4 Emargency Stop
Removable Insert
A5
Terminal 7
A5 Pump 1 ON
Board 8 A6 V HInged Cover
9 A7 A6 Pump 2 ON
Connection
10 Motor Starter 1
A8 Diagram on A7
11 Back of Insert
A8 MotorStarter 2
12 B1
B1 CR 1
13 V
B2
14 B3 User can Write B2 CR 2
Signal Names on
15 B4 Front of Insert B3 CR 3
16
B4 CR 4
17 B5
SOL 1
B5
18 B6 V
B6 SOL 2
19 B7
20 B8 B7 SOL 3
44A726782–015 B8 SOL 4
FOR USE WITH
IC693MDL940 Module Catalog No.
Figure 7-1. Example of Series 90-30 Standard Density Discrete Output Module
7
Wiring Standard Density (16-Point or Less) Discrete Modules

There are three basic wiring methods:
D Direct Method. Run the wires from the field devices (switches, relays, etc.)
directly to the screws on the modules’ terminal boards.
D Terminal Strip Method. Mount a terminal strip inside the control enclosure
and wire from the terminal strip to the modules’ terminal boards. Then
wire field devices to the terminal strip.
D Terminal Block Quick Connect Assembly Method. The Terminal Block
Quick Connect Assembly has three pieces: a faceplate, a cable, and a
terminal block. The faceplate snaps onto an I/O module in place of its
normal terminal board. This faceplate has a connector that mates with the
cable. In turn, the cable plugs into a connector on the terminal block. The
terminal block mounts on a DIN-rail in a convenient place in your enclosure.
The terminal block is used for connecting to field devices such as switches
and relays. This method saves, on the average, over two hours of wiring
time per module when compared with the Terminal Strip method. For
more information, see Appendix J, “Terminal Block Quick Connect
Components.”
Discrete Relay Output Module Protection

Output points on discrete relay output modules that switch an inductive load such as a
relay coil, lamp filament, or solenoid coil should have external protection. This is usually
in the form of an R-C (Resistor-Capacitor) network across an AC load, or a reverse-biased
diode across a DC load. Please see GFK-0898, Series 90-30 PLC I/O Module Specifications,
for details.
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
7
High Density (32-Point) Discrete Module Features

D There are two types of these modules. One type has a single 50-pin
connector on its faceplate, the other type has a pair of 24-pin connectors on
its faceplate (see next two figures).
D The dual 24-pin type has LED status indicators. The 50-pin type does not.
The LED status indicators are arranged in four groups of eight across,
labeled A, B, C, and D. They are located at the top of the module (see next
figure).
D 32-point modules are only available in 5, 12, and 24 VDC ratings.
D None of the 32-point modules are fused.
D These modules are useful in applications where a high count of DC I/O

points is required. The maximum number of I/O points for a Series 90-30
system can be obtained by using a CPU that supports a total of eight 10-slot
racks, and by populating the racks with 32-point modules. The theoretical
maximum number of I/O points possible is calculated by adding the 9
available slots in the CPU rack (the CPU must occupy one slot) to the 70 slots
in the seven 10-slot expansion or remote racks to get a total of 79 slots.
Multiply 79 times 32 for a maximum of 2,528 I/O points (only CPUs 350 –
364 support this many I/O points). Of course, this assumes that every slot is
populated with a 32-point I/O module. Most practical applications require
that you use some slots for option modules, so the number of slots available
for I/O modules will be reduced accordingly.
A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
F
B1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
LED Indicators
C1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
INPUT
5/12 VDC
POS/NEG LOGIC
3.0 mA/Pt at 5VDC
Pin B12 Pin A12 8.5 mA/Pt at 12VDC Pin A1 Pin B1
CD AB
Left Side Right Side

Connector Connector
Pin B1 Pin A1 Pin A12 Pin B12
Figure 7-2. Example of 32-Point I/O Module (IC693MDL654) With Dual Connectors
7
33 1
19
INPUT 32 PT
24 VDC ISOL
NEG/POS LOGIC
32
50 18
7.5 mA/Pt
Connector Pin
Numbering
Figure 7-3. Example of 32-Point I/O Module (IC693MDL653) With Single Connector
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
7
Wiring Methods for 32-Point Discrete I/O Modules
Modules with Single 50-Pin Connector

Three choices are available for connecting these modules.
D Connect to a Weidmuller #912263 terminal block using one of the two GE
Fanuc “extension” cables (see next figure). Cable IC693CBL306 is 3 feet
(1meter) long. Cable IC693CBL307 is 6 feet (2 meters) long. Chapter 10,
“Cables,” has details on these cables.
D Connect to a user-supplied terminal block/strip or I/O field devices using
one of the two GE Fanuc “interface” cables. These cables have a 50-pin
connector on one end that plugs into the module, and stripped, tinned leads
on the other for wiring to a terminal block/strip or I/O field devices. Cable
IC693CBL308 is 3 feet (1 meter) long, and cable IC693CBL309 is 6 feet (2
meters) long. These cables are useful if you have to run your wiring
through conduit that is too small for a connector to fit through.
D Build a custom length cable. This is required if you need a cable longer than
6 feet (2 meters). See the IC693CBL308/309 data sheet in Chapter 10 for
pin-out details.
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
IC693CBL306/307
50-Pin, 32–Point Extension Cable
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
I/O Module a44838A
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
Series 90–30 PLC
Weidmuller 912263
Terminal Block
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
50
End
View 1
Î Î Î
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
Î Î Mounts on
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Top
View
25
DIN-Rail
Figure 7-4. 50-PIN, 32 Point I/O Module Connection Method
7
Modules with Dual 24-Pin Connectors

Three choices are available for connecting these modules
D Connect to a pair of Terminal Block Quick Connect (TBQC) terminal blocks
(IC693ACC337) using a pair of GE Fanuc cables. Three lengths of cables are
available: 20” (0.5 meter), 3 feet (1 meter), 6 feet (2 meters). The cables come
in right hand and left hand types because the connectors on the modules are
oriented differently (see figure 7-2). For details on the terminal blocks and
cables, please see Appendix J.
D Connect to user supplied terminal block/strip or directly to I/O field devices
using a pair of 10 foot (3 meter) GE Fanuc interface cables. These cables
have 24-pin connectors on one end for connecting to the module, and
stripped, tinned leads on the other for wiring to a terminalblock/striporI/O
devices. Cable IC693CBL327 is for the left side and IC693CBL328 is for the
right side. These cables are useful if you have to run your wiring through
conduit that is too small for a connector to fit through, or if you need a cable
longer than six feet. Chapter 10, “Cables,” has details on these cables.
D Build a custom length cable. This is required if you need a cable longer than
10 feet (3 meters). See the IC693CBL327/328 data sheet in Chapter 10 for
details on building custom length cables.
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
7
Analog Module Features

Analog Modules have the following basic features (refer to the following figure):
H Removeable Terminal Board. You can remove the terminal board from the module
in order to wire it, if desired. Then, when you are finished wiring it, you can easily
reinstall it on the module. However, some prefer to leave it on the module when
wiring. If you ever need to replace a module, you don’t have to do any rewiring if
your old terminal board is still in good condition. Simply remove the wired terminal
board from the old module and install it on the new module if it is good condition.
The terminal board screw terminals are also convenient points for measuring
voltages while testing or troubleshooting.
H Hinged Front Cover. The cover is easily opened to access the terminal board
connections. For normal operation, it is kept closed to protect personnel from
accidentally touching a hot terminal. Note in the following figure that the back side
of the front cover insert contains a schematic diagram of the terminal board
connections. The module catalog number (IC693ALG391 in this example) is printed
on the bottom of the front cover insert. The module catalog number is also printed
on the label on the side of the module. However, in order to see this side label, the
module has to be removed from the PLC
On the front side of the front cover insert are lines that correspond to the module’s
I/O points. You can temporarily remove the insert and write the signal name for
each point on the appropriate line to aid in testing or troubleshooting.
Also on the front side of the front cover insert, running vertically on the left edge of
the insert, is a colored line that identifies the type of module: Blue = DC, Red = AC,
and Gray = Analog.
H Module Lens Cap. Located on the top front of the module, it covers the LED (Light
Emitting Diode) OK status light. This light indicates the basic status of the module.
For normal operation, the OK LED should be on.
7
Lens Cap a43082B
OK Module OK LED
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
OUTPUT Module Type
ANALOG
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
CURRENT
1 VOUT1 Hinged Cover
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
VOUT2
2 A1
IOUT1
3 1
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
A2 Removeable Insert
IOUT2
4 A3
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
RTN1
5 A4 2
RTN2
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
6
Removeable Terminal Board GND
7
GND
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
8
JMPV1
9
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ 10 JMPV2
Connection Diagram
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
DEF0
11
OPT. CONN. SEE USER’S MANUAL

12 *
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
13
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
0–20mA
14 CH1
15 *
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
17
16
18
* +
24V
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
–
19
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
CH2 * *
20 0–20mA
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
44A729182-021R01
FOR USE WITH
IC693ALG391 Module Catalog No.
Figure 7-5. Example of Series 90-30 Analog Current Output Module
Wiring Methods for Analog Modules

Twisted, shielded instrumentation cable is strongly recommended for analog module
input or output signal connections. Proper grounding of the shield is also important.
For maximum electrical noise suppression, the cable shield should only be grounded at
one end of the cable. For Input modules, ground the end that is in the noisiest
environment (which often is at the field device end). For Output modules, ground at the
module end. See GFK-0898, Series 90-30 PLC I/O Module Specifications, for more shield
Analog Input Module Wiring Methods

Correcting electrical noise problems can sometimes be a trial-and-error routine.
However, in general, it is generally best to ground the cable shield as close to the source
of the noise as possible, which is usually at the device end. In troubleshooting noise
problems, sometimes it is beneficial to experiment with the shield grounding point
location. Remember, the cable shield should be grounded at one end only. Also, it is best
to keep the length of stripped cable leads as short as possible to minimize the length of
unshielded conductors that will be exposed to the noisy environment. See the Series
90-30 PLC I/O Module Specifications Manual, GFK-0898 for additional details.
D Direct Method. Run a shielded cable from the field device (transducer,
potentiometer, etc.) directly to the module. Connect the conductors to the
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
7
applicable screws on the module’s terminal board. Ground the shield at the
field device end, exposing a minimum amount of conductor to the noisy
environment. Do not connect the shield at the module end (insulate it with
shrink tubing).
D Terminal Strip Method. Mount a terminal strip inside the control enclosure
and run a shielded cable from the terminal strip to the module’s terminal
board terminals. Connect the shield to the metal panel next to the terminal
strip. Do do not connect the shield at the module end (insulate it with
shrink tubing). Wire the field device to the terminal strip with a shielded
cable, grounding the shield at the device end only (insulate the other end of
the shield with shrink tubing). Also, keep the length of exposed leads at the
terminal strip and device ends as short as possible.
Note
TBQC – The Terminal Block Quick Connect Assembly is not

recommended for use with analog modules due to cable shielding
requirements.
Analog Output Module Wiring

Each output should be connected using a good quality shielded wire with the shield
grounded at the module end only. See GFK-0898, Series 90-30 PLC I/O Module
Specifications, for more information.
I/O Module Power Supply Current Draw

These values are found in Chapter 12 of this manual, which discusses how to calculate
power supply loading. The information is also found in GFK-0898, Series 90-30 PLC I/O
Module Specifications.
I/O Module Wire Routing

To reduce noise coupling among PLC wires, it is recommended you keep electrically
noisy wiring, such as AC power wiring and Discrete Output Module wiring, physically
separated from low-level signal wiring such as connections to DC and Analog Input
modules. This can be accomplished by grouping separately, where practical, the
following categories of wiring:
D AC power wiring. This includes the AC input to the PLC power supply, as
well as other AC devices in the control cabinet.
D Analog Input and Output Module wiring. This should also be shielded to
further reduce noise coupling.
D Discrete Output Module wiring. These often switch inductive loads that
produce noise spikes when switched off.
D DC Input Module wiring. Although suppressed internally, these low-level
inputs should be further protected against noise coupling by observing
these wiring practices.
7
Grouping Modules to Keep Wires Segregated

If practical, grouping similar modules together in the PLC racks can help keep wiring
segregated. For example, one rack could contain only AC modules and a different rack
only DC modules, with further grouping in each rack by input and output types. For
smaller systems, as an example, the left end of a rack could contain Analog modules, the
middle could contain DC modules, and the right end could contain AC modules. Where
AC or Output wiring bundles must pass near low-level signal wiring bundles, avoid
running them beside each other. Route them so that, if they have to cross, they do so at
a right angle. This will minimize coupling between them.
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
7
IC693DVM300 Digital Valve Driver Module

This 4-channel digital valve driver module is capable of driving loads of up to 1.6 Amps
at 24 VDC. Although it mounts in a standard Series 90-30 PLC slot, it does not connect to
the PLC backplane. Its control power and output power come from an external supply.
(The GE Fanuc IC690PWR124 stand-alone power supply would be a suitable choice.)
This module is designed for TTL (5 Vdc) inputs.
DIG CH: 1 3
2 4
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
PWR
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ OUTPUT
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
28V 1.6A max.
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
1 +28V.IN
2 +28V.RET
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
3 AUX.OUT.+15
4
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
AUX.OUT.–15
5 DIGITAL.1.IN
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
6 DIGITAL.2.IN
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
7 DIGITAL.3.IN
8 DIGITAL.4.IN
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
9 DIGITAL.RET
10
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
+28V1.IN
11 +28V2.IN
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
12 28V1&2.RET
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
13 VALVE.1.OUT
14 VALVE.1.RET
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
15 VALVE.2.OUT
16
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
VALVE.2.RET
17 VALVE.3.OUT
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
18 VALVE.3.RET
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
19 VALVE.4.OUT
20 VALVE.4.RET
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Figure 7-6. IC693DVM300 Digital Valve Driver Module
Indicator LEDs
D DIG CH: 1 - 4: These light when their corresponding input is at a Logic 1 level.
D PWR: Lights to indicate the presence of +26 VDC (nominal) input power on
terminals 1 and 2.
7
DVM Specifications
Table 7-1. IC693DVM300 Specifications
OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS
Outputs (Channels) per Module 4
Isolation 2500 Vrms (optical isolation)
Nominal Output Voltage 24 Vdc
Power Supply for Output Channels 26 Vdc nominal, 21 Vdc minimum, 35 Vdc
maximum
Output Current 1.6 Amps maximum per channel
6.4 Amps maximum total per module
Output Voltage Drop (fully loaded) 0.32 Vdc
Off state leakage current 26 µA at 26 Vdc operating voltage
Turn-on response time < 1 µS with resistive load
Turn-off response time < 1 µS with resistive load
Output protection (per channel) Reversed-biased zener diode for
free-wheeling inductive current. Also 36
Volt transorb for ESD and surge
protection.
INPUT CHARACTERISTICS
Input Voltage 5 VDC (TTL) nominal, 12Vdc Maximum
Logic 1 Level Logic 1: V > 3.5 Vdc
Logic 0: V < 0.7 Vdc
Input Current 3.8 mA nominal
Input protection 13.3 Volt transorb
AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY OUTPUTS
Voltage and Current +15 VDC @ 0.3A and –15 VDC @ 0.2A
Isolation Not isolated
MODULE POWER REQUIREMENTS
Power Consumption (Does not consume 5.6 Watts (with all outputs on) from
any power from PLC backplane.) external supply connected to terminals 1
and 2 (does not include power consumed
by outputs)
Input Voltage +26 VDC nominal, 35 VDC maximum
continuous
Fuses
H Quantity 1 – Module control power. 1 Amp. Buss GDB-1A.
H Quantity 4 – One for each output. 2 Amps. Littlefuse 239002.
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
7
DVM Connections
Table 7-2. IC693DVM300 Connections
Pin Signal Name Connection Description

No.
1 +28V.IN Module Control Power + input terminal (common on pin 2).
Supplies power to module’s signal-level circuits and auxiliary
+15 and –15 Volt power supplies (pins 2, 3, and 4). Requires
external 26 VDC (nominal) power supply
2 +28V.RET Common terminal for Module Control Power (pin 1).
3 AUX.OUT.+1 + 15 Vdc @ 0.3A Auxiliary power output for external circuits.
5 Not isolated. Developed from input power on pins 1 and 2.
4 AUT.XOUT.–1 – 15 Vdc @ 0.2A Auxiliary power output for external circuits.
5 Not isolated. Developed from input power on pins 1 and 2.
5 DIGITAL.1.IN Channel 1 TTL input connection (common on pin 9)
9 DIGITAL.RET Common connection for Digital Input Channels 1 – 4 (pins 5 –
8)
10 +28V1.IN Power Supply connection for Output Channels 1 and 2
(common on pin 12). Required external 26 VDC (nominal)
power supply.
11 +28V2.IN Power Supply connection for Output Channels 3 and 4
(common on pin 12). Required external 26 VDC (nominal)
power supply.
12 28V1&2.RET Common connection for both Output Channel Power Supply
inputs (pins 10 and 11)
13 VALVE1.OUT Channel 1 Output connection (return on pin 14)
14 VALVE1.RET Return connection for Channel 1 Output (pin 13)
7
Table 7-3. Series 90-30 Discrete I/O Modules
Catalog Number Points Description
Discrete Modules - Input

IC693MDL230 8 120 VAC Isolated
IC693MDL231 8 240 VAC Isolated
IC693MDL240 16 120 VAC
IC693MDL241 16 24 VAC
IC693MDL630 8 24 VDC Positive Logic
IC693MDL632 8 125 VDC Positive/NegativeLogic
IC693MDL633 8 24 VDC Negative Logic
IC693MDL634 8 24 VDC Positive/Negative
IC693MDL640 16 24 VDC Positive Logic
IC693MDL641 16 24 VDC Negative Logic
IC693MDL643 16 24 VDC Positive Logic, FAST
IC693MDL644 16 24 VDC Negative Logic, FAST
IC693MDL646 16 24 VDC Positive/NegativeLogicFAST
IC693MDL653 32 24 VDC Positive/NegativeLogic,FAST
IC693MDL654 32 5/12 VDC (TTL) Positive/NegativeLogic
IC693ACC300 16 Input Simulator
Discrete Modules - Output

IC693MDL310 12 120 VAC, 0.5A
IC693MDL330 8 120/240VAC, 2A
IC693MDL340 16 120 VAC, 0.5A
IC693MDL390 5 120/240VAC Isolated, 2A
IC693MDL730 8 12/24VDCPositive Logic, 2A
IC693MDL731 8 12/24 VDC Negative Logic, 2A
IC693MDL732 8 12/24VDCPositive Logic, 0.5A
IC693MDL733 8 12/24 VDC Negative Logic
IC693MDL734 6 125 VDC Positive/NegativeLogic,1A
IC693MDL740 16 12/24VDCPositive Logic, 0.5A
IC693MDL741 16 12/24 VDC Negative Logic, 0.5A
IC693MDL742 16 12/24VDCPos. Logic, Electronic Short Circuit Protect
IC693MDL750 32 12/24 VDC Negative Logic
IC693MDL751 32 12/24VDCPositive Logic
IC693MDL752 32 5/24 VDC (TTL) Negative Logic
IC693MDL753 32 12/24VDCPositive/NegativeLogic,0.5A
IC693MDL930 8 Relay, 4A Isolated
IC693MDL940 16 Relay, 2A
IC693MDL931 8 Relay, Isolated, N.C. and Form C, 8A
IC693DVM300 4 Digital Valve Driver module, 1.6A, 24 VDC
DiscreteModules-CombinationInput/Output
IC693MAR590 8/8 120 VAC Input, Relay Output
IC693MDR390 8/8 24 VDC Input, Relay Output
Table 7-4. Series 90-30 Analog I/O Modules
Catalog Number Channels Description
AnalogModules
IC693ALG220 4 Analog Input, Voltage
IC693ALG221 4 Analog Input, Current
IC693ALG222 16 Analog Input, Voltage, High Density
IC693ALG223 16 Analog Input, Current, High Density
IC693ALG390 2 Analog Output, Voltage
IC693ALG391 2 Analog Output, Current
IC693ALG392 8 Analog Output, Current/Voltage, High Density
IC693ALG442 4 In/2 Out Analog Current/VoltageCombinationInput/Output
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
Chapter Option Modules
8
This chapter provides an overview of Series 90-30 Option modules. For detailed
information, the applicable user’s manual should be consulted (these manuals are listed
for each module at the end of its section).
Third-Party Option Modules and the Accompany Program

In addition to the modules discussed in this chapter, numerous third-party option
modules (and other hardware and software products) for the Series 90-30 PLC are
available to meet a wide variety of needs. Third-party companies that meet GE Fanuc’s
standards may apply for recognition under the GE Fanuc Accompany Program. Details
on the Accompany Program are found in the GE Fanuc Automation Solutions Catalog or
on the GE Fanuc web site, both listed below. For information on third-party modules,
consult the following:
H Your GE Fanuc PLC distributor or sales engineer
H The GE Fanuc web site at http://www.gefanuc.com
H The GE Fanuc Automation Solutions Catalog, GFW-0067
Option Modules Discussed in this Chapter

H IC693CMM301 Genius Communications Module (GCM)
H IC693CMM302 Enhanced Genius Communications Module (GCM+)
H IC693BEM331 Genius Bus Controller (GBC)
H IC693BEM340 FIP Bus Controller (FBC)
H IC693BEM330 FIP Remote I/O Scanner
H IC693APU301/302 Motion Mate Axis Positioning Module (APM)
H IC693DSM302 Motion Mate Digital Servo Module (DSM302)
H IC693DSM314 Motion Mate Digital Servo Module (DSM314) – Preliminary
H IC693APU300 High Speed Counter (HSC) Module
H IC693BEM320 I/O Link Interface Module
H IC693BEM321 I/O Link Master Module
H IC693APU305 I/O Processor Module
H IC693CMM321 Ethernet Interface Module
H IC693PCM300/301/311Programmable Coprocessor Module (PCM)
H IC693CMM311 Communications Control Module (CCM)
H IC693ADC311 Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor (ADC) Module
H IC693TCM302 Temperature Control Module (TCM)
H IC693PTM100 Power Transducer Module (PTM) –Preliminary
GFK-0356P 8-1
8
IC693CMM301 Genius Communications Module (GCM)

The Genius Communications Module (IC693CMM301) for the Series 90-30 PLC provides global
communications on a Genius Communications bus between Series 90-30 PLCs and/or other
GE Fanuc PLCs. Series 90-70, Series Six, and Series Five PLCs can communicate on this bus
through their respective Genius Bus Controllers.
The Genius Communications bus is a token passing peer-to-peer, noise immune network
optimized to provide high speed transfer of real time control data. Up to eight Series 90-30
PLC CPUs, in any combination, can communicate with each other over a single Genius I/O
serial bus using a standard twisted pair, shielded cable.
a45138
GENIUS
COMM
OK
COM
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
GENIUS
COMMUNICATIONS
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
MODULE
1
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
SER
3
1
4
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
5
6
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
7
SER
8
2
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
9
10
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
11
12
SHD
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
13
IN
14
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
15
16
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
17
SHD
18
OUT
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
19
20
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
44A729182–016R02
FOR USE WITH
IC693CMM301 / 302
Figure 8-1. The IC693CMM301 GCM Module
Status LEDs
The LEDs on the front of the GCM module indicate its operating status and should be on
during normal operation.
OK Shows the status of the GCM module. This LED turns on after power up
diagnostics are completed.
COM Shows the status of the Genius communications bus. This LED is on steadily when
the bus is operating properly. It blinks for intermittent bus errors and is off for a
failed bus. It is also off when no configuration has been received from the PLC CPU.
8-2
FANUC CNC Controls
8
a43391
FIRST LAST
ÎÎ Î Î Î
DEVICE DEVICE
ÎÎ Î Î Î
SERIAL SERIAL SERIAL SERIAL
1 1 1 1
ÎÎ
SERIAL
Î
SERIAL
Î
SERIAL
Î
SERIAL R
ÎÎ Î Î Î
2 2 2 2
ÎÎ Î Î Î
SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD
IN IN IN IN
ÎÎ Î Î Î
SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD
OUT OUT OUT OUT
Figure 8-2. Genius Bus Wiring Schematic
a42915
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
SERIES 90-30 SERIES 90-30
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
C G
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î G
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
P C C
U M M
GENIUS COMMUNICATIONS BUS
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
SERIES 90-70
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î
G
B
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
C
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Figure 8-3. Example of Genius Communications Network
GCM Documentation
For detailed information on the Genius Communications Module, including installation
instructions, refer to GFK-0412, the Series 90-30 Genius Communications Module User’s
Manual.
GFK-0356P Chapter 8 Option Modules 8-3

8
IC693CMM302 Enhanced Genius Communications Module (GCM+)

The Enhanced Genius Communications Module (GCM+), IC693CMM302, is an intelligent
module that provides automatic global data communications between a Series 90-30 PLC
and up to 31 other devices on a Genius bus.
The GCM+ can be located in any standard Series 90-30 CPU baseplate, expansion base-
plate, or remote baseplate. However, for most efficient operation, it is recommended that
the module be installed in the CPU baseplate since the sweep impact time of the GCM+
module depends on the model of PLC and the baseplate where it is located. Note: if a GCM
module is present in a system, GCM+ modules cannot be included in the system.
Multiple GCM+ modules can be installed in a Series 90-30 PLC system with each GCM+
having its own Genius bus serving up to 31 additional devices on the bus. For example, this
allows a Series 90-30 PLC with three GCM+ modules to exchange global data with as many
as 93 other Genius devices automatically. In addition to basic global data exchange, the
GCM+ module can be used for various applications such as:
H Data monitoring by a personal computer or an industrial computer.
H Monitoring data from Genius I/O blocks (although it cannot control Genius I/O
blocks).
H Peer-to-peer communications among devices on the bus.
H Master-slave communications among devices on the bus (emulates remote I/O).
The Genius bus connects to the terminal board on front of the GCM+ module.
a45138
ENHANCED
GENIUS
OK
COMM
COM
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
GENIUS
COMMUNICATIONS
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
MODULE
1
2
SER
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
3
1
4
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
5
6
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
7
SER
8
2
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
9
10
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
11
12
SHD
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
13
IN
14
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
15
16
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
17
SHD
18
OUT
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
19
20
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
44A729182–016R02
FOR USE WITH
IC693CMM301 / 302
Figure 8-4. Enhanced Genius Communications Module
8-4
FANUC CNC Controls
8
Status LEDs
The LEDs on the front of the GBC indicate its operating status and should be on during
normal operation.
OK Shows the status of the GBC module. This LED turns on after power up
GCM+ Documentation
For more information about the GCM+, refer to GFK-0695, Series 90-30 Enhanced Genius
Communications Module User’s Guide.

8
IC693BEM331 Genius Bus Controller (GBC)

The Series 90-30 Genius Bus Controller (GBC), catalog number IC693BEM331, provides
the interface between a Series 90-30 PLC and a Genius I/O serial bus. The GBC receives
and transmits control data of up to 128 bytes for up to 31 devices on the Genius I/O bus.
A Genius Bus Controller can serve:
H Genius blocks, which provide an interface to a wide range of discrete, analog, and
special-purpose field devices. Note that the GCM and GCM+ modules, described
earlier, cannot control Genius blocks.
H Remote Drops, which consist of Series 90-70 I/O racks interfaced to the bus through
Remote I/O Scanner modules. Each of these drops can have any mix of Series 90-70
discrete and analog I/O modules, providing up to 128 bytes of input data and 128
bytes of output data.
H Field Control I/O Station, which consists of a Bus Interface Unit (BIU) and up to
eight additional Field Control modules. The BIU provides intelligent processing, I/O
scanning, and feature configuration for the I/O station.
H Genius Hand-Held Monitor (HHM), which is a portable device that can also be
permanently mounted. The HHM provides a convenient operator interface for
block setup, data monitoring, and diagnostics.
H Multiple hosts, for communications using datagrams and Global Data.
a47051
GENIUS
BUS
CONTROL OK
COM
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
GENIUS
BUS
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
CONTROLLER
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
2
SER
3
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
1
4
5
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
6
7
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
SER
8
2
9
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
10
11
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
12
SHD
13
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
IN
14
15
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
16
17
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
18 SHD
19 OUT
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
20
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
44A729182–068R01
FOR USE WITH
IC693BEM331
Figure 8-5. Genius Bus Controller Module
A bus may feature I/O control, enhanced by communications commands in the program.
Or, a bus can be used entirely for I/O control, with many I/O devices and no additional
communications. A bus can also be dedicated to CPU communications, with multiple
CPUs and no I/O devices. More complex systems can also be developed, with dual CPUs
and one or more additional CPUs for data monitoring.
8-6
FANUC CNC Controls
8
Number of Genius Bus Controllers

Up to eight Genius Bus Controllers or Enhanced Genius Communications Modules can
be included in a Series 90-30 PLC system that has release 5.0 or later Logicmaster 90-30
software, and release 5.0 or later CPU firmware. A GBC cannot be installed in a system
with a GCM.
The I/O devices on a bus may be Genius I/O blocks, or standard Series 90-70 I/O modules
in one or more remote drops. The total number of I/O circuits that can be served by one
Genius bus depends on the types of I/O devices that are used and the memory available
in the CPU.
Many Genius I/O blocks have both inputs and outputs on the same block. Blocks
configured in the Logicmaster 90-30 software as having both inputs and outputs will
occupy the identical number of references in both %I and %Q memory, regardless of the
block’s software configuration. Unused references cannot be assigned to other inputs or
outputs, and should not be used in the application program.
Status LEDs
The LEDs on the front of the GBC indicate its operating status and should be on during
normal operation.
OK Shows the status of the GBC module. This LED turns on after power up
Compatibility
Specific equipment or software versions required for compatibility with the GBC module
are listed below.
Series 90-30 PLC

CPU: The GBC module can be used with CPU models: IC693CPU311K, 321K, 331L or
later, or any version of the IC693CPU313, 323, 340, 341, 350, 351, 352, 360, 363, and 364.
The CPU firmware must be release 5.0 or later.
Logicmaster 90-30 software: rel. 5.0 (IC641SWP301L, 304J, 306F, 307F) or later is required.
Series Six PLC

To exchange global data with a Genius Bus Controller, the Series Six Bus Controller must
be catalog number IC660CBB902F/903F (firmware version 1.5), or later.
Genius Hand-Held Monitor

The Genius Hand-Held Monitor can be used to display the GBC bus address, its
software version, and the Series Six register address configured for global data. HHM
version IC660HHM501H (revision 4.5) or later is required. There is no Hand-Held
Monitor connector on the GBC module, but a Hand-Held Monitor can communicate
with the GBC while connected to any other device on the bus. Optionally, an additional
HHM mating connector can be installed on the bus near the GBC.

8
Hand-Held Programmer
The GBC can be configured using a Series 90-30 Hand-Held Programmer
(IC693PRG300).
Genius I/O Blocks

Genius I/O blocks can be present on the same bus as the GBC. However, because the Bus
Controller is not compatible with older phase A blocks, they should not be installed on the
same bus.
Genius Bus
The Genius bus is a shielded twisted-pair wire, daisy-chained between devices, and
terminated at both ends. Proper cable selection is critical to successful operation of the
system. Suitable cable types are listed in GEK-90486-1, the Genius I/O System and
Communications User’s Manual.
Diagnostics
Genius blocks and other devices on the bus automatically report faults, alarms and
certain other predefined conditions to the PLC.
INPUTS AND FAULT MESSAGE a43556

FROM BLOCK 3
GBC
1 2 3 4
TOKEN
F F
F FAULT
Only one diagnostic message can be sent during any bus scan. If a fault message has
already been sent (by another device) during that scan, a device saves its own diagnostic
message until the next available bus scan. For example, if the communications token is
currently at device 3, and faults occur at devices 3 and 4 at the same time, device 3 can
send its diagnostic message if another message has not already been sent. Device 4 must
wait at least one more bus scan to send its diagnostic message.
The GBC stores any diagnostic messages it receives. They are read automatically by the
Series 90-30 CPU. Faults can then be displayed in the fault table using the Logicmaster
90-30 software. A Genius Hand-held Monitor must be used to clear the faults from the
fault table.
Datagrams
The Series 90-30 GBC supports all Genius datagrams. Refer to chapter 3 of the Genius
I/O System and Communications User’s Manual, GEK-90486-1, for details on using
datagrams.
Global Data
Global Data is data that is automatically and repeatedly broadcast by a GBC. The Series
90-30 GBC can send up to 128 bytes of Global Data each bus scan. It can receive up to
128 bytes of Global Data each bus scan from each GBC on its bus.
8-8
FANUC CNC Controls
8
Sending Global Data

Once set up by configuration, Global Data is broadcast automatically. Other devices that
receive the Global Data sent by a Series 90-30 PLC place it in these memory locations:
Series 90-30 PLC Sends

Global Data To: Other CPU Places Global Data in these Memory Location:
Series 90-30 PLC %I, %Q, %G, %R, %AI, %AQ. Memory type and beginning
address are chosen during configuration of the receiving GBC.
Series 90-30 GCM+ %I, %Q, %G, %R, %AI, %AQ
Series90-30PLC/GCM %G memory location corresponding to Device Number (16-23)
of the Series 90-30 GBC that sent the data.
Series Six PLC Registermemory. Beginning Series Six address selected during
configuration of the Series 90-30 GBC that sent the data.
Series Five PLC Registermemory. Beginning Series Five address selected during
configuration of the Series 90-30 GBC that sent the data.
Computer PCIM or QBIM Input Table Segment corresponding to Device
Number of the Series 90-30 GBC that sent the data.
Receiving Global Data

The GBC can be configured to receive or ignore Global Data from any other GBC. The
memory type and length for incoming Global Data are also selected during
configuration. The Series 90-30 CPU can place incoming Global Data in %I, %Q, %G,
%R, %AI, or %AQ memory.
Genius Bus Controller Documentation:

See the following manuals for detailed information on the Series 90-30 Genius Bus
Controller and the Genius I/O system:
H GFK-1034 Series 90-30 Genius Bus Controller User’s Manual
H GEK-90486-1 Genius I/O System and Communications User’s Manual
H GEK-90486-2 Genius I/O Discrete and Analog Blocks User’s Manual
H GFK-0825 Field Control Distributed I/O and Control System - Genius Bus Interface
Unit User’s Manual
H GFK-0826 Field Control Distributed I/O and Control System - I/O Modules User’s
Manual

8
IC693BEM340 FIP Bus Controller (FBC) Module

The Series 90-30 PLC FIP (Factory Instrumentation Protocol) Bus Controller (catalog
number IC693BEM340) is used to interface a FIP I/O serial bus to a Series 90-30 PLC.

a46559
PS
CPU
FBC
PS
CPU
FBC
Optional Redundant FIP I/O Bus
Î
FIP I/O Bus
Field Control
Î ÎÎ Î Î
I/O Station
FIP Bus FIP Inter-
Î ÎÎ Î Î
PS
CPU
PS
Scanner
FBC
Interface Unit face Module
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Generic
Device
Up to 8 Field Control
Remote I/O Rack Series 90-30 PLC
modules (4 shown).
Î ÎÎ
Remote I/O Nest
ÎÎ
Optional Expansion Rack
Figure 8-6. Example of FIP I/O System Configuration
A FIP bus is used primarily for I/O control. It also is used to store configuration data to
remote devices and to report faults. Devices that can be on a FIP bus in a Series 90-30 PLC
system include:
H Series 90-70 PLC, interfaced to a FIP bus by a Fip Bus Controller.
H Field Control Stations, Field Control I/O modules that are interfaced to the bus via a
FIP Bus Interface Unit (BIU).
H Remote Drops, Series 90-30 I/O racks that are interfaced to the bus via FIP Remote
I/O Scanner Modules. Each remote drop can include one 5- or 10-slot main rack, one
5- or 10-slot expansion rack and any mix of discrete and analog I/O modules.
H Generic Devices, such as general-purpose computers that are interfaced to the bus
via a FIP Interface Module.
8-10
FANUC CNC Controls
8
The FIP Bus Controller is a standard, rack-mounted Series 90-30 PLC module. It plugs
easily into the PLC’s backplane. The latch on the bottom of the module secures it in
position.
a46560
Module OK
Run
Carrier Detect Ch. 1
Transmit Enable Ch. 1
Carrier Detect Ch. 2
Transmit Enable Ch. 2
15-Pin Serial Connector RS-485
9-Pin FIP Fieldbus Connector

(channel 1)
9-Pin FIP Fieldbus Connector

(channel 2)
Figure 8-7. Series 90-30 FIP Bus Controller
There are no DIP switches or jumpers to set on the module.

The Series 90-30 FIP Bus Controller has six status LEDs, an RS-485 serial port, and two
identical FIP bus connectors.
Status LEDs
The 6 LEDs on the front of the FIP Bus Controller display module status and
communications activity.
Serial Port
The 15-pin serial port is used to connect a computer for upgrading the operating
firmware of the Bus Controller and for configuring by an external configuration tool.
FIP Bus Connectors

The two 9-pin connectors on the FIP Bus Controller provide for attachment of one or
two FIP busses. The two busses provide a redundant bus capability.

8
IC693BEM330 FIP Remote I/O Scanner Module

The FIP (Factory Instrumentation Protocol) Remote I/O Scanner (catalog number
IC693BEM330) is an intelligent module that interfaces Series 90-30 I/O modules to a FIP
bus. Up to 19 I/O modules can be accommodated by using two 10-slot baseplates
connected by an expansion cable. Together, the Remote I/O Scanner and the modules it
serves are referred to as an I/O Nest. The FIP Nest can include most Series 90-30 I/O
modules.
The host CPU can be any type of CPU capable of communicating on a FIP bus. A module
in the host (such as a FIP Bus Controller) provides the necessary interface between the
FIP bus and the host CPU.
Hand-held 46550
Programmer
Host CPU
CPU I/O Nest
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
FIP
Scanner
Bus
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Controller
FIP Bus
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ Expansion Cable,
up to 50 feet (15 Meters)
Up to 128 devices
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
Figure 8-8. Example of FIP Remote I/O Scanner System Configuration
The Series 90-30 Hand-Held Programmer provides a convenient way to perform setup,
monitoring, and control functions.
Features of the Remote I/O Scanner

The FIP Remote I/O Scanner performs the following basic functions:
H controls operation of the I/O nest in the selected mode
H scans discrete and analog I/O modules and maintains I/O scan timing
H maps I/O data to FIP application variables
H detects module and system faults and reports them to the FIP network
H permits standalone configuration using Hand-Held Programmer
H retains its network configuration through loss of power
H permits I/O forcing from the Hand-Held Programmer
H detects and records input transitions
8-12
FANUC CNC Controls
8
H supports FIP messaging services

H responds to an external synchronization signal
H can provide blinking or pulsed outputs
H can provide input filtering and chatter detection
FIP Bus Interface

The Remote I/O Scanner communicates at a data rate of 1MHz. There are two versions
of the FIP communications standard: FIP and WORLD FIP. A DIP switch on the module
is used to select the version that will be used by the Remote I/O Scanner. (The same
communications method will then be used on both bus cables).
The DIP switch on the module must be set to the FIP position for the Remote I/O
Scanner to communicate with a Series 90-70 PLC.
Module Description
The FIP Remote I/O Scanner is a standard Series 90–30 PLC module that plugs easily
into the backplane of the baseplate.
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
FIP CH S2 46551
CD1
1.0 MHz
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
TEN1
CD2
LEDs
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
TEN2
ÎÎÎÎÎ C
ÎÎÎÎÎ
H
A
ÎÎÎÎÎ
N
N
E
ÎÎÎÎÎ
L
1 FIP Bus Connectors
ÎÎÎÎÎ
C
ÎÎÎÎÎ
H
A
N
ÎÎÎÎÎ
N
E
L
ÎÎÎÎÎ
2
ÎÎÎÎÎ
S
Y Synchro Connector
ÎÎÎÎÎ
N
C
ÎÎÎÎÎ
H
R
O Lug for Ground Wire
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Figure 8-9. FIP Bus Interface Module
Connectors
The front of the module has the following connectors:
CHANNEL 1 9-pin male D connectors for two FIP bus cables. A bus can be
CHANNEL 2 disconnected from the module without disturbing the continuity of the
bus. The second bus is a backup for the first bus; its use is optional.

8
SYNCHRO Connector for a FIP synchronization cable. It requires a mating connector

such as Molex #39-01-4031. The synchronization capability is not used in a
Series 90-70 PLC application.
(ground) The lug below the Synchro connector is used for the module ground wire
(provided). The other end of the ground wire must be connected to the
mounting bolt on the lower left corner of the baseplate and to chassis ground.
LEDs
There are two pairs of LEDs at the top of the module. The upper pair is for channel 1
and the lower pair is for channel 2.
CD1/CD2 the green Carrier Detected LEDs indicate the presence of a carrier-detect
signal on their respective channels.
TEN1/TEN2 the red Transmission Enabled LEDs indicate the module is generating
transmissions on their respective channels.
FIP Remote I/O Scanner Documentation:

H GFK-1037, Series 90-30 FIP Remote I/O Scanner User’s Manual
H GFK-1038, FIP Bus Controller User’s Manual
8-14
FANUC CNC Controls
8
IC693APU301/302 Motion Mate Axis Positioning Module (APM)

The Motion Mate APM is an easy-to-use intelligent, fully programmable 1-axis
(IC693APU301) or 2-axis (IC693APU302) motion control module for the Series 90-30 PLC.
The APM allows a PLC user to combine high-performance control with PLC logic solving
functions in one integrated system. The APM can be configured to operate in either
Standard mode or Follower mode. When used in Standard mode, it combines
high-performance motion control with PLC logic solving functions in one integrated system.
When used in Follower mode, it provides high-performance ”electronic gearing” for
continuous master/slave applications. The desired mode is easily selected by configuring a
setup parameter in the Logicmaster 90-30 Configuration software.
a45116A
EN1 STAT
EN2 OK
CFG
AXIS POS
MODULE
ONE
AXIS
C
O
M
M
B A
Figure 8-10. Motion Mate APM Module

The Series 90-30 and APM operate together as one integrated motion control package. The
APM controls axis motion and handles all direct communications to the drive and machine
while the PLC automatically transfers data between PLC tables and the APM.
The PLC also provides a means for connecting Operator Interfaces, which can control and
monitor system operation. An example of an APM servo system showing the hardware
and software used to configure, program, and operate the system is shown below.
The APM can be installed in any Series 90-30 CPU, expansion, or remote baseplate. For
embedded CPUs (311, 313, or 323), you may have up to three APM modules. For a
modular CPU (331 or higher), you may have up to eight APM modules in one system with
a maximum of three APM modules per baseplate. Logicmaster 90-30 or VersaPro software
is used to configure the APM.
Multiple motion programs may be created and stored in the APM (maximum of 10 may be
stored in the APM) with the Motion Programmer software package. Also, a single short

8
program can be created using the Program Zero Editor in the Logicmaster 90-30 software
package.
The APM faceplate (front panel) has two 24-pin high-density connectors for servo
connections. The connector labeled A contains connections for Axis 1. Connector B, for a
1-axis APM, contains general purpose connections. Connector B, for a 2-axis APM, has
connections for Axis 2 as well general purpose connections. To make wiring easier to the
drive and machine, each high-density connector is typically connected by a short cable to a
terminal block.
a45114A
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
CPU APM MACHINE 1
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
DRIVE
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ENCODER 1
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
MACHINE 2
ÎÎÎÎ DRIVE
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ MotionProgramming
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î
Configuration Software ENCODER 2
Software
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Figure 8-11. Example of Motion Mate APM Servo System
APM Cables
These cables consists of a 24-pin I/O connector , a cable, and a 25-pin D-type terminal
block connector. (Cables are documented in Chapter 10.) Available cables are:
H IC693CBL311 (10 feet/3 meters)
H IC693CBL319 (3 feet/1 meter)
H IC693CBL317 (10 feet/3 meters) with an 8” external shield pigtail
H C693CBL320 (3 feet/1 meter) with an 8” external shield pigtail
For building custom-length cables, the 24-pin I/O cable connector is available in three
different kits (solder eyelet receptacle, crimp wire receptacle, and IDC (ribbon)
receptacle). The terminal block is Weidmuller RD25 910648 or equivalent (must be
compatible with the I/O cable IC693CBL311/319/317/320 – see Chapter 10 for details).
Motion Mate APM Module Documentation

See the following manuals for detailed information on Power Mate APM Modules:
H GFK-0840 Motion Mate APM for Series 90-30 PLC Standard Mode User’s Manual
H GFK-0781 Motion Mate APM for Series 90-30 PLC Follower Mode User’s Manual
H GFK-0664 Series 90 PLC APM Programmer’s Manual
Related servo manual:
H GFK-1581 SL Series Servo User’s Manual
8-16
FANUC CNC Controls
8
IC693DSM302 Motion Mate Digital Servo Module (DSM302)

The Motion Mate DSM302 is a high-performance, 2-axis motion control module that is
highly integrated with the logic solving and communications functions of the Series
90-30 PLC. In digital mode, this module controls GE Fanuc digital servos. Beginning
with the release of Firmware 1.40, this module was provided with the capability of
controlling servos with an analog command input, such as the GE Fanuc SL Series
Servos, or third party analog servos.
a47130
Status LEDs COMM
COMM
STAT STAT 6-pin, RJ-11 connector
OK
OK CFG
used to upgrade firmware
CFG EN3 EN1
and load motion programs
EN1 – EN4 EN4 EN2
(use cable IC693CBL316)
C A
Pin 1
Connector C
Connector A
Aux Axis 3
Servo Axis 1
(Follower Master Axis)
PORT 1
RS-232
D B
Connector D Connector B
Aux Axis 4 Servo Axis 2
Motion Mate DSM302
Grounding Tab
Figure 8-12. Motion Mate DSM302 Module

8
Features.
H Digital Signal Processor (DSP) control of GE Fanuc Servos
H Block Processing time under 5 milliseconds
H Velocity Feed forward and Position Error Integrator to enhance tracking accuracy
H High resolution of programming units
– Position: -8,388,608...+8,388,607 User Units
– Velocity: 1 ... 8,388,607 User Units/sec
– Acceleration: 1 .. 134,217,727 User Units/sec/sec
H Simple and powerful Motion Program instruction set
H Simple 1- or 2-axis motion programs with synchronized
block start
H Program support for a short motion program, called Program 0, which can be
created in Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro configuration software
H Non-volatile storage for 10 programs and 40 subroutines, created with the APM
Motion Programming software.
H User scaling of programming units (User Units)
H DSM firmware, stored in Flash memory, is updated via its front panel COMM port.
H Generic programming using command parameters as operands for Acceleration,
Velocity, Move, and Dwell Commands
H Configured with Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software (version 8.02 or later)
H Automatic Data Transfer between PLC tables and DSM302 without user
programming
H Ease of I/O connection with factory cables and terminal blocks as well as a serial port
for connecting programming devices. The serial port also allows ”soft“ upgrades to
firmware, which is stored in Flash memory.
H Control of GE Fanuc Digital servos, analog SL Series Servos, or third party analog
servos.
H Home and overtravel switch inputs for each Servo Axis
H Two Position Capture Strobe Inputs for each Position Feedback Input
H 5v , 24v and analog I/O for use by PLC
H A Quad B Encoder input for Follower Master axis
H 13 bit Analog Output can be controlled by PLC or used as Servo Tuning monitor
8-18
FANUC CNC Controls
8
Configuration
The DSM302 is configured using Logicmaster 90-30 or VersaPro software . The DSM302
is assigned to a particular slot and rack like any other PLC module. In addition, other
types of configuration data must be entered such as:
H I/O addresses where the CPU to DSM302 data transfers take place
H Serial Port Setup (COMM on module’s front panel) for connecting the APM Motion
Programmer
H DSM302 Setup Data
H A small optional motion program, Program Zero (20 lines in standard mode, 9 lines
in follower mode)
Modes of Operation
Standard Mode
In Standard mode, the module provides closed loop position and velocity control for one
or two servo motors. User Programming units can be adjusted by configuring a User
Units to Feedback Counts ratio. Jog, Move at Velocity and Execute Motion Program
commands allow Standard mode to be used in a wide variety of positioning applications.
Follower Mode
In Follower mode, the module provides most of the same features as Standard mode with
a major exception that the User Units to Counts ratio is not configurable. This ratio is
fixed at 1:1 in Follower mode. In Follower mode, a Master Axis position input can be
enabled. Each Follower axis tracks the Master Axis input at a programmable A:B ratio.
Motion caused by Jog, Move at Velocity and Execute Motion Program commands can be
combined with follower motion generated by the master axis. Follower options include:
H Selection of internal or external Master Axis sources
H Acceleration Ramp to smoothly accelerate a slave axis until its position and velocity
lock to the master/slave A:B ratio
H Winder mode (”electronic fishing reel”) for coil winding and material handling
applications
IC693DSM302 Documentation
H GFK-1464, Motion Mate DSM302 for Series 90-30PLCs User’s Manual.
H GFK-0664, Series 90-30 PLC APM Programmer’s Manual
Related servo manuals:
H GFK-1581, SL Series Servo User’s Manual
H GFH-001, Beta Series Servo Products Specification Guide
H GFZ-65192EN, Alpha Series Servo Amplifier (SVU) Descriptions Manual
H GFZ-65162E, Control Motor Amplifier, Alpha Series
H GFZ-65142E, GFZ-65150E, GFZ-65165E, Alpha Series Servo Motor Manuals

8
IC693DSM314 Motion Mate Digital Servo Module (DSM314)– Preliminary
Note
This information was preliminary at the time of writing and could

change by the time this module is released. The module is expected to
be available in late 1999. Please contact your distributor for up-to-date
information.
The Motion Mate DSM314 is a high-performance motion control module that is highly
integrated with the logic solving and communications functions of the Series 90-30 PLC.
In digital mode, this module controls GE Fanuc digital servos. In analog mode, this
module controls servos with an analog command input, such as the GE Fanuc SL Series
Servos, or third party analog servos.
a47130A
Status LEDs COMM
COMM
STAT STAT
6-pin, RJ-11 connector
OK
OK CFG used to upgrade firmware
CFG EN3 EN1 (use cable IC693CBL316)
EN1 – EN4 EN4 EN2
A
C
Pin 1
Connector C
Connector A
Axis 3
Servo Axis 1
(Analog Only)
D B
Connector D Connector B
Axis 4 Servo Axis 2
(Analog Only)
Motion Mate DSM314
Grounding Tab
Figure 8-13. Motion Mate DSM314 Module
8-20
FANUC CNC Controls
8
Features.
H Digital Signal Processor (DSP) control of GE Fanuc Servos
H Block Processing time under 5 milliseconds
H Position Loop Velocity Feed forward, Acceleration Feed Forward, and Position Error
Integrator to enhance tracking accuracy
H High resolution of programming units
– Position: –536,870,911...+536,870,911 User Units or Counts, whichever is greater.
– Velocity: 1 ... 8,388,607 User Units/sec
– Acceleration: 1 .. 1,073,741,823 User Units/sec/sec
H Simple yet powerful motion program instruction set
H Single or multi-axis motion programs with synchronized
block start
H Configured and programmed with VersaPro software (Version 1.1 or later).
H Compatible with Series 90-30 CPUs equipped with Firmware Release 10.0 or later.
H Single point of connect for all programming and configuration tasks, including
motion program creation (Motion Programs 1 - 10) and Local Logic programming.
All programming and configuration is loaded through the PLC’s programming
communications port. In turn, the CPU loads all configuration, motion programs,
and Local Logic programming to the DSM314 across the PLC backplane.
H Each motion file supports up to 10 programs and 40 subroutines. These are created
with VersaPro software (Version 1.1 or later) and loaded to the DSM314 over the
PLC backplane.
H Local Logic programming with VersaPro software (Version 1.1 or later). Local Logic
lets the user create a logic program internal to the DSM314 that runs in
synchronization with the motion program and is independent of the PLC scan. This
gives the DSM314 the ability to respond quickly to motion-related I/O requirements.
H User scaling of programming units (User Units) including Follower Mode.
H DSM314 firmware, stored in Flash memory, will be updated via its front panel
COMM port. Firmware update kits will provide firmware and Loader software on
floppy disk. Firmware will also be available for download on the GE Fanuc web site.
H Generic programming using command parameters as operands for Acceleration,
Velocity, Move, and Dwell Commands
H Automatic Data Transfer between PLC tables and DSM314 without user
programming
H Ease of I/O connection with factory cables and terminal blocks.
H Control of GE Fanuc Digital servos, SL Series Servos, or third party analog servos.
H Home and overtravel switch inputs for each Servo Axis
H Two Position Capture Strobe Inputs for each axis can capture axis and/or master
position in less than 20 microseconds.
H 5vdc (4 points) , 24vdc (4 points) and analog I/O for use by PLC. Digital I/O can be
used by onboard Local Logic processor.
H Quadrature Encoder input for Follower Master axis
H 13 bit Analog Output can be controlled by PLC or used as Servo Tuning monitor

8
Key Differences Between the DSM302 and DSM314

Feature DSM302 DSM314
Max. No. of Servo Axes 2 2 digital, 4 analog
Motion Programming for Uses DOS-based APM Uses VersaPro’s (Version
Motion Programs 1–10. Motion Programmer 1.1 or later) Motion Editor
Program Zero Supported Not supported
Motion Program Loading Through COMM port on Across CPU backplane
module’s faceplate
Motion Program Storage DSM memory PLC CPU memory
Configuration Logicmaster or VersaPro 1.1 VersaPro 1.1 or later
or later
Local Logic feature Not supported Supported. Local Logic
programs are created in
VersaPro’s (Version 1.1 or
later) Local Logic Editor.
Camming Not supported Support planned for future
release (first half of year
2000)
Follower Modes Normal, Ramp, Winder Ramp only
Position Capture 250 microseconds < 20 microseconds
User Units to Counts Ratio Not configurable in Configurable in Follower
Follower Mode Mode
Maximum Position Units 8,388,608 User Units 500,000,000 User Units or
Counts, whichever is
greater.
Supported CPUs All Series 90-30 CPUs with CPUs 350, 352, 360, 363, 364
Firmware Release 6.50 or with Firmware Release 10.0
later. or later.
Number of %I bits 64 (fixed) 32/48/64/80
(configurable)
Number of %Q bits 64 (fixed) 32/48/64/80
(configurable)
Number of %AI words 40/50/64(configurable) 24/44/64/84
(configurable)
Number of %AQ words 6/9/12(configurable) 3/6/9/12
(configurable)
Configuration
The DSM314 is configured using VersaPro software, Version 1.1 or later . The DSM314 is
assigned to a particular slot and rack like any other PLC module. In addition, other
types of configuration data must be entered such as:
H I/O addresses where the CPU to DSM314 data transfers take place.
H Serial Port Setup for connecting a Personal Computer if a firmware update is
needed.
H DSM314 configuration data such as motor type, feedback type, mode, gains, etc.
H Up to 10 motion programs and 40 subroutines using the VersaPro Motion Editor.
H Local Logic programs using the VersaPro Local Logic (LL) Editor.
8-22
FANUC CNC Controls
8
Operation Modes
The maximum digital axis count is two. The maximum analog axis count is four. In
determining the number of axes available in analog modes, keep in mind that use of a
Master Encoder input or of a Local Logic program each reduce the maximum axis count
by one.
Standard Mode
In Standard mode, the module provides closed loop position and velocity control for
these maximum axis configurations:
H Two digital axes (Local Logic program may be used).
H Four analog axes if Local Logic program is not used.
H Three analog axes if Local Logic program is used.
User Programming units can be adjusted by configuring a User Units to Feedback
Counts ratio. Jog, Move at Velocity and Execute Motion Program commands allow the
DSM314 to be used in a wide variety of positioning applications.
Follower Mode
In Follower mode, the module provides most of the same features as Standard mode. In
Follower mode, a Master Axis position input can be enabled. Each Follower axis tracks
the Master Axis input at a programmable A:B ratio. Motion caused by Jog, Move at
Velocity and Execute Motion Program commands can be combined (superimposed) with
follower motion generated by the master axis. Follower options include:
H Selection of internal or external Master Axis sources
H Acceleration Ramp to smoothly accelerate a slave axis until its position and velocity
lock to the master/slave A:B ratio
The maximum axis configurations in Follower mode are:
H Two digital axes. May have Master Encoder input and a Local Logic program.
H Three analog axes with a Master Encoder input but no Local Logic program.
H Two analog axes with a Master Encoder input and Local Logic program.
IC693DSM314 Documentation
H GFK-1742, Motion Mate DSM314 for Series 90-30 PLC User’s Manual (will not be
available until late 1999).
Related servo manuals:
H GFK-1581, SL Series Servo User’s Manual
H GFH-001, Beta Series Servo Products Specification Guide
H GFZ-65192EN, Alpha Series Servo Amplifier (SVU) Descriptions Manual
H GFZ-65162E, Control Motor Amplifier, Alpha Series
H GFZ-65142E, GFZ-65150E, GFZ-65165E, Alpha Series Servo Motor Manuals

8
IC693APU300 High Speed Counter (HSC) Module

The High Speed Counter (IC693APU300) for the Series 90-30 PLC is a single-slot module
which can be used in applications where pulse input rates exceed the input capability of
the PLC or where too large a percentage of PLC processing capability would be
required. The High Speed Counter provides direct processing of rapid pulse signals up
to 80 KHz for industrial applications such as: meter proving, turbine flowmeter, velocity
measurement, material handling, motion control and process control.
With direct processing, the High Speed Counter module is able to sense inputs, count,
and respond with outputs without needing to communicate with a CPU. It can be
configured to count either up or down, to count both up and down, or to count the
difference between two changing values. The module can be configured to provide 1, 2,
or 4 counters of differing complexity.
a43971A
HIGH HIGH
SPEED OK SPEED OK
COUNTER COUNTER
CFG CFG
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
HIGH SPEED CNTR
HIGH SPEED 5/12/24 VDC
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
COUNTER 1
I1
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
5/12/24 VDC 2
I2
I3
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
I1 3
I4
4
I2
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
I5
5
I3
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
I6
6
I4 I7
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
7
I5 8
I8
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
I6 I9
9
I10
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
I7 10
I11
I8 11
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
I12
I9 12
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
I10 13
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
14
I11
15 5V OPTION
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
I12
16 01
O1
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
17 02
O2 18
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
03
O3 19 04
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
O4 20
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
SLOT 44A729182–019
FOR USE WITH
IC693APU300
Figure 8-14. High Speed Counter (HSC)

The High Speed Counter can be installed in any Series 90-30 baseplate and is configured
using either the Hand-Held Programmer, Logicmaster 90-30/20 or VersaPro software.
Many features can also be configured from the user’s application program. There are no
jumpers to be set on the module. Two LEDs at the top of the module indicate the
operating status of the module and the status of configuration parameters.
High Speed Counter Documentation
Details can be found in GFK-0293, Series 90-30 High Speed Counter User’s Manual.
8-24
FANUC CNC Controls
8
IC693BEM320 I/O LINK Interface (Slave) Module

The I/O LINK Interface module (IC693BEM320) provides an interface between a Series
90-30 PLC and a proprietary Fanuc I/O LINK in a Fanuc CNC (Computer Numerical
Control), or a Series 90-70 PLC. This module is configured as a slave device only (see the
IC693BEM321 for master applications). The Fanuc I/O LINK is a serial interface which
provides high speed exchange of data between a master and up to 16 slaves. An
example of a Series 90-30 PLC in a Fanuc I/O LINK system configuration is shown in the
following illustration.
ÎÎÎ HHP a45001
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
MASTER
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
SERIES 90-30
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ I/O LINK
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎPROGRAMMER
Figure 8-15. Example of a Series 90-30 PLC in a Fanuc I/O LINK Configuration
The Series 90-30 I/O LINK Interface module is configured as a slave device only and allows
the Series 90-30 PLC to send either 32 or 64 I/O points to the I/O LINK. The I/O LINK
module must be configured as either a 32 or 64 point I/O module during installation by
setting a jumper plug inside of the front cover of the module to either 32 I/O or 64 I/O.
An I/O LINK Interface module can be installed in any model of Series 90-30 PLC, and
any number of I/O LINK Interface modules can be installed in a system within the
current limits of the baseplate and other I/O modules installed in the baseplate. For
more details, see ”Load Requirements for Hardware Components” in Chapter 12 of this
manual.
I/O LInk Interface Documentation

For detailed information on this module, refer to GFK-0631, the Series 90-30 I/O LINK
Interface Module User’s Manual.

8
IC693BEM321 I/O LINK Master Module

The Series 90-30 I/O LINK Master Module (IC693BEM321) allows a Series 90-30 PLC to
act as a master on a proprietary Fanuc I/O LINK. The Fanuc I/O LINK is a serial
interface which provides high-speed exchange of I/O data between the master and up to
16 slaves. The master can receive 1024 discrete inputs from slaves, and send up to 1024
discrete outputs.
HHP
Power Mate CNC
Master
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Series 90-30 PLC
ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
I/O Link Master
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
I/O LINK
Figure 8-16. Example of I/O LINK Master System Configuration
The illustration above shows a simple I/O LINK system: a Series 90-30 PLC used as a
master, a Series 90-30 Hand-held Programmer, an I/O LINK, and one slave. In the
illustration, the slave is a Power Mate CNC. Other devices that can be used as slaves
include the Series 90-70 PLC, the Series 90-30 PLC, the Fanuc Series 0 CNC, Fanuc
Connection Units, and Fanuc Operator Panels.
The module can be configured using the Logicmaster 90 (LM90) configuration software
release 4.5 (or later), VersaPro software, Control software release 2.0 or later, or a Series
90-30 Hand-held Programmer (HHP).
8-26
FANUC CNC Controls
8
Any number of I/O LINK Master Modules can be installed in a Series 90-30 PLC. When
there are multiple I/O LINK Master Modules in the same PLC, they must be on separate
I/O LINKs. An I/O LINK Master Module can be installed in any I/O slot in any baseplate.
The maximum number of I/O LINK Master Modules that can be installed in the CPU
baseplate is six,
Restart Pushbutton
The LINK RESTART pushbutton provides a convenient means of restart if a failure
occurs. Pushing the Restart pushbutton restarts the operation of the LINK.
Serial Port
The front of the module has one 20-pin, Honda-type connector, used for connection to
the first slave on the I/O LINK. Signal levels are RS422/485 compatible.
Compatibility
The Series 90-30 I/O LINK Master Module is compatible with the following devices:
H Host CPU
h Series 90-30 CPU models 311, 313, 321, 323, 331, and 341 release 4.4 or later, and
all versions of the CPU models 350, 351, 352, 360, 363, and 364.
h Series 90-30 Hand-held Programmer (HHP)
H Programmer
h Hand-Held Programmer
h Logicmastert 90-30 Programming Software Configurator, release 4.5 or later.
h VersaPro Software.
h Control programming software, Version 2.0 or later.
H Slave Units
h Power Mate models A, C, D, and E
h Series 0 CNC
h Fanuc Operator Panel Unit
h Fanuc Connection Unit 1
h Fanuc Connection Unit 2
h Series 90-30 PLC with 90-30 I/O LINK Slave Module
h Series 90-70 PLCs with 90-70 I/O LINK Interface Module set up as slave
I/O Link Master Module Documentation

For detailed information on this module, refer to GFK-0823, the Series 90-30 I/O LINK
Master Module User’s Manual,

8
IC693APU305 I/O Processor Module

The I/O Processor (IOP) module (IC693APU305) for the Series 90-30 PLC provides direct
processing of rapid pulse signals for industrial control applications such as:
H Fast response process control
H Velocity measurement
H Material handling, marking, and packaging
Direct processing means that the module is able to sense inputs, process the input
information, and control the outputs without needing to communicate with a CPU.
During each CPU sweep, the I/O Processor communicates with the CPU through 32
discrete inputs (%I), 15 words of analog inputs (%AI), 32 discrete outputs (%Q), and 6
words of analog outputs (%AQ). The %AQ outputs can be used by the CPU program to
set up timer values or send other controlling parameters to the I/O Processor.
a45380
I/O I/O
PROC 1 2 PROC 1 2
MODULE MODULE
3 4 3 4
CFG OK CFG OK
I/O PROCESSOR
I/O PROCESSOR 5/12/24 VDC
5/12/24 VDC 1 IN1
IN1 2 IN2
IN2 3 IN3
IN3 4 IN4
IN4 5 IN5
IN5 6 IN6
IN6 7 IN7
IN7 8 IN8
IN8 9 IN9/OUT5 V
I9/ 10 IN10/OUT6
05
I10/ 11 IN11/OUT7
06
12 IN12/OUT8
I11/
07 13 INCOM
I12/
08 14
OUT1 I
N 15 SHIELD V
OUT2 T
E 16 OUT1
OUT3 R 17 OUT2
N
OUT4 A 18 OUT3
L
OUT 1–8: 0.02A @ 5 VDC 19 OUT4
OUT 1–4: 1.0A @ 12/24 VDC 20 OUTCOM
OUT 5–8: 0.5A @ 12/24 VDC
4.0A/MODULE 44A729182–070R01
FOR USE WITH
IC693APU305
Figure 8-17. I/O Processor Module
The I/O Processor is configured using the Series 90-30 Hand-held Programmer,
Logicmaster 90-30, or VersaPro software. Many configuration parameters can be
8-28
FANUC CNC Controls
8
modified from the user’s application program as well. Each configuration parameter is
set to a factory default value which is suitable for many applications. There are no
jumpers or DIP switches to set on the module. Six green LEDs at the top of the module
indicate the operating status of the module, the status of configuration parameters, and
the state of hardware outputs 1 through 4.
Module Features
Module features include:
H Up to 12 positive logic (source) inputs with input voltage range selection of either 5
VDC (TTL) or 10 to 30 VDC (non-TTL).
H Up to eight positive logic (source) outputs: four outputs with 1 amp rating and four
configurable outputs with 0.5 amp rating
H Outputs protected by replaceable fuse (one fuse common to all outputs)
H Dedicated processor provides 500 µs I/O update
H Counts per Timebase register for input rate measurement
H Total Counts register (32-bit) accumulates total counts received by module
H Four Strobe data registers for input position capture
H Two Timer data registers for indicating input pulse length or input spacing in
milliseconds
H Thirty-two range comparators (outputs returned in %I and %AI data)
H Software configuration
H Internal module diagnostics
H Individual LEDs that indicate Module OK and Configured OK status
H Individual LEDs that indicate state of Outputs 1 through 4
H A removable terminal board for connection of field wiring.
Inputs can be used as count signals or edge-sensitive strobe signals. Outputs can be
used to drive indicating lights, solenoids, relays, and other devices.
Power to operate the module’s logic circuitry is obtained from the 5 VDC bus on the
baseplate backplane. Power sources for the input and output devices must be supplied
by the user or by the +24 VDC isolated output of the Series 90-30 power supply. The I/O
Processor module provides a selectable threshold voltage to allow the inputs to respond
to either a 5 VDC signal level or a 10 to 30 VDC signal level. The threshold is selected by
configuration.
All configuration parameters for the module are downloaded from the PLC to the I/O
Processor after it passes its internal diagnostics. Once the module has been successfully
configured, the CONFIG OK LED will turn on. Configuration parameters can be
changed using Logicmaster 90-30 programming software configuration software or the
Hand-Held Programmer.
Operation of the I/O Processor module is monitored by a watchdog timer circuit. If the
watchdog timer detects a module failure, it will force all outputs off and turn off the
MODULE OK LED.
I/O Processor Module Documentation

Please refer to publication GFK-1028, Series 90-30 I/O Processor User’s Manual.

8
IC693CMM321 Ethernet Interface Module

The Ethernet Interface module (IC693CMM321) provides an interface that allows you to
attach the Series 90-30 PLC to an Ethernet LAN via an external transceiver and AAUI
cable, and to communicate with hosts and other control devices on the network.
The Ethernet Interface for the Series 90-30 PLC has client/server capability. As a client it
can initiate communications with other PLCs containing Ethernet Interfaces. This is
done from the ladder program using the COMMREQ Function Block. As a server it
responds only to requests from other devices such as a Host computer running a Host
Communications Toolkit application or another Series 90-30 PLC acting as a client.
The Ethernet Interface allows you to:
H Directly attach your PLC to an Ethernet network
H Initiate transfer of data to the PLC from another device
H Communicate simultaneously to multiple devices with up to 16 server connections
H Interface with other GE Fanuc devices, as well as with devices from other vendors
H Communicate from a Host computer (or other control device)
H Diagnose and maintain your system using diagnostic and station management tools
The Ethernet Interface does not support the Series 90-30/20/Micro Hand-Held
Programmer. Either one or two Ethernet Interface modules can be installed in any Series
90-30 baseplate.
The Ethernet Interface connects to an Ethernet network through an external SQE

enabled transceiver (GE Fanuc catalog no. IC649AEA102 or IC649AEA103 or equivalent.
See Appendix L). The following figure shows the layout of the Ethernet Interface.
a45481A
CMM 321 OK OK
ETHERNET LAN LAN
INTERFACE
SER SER
STAT STAT
RESTART
STATION
MANAGER
PORT
Pin 1 MAC
ADDRESS
LABEL
FIRMWARE
UPGRADE
PORT
SERIAL
NUMBER
LABEL
TRANSCEIVER
PORT
Figure 8-18. Ethernet Interface Module
8-30
FANUC CNC Controls
8
Four LEDs are located at the top of the board. The Restart pushbutton is located
immediately below the LEDs. The RS-232 serial port with the RJ-11 connector is the
Station Manager port. The RS-485 serial port with the 15-pin D connector located below
the Station Manager port is the module’s Downloader port. The 14-pin AAUI connector,
facing downward, is the Transceiver port. The Default MAC Address label is attached to
the outside of the plastic housing.
Board Indicators
There are four LEDs on the Ethernet Interface: OK, LAN, SER, and STAT. These LEDs
can be ON, OFF, BLINKING slow, or BLINKING fast. They indicate the state the
Interface is in, traffic on the Transceiver port and Downloader port, and when an
exception event has occurred.
Restart Button
The Restart button serves four functions: LED test, Restart, Restart and Reload, and
Restart and Enter Maintenance Utility. The Restart button is inaccessible when the front
cover of the Ethernet Interface is closed.
Serial Ports
There are two serial ports on the Ethernet Interface: the Station Manager Port and the
Downloader Port.
The Station Manager Port

This RS-232 port is used to connect a terminal or terminal emulator to access the Station
Manager software on the Ethernet Interface. This port uses a 6-pin, RJ-11 connector.
The IC693CBL316 Station Manager cable is ideal for connecting to this port (see Chapter
10 for details).
The Firmware Upgrade Port

The 15-pin, D-type, RS-485 port is used to connect to the PC Downloader in case the
communications software in the Ethernet Interface needs to be updated. Use the
IC690ACC901 miniconverter/cable kit for this connection (see Appendix F for details).
AAUI (Transceiver) Port

The 14-pin AAUI port connects to an external Ethernet-compatible transceiver via an
IEEE 802.3 transceiver cable. GE Fanuc catalog number IC649AEA102 (for 10Base T) or
IC649AEA103 (for 10Base 2) are suitable transceivers (see Appendix L for details).
Default MAC Address Label

The Default MAC Address label lists the Ethernet MAC address to be used by this
module.
Serial Number Label

The Serial Number Label indicates the serial number of this Interface.
Ethernet Interface Module Documentation

For detail, refer to GFK– 1541, Series 90-30 TCP/IP Ethernet Communications User’s Manual.

8
IC693PCM300/301/311 Programmable Coprocessor Module (PCM)

The Programmable Coprocessor Module (PCM) is a high performance coprocessor for
the Series 90-30 Modular CPUs (will not work with Embedded CPU models 311, 313, or
323). The PCM supports the Modbus RTU and GE Fanuc CCM protocols, as well as the
MegaBasic and C programming languages. A free program for using this module as an
RTU Master can be downloaded from the GE Fanuc website. The PCM has two separate
ports, both accessed on one front panel connector.
The PCM is available in three versions. Each version is listed below with the total
memory on the board and the nominal user-available MegaBasic program memory size.
PCM Catalog Number Total Memory User Megabasic memory

IC693PCM300 160K 35K
IC693PCM301 192K 47K
IC693PCM311 640K 190K
Î a43734
Î
PCM300 OK BD OK
Î
COPROC US1 P1 OK
US2 P2 OK
RESTART
BATTERY
PORTS 1 & 2
CONNECTOR
Figure 8-19. Programmable Coprocessor Module (PCM)
Applications
These modules are used for communicating with programming terminals, CRTs, bar
code readers, scales, printers, ASCII devices, RTU master devices, etc.
8-32
FANUC CNC Controls
8
PCM Module Location

A PCM can be installed in any slot in the CPU baseplate only, except slot 1 (labeled
CPU/1), which must contain the CPU module. A PCM will not work in Expansion or
Remote racks or in an Embedded CPU (CPU311, 313, or 323) rack.
Protocols Supported
Modbus RTU and GE Fanuc CCM.
LED Indicator Lights

H OK –Normally ON. Indicates the basic condition of the module.
H US1 and US2 – By default, LED US1 flashes to indicate activity on Port 1, and LED
US2 flashes to indicate activity on Port 2. Both LEDs stay OFF when there is no port
activity. However, the function of these two LEDs can be custom configured by the
user. Please see GFK-0255 for custom configuration details.
Restart Pushbutton
Used to place the module in either the RUN mode or the PROGRAM mode. Please see
“PCM Operation Modes” in GFK-0255, Chapter 1.
Memor y Backup Battery

The Lithium battery for backup of RAM memory is installed in a battery mounting clip
on the inside of the PCM faceplate. This battery is disconnected for shipment from the
factory and must be connected prior to installation of the module. When the PCM is
stored for extended periods of time, the battery should be disconnected, unless you wish
to retain the program in RAM memory. Order replacement batteries using catalog
number IC693ACC301 (package of two).
Cables
IC693CBL304/305 – These Wye cables split out the two PCM port connections from the
single connector on the front of the PCM modules. One of these cables is supplied with
each PCM module. The IC693CBL304 is for the PCM300. The IC693CBL305 is for the
PCM301 and PCM311. Please see Chapter 10 for details on these cables.
IC690CBL701/702/705 – These cables provides a direct RS-232 connection between the

PCM and various programmers’ serial ports. These cables are not supplied with the
PCM modules. Please see Chapter 10 for details on these cables.
Programmable Coprocessor Module Documentation

H GFK-0255, Series 90 Programmable Coprocessor Module and Support Software User’s
Manual
H GFK-0256, Megabasic Language Reference and Programmer’s Guide Reference Manual
H GFK-0487, Series 90 PCM Development Software (PCOP) User’s Manual
H GFK-0771, C Programmer’s Toolkit for Series 90 PCMs User’s Manual

8
IC693CMM311 Communications Coprocessor Module (CMM)

The Communications Coprocessor Module (IC693CMM311) provides a high
performance coprocessor for all Series 90-30 modular CPUs (cannot be used with
embedded CPUs – models 311, 313, or 323). This module supports the GE Fanuc CCM
communications protocol, the RTU (Modbus) slave communications protocol, and the
SNP protocol. This module has two serial ports. Port 1 supports RS-232 applications
and Port 2 supports either RS-232 or RS-485 applications. The module can be
configured using Logicmaster or VersaPro or by using a default setup.
Since both serial ports are wired to the module’s single connector, an IC693CBL305 Wye
cable is supplied with this module to separate the two ports for ease of wiring. A system
with a 331 or higher CPU can have up to four CMMs (in the CPU baseplate only).
Î a44902
Î
COMM OK OK
Î
COPROC US1 US1
US2 US2
RESTART
COMBINED
SERIAL PORT
PORT1
&
PORT2
Figure 8-20. Communications Control Module
Communications Control Module Documentation

For more information, refer to GFK-0582, the Series 90 PLC Serial Communications Driver
User’s Manual.
8-34
FANUC CNC Controls
8
IC693ADC311 Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor (ADC)

The Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor module (IC693ADC311) is a coprocessor to the
Series 90-30 PLC CPU and is used in a CIMPLICITY 90-ADS system. It performs
CIMPLICITY 90-ADS display, report, and alarm functions when interfaced to an
Operator Interface Terminal (OIT). The OIT can be a variety of GE Fanuc devices, a
VT100 compatible terminal, or IBM compatible personal computer running TERMF.
Communications with the Series 90-30 CPU is done over the PLC system backplane.
ÎÎ
a44535
BD OK
ÎÎ
ADC311 OK
COPROC US1 P1 OK
US2 P2 OK
Î RESTART
Î
Î Î
Î Î BATTERY
Figure 8-21. Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor Module (ADC)

Features of the Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor include:
H Single slot module
H Runs CIMPLICITY 90-ADS System software
H 8 Mhz, 80C188 microprocessor
H High performance access to PLC memory
H Real time calendar clock synchronized to PLC
H Reset pushbutton; three status LEDs
H Soft Configuration (No DIP switches or jumpers)
H Easy fill-in-the-blank system building
H Pop-up windows; pull down menus
H Fifteen User definable function keys per screen
H Printer logging to a serial printer
Multiple Alphanumeric Display Coprocessors can be supported in a single Series 90-30 PLC
system with modular CPU (331 and higher) and must be located in the CPU baseplate. This

8
module has a single connector which supports two serial ports, with each port being
dedicated to a specific operation. Port 1 is most often used to connect to an RS-232 serial
COM port of a computer running GE Fanuc PCM Development Software (PCOP).
Alternately, port 1 may be connected to a serial RS-232 printer (see the “Cables” section
below.). By default, Port 2 is configured as a 19.2 Kbaud RS-232 port. It can be used to
interface to a terminal with keyboard input and screen output.
Serial port programming and configuration are done using a Workmaster II, Workmaster, or
an IBM-compatible PC, XT, AT, or PS/2 computer with PCM Development Software (PCOP)
installed. The programming computer connects to Port 1 (see the “Cables” section below) .
The default setting is 19,200 bps. The PCM Development Software is used to configure the
serial port parameters and to install the CIMPLICITY 90-ADS software onto the ADC.
There are no DIP switches or jumpers on this board that need to be set for configuration.
The ADC module must be configured with Logicmaster 90-30 or VersaPro software prior to
use.
Cables
IC693CBL305 – This Wye cable is used to split out the two ADC port connections from
the single connector on the front of the ADC module. This cable is supplied with the
module. Please see Chapter 10 for details on this cable.
IC690CBL702 – This cable provides a direct RS-232 connection between the ADC and
another serial device such as a Personal Computer. This cable is not supplied with the
module. Please see Chapter 10 for details on this cable.
Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor Module Documentation:

See the following manuals for detailed information on Series 90-30 Alphanumeric
Display Coprocessor Modules:
H GFK-0499 CIMPLICITY 90-ADS Alphanumeric Display System User’s Manual
H GFK-0641 CIMPLICITY 90-ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual
H GFK-0487 Series 90-30 PCM Development Software (PCOP) User’s Manual
8-36
FANUC CNC Controls
8
IC693TCM302/303 Temperature Control Modules (TCM)

The Temperature Control Modules (TCM) provides temperature control for up to eight
channels. The two TCM models are identical except for temperature range and
resolution ratings (see comparison table). They have the following features:
H Can operate in either open loop or closed loop mode
H Each channel has a thermocouple input and a relay output
H RTD input
H 12V common mode voltage capability
H Open and reverse thermocouple detection and reporting
H Out of tolerance temperature detection and reporting
P R F S
Power, Run, Fault,
and Short LEDs 1 4
Output Status LEDs (1 - 8)
5 8
TCM
RTD PWR
Front Cover + 1/P + 0/P
Location of Fuse
(Behind Front Cover)
R– P+
S– P– External Power Input
RTD Input S+ G
R for Output Relays
1+ 1+
1– 1–
2+ 2+
2– 2–
Input Connector 3+ 3+ Output Connector
3– 3–
4+ 4+
4– 4–
5+ 5+
5– 5–
6+ 6+
6– 6–
7+ 7+
7– 7–
8+ 8+
8– 8–
Figure 8-22. IC693TCM302/303 Temperature Control Module (TCM)
Connections
Field devices (thermocouples, relays), RTD and external power for output relays are
connected to the module using a pair of plug-in connectors which are supplied with the
module. These connectors have captive screw terminals for ease of connecting field
wiring. The signal name for each terminal is labeled on the module’s front cover next to
each connector, as shown in the drawing above. For example, Channel 8 connections are
labeled 8+ and 8– on each connector. Input connections are on the left-hand connector
and output connections are on the right-hand connector.

8
LED Indicators
H P (External Power) – This green LED is normally ON, indicating that the module is
receiving power. If this LED is OFF, it may indicate that the TCM’s internal fuse is
open.
H R (Run) – This green LED is normally ON. When there is an internal module fault,
this LED will alternately flash with the red Fault (F) LED.
H F (Fault) – This red LED is normally OFF. This light flashes upon module startup
and goes out when the TCM finishes its internal startup routine. When there is an
internal module fault, this LED will alternately flash with the green Run (R) LED.
H S (Short) – This red LED is normally OFF. This LED lights when there is a short on
one of the output circuits.
H 1 - 8 (Output Status) – These green LEDs normally turn ON and OFF while the
module is regulating their outputs. The percentage of time that one of these LEDs is
ON verses OFF is representative of the PWM period of that output. Each of the
eight LEDs corresponds to an output channel. The output connector is the one on
the right side of the module. The channels numbers are labeled on the module next
to the connector. For example, LED 8 corresponds to the connections labeled 8+ and
8– on the right-hand connector.
Internal Fuse
The TCM‘s internal fuse is a 2 Amp, 125V subminiature type (Littlefuse Microfuse,
Catalog Number 273 002 or equivalent). If the P (External Power) LED will not light, the
internal fuse may be open. To access this fuse:
H Turn off power to the PLC, then remove the TCM module.
H While gently pulling outward on the front cover, release the front cover side tabs
with a small (“pocket-size”) standard screwdriver.
H Gently remove the fuse by pulling it forward, out of the front of the module, with a
small pair of needle nose pliers.
Warning
Replace fuse only with the correct size and type. Using an incorrect
fuse can result in harm to personnel, damage to equipment, or both.
8-38
FANUC CNC Controls
8
Automatic Data Transfers Between TCM and PLC

The PLC CPU controls the TCM by automatically passing commands to it on each PLC
sweep. These commands are contained in %Q bits and %AQ words that command such
things as Enable/Disable Output, Auto/Manual Mode, Do Autotuning, Setpoint values,
and Alarm Limit values.
In return, the TCM sends information to the PLC CPU by automatically passing %I bits
and %AI words each PLC sweep. The information sent by the TCM includes Alarm and
Output Short Circuit status, Current Temperature, PWM Period, and TCM Error Code.
Comparison of TCM302 and TCM303 Modules

The following table describes the only differences between the TCM302 and TCM303
modules.
Table 8-1. Comparison of TCM302 and TCM303
Item IC693TCM302 IC693TCM303

Temperature range, J and L Thermocouples 0 - 450 deg. C 0 - 750 deg. C
Temperature range, K Thermocouples 0 - 600 deg. C 0 - 1050 deg. C
Resolution 12 bits / 0.2 deg. C 12 bits / 0.5 deg. C
Documentation
Please refer to GFK-1466, Temperature Control Module for the Series 90-30 PLC User’s
Manual. Note that GFK-1466 does not mention the TCM303. It will be included in the
next revision (Revision A) of the manual, when available. However, the TCM303 is just
an extended range TCM302 as shown in the comparison above.

8
IC693PTM100/101 Power Transducer (PTM)– Preliminary

Note
change by the time the product is released. The PTM is expected to be
available early in the year 2000. Please contact your distributor for
up-to-date information.
The PTM is used for measuring electrical power consumption or for monitoring voltages
between an electrical generator and its power grid. It connects to user-supplied current
and potential transformers, which furnish the input signals the PTM uses to calculate its
data. Since one of the PTM’s components is a Series 90-30 PLC module, the PLC can use
the data gathered by the PTM for data reporting, fault monitoring, generator control, or
demand charge reduction/load shedding applications. The PTM consists of three parts,
which are all included under one catalog number:
H PTM Processing Module (PTMPM) – a module that mounts in a Series 90-30 Rack.
H PTM Interface Module (PTMIM) – a panel-mounted circuit board. This board
interfaces between the PTMPM module and the input transformers (current and
potential).
H Interface cable – connects the PTMPM module to the PTMIM circuit board.
Difference Between PTM100 and PTM101

The only difference between the IC693PTM100 and IC693PTM101 is in the length of
their interface cables. The PTM100 comes with a 19” (0.5 meter) cable, and the PTM101
comes with a 39” (1 meter) cable.
Capabilities
A single PTM is capable of performing any one of the following tasks, as selected by the
appropriate %Q bit:
H Measure power parameters for three individual single phase circuits.
H Measure power parameters for one 3-wire single phase circuit (120/240 VAC).
H Measure power parameters for one 3-phase circuit (selectable between Wye or Delta
type).
H Measure and compare power parameters between a 3-phase generator’s output
phases and one power grid phase.
H Measure and compare power parameters between one generator output phase and
one power grid phase.
Operating Modes
The PTM can operate in either of the following two modes, which are selectable by a
%Q bit in the user’s PLC application program:
H Power Monitor Mode – In this mode, the PTM samples either Single Phase or
3-Phase AC voltages and currents and uses the data to calculate numerous power
values. For 3-Phase operation, Wye or Delta, can be selected.
H Synchro Monitor Mode – In this mode, the PTM samples a Single-Phase or 3-Phase
AC voltage produced by a generator, and one voltage from the associated power
grid, then develops voltage, frequency, and relative phase information.
8-40
FANUC CNC Controls
8
Automatic Data Transfers Between PTMPM and PLC

The PLC CPU controls the PTM Processor Module (PTMPM) by sending it several %Q
bits and %AQ words during each PLC sweep. These %Q bits and %AQ words represent
commands such as Enabled/Disabled, Power/Synchro Mode, Display Mode, and Gain
values.
In return, the PTMPM provides information to the PLC CPU by sending it several %I
bits and %AI words each PLC sweep. The information sent by the PTMPM includes
voltage, current, power, and phase values, as well as discrete fault status.
Compatibility
The PTM is compatible with all Series 90-30 CPUs, and the PTMPM module may be
mounted in any type of baseplate (CPU, Expansion, Remote).
PTMPM PTMIM
F
PTM
R
FGND
Vg
In+
In–
Va
Ia+
Ia–
Vb
Ib+
Ib–
Vc
Ic+
Ic–
COM
Length*
Interface Cable
*Length of IC693CBL340 Cable is 19” (0.5 meter)

*Length of IC693CBL341 Cable is 39” (1 meter)
Figure 8-23. IC693PTM100/101 Components

8
Dimensions
H PTMPM – Standard size Series 90-30 module, mounts in a Series 90-30 baseplate.
H PTMIM – Interface module. Approximately 4.5” (114 mm) long by 3” (76 mm)
wide. It is mounted on a standard 35 mm DIN-rail.
H IC693CBL340 Interface cable – Approximately 19” (0.5 Meter) long.
H IC693CBL341 Interface cable – Approximately 39” (1 Meter) long.
PTMPM Indicator LEDs

H F (Fault) – This RED LED, when OFF, indicates that there are no interface faults.
When ON, either steady or flashing, it indicates that one or more of three possible
faults is present: (1) Phase A input not present, (2) over-range condition on one or
more inputs (voltage or current values too high), and (3) phase polarity fault. Each
of these three fault signals has a %I status bit in the PLC.
H R (Running) – This Green LED, when ON, indicates that the module is “running”
(functioning properly). When OFF, it indicates a module failure.
General Mounting Information

It is recommended the PTMPM modules be mounted in a slot at or near the end of the
PLC and that the PTMIM be mounted to the panel to the side of the PLC (the PTMIM
mounts on a standard DIN-rail). This will keep the power wiring to the PTMIM
physically separated from PLC signal wiring, thus reducing the opportunity for noise
coupling. The PTMIM ground requirements must be strictly adhered to – refer to the
user’s manual (GFK-1734 when available in early 2000) for instructions. See Warning
note below.
Series 90-30 PLC PTMPM

PTM
IC693CBL340/341 PTM Cable

PTMIM
Figure 8-24. IC693PTM100/101 Component Mounting
Warning
The PTMIM board connects to hazardous voltages. Before installing,

testing, or troubleshooting this board, you should read the complete
instructions in the PTM User’s Manual, GFK-1734 (see
“Documentation” section below). Failure to follow the guidelines in
the PTM User’s Manual may result in personal injury, equipment
damage, or both.
8-42
FANUC CNC Controls
8
Baseplate Type and Allowable Number of PTMPM Modules

The PTMPM module may be installed in any type of Series 90-30 baseplate (CPU,
Expansion, or Remote). There are no restrictions as to the maximum number of PTMPM
modules per PLC system, or per PLC baseplate, as long as the PLC power supply has
sufficient capacity and there is sufficient %I, %Q, %AI, and %AQ memory available.
However, as noted in the “Mounting Information” section, it is beneficial to keep the
PTMIM power wiring physically separated from PLC signal wiring in order to reduce
noise coupling; this can have a bearing on which baseplate slots to choose when
mounting PTMPM modules.
Power Supply Requirement

The PTMPM module requires 400 mA @ 5 VDC from the PLC power supply. The
PTMIM does not require a control power input.
Memor y Requirement
Each PTMPM requires the following PLC memory allocation:
H %I – 16 bits
H %Q – 16 bits
H %AI – 25 words
H %AQ – 2 words
Configuration
The PTMPM module should be configured in the Series 90-30 PLC as a “Foreign”
module.
PTM Acronyms
H PTM Power Transducer. Consists of PTMPM, PTMIM,
and interface cable.
H PTMPM Power Transducer Processor Module
H PTMIM Power Transducer Interface Module
Ordering Information
The PTMPM module and its PTMIM interface board are considered to be a matched set
and, therefore, they are not sold separately. The two cables, however, may be ordered as
separate items. There are four catalog numbers in the PTM product line:
H IC693PTM100 – This system contains the PTMPM, its matched PTMIM, and the 19”
(0.5 meter) interface cable.
H IC693PTM101 – This system contains the PTMPM, its matched PTMIM, and the 39”
(1 meter) interface cable.
H IC693CBL340 – The 19” (0.5 meter) interface cable.
H IC693CBL341 – The 39” (1 meter) interface cable.
Documentation
The user’s manual will not be available until early in the year 2000. It will be GFK-1734,
Series 90-30 PLC Power Transducer User’s Manual.

Chapter State Logic Products
9
State Logic Overview

State Logic, unlike other Series 90-30 PLC systems, does not use ladder logic type
instructions. Instead, it uses ”Natural Language” programming instructions. For
example, to program a rung of logic that turns on a motor at a specific time in a State
Logic system, you could create a statement, “If hour is past 8 AM, start the
exhaust_system.” This type of programming instruction cannot be handled currently by
standard Series 90-30 CPUs, so a State Logic CPU is required. This chapter only provides
an overview of State Logic products. For details, please see GFK–1056, Series 90-30 State
Logic Control System User’s Manual.
State Logic Products

The State Logic product line consist of just a few key hardware and software items. To
complete a State Logic system, standard Series 90-30 products are used. The primary
State Logic products are:
H State Logic CPUs. There are five models: 311, 313, 323, 331, and 340.
H State Logic Processor Module (IC693SLP300). This module can reside in a Series
90-30 PLC system containing a standard CPU, providing the user with both standard
ladder logic and State Logic capabilities.
H Serial Communications Module (AD693CMM301). Provides two additional serial
ports for the State Logic system. Requires a 331 or 340 State Logic CPU.
H ECLiPS software. Provides Natural Language programming and online debugging
functions.
H OnTOP software. A debugging tool, it provides operator interface, maintenance, or
troubleshooting functions. It has all the capabilities of the ECLiPS debugging
function.
Baseplates and Power Supply, I/O, and Option Modules

The State Logic CPUs and modules work with most standard Series 90-30 baseplates,
power supplies, input and output modules (discrete and analog), and option modules.
Please see GFK-1056, Series 90-30 State Logic Control System User’s Manual, for details.
FANUC CNC Controls

GFK-0356P 9-1
9
AD693CMM301 State Logic Serial Communications Module (SCM)
Description
This module provides two additional serial ports for a Series 90-30 State Logic PLC
System. A model 331 or 340 State Logic CPU is required.
Î
a44902
Î
OK OK
RESTART
COMBINED
SERIAL PORT
PORT1
&
PORT2
Figure 9-1. AD693CMM301 State Logic Serial Communications Module
OK LED
The SCM turns on its OK LED after completing its start-up internal self test procedure.
The OK LED remains ON as long as the module is functioning properly. If the OK LED
turns OFF while power is applied to the system, turn OFF PLC power and make sure
the module is properly seated in the baseplate. Turn power back ON. If the OK LED
remains OFF when power comes back up, it indicates a probable hardware failure in the
SCM and it should be returned for repair. The other two LEDs on this module are not
used.
Reset Button
Pressing the Reset pushbutton when the OK LED is ON re-initializes the module.
However, if the OK LED is off (indicating a module failure), pressing the Reset button
will have no effect.
Serial Connector
The SCM front-mounted serial port connector provides all of the connections for the two
SCM serial ports. Separate pins on this connector are assigned for Port 1 and Port 2.
9
Both ports support RS-232 standard. Only Port 2 supports the RS-485 standard. A
special WYE cable, described below, is available from GE Fanuc to separate the two port
connections on the connector.
Cable Information
Cable IC693CBL305 can be used in applications that require use of both SCM serial ports.
This is a Wye-type cable that breaks out the Port 1 and Port 2 connections on the
module’s single connector to two individual connectors. A data sheet for this cable can
be found in the “Cables” chapter of this manual. (Additional SCM cable information is
found in the two documents referenced in the next section.) This cable wouldn’t be
required for applications that use only one SCM port. Also, this cable should not be
used in a multidrop network (see Caution note below).
Caution
The IC693CBL305 Wye cable should not be used with an SCM
connected to a multidrop network because it introduces signal
reflections on the network. Multidrop networks should be cabled
directly to the SCM serial connector.
a44225
RS–232
25–PIN FEMALE
1 FOOT CONNECTOR PIN 1
ÎÎ
(+2.0 INCH, –0 INCH)
ÎÎ Î
LABEL
PORT 1
ÎÎ
PORT 2
PCM COMM. CABLE
IC693CBL305B
PIN 1 RS–232 RS–232/RS–485 PIN 1

25–PIN MALE 25–PIN FEMALE
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
Figure 9-2. IC693CBL305 WYE Cable
State Logic SCM Documentation

H GFK-1661 (Data Sheet), Serial Communications Module, Series 90-30 State Logic
H GFK-1056, Series 90-30 State Logic Control System User’s Manual
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
Chapter 9 State Logic Products 9-3
9
IC693SLP300 State Logic Processor Module
Description
The State Logic Processor Module (SLP) installs in a Series 90-30 PLC ladder logic con-
trol system to provide real time multi-tasking control for machine and process applica-
tions. It can be programmed to perform computations, data acquisition, data commu-
nications and operator interface functions. Also, the SLP module can provide machine
or process simulation capabilities to Series 90-30 PLC ladder logic control system to help
reduce debug and startup times. This dual processor architecture allows a user to create
both ladder logic and state logic application programs in any combination for efficient
parallel processing solutions.
The SLP is programmed using the English Control Language Programming System
(ECLiPS) software package. It communicates with the PLC CPU over the backplane and
can access user and system data. Many SLPs can be supported in a single Series 90-30
PLC system and each SLP can support up to 512 inputs and 512 outputs.
a45130
OK
ÎÎ
STATE LOGIC
Î
PROCESSOR
Figure 9-3. IC693SLP300 State Logic Processor Module for Series 90-30
9
SLP Features
D Natural English Language Programming using ECLiPS
D Structured State Logic program architecture
D Advanced Diagnostics
D Simulation capabilities
D PID Loop control
D Handles complex math easily (floating point, square root, trig. functions)
D Allows any combination of Natural English State Logic and Ladder Logic programs
in same system
D Configurable to operate with a Series 90-30 PLC system that uses a model 331, 340,
or 341 CPU
D Up to 512 inputs and 512 outputs
D CCM2 Protocol
D 8 Mhz, 80C188 microprocessor
D 46 Kbytes battery-backed CMOS logic memory on board
D One RS-422/RS-485 port and one RS-232 serial port
D Soft configuration (No DIP switches or jumpers)
D Restart/ResetPushbutton
D OK Status LED
D Occupies a single slot in a Series 90-30 rack
Memor y
The SLP module has 46 Kbytes of user program memory space. Additional memory ex-
ists for Input, Output, Register, and other variable data. The battery which supports this
memory is located on the SLP module, as shown in the following figure.
Installation
D Installation should not be attempted without referring to the State Logic Processor
User’s Guide (see reference 1).
D The Series 90-30 SLP can only be installed in a Series 90-30 PLC system that uses a
model 331, model 340, or model 341 CPU.
D Make sure rack power is off.
D Connect the battery to either of the battery connectors on the module
(See figure G-3).
D Install the SLP Module in the rack.
D Turn on power.
The module should power up and blink the top LED, indicating that power up diagnos-
tics are in progress. When the diagnostics have completed successfully the top LED stays
on. The other LEDs on this module are not used and will always stay off.
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
9
a45131
OK BD OK
CURRENTLY
INSTALLED
BATTERY
CONNECTOR
ÎÎ RESTART
ÎÎ ÎÎ
OPEN
REPLACEMENT
ÎÎ ÎÎ
BATTERY
CONNECTOR
ÎÎÎÎ
BATTERY
PORTS
1 AND 2
SLP 300
Figure 9-4. State Logic Processor Module User Details
Status Light
Three Status LEDs exist on the SLP module. The top LED (see figure above) indicates
the condition of the module. It will blink ON and OFF while the module is booting up,
then will stay ON during normal operation. The bottom two LEDs are not used and will
always be off.
Pushbutton
See Caution note below before operating the pushbutton. One pushbutton is provided.
Pushing and holding the pushbutton for less than 5 seconds will simply restart the user
application program if it was configured to “auto-run” at power up. Pushing and hold-
ing for more than 5 seconds will reinitialize the module and require that the user ap-
plication program be reloaded.
Caution
Pushing and holding the pushbutton for more than 5 seconds will
reinitialize the module and require that the user application program
be reloaded.
9
Battery
A lithium battery (IC697ACC301) is installed as shown in the previous figure. This bat-
tery maintains user memory when power is removed. Be sure to install a new battery
before removing the old battery (two connectors are provided). Indication of a low bat-
tery is provided through the ECLiPS programming system software and Logicmaster
90-30 software.
Cable Information
Cable IC693CBL305 can be used in applications that require use of both SLP serial ports.
This is a Wye-type cable that breaks out the Port 1 and Port 2 connections on the
module’s single connector to two individual connectors. A data sheet for this cable can
be found in the “Cables” chapter of this manual. (Additional SLP cable information is
found in publication GFK-0726 – see “Documentation” section.) This cable is not
required for applications that use only one SLP port.
Hardware Specifications
Battery:
Shelf Life 5 years at 20°C (68°F)
Memory Retention 6 months nominal without applied power
Internal Power Consumption 400 mA from 5V bus on backplane
Serial Ports: TwoRS-232/422/485compatible
State Logic Processor (SLP) Documentation

Please refer to the following publications for more State Logic Processor information.
Title GFK Number

Series 90-30 PLC State Logic Processor User’s Guide GFK-0726
Series 90-30 PLC ECLiPS User’s Manual GFK-0732
Series 90-30 PLC OnTOP User’s Guide GFK-0747
OnTOP for Series 90-30 Online Troubleshooting and Operator Program GFK-0750
User’s Manual
Series 90-30 State Logic Control System User’s Manual GFK-1056
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
9
State Logic CPUs

Five models of State Logic CPUs are available that support State Logic programming.
Three of these CPUs are of the embedded baseplate type, and two are modular CPUs.
Data sheets for these modules are located at the back of this chapter. The available State
Logic CPUs for the Series 90-30 PLC are:
H IC693CSE311 and IC693CSE313, both are 5-slot embedded CPU (CPU is built-in)
baseplates.
H IC693CSE323, 10-slot embedded CPU baseplate.
H IC693CSE331 and IC693CSE340, single-slot CPU modules (can be installed in
standard IC693CHS397 5-slot CPU baseplate, or standard IC693CHS391 10-slot CPU
baseplate).
Features of State Logic CPUs

H Support State Logic programming
H Support Floating Point calculations
H Support Clock/Calendar functions (CSE331 and 340 are battery backed)
H Support discrete and analog overrides
H Programmed by State Logic software products
H Provide from 10K to 98K Bytes of program memory depending on model
H Program memory is battery backed
H Control two Status LEDs on the power supply
H Software configuration (no DIP switches or jumpers to set)
H Serial port on power supply used as a programming port, a simple ASCII interface,
or a CCM port
H Password controlled access
H Support Series 90-30 I/O products
H Alarm Processor Function for module diagnostics
H Simulation mode
H EPROM and EEPROM program memory
H Store histogram of State Changes
Model CSE311, CSE313 and CSE323 Embedded CPU Baseplates

The Programmable Logic Controller with a built-in State Logic CPU is available in three
models. The CSE311 and CSE313 with built-in CPU has 5 slots available for modules and
the CSE323 with built-in CPU has 10 slots available for modules. Each baseplate also has
a power supply slot.
The CSE 311, 313 and 323 CPUs can be programmed in the State Logic programming
language using the State Logic software products. The State logic software products are
also used to configure the Programmable Controller and communicate on-line with the
State Logic CPU for debugging and troubleshooting operations.
9
The CSE311, CSE313, and CSE323 communicate with I/O modules, smart option
modules, and Third Party modules across the PLC backplane. Most of the available
Series 90-30 discrete, analog, and special purpose modules are supported (with Release
3.0 of State Logic). Foreign or 3rd party modules are also supported.
A socket labeled PROGRAM PROM is provided to install an EEPROM or EPROM. This
option allows the control program to be stored in a PROM instead of RAM memory. It also
is convenient in that it allows the PROM to be copied for installation in multiple CPUs.
a47063
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
PROGRAMMABLE 1
CONTROLLER
ÎÎ
CAUTION
USER PROGRAM
ÎÎ
SYSTEM
PROM
PROGRAM
PROM
AND REGISTER
VALUES MAY BE
LOST IF POWER
SUPPLY IS
REMOVED FOR
LONGER THAN
i HOUR
1 2 3 4 5
POWER
SUPPLY
Figure 9-5. Model CSE311 or CSE313 5-Slot Embedded CPU Baseplate
a47064
1
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER

PROM PROM
USER PROGRAM
AND REGISTER
VALUES MAY BE
LOST IF POWER
SUPPLY IS
REMOVED FOR
LONGER THAN
1 HOUR.
POWER 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SUPPLY
Figure 9-6. Model CSE323 10-Slot Embedded CPU Baseplate
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
9
Model CSE331 and CSE340 Modular CPUs

The CSE 331 CPU (IC693CSE331) and CSE 340 (IC693CSE340) CPUs are single slot
modules which must be installed in slot one (labeled CPU/1) of a CPU baseplate
(IC693CHS391 or IC693CHS397). An illustration of the State Logic CPU modules is
shown below.
a45454
STATE LOGIC
CPU
Figure 9-7. CPU Models CSE 331 or CSE 340
The CSE 331 and CSE 340 CPU modules provide the same functionality as the models
CSE 311, 313 and 323, and offer several more advanced features such as more I/O points
and more User Program memory. See the table at the end of this chapter to compare
CPU specifications.
CPU Serial Port Connector on Power Supply

The 15-pin D-connector provides the connection to an RS-485 compatible serial port.
The connection is made from the serial port on the power supply to the serial port on the
programming computer or other serial device through the RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232
Converter (IC690ACC900) or RS-422 to RS-232 Miniconverter (IC690ACC901).
9
The serial port has three possible uses:

H as a programming port for the State Logic software to download programs and to
send instructions to the PLC;
H as an ASCII port providing a connection from the CPU to any ASCII device;
H as a CCM port providing an interface connection for MMI and other host computer
systems.
a43832
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
SERIAL PORT
Figure 9-8. Serial Port Connector
Notes
The serial port connector is functional only in a power supply that is

installed in a baseplate that also contains the CPU; this includes the
Model CSE 311 and CSE 313 5-slot baseplates with built-in CPU, CSE
323 10-slot baseplate with built-in CPU, and the Model CSE 331 and
CSE 340 single slot CPUs.
The serial port is not functional when a power supply is installed in a Series
90-30 expansion or remote baseplate.
Additionally, any device connected to the serial port that uses +5 VDC
power from the Series 90-30 power supply must be included in the
calculation for maximum power consumption (see Sample Calculations
for Power Supply Loads in Chapter 3 of this manual).
Configuring the State Logic CPUs

All of the State Logic CPUs and attached I/O system are configured with the State Logic
software. There are no DIP switches or jumpers used to configure the system. The CPU
verifies the actual module configuration at power-up and periodically throughout the
operation. The actual configuration must match the programmed configuration. Any
detected deviations are reported to the CPU alarm processor function for the configured
fault response. Refer to GFK-1056, the Series 90-30 State Logic CPU User’s Manual for
more information.
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
9
Table 9-1. System Specifications for Series 90-30 State Logic CPUs
State Logic CPU Model

CSE 340 CSE 331 CSE 313/323 CSE 311
Digital Inputs, %I 1024 1024 512 512
Digital Outputs, %Q 1024 1024 512 512
GlobalI/O, %G 1280 1280 1280 1280
Internal Flags 1000 1000 500 500
Analog Inputs, %AI 256 256 128 128
Analog Outputs, %AQ 128 128 64 64
PID Loops 20 20 20 20
Integer Variables 1000 1000 250 250
Floating Point Variables 250 250 61 61
String Variables 20 20 8 8
Character Variables 64 64 64 64
Tables 20 20 10 10
Program Memory 98K Bytes 48K Bytes 20K Bytes 10K Bytes
Processor Speed 20 MHz 10 MHz 10 MHz 10 MHz
Number of Baseplates 5 5 1 1
Baseplate Size 5 or 10 slots 5 or 10 slots 5 slots (CSE313) 5 slots
10 slots (CSE323)
Supports SCM Yes Yes No No
Serial Ports 1 1 1 1
Clock/Calendar Hardware Hardware Software Software
Table Memory Space 4K Bytes 4K Bytes 1K Bytes 1K Bytes
For more detailed information on State Logic CPU specifications, see GFK-1056, the
Series 90-30 State Logic Control System User’s Manual.
State Logic CPU Firmware and PROM Configurations
State Logic CPU Firmware and PROM Table

Firmware EPROM EEPROM Flash
CPU (standard) (for user (for user (for user
memor y) memor y) memor y)
CSE311 EPROM Optional N/A N/A
CSE340 EPROM N/A N/A Optional
9
State Logic CPU Data Sheets

This section provides data sheets describing each of the Series 90-30 State Logic CPU
modules. Each CPU is described in a one-page data sheet, which provides a quick
reference to all of the available CPU models.
H IC693CSE311 State Logic, 5-slot baseplate with embedded CPU
H IC693CSE331 State Logic, CPU module, 10 MHz
H IC693CSE340 State Logic, CPU module, 20 MHz
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
9
CSE311 Catalog Number IC693CSE311
a47063
ÎÎ 1
ÎÎ
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER
CAUTION
ÎÎ
SYSTEM
PROM
PROGRAM
PROM
USER PROGRAM
AND REGISTER
VALUES MAY BE
LOST IF POWER
SUPPLY IS
REMOVED FOR
LONGER THAN
i HOUR
1 2 3 4 5
POWER
SUPPLY
CPU Type State Logic 5-slot baseplate with embedded CPU

Load Required from Power Supply 410 milliamps from +5 VDC supply
Processor Type and Speed 80188, 10 MegaHertz
Typical Scan Rate 18 milliseconds per 1K of logic (boolean contacts)
Serial Ports 1
Type of memory Storage RAM, EPROM, EEPROM
Clock Software
Program Memory 10K Bytes
Digital I/O (%I, %Q) 1024
Tasks 256
Task Groups 16
States per task 254
I/O and VariableNames 3000
Analog Inputs and Outputs 128 (%AI), 64 (%AQ)
Internal Flags 500
%G 1280
%T, %S, %M, %R n/a
Integer Variables 250
Floating Point Variables 61
String Variables 8
Characters / String 80
Character Variables 64
Characters / Write 512
Serial Protocols SNP, CCM
Tables 10
Table Memory (Bytes) 1K
Timers Unlimited
Timer Resolution .01 seconds
Timer-Counters 100
Trace Size 100
PID Loops 20
9
a47063
ÎÎ
ÎÎ 1
ÎÎ
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER
CAUTION
ÎÎ
SYSTEM
PROM
PROGRAM
PROM
USER PROGRAM
AND REGISTER
VALUES MAY BE
LOST IF POWER
SUPPLY IS
REMOVED FOR
LONGER THAN
i HOUR
1 2 3 4 5
POWER
SUPPLY

Serial Ports 1
Type of Memory Storage RAM, EPROM, EEPROM
Clock Software
Tasks 256
Task Groups 16
States per task 254
Internal Flags 500
%G 1280
%T, %S, %M, %R n/a
String Variables 8
Tables 10
Timers Unlimited
Timer-Counters 100
Trace Size 100
PID Loops 20
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
9
a47064
1
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER

PROM PROM
USER PROGRAM
AND REGISTER
VALUES MAY BE
LOST IF POWER
SUPPLY IS
REMOVED FOR
LONGER THAN
1 HOUR.
POWER 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SUPPLY

Serial Ports 1
Type of Memory Storage RAM, EPROM, EEPROM
Clock Software
Tasks 256
Task Groups 16
States per task 254
Internal Flags 500
%G 1280
%T, %S, %M, %R n/a
String Variables 8
Tables 10
Timers Unlimited
Timer-Counters 100
Trace Size 100
PID Loops 20
9
a45454
CPU Type State Logic single slot CPU module
Total Baseplates per System 5 (1 CPU baseplate + 4 expansion and/or remote baseplates)
Serial Ports 1 STATE LOGIC
Type of Memory Storage RAM, EPROM, EEPROM CPU
Clock Hardware
Tasks 256
Task Groups 16
States per task 254
Internal Flags 1000
%G 1280
%T, %S, %M, %R n/a
String Variables 20
Serial Protocols SNP, CCM, RTU
Tables 20
Timers Unlimited
Timer-Counters 100
Trace Size 100
PID Loops 20
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
9
a45454
CPU Type State Logic single slot CPU module
Total Baseplates per System 5 (1 CPU baseplate + 4 expansion and/or remote baseplates)
Processor Type and Speed 80C188XL, 20 MegaHertz
Serial Ports 1 STATE LOGIC
Type of Memory Storage RAM, Flash, EEPROM CPU
Clock Hardware
Tasks 256
Task Groups 16
States per task 254
Internal Flags 1000
%G 1280
%T, %S, %M, %R n/a
String Variables 20
Serial Protocols SNP, CCM, RTU
Tables 20
Timers Unlimited
Timer-Counters 100
Trace Size 100
PID Loops 20
Chapter Cables
10
The following table serves as a cable catalog number/application cross-reference:
Table 10-1. Series 90-30 Cable Cross-Reference

Series 90-30 Cable Cross-Reference
Catalog No. Description Applications
A03B-0807-K802 33’ (10 meter) I/O Link module I/O Link modules:
(Equivalent to to module cable. See publication IC693BEM321 (Master)
catalog number GFK-0823 for details on I/O Link IC693BEM320(Slave/Interface)
44C741558-004) cables.
A03B-0807-K803 1.5’ (0.45) meter I/O Link optical I/O Link modules:
(Equivalent to adapter to module cable. See IC693BEM321 (Master)
catalog number publication GFK-0823 for details IC693BEM320(Slave/Interface)
44C741558-002) on I/O Link cables.
A66L-6001-009# I/O Link fiber optic cable, I/O Link modules:
Lxxxxx available in ten lengths. Catalog IC693BEM321 (Master)
Note: xxxxx number depends on length. For IC693BEM320(Slave/Interface)
portion of the example, the 10 meter cable’s
number depends catalog number is
on the cable A66L-6001-009#L10R03.
length. Lengths See publication GFK-0823 for
are 10, 15, 20, 30, details on these length choices.
40, 50, 60, 80, 90,
and 100 meters.
IC647CBL704 Programmer serial cable to For GE Fanuc Work Station
connect Work Station Interface Interface (WSI) boards:
board to the serial connector on IC647WMI310
the PLC Power Supply. IC647WMI320
IC690ACC901 Contains RS-422 to RS-232 For connecting a computer’s
Miniconverter miniconverter, a 6’ (2 meter) RS-232 serial port to a PLC
and cable kit serial cable, and a 9-pin to 25-pin RS-422/485 serial port. See
adapter. Appendix F for details on this
product.
IC690CBL701 Connects a PCM, CMM, or ADC Use with the following
module to a GE Fanuc modules:
(Note: Used on Workmaster I or IBM XT or IC693PCM300/301/311,
older computers) compatible personal computer. IC693CMM311
IC693ADC311
module to an IBM AT or modules:
compatible personal computer. IC693PCM300/301/311,
IC693CMM311
IC693ADC311
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls 10-1
10

module to a GE Fanuc modules:
Workmaster II or IBM PS/2 or IC693PCM300/301/311,
compatible personal computer IC693CMM311
IC693ADC311
IC690CBL714A Dual-port multi-drop cable. Series 90 PLCs.
Allows the interconnecting of
individual PLCs using SNP serial
ports. Connections are in a
daisy-chain configuration.
IC693CBK002 Cable kit. Contains both the Used with Terminal Block Quick
IC693CBL329 and IC693CBL330 Connect (TBQC) assemblies.
3’ (1 m) cables. Used for See appendix J for a module list
32-point I/O modules having and cable selection information.
dual 24-pin connectors. See also, the data sheet for the
IC693CBL329/330/331/332/333/334
cables for additional
information.
6’ (2 m) cables. Used for See appendix J for a module list
IC693CBL329/330/331/332/333/334
information.
19” (0.5 m) cables. Used for See appendix J for a module list
IC693CBL329/330/331/332/333/334
information.
IC693CBL300 3’ (1 meter) I/O expansion cable To interconnect CPU, expansion,
interconnects baseplate and remote baseplates.
expansion ports. This is a Wye
type cable for daisy-chaining
baseplates.
baseplates.
IC693CBL302 50’ (15 meter) I/O expansion To interconnect CPU, expansion,
cable interconnects baseplate and remote baseplates.
Note: expansion ports. This is a special
This cable is type with built-in termination
identical to cable resistors. It is not a Wye type
IC693CBL314 cable - it is for use as the last
cable on the link.
10
IC693CBL303 Programmer serial cable to For Hand-Held Programmer:

connect Hand-Held IC693PRG300
Programmer (HHP) to serial
connector on PLC Power Supply.
IC693CBL304 Wye cable for splitting out two For use with:
serial port connections from one IC693PCM300 module
module connector.
IC693CBL305 Wye cable for splitting out two For use with the following
serial port connections from one modules:
module connector. (Use cable IC693PCM301
IC693CBL304 with the IC693PCM311
IC693PCM300 module.) IC693CMM311
IC693ADC311
AD693CMM301
IC693SLP300
IC693CBL306 3’ (1 meter) extension cable For High Density (32-point) I/O
connects between the 50-pin modules having a single 50-pin
connector on the module connector:
faceplate and the connector on IC693MDL652
the terminal block. IC693MDL653
IC693MDL750
IC693MDL751
IC693CBL307 6’ (2 meter) extension cable For High Density (32-point) I/O
connects between the 50-pin modules having a single 50-pin
connector on the module connector:
faceplate and the connector on IC693MDL652
the terminal block. IC693MDL653
IC693MDL750
IC693MDL751
IC693CBL308 3’ (1 meter) I/O cable connects to For High Density (32-point) I/O
the 50-pin connector on the modules having a single 50-pin
module faceplate. The other connector:
end has stripped, tinned, and IC693MDL652
labeled leads. IC693MDL653
IC693MDL750
IC693MDL751
IC693CBL309 6’ (2 meter) I/O cable connects to For High Density (32-point) I/O
the 50-pin connector on the modules having a single 50-pin
module faceplate. The other connector:
end has stripped, tinned, and IC693MDL652
labeled leads. IC693MDL653
IC693MDL750
IC693MDL751
IC693CBL310 10’ (3 meter) I/O cable connects For High Density (32-point) I/O
to one of the 24-pin connectors modules having dual 24-pin
(Obsolete. Use on the module. The other end connectors:
IC693CBL327 has stripped, tinned, and labeled IC693MDL654
and leads. This cable was obsoleted IC693MDL655
IC693CBL328) and replaced by IC693CBL315, IC693MDL752
until that cable also was IC693MDL753
obsoleted. Two cables are
required per module.
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
Chapter 10 Cables 10-3
10
IC693CBL311 10’ (3 meter) APM I/O cable APM modules:

connects between one of the IC693APU301
24-pin connectors on the IC693APU302
module and the connector on
the terminal block.
Two cables are required per
module.
IC693CBL312 0.5’ (152 mm) I/O expansion To interconnect CPU, expansion,
baseplates.
baseplates.
IC693CBL314 50’ (15 meter) I/O expansion To interconnect CPU, expansion,
Note: expansion ports. This is a special
This cable is type with built-in termination
identical to cable resistors. It is not a Wye type
IC693CBL302 cable - it is for use as the last
cable on the link.
IC693CBL315 10’ (3 meter) I/O cable connects For High Density (32-point) I/O
to one of the 24-pin connectors modules having dual 24-pin
(Obsolete. Use on the module. The other end connectors:
IC693CBL327 has stripped, tinned, and labeled IC693MDL654
and leads. IC693MDL655
IC693CBL328) Two cables are required per IC693MDL752
module. IC693MDL753
IC693CBL316 3’ (1 meter) serial cable with For connecting to modules with
9-pin D-shell connector that an RJ-11 communications port:
connects to a Personal IC693CMM321
Computer ’s serial port. The IC693CPU351, 352, 363
other end has an RJ-11 IC693DSM302, 314
connector.
IC693CBL317 Special 10’ (3 meter) APM I/O APM modules:
cable connects between one of IC693APU301
the 24-pin connectors on the IC693APU302s
the terminal block. This cable is
similar to IC693CBL311 except
that its drain shield wire is
brought outside of the
connector.
module.
IC693CBL318 Unused or inactive number
10
IC693CBL319 3’ (1 meter) APM I/O cable APM modules:

connects between one of the IC693APU301
24-pin connectors on the IC693APU302
the terminal block.
module.
IC693CBL320 Special 3’ (1 meter) APM I/O APM modules:
cable connects between one of IC693APU301
the 24-pin connectors on the IC693APU302
the terminal block. This cable is
similar to IC693CBL319 except
that its drain shield wire is
brought outside of the
connector.
module.
IC693CBL321 3’ (1 meter) I/O cable connects Used with the Terminal Block
between a 24-pin connector on Quick Connect assemblies. See
(Obsolete. Use the module and the connector Appendix J for a module list and
IC693CBL329 on the terminal block. cable selection information.
and
IC693CBL330)
IC693CBL322 6’ (2 meter) I/O cable connects Used with the Terminal Block
between a 24-pin connector on Quick Connect assemblies. See
(Obsolete. Use the module and the connector Appendix J for a module list and
IC693CBL331 on the terminal block. cable selection information.
and
IC693CBL332)
IC693CBL323 1.5’ (0.5 meter) I/O cable Used with the Terminal Block
connects between a 24-pin Quick Connect assemblies. See
(Obsolete. Use connector on the module and Appendix J for a module list and
IC693CBL333 the connector on the terminal cable selection information.
and block.
IC693CBL334)
IC693CBL324 3’ (1 meter) cable connects DSM modules:
between a DSM module and IC693DSM302
either a servos axis terminal IC693DSM314
block or an aux axis terminal
block. See the DSM user’s
manuals (GFK-1464, GFK-1742)
for details.
IC693CBL325 10’ (3 meter) cable connects DSM modules:
either a servo axis terminal IC693DSM314
block or an aux axis terminal
for details.
IC693CBL326 Unused or inactive number
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
10
IC693CBL327 10’ (3 meter) right angle I/O For High Density (32-point) I/O
cable connects to the left side modules having dual 24-pin
24-pin connector on a 32-point connectors:
module. The other end has IC693MDL654
stripped, tinned, and labeled IC693MDL655
leads. Replaces straight cable IC693MDL752
IC693CBL315 on the left side of IC693MDL753
the module.
IC693CBL328 10’ (3 meter) right angle I/O For High Density (32-point) I/O
cable connects to the right side modules having dual 24-pin
24-pin connector on a 32-point connectors:
module. The other end has IC693MDL654
stripped, tinned, and labeled IC693MDL655
leads. Replaces straight cable IC693MDL752
IC693CBL315 on the right side IC693MDL753
of the module.
IC693CBL329 3’ (1 meter) right angle I/O cable Used with the Terminal Block
connects between the left side Quick Connect (TBQC)
24-pin connector on a 32-point assemblies. See Appendix J for a
module and the connector on module list and cable selection
the terminal block. Replaces information.
cable IC693CBL321.
IC693CBL330 3’ (1 meter) right angle (both Used with the Terminal Block
connectors) I/O cable connects Quick Connect (TBQC)
between the right 24-pin assemblies. See Appendix J for a
connector on a 32-point module module list and cable selection
or the single connector on a information.
TBQC faceplate and the
connector on the terminal block.
Replaces cable IC693CBL321.
IC693CBL331 6’ (2 meters) right angle (both Used with the Terminal Block
connectors) I/O cable connects Quick Connect (TBQC)
between the left 24-pin assemblies. See Appendix J for a
connector on a 32-point module module list and cable selection
and the connector on the information.
terminal block. Replaces cable
IC693CBL322.
IC693CBL332 6’ (2 meters) right angle I/O Used with the Terminal Block
cable connects between the right Quick Connect (TBQC)
module or the single connector module list and cable selection
on a TBQC faceplate and the information.
IC693CBL333 20” (0.5 meter) right angle I/O Used with the Terminal Block
cable connects between the left Quick Connect (TBQC)
module and the connector on module list and cable selection
the terminal block. Replaces information.
cable IC693CBL323.
10
IC693CBL334 20” (0.5 meter) right angle I/O Used with the Terminal Block
cable connects between the right Quick Connect (TBQC)
module or the single connector module list and cable selection
on a TBQC faceplate and the information.
IC693CBL340 PTM interface cable. 19” (0.45 Part of IC693PTM100 assembly.
meter) length. Connects This assembly includes PTMPM
between PTMPM Series 90-30 module, PTMIM interface
PLC module and the PTMIM module, and IC693CBL340
DIN-rail mounted interface cable. This cable also available
module. as separate item.
IC693CBL341 PTM interface cable. 39” (1 Part of IC693PTM101 assembly.
meter) length. Connects This assembly includes PTMPM
between PTMPM Series 90-30 module, PTMIM interface
PLC module and the PTMIM module, and IC693CBL341
DIN-rail mounted interface cable. This cable also available
module. as separate item.
IC693CBL803 3’ (1 meter) redundant
communications cable.
IC800CBL001 3’ (1 meter) Digital Servo Used with DSM modules:
Command cable connects IC693DSM302
either a digital servo amplifier or
a digital servo axis terminal
for details.
IC800CBL002 10’ (3 meter) Digital Servo Used with DSM modules:
Command cable connects IC693DSM302
between a DSM module and IC693DSM314d
either a digital servo amplifier or
a digital servo axis terminal
for details.
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
10
Cable Data Sheets

The next section of this chapter contains cable data sheets. These are listed in numerical
order by catalog number, where possible. However, some data sheets cover more than
one catalog number, so some catalog numbers may be out of order.
Cable data sheets are listed in this order:
Cable Data Sheet Catalog Description

Numbers
IC647CBL704 Workstation Interface board to Series 90 CPU
IC690CBL701 PCM to Workmaster (IBM PC-XT)
IC690CBL702 PCM to IBM PC-AT
IC690CBL705 PCM to Workmaster II (IBM PS/2)
IC690CBL714 Series 90 Multidrop
IC693CBL300/301/302/312/313/314
I/O Bus Expansion cables, continuous shield. This data sheet
also includes information on building custom length I/O Bus
ExpansionCables.
IC693CBL303 Hand-Held Programmer cable, 6 feet (2 meters)
IC693CBL304/305 WYE cables - Port expansion cable s used with PCM 300,
PCM301, PCM311, and CMM311
IC693CBL306/307 Extension cables for 50-pin connectors on high-density I/O
modules
IC693CBL308/309 I/O Interface cables for 50-pin connectors on high-density I/O
modules
IC693CBL310 I/O Interface cable for 24-pin connectors on high-density I/O
modules, 10 ft. (3 m). Obsolete.
IC693CBL311/317/319/320 I/O Interface cables for 24-pin connectors on APU301/302
IC693CBL315 I/O Interface cable for 24-pin connectors on high-density I/O
modules, 10 ft. (3 m). Obsolete.
IC693CBL316 “Station Manager Cable.” Serial cable, 3-feet long, with 9-pin
D-shell to 6-pin RJ-11 connectors.
IC693CBL321/322/323 I/O straight connector cables, faceplate to terminal block,
24-pins. Obsolete.
IC693CBL327/328 I/O right angle connector cables, faceplate to stripped leads
IC693CBL329/330/331/332/333/334
I/O right angle connector, faceplate to terminal block, 24-pin.
Includes informationoncablekitsIC693CBK002/003/004.
IC693CBL340/341 PTM interface cables. Connect between PTMPM module
(mounts in Series 90-30 baseplate) and PTMIM board (DIN-
rail mounted).
10
IC647CBL704
Workstation Interface to Series 90 CPU (SNP Port) Cable
(Includes Instructions on Building Custom Length Cables)
Function of cable
The serial Work Station Interface cable has a 15-pin D connector on one end and a
37-pin D connector on the other end. This cable connects the CPUs serial port to the
Work station Interface board installed in the programming computer through an
isolated shielded, twisted pair.
Cable Specifications
Cable Length 10 feet (3 meters)
Connectors
CPU Side 15-pin male, D-subminiature type with M3 screws and AMP hood 207908-4, or equivalent
Programmer Side 37-pin male, D-subminiature type with 4-40 screws and AMP hood 1-207908-0, or equivalent
Hardware Kit AMP 207871-1. Kit includes two metric screws and two screw clips.
Cable Type 24 AWG (.21 mm2), 30V computer grade. Extra flexible construction recommended for short
lengths.
Connecting the Cable

H Attach the 15-pin D connector to the serial connector on the PLC power supply on
the CPU baseplate.
H Attach the 37-pin D connector to the 37-pin D connector on the Work Station
Interface board.
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
a43060
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
WSI
SERIAL
SERIES 90–30
SERIAL
ÎÎÎÎ
CABLE
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
PROGRAMMER
Figure 10-1. Serial Port to Work Station Interface Board Cable Connection
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
10
Building Custom Length Cables

The following information is provided for those users who may want to build a serial
cable with a different length for connecting a Series 90 PLC to a Workmaster II computer.
Î
ÎÎ Î Î ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
PIN PIN a43114
0V 1 7 0V
ÎÎ
Î Î
SD (B) 26 11 RD (B’)
Î
ÎÎÎ Î
SD (A) 27 10 RD (A’)
WORKSTATION 9 RT
SERIES
INTERFACE CTS (A) 30 90–70
Î
ÎÎ Î
14 RTS (B)
CTS (B) 31 6 RTS (A) (CPU)
Î
ÎÎÎ Î
(WS9A1) RTS (B) 32 8 CTS (B’)
SERIES
RTS (A) 33 15 CTS (A’)
Î
ÎÎÎ Î
RT 36 90–30
RD (B) 34 13 SD (B) (PS)
Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
RD (A) 35 12 SD (A)
SHLD 37 1 SHLD
4000 FEET
37– PIN 37– PIN (1200 METERS) 15– PIN 15– PIN
FEMALE MALE MAXIMUM MALE FEMALE
D–TYPE D–TYPE D–TYPE D–TYPE
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
Figure 10-2. Series 90 PLC to Workmaster II Serial Cable
H Cable Type - 24 AWG (.22 mm2), 30V computer grade. Extra flexible construction
recommended for short lengths.
H Connectors - 37-pin male D-type with 4-40 screws and AMP hood No. 1-207908-0
or equivalent. 15-pin male D-type with M3 screws and AMP hood No. 207908-4, or
equivalent. An AMP connector is not supplied with M3 (metric) screws.
H Hardware Kit - AMP 207871-1. This kit includes two metric screws, and two screw
clips.
Multidrop Configuration, Workmaster II to Series 90 PLCs

The following illustrations show the wiring diagram and requirements for connecting a
Workmaster II, Workmaster, or compatible computer to Series 90 PLCs in an 8-wire
multidrop, serial data configuration.
The figure below is an example of the wiring configuration required for the multidrop
configuration when using the RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 converter.
Note
The connector to the PLC serial port in the Series 90-30 PLC must be a
right angle connector in order for the hinged door to close properly.
10
IC690CBL705 OR EQUIVALENT RS–232/RS–422 RS–422

RS–232 SHIELDED PAIRS CONVERTER MAKE CONNECTIONS a44511
Î ÎÎÎ Î
(IC690ACC900) INSIDE D–CONNECTORS
SLAVE
PIN PIN PIN PIN STATION
Î Î Î Î Î
TD 2 3 RD DCD ( A ) 2 2
RD 3 2 TD DCD ( B ) 3 3
RTS 4 5 CTS RD ( A’ ) 10 12 SD ( A )
ÎÎ
SERIES
Î Î Î Î ÎÎ
CTS 5 20 DTR RD ( B’ ) 11 13 SD ( B ) 90–70
DCD 8 8 DCD SD ( A ) 12 10 RD ( A’ )
WORKMASTER DTR 20 SD ( B ) 13 11 RD ( B’ )
Î ÎÎ
Î Î Î
CPU
RT 9 * 9 RD RS–422
RS–232 CTS ( A’ ) 15 6 RTS ( A ) PORT
PORT CTS ( B’ ) 8 14 RTS ( B )
Î ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î
RTS ( A ) 6 15 CTS ( A’ )
RTS ( B ) 14 8 CTS ( B’ )
+5V 5 5 +5V
GND 7 7 GND 0V 7 7 0V
1 SHLD SHLD 1 1 SHLD
25– PIN 25– PIN 25– PIN 25–PIN 15–PIN 15– PIN 15– PIN 15– PIN
MALE FEMALE MALE FEMALE FEMALE MALE MALE FEMALE
RS–232 RS–422
Î
LAST
PORT PORT
PIN STATION
POWER 5V 2
Î
NOTE SOURCE 3
WHEN WIRING RS–422 /485 MULTIDROP CABLES REFLECTIONS ON THE FOR 12 SD ( A ) SERIES
TRANSMISSION LINE CAN BE REDUCED BY CONFIGURING THE CABLE IN A CONVERTER 0V 13 SD ( B ) 90–30
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
DAISY CHAIN FASHION AS SHOWN BELOW. 10 RD ( A’ )
MASTER CONVERTER SLAVE STATION LAST STATION 11 RD ( B’ ) PS
* 9 RD
Î Î
PLC 15–PIN CONNECTOR RS–422
6 RTS ( A ) PORT
SERIES 90–30 LOCATED
ON POWER SUPPLY 14 RTS ( B )
15 CTS ( A’ )
Î
ON THE CPU BOARD 8 CTS ( B’ )
5 +5V
ALSO IT IS RECOMMENDED TO MAKE ANY NECESSARY CONNECTIONS 7 0V
INSIDE THE CABLE CONNECTOR TO BE MOUNTED ON THE PLC. IT IS 1 SHLD
NOT RECOMMENDED TO USE TERMINAL STRIPS TO OTHER TYPES OF
CONNECTORS ALONG THE LENGTH OF THE TRANSMISSION LINE. 15– PIN 15– PIN
TO OTHER PLC’s MALE FEMALE
* TERMINATION RESISTANCE FOR THE RECEIVE DATA (RD) SIGNAL NEEDS TO BE CONNECTED ONLY ON UNITS AT THE END OF THE LINES. THIS TERMINATION IS MADE
ON THE SERIES 90 PLC PRODUCTS BY CONNECTING A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 10 INSIDE THE 15–PIN D–SHELL WITH THE FOLLOWING EXCEPTION. FOR SERIES
90–70 PLCs, CATALOG NUMBERS IC697CPU731 AND IC697CPU771, THE TERMINATION FOR RD AT THE PLC IS IMPLEMENTED BY A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 11.
GROUND POTENTIAL: MULTIPLE UNITS, NOT CONNECTED TO THE SAME POWER SOURCE, MUST HAVE COMMON GROUND POTENTIALS OR GROUND ISOLATION FOR PROPER
OPERATION OF THIS SYSTEM.
Figure 10-3. Example of Multidrop Configuration with Converter
The following figure is an example of the wiring configuration required when a Work
Station Interface board is installed in the computer. The 15-pin serial port connector for
the 90-30 PLC is on the power supply; the 37-pin serial port connector for Workmaster II
and Workmaster computers is on the Work Station Interface board in the programming
computer. The cable type for these connections should be 24 AWG (.22 mm2), 30V
computer grade. Extra flexible construction is recommended for short lengths.
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
10
WORKMASTER OR a43846
WORKMASTER II SHIELDED MAKE CONNECTIONS SERIES
WSI TWISTED INSIDE D-CONNECTORS 90 PLC
PIN PAIRS PIN
SD (A) 27 10 RD (A’)
SD (B) 26 11 RD (B’)
RD (A’) 35 12 SD (A)
RD (B’) 34 13 SD (B)
CTS (A’) 31 6 RTS (A)
CTS (B’) 30 14 RTS (B)
RTS (A) 33 15 CTS (A’)
RTS (B) 32 8 CTS (B’)
RT 36 9 RT
0V
* * 7
1 0V
SHIELD 37 1 SHIELD
37-PIN 15-PIN
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
UP TO A
MAXIMUM OF SERIES
4,000 FEET 90 PLC
(1,200 METERS)
PIN
10 RD (A’)
11 RD (B’)
12 SD (A)
13 SD (B)
6 RTS (A)
NOTE 14 RTS (B)
WHEN WIRING RS-422/485 MULTIDROP 15 CTS (A’)
CABLES, REFLECTIONS ON THE TRANS- 8 CTS (B’)
MISSION LINE CAN BE REDUCED BY CON- 9 RT
FIGURING THE CABLE IN A DAISY CHAIN
* 7 0V
FASHION AS SHOWN BELOW. 1 SHIELD
WORKMASTER PLC 1 15-PIN

CONNECTOR
SERIES
PLC 3 PLC 2 90 PLC
PIN
10 RD (A’)
11 RD (B’)
12 SD (A)
13 SD (B)
6 RTS (A)
ALSO IT IS RECOMMENDED TO MAKE ANY 14 RTS (B)
IMPORTANT ! NECESSARY CONNECTIONS INSIDE THE 15 CTS (A’)
CABLE CONNECTOR TO BE MOUNTED ON 8 CTS (B’)
THE PLC. 9 RT
* 7 0V
IT IS NOT RECOMMENDED TO USE TERMI- 1
DO NOT SHIELD
NAL STRIPS OR OTHER TYPES OF CON-
USE TERMINAL STRIPS
NECTORS ALONG THE LENGTH OF THE 15-PIN
OR OTHER TYPES OF
TRANSMISSION LINE. CONNECTOR
CONNECTORS ALONG THE
LENGTH OF THE TRANSMISSION
LINE WHEN WIRING A
MULTIDROP SERIAL DATA
TO OTHER PLC’s
CONFIGURATION (MAXIMUM OF 8 PLC’s ON A MULTIDROP)
ÎÎÎ Î
TERMINATION RESISTANCE FOR THE RECEIVE DATA (RD) SIGNAL NEEDS TO BE CON-
NECTED ONLY ON UNITS AT THE END OF THE LINES. THIS TERMINATION IS MADE ON
THE SERIES 90 PLC PRODUCTS BY CONNECTING A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 10
ÎÎÎ Î
INSIDE THE 15-PIN D-SHELL, WITH THE FOLLOWING EXCEPTION. FOR SERIES 90-70 PLCs,
CATALOG NUMBERS IC697CPU731 AND IC697CPU771, THE TERMINATION FOR
RD AT THE PLC IS IMPLEMENTED BY A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 11.
ÎÎ
CAUTION
GROUND POTENTIAL: MULTIPLE UNITS, NOT CONNECTED TO THE SAME POWER
SOURCE, MUST HAVE GROUND POTENTIAL WITHIN " 7V FOR PROPER OPERATION
OF THIS SYSTEM. FAILURE TO PROVIDE A COMMON GROUND MAY CAUSE DAMAGE
TO PLC COMPONENTS.
Figure 10-4. Series 90 PLC to Programmer 8-Wire Multidrop, Serial Data Configuration
10
IC690CBL701
PCM, ADC, CMM to Workmaster (PC-XT) Cable
NOTE: This cable was designed for use with older computers such as
PC or XT types and would not likely be used for new projects.
Function of cable
This cable provides RS-232 signal connections between the RS-232 port on a PCM, ADC,
or CMM module and a serial port on a Workmaster computer or IBM-XT or equivalent
Personal Computer.

Connectors
PCM/ADC/CMM 25-pin male, D-subminiature type, AMP 205208-1, or equivalent
Side 9-pin male, D-subminiature type, AMP 205203-1, or equivalent
Programmer Side
Cable Clamps
25-pin AMP 207908-7 or equivalent
Cable Type Six conductor, overall shield, non-paired AWG #24 (.21 mm2),
Belden 9536 or equivalent
Wiring Diagram
Î ÎÎ
PIN PIN a42831
Î
ÎÎ TD 2 3 RD
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
RD 3 2 TD
Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
RTS 4 5 CTS
WORKMASTER CTS 5 20 DTR PCM
Î
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
OR 8
DCD 8 DCD
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ
IBM PC-XT
DTR 9 1 SHLD
GND 7 7 GND
9– PIN 9– PIN 25– PIN 25– PIN
FEMALE MALE MALE FEMALE
Figure 10-5. PCM, ADC, or CMM to Workmaster or PC-XT Serial Cable
Note
Although the IC690CBL701 and 702 cables look identical (except for
catalog number labeling), the internal pin connections are different.
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
10
PCM to Programmer Cable Installation
Caution
The Series 90-30 PLC baseplate that contains the PCM, ADC, or CMM
and the programmer ground connections must be at the same ground
potential. Incorrect wiring will result in damage to the programmer or
the module.
H Select the WYE cable (IC693CBL305 or IC693CBL304).
H Connect the IC690CBL701 cable’s 9-pin female connector to the male RS-232
connector (serial port) on the selected programming device.
H Connect the cable’s 25-pin male connector to the Port 1 connector on the WYE cable.
H Connect the 25-pin male connector on the WYE cable to the female connector on
the front of the PCM, ADC, or CMM module.
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
WORKMASTER a44748
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
IC690CBL701
RS–232 PCM
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ (DEFAULT PORT)
IC693CBL305B
PORT 1
Figure 10-6. PCM to Workmaster Computer or PC-XT Personal Computer
10
IC690CBL702
PC-AT to PCM, ADC, CMM Cable
Function of cable
This cable provides RS-232 signal connections between the RS-232 port on a PCM, ADC,
or CMM module and a serial port on an IBM PC-AT or equivalent Personal Computer.
Connectors
PCM/ADC/CMMSide 25-pin male, D-subminiature type, AMP 205208-1, or equivalent
Programmer Side 9-pin male, D-subminiature type, AMP 205203-1, or equivalent
Cable Clamps
Cable Type Six conductor, overall shield, non-paired AWG #24 (.21 mm2), Belden 9536 or equivalent
Wiring Diagram
Î Î
PIN PIN a42832
Î Î
DCD 1 1 SHLD
RD 2 2 TD
Î TD 3 3 RD
Î
Î Î
PC–AT DTR 4 8 DCD PCM
Î Î
RTS 7 5 CTS
CTS 8 20 DTR
9– PIN
MALE
Î GND
9– PIN
FEMALE
5 7 GND
25– PIN
MALE
Î 25– PIN
FEMALE
Figure 10-7. PCM, ADC, or CMM to Workmaster or PC-AT Serial Cable
Note
Although the IC690CBL701 and 702 cables physically look identical

(except for catalog number labeling), the internal pin connections are
different.
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
10
Caution
the module.
PC–AT a44749
IC690CBL702
RS–232 PCM
(DEFAULT PORT)
IC693CBL305B
PORT 1
Figure 10-8. PCM to PC-AT Personal Computer
10
IC690CBL705
Workmaster II (PS/2) to PCM, ADC, CMM Cable
Function of cable
This cable provides RTS-232 signal connections between the RS-232 port on a PCM,
ADC, or CMM module and a serial port on a Workmaster II or an IBM Personal System 2
(PS/2) or equivalent Personal Computer.
Connectors
PCM/ADC/CMMSide 25-pin male, D-subminiature type, AMP 205208-1, or equivalent
Programmer Side 25-pin female, D-subminiature type, AMP 205207-1, or equivalent
Cable Clamps
Cable Type Six conductor, overall shield, non-paired AWG #24 (.21 mm2), Belden 9536 or equivalent
Wiring Diagram
Î PIN PIN
ÎÎ a44033
Î TD 2 3 RD
ÎÎ
Î
Î ÎÎ
Î
RD 3 2 TD
WORKMASTER II
Î ÎÎ
Î
RTS 4 5 CTS
AND CTS 5 20 DTR PCM
Î Î
ÎÎÎ
IBM PS/2 DCD 8 8 DCD
DTR 20 1 SHLD
GND 7 7 GND
25– PIN 25– PIN 25– PIN 25– PIN
MALE FEMALE MALE FEMALE
Figure 10-9. PCM, ADC, or CMM to Workmaster II or PS/2 Serial Cable
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
10
Caution
the module.
ÎÎÎÎÎ
WORKMASTER II a44747
ÎÎÎÎÎ IC690CBL705
ÎÎÎÎÎ
RS–232 PCM
(DEFAULT PORT)
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
IC693CBL305B
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ PORT 1
Figure 10-10. PCM to Workmaster II Computer or PS/2 Computer
10
IC690CBL714A Multidrop Cable
Purpose
This cable has a number of possible applications with Series 90 products:
D To interconnect Series 90-30 PLCs or redundant Series 90-30 PLCs in a multidrop
configuration.
D To interconnect a Series 90-30 PLC and APM module in a multidrop configuration
with a single personal computer (programmer). This allows programming and
troubleshooting both PLC and APM without moving connection cables.
D To interconnect Series 90-70 or redundant Series 90-70 PLCs in a multidrop
configuration.
Specifications
H Connector A: DB15F, 15-pin female connector with M3 latchblocks
H Connectors B and C: DB15M, 15-pin right angle, male connector with spring clips
H Wire: Cable consists of three individually shielded pairs of 22-gauge stranded
conductors. Belden #8777 or equivalent.
H Jumpers: All jumpers are made of #22 AWG (UL1061) type individual wires.
H Length: The length from the back of Connector A to entry into Connector B is 6
inches (+/– 0.5 inch). The length from the back of Connector C to entry into
Connector B is 40 inches (+/– 1.0 inch).
Connector B
Connector C
Connector A
Pin 1
M3 Latching
Blocks (2)
Pin 1
M3 pan head screws (2).

Screws must not protrude
through the end of the Latching
Blocks.
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
10
IC690CBL714A Multi-Drop Cable Wiring Diagram
Connector A, 15-pin Female,

to other CPU or Adapter
N.C. 9
8
Connector B, 15-pin male,
to CPU SNP Port 14
15
5 5
7 7
10 10
11 11
12 12
13 13
14
15
9 N.C.
10
11
12
NOTE: Trim all drain wires 13

flush with the jacket.
9
14
15
N.C. 5
Connector C, 15-pin male, to

next CPU or final term.
Figure 10-11. Connecting Diagram for Multidrop Cable IC690CBL714A
10
Connection Diagrams for IC690CBL714A Cable
Conn. B Conn. C
Conn. A
IC690CBL714A Cable
IC690ACC901
Miniconverter
Serial Cable
Figure 10-12. Multidrop Arrangement for Series 90-30 Redundant System
Conn. B Conn. C to APM Comm. Port
Series 90-30 PLC
PS CPU APM
Conn. A
IC690CBL714A Cable
IC690ACC901
Miniconverter
Serial Cable
Figure 10-13. Connecting CPU and APM to Programmer with IC690CBL714A Cable
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
10
a47100
Conn. B Conn. B Conn. C

PLC A PLC B PLC C
C C C
P P P
U U U
IC690CBL714A IC690CBL714A
Conn. C Conn. A
Conn. A
RS–232/422
Converter
Figure 10-14. Multidrop Arrangement for Series 90-70 TMR Redundant System
10
IC693CBL300/301/302/312/313/314
I/O Bus Expansion Cables
(Includes Instructions for Building Custom Length Cables)
Description
I/O bus expansion cables (IC693CBL300, 301, 312, 313, 314), called “Wye cables,” have a
single male 25-pin D connector on one end and a two-headed (one male, one female)
25-pin D connector on the other end as shown in (A) of the figure. The 50 foot (15m)
(IC693CBL302) cable has a single male connector on the CPU baseplate end and a single
terminated male connector on the expansion baseplate end. The 3 foot cable
(IC693CBL300) can also be used as a WYE adapter cable to simplify building custom length
cables (see the section “Cable Application Suggestions” later in this Chapter).
FEMALE
ÎÎ Î
a43853
CONNECTOR
ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
A ÎÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ
.5, 3, 6, 26 FOOT
ÎÎ Î
CABLES
MALE MALE
ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
Î
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ Î
B ÎÎ
MALE
ÎÎ
Î 50 FOOT
CABLE
MALE
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
Figure 10-15. Detail of I/O Bus Expansion Cables
Cable Lengths
h IC693CBL300 3 feet (1 meter), continuous shield
h IC693CBL301 6 feet (2 meters), continuous shield
h IC693CBL302 or IC693CBL314 50 feet (15 meters), continuous shield
h IC693CBL312 0.5 feet (0.15 meters), continuous shield
h IC693CBL313 25 feet (8 meters), continuous shield
Function of Cables
The I/O Bus expansion cables are used to extend the I/O bus to expansion or remote
baseplates in a Series 90-30 I/O system when additional I/O slots are needed or
baseplates are required some distance from the CPU baseplate. The prewired I/O bus
expansion cables can be used for connecting either expansion or remote baseplates.
Where required cable length is not available in a standard cable, a custom cable must be
built (see the section “Building Custom Length I/O Bus Expansion Cables” for detailed
instructions).
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
10
Connecting the Cables

H Connect the single male connector to the 25-pin female connector on the right side
of the CPU baseplate.
H Connect the male connector on the dual connector end of the cable to the 25-pin
female connector on the first expansion baseplate.
H Connect the unused 25-pin female connector on the dual connector end of the cable
to either the single male connector of a second I/O bus expansion cable to continue
the I/O bus expansion chain, or to an I/O bus Terminator plug if this is the last cable
in the expansion chain.
Important Notes About I/O Bus Expansion Cables

1. The maximum number of cables that can be included in an I/O expansion system is
seven, and the total maximum cable length between the CPU baseplate and the last
expansion baseplate is 50 feet (15 meters). The total maximum cable length between
the CPU baseplate and the last remote baseplate is 700 feet (213 meters). Failure to
observe these maximum cable lengths could result in erratic operation of the PLC
system.
2. CPUs 350 – 364 support a maximum of seven I/O expansion cables. CPUs 331 – 341
support a maximum of four I/O expansion cables.
3. The 50 foot (15 meter) I/O bus expansion cable (IC693CBL302), which has a male
connector on each end, has the I/O bus terminating resistors built into the end
connector on the cable. If this cable is used, you would not install a separate terminator
block.
Caution
I/O Bus Expansion cables should NOT be connected or disconnected
with power applied to the I/O expansion baseplate(s). Unexpected
PLC operation may result.
Cable Application Suggestions

In general, it is advantageous to use standard, factory-built cables, where possible, to
save time and avoid wiring errors.
Using Standard Cables

D For connecting between baseplates (either between a CPU and expansion baseplate,
between two expansion baseplates or between two remote baseplates) in the same
cabinet when a standard length (0.5, 1, 2, 8, or 15 meters) will fit the need.
D As a Wye jumper for custom built point-to-point cables (IC693CBL300 is often used
for this). This combination saves time since a point-to-point cable can be built much
faster than a Wye cable. An example of this is shown in Figure 10-23.
Using Custom Built cables

D When you need a cable length not available in a standard size.
D When a cable must be routed through a conduit that is not large enough for a
standard cable’s connector to fit through.
10
Building Custom Length I/O Bus Expansion Cables

This section provides details needed to create custom length I/O Bus Expansion cables.
Two Types of Custom Built Cables

The two types are:
D Point-to-Point – these have a single male connector on one end and a single female
connector on the other end. These are usually used with the IC693CBL300 which
supplies the Wye connection. This combination saves time since a point-to-point
cable can be built much faster than a Wye cable.
D Wye - these have a single male connector on one end and two connectors (one male
and one female) on the other end.
Components Needed to Build Custom Length I/O Bus Expansion Cables

Note: the special two-headed Wye connector used on the standard Wye cables is not
available as a separate component.
Item Description
Cable: Belden8107 only (no substitutes):
Computer cable, overall braid over foil shield, twisted-pair
30volt/80_C (176_F)
24 AWG (.22 mm2) tinned copper, 7 x 32 stranding
Velocity of propagation = 70% [
Nominal impedance = 100Ω
25 Pin Male Connector: Crimp Plug = Amp 207464-1; Pin = Amp 66506-9
Solder Plug = Amp 747912-2
25 Pin FemaleConnector: Crimp Receptacle = Amp 207463-2; Pin = Amp 66504-9
Solder Receptacle = Amp 747913-2
ConnectorShell: Kit - Amp 745833-5:
Metal-plated plastic (plastic with nickel over copper) [
Crimp ring - Amp 745508-1, split ring ferrule
[ = Critical Information
] Vendor part numbers listed for user assembled cables are provided for reference only and do not
suggest or imply that they are preferred. Any part meeting the same specification can be used.
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
10
Expansion Port Pin Assignments

The following table lists the expansion port pin assignments you will need when
building remote cables. All connections between cables are point-to point, that is, pin 2
of one end to pin 2 of the opposite end, pin 3 to pin 3, etc.
Table 10-2. Expansion Port Pin Assignments
Pin Number Signal Name Function

16 DIODT I/OSerial Data Positive
17 DIODT/ I/O Serial Data Negative
24 DIOCLK I/O Serial Clock Positive
25 DIOCLK/ I/O Serial Clock Negative
20 DRSEL Remote Select Positive
21 DRSEL/ Remote Select Negative
12 DRPERR Parity Error Positive
13 DRPERR/ Parity Error Negative
8 DRMRUN Remote Run Positive
9 DRMRUN/ Remote Run Negative
2 DFRAME Cycle Frame Positive
3 DFRAME/ Cycle Frame Negative
1 FGND Frame Ground for Cable Shield
7 0V Logic Ground
I/O Expansion Bus Termination

When two or more baseplates are cabled together in an expansion system, the I/O
expansion bus must be properly terminated. The I/O bus must be terminated at the last
baseplate in an expansion system. Each signal pair is terminated with 120 ohm, 1/4 watt
resistors wired between the appropriate pins, as follows (see the above table, also):
pins 16 - 17; 24 - 25; 20 - 21; 12 - 13; 8 - 9; 2 - 3
The I/O bus termination can be done one of the following ways:
h By installing an I/O Bus Terminator Plug, catalog number IC693ACC307, on the last
expansion baseplate (local expansion baseplate or remote baseplate) in the system.
The Terminator Plug has a resistor pack physically mounted inside of a connector.
The I/O Bus Terminator Plug is shipped with each baseplate; only the last baseplate
in the expansion chain can have the I/O Bus Terminator Plug installed. Unused I/O
Bus Terminator Plugs can be discarded or saved as spares.
h If an expansion system has only one expansion baseplate, the I/O bus can be
terminated by installing as the last cable, the 50 foot (15 meter) I/O Expansion cable,
catalog number IC693CBL302 or IC693CBL314. These cables have the termination
resistors installed in the end that connects to the expansion baseplate connector.
h You can also build a custom cable with termination resistors wired to the appropriate
pins for installation at the end of the bus.
10
Shield Treatment
All GE Fanuc factory made cables are made with a continuous, or 100% shield. This
means that the braided cable shield is connected to the metal shell of the connector
around the entire perimeter of the connector. This provides a low impedance path to
frame ground for any noise energy that is coupled onto the cable shield.
For custom length cables made per Figure 10-18, the best noise immunity is achieved
when using a metalized connector cover that makes contact with the cable’s braided and
foil shielding and with the connector shell on the terminating end.
Note
It is not sufficient to only solder the drain wire to the connector shell. It
is required that the cable’s shield be continuous across the entire length
of the cable, including at the terminations. The figure below shows the
recommended method for folding the braided shield back before
inserting the cable into a metallized cover.
a45524
Foil & Braid

(to be folded back
over ferrule and Split–Ring Cable
ground wire) Ferrule Jacket
Conductors Ground Wire

Attach to Pin 1 for custom length cables
OR
Fold back for custom Wye cables. *
* See “Alert for Users of Early Remote Baseplate Versions” for
description of when to attach drain wire to pin 1.
Figure 10-16. How to use Split-Ring Ferrules for Foil and Braided Cable Shield
For typical industrial applications, all expansion and remote baseplate cables can be
made with plastic shell covers and should be wired as shown in Figure 10-19. In either
case, pin 1 should be wired into both ends of the custom length cable and the
recommendations listed below should be followed for the Wye cables treatment in the
remote (IC693CHS392/399) baseplates.
When using 100% shielded cables all local (CPU and expansion) baseplates in the system
must be solidly referenced to the same ground point or a potential difference between
baseplates could disturb signal transmission.
Alert for Users of Early Remote Baseplate Versions

In early remote baseplates versions, IC693CHS393E (and earlier) and IC693CHS399D
(and earlier), it is necessary to remove pin 1 of the mating cable where the cable plugs
into the baseplate. This means that when using a factory made Wye cable, such as
IC693CBL300, you must break pin 1 out of the male end where it plugs into the remote
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
10
baseplate before using it with one of these baseplates. Custom built Wye cables for these
baseplates should be built using Figure 10-20.
Remote baseplates IC693CHS393F (and later) and IC693CHS399E (and later) have a
change inside the baseplate which eliminates the need to remove pin 1 from the mating
cable. When using factory made Wye cable with these baseplates, it is not necessary to
remove pin 1 from the cable. Custom built Wye cables for these baseplates can be made
using either Figure 10-20 or Figure 10-21. Figure 10-21 shows how the standard (factory
made) Wye cables are made.
By removing pin 1 in custom built Wye cables made for the earlier versions of remote
baseplates, the pin 7 (0V) signal reference originates in the main (CPU) baseplate. In
these earlier versions of the remote baseplates, pin 1 was tied to pin 7 (0V) and also AC
coupled to the remote frame ground. When using these baseplates in combination with
the 100% shielded Wye cables, the pin 7 (0V) reference would be improperly DC coupled
to the remote frame ground through the D-subminiature connector shell, which is DC
coupled to the remote frame ground.
In the remote baseplates IC693CHS393F (and later) and IC693CHS399E (and later), the
pin 1 shield signal is DC coupled to the remote frame ground and not attached to pin 7
(0V). This allows the best noise immunity by providing a good continuous cable shield,
and still allows the pin 7 (0V) signal reference to originate in the CPU baseplate without
the need for removing pin 1 in any factory or custom built cable. The D-subminiature
connector shell is still DC coupled to the remote frame ground.
Making a 100% Shielded Cable

Use the following steps to build a 100% shielded cable:
1. Strip approximately 5/8 inch of insulation from your custom cable to expose the
shield.
2. Remove the male Pin 1 from any connector plugging directly into an older version
remote baseplate (IC693CHS393E, IC693CHS399D, or earlier).
3. Put split-ring ferrule over cable insulation (Figure 10-17).
4. Fold the shield back over top of the cable insulation and ferrule.
5. Place the collar of the metal hood over top of the folded shield and securely clamp
the hood.
6. Test your cable for continuity between both connector shells. Connect an ohmmeter
between the shells and flex the cable at both ends. If the metalized connector hood
is not making proper contact with the cable shield at either end, the connection will
show intermittent continuity on the ohmmeter.
7. Plug the metal hooded cable onto a remote baseplate expansion port connector or
into a GE Fanuc WYE cable and securely tighten the two screws. Installing and
tightening the screws will electrically connect the shield to the remote baseplate
frame ground, which should in turn should be connected to earth ground as
instructed in the “Installation” chapter, under the heading “Baseplate Safety
Grounding.”
10
Wiring Diagrams
The following wiring diagrams show the wiring configuration for I/O expansion system
cables. Wiring diagrams are provided for both point-to-point cables and Wye cables.
TWISTED PAIRS, SHIELDED a45525
PIN (7 PAIRS) PIN
DIODT 16 16 DIODT
DIODT/ 17 17 DIODT/ SERIES
DIOCLK 24 24 DIOCLK 90–30
DIOCLK/ 25 25 DIOCLK/ BASEPLATE
DRSEL 20 20 DRSEL EXPANSION
WYE
DRSEL/ 21 21 DRSEL/ PORT
CABLE
DPRERR 12 12 DPRERR
SINGLE
DPRERR/ 13 13 DPRERR/ OR
CONNECTOR
END DRMRUN 8 8 DRMRUN
DRMRUN/ 9 9 DRMRUN/ WYE
DPFRAME 2 2 DPFRAME CABLE
DOUBLE
DPFRAME/ 3 3 DPFRAME/
CONNECTOR
0V 7 7 0V
END
NC NC
FGND 1 1 FGND
25–PIN 25–PIN SHIELD DRAIN WIRE 25–PIN 25–PIN

METALIZED SHELL METALIZED SHELL
NOTE:
Bold dashed line shows continuous (100%) shielding when metallized shell connectors are plugged together.
Figure 10-17. Point-To-Point Cable Wiring for Continuous Shield Custom Length Cables
TWISTED PAIRS, SHIELDED a45527

(7 PAIRS)
PIN PIN
DIODT 16 16 DIODT
DIODT/ 17 17 DIODT/
DIOCLK 24 24 DIOCLK
DIOCLK/ 25 25 DIOCLK/
SERIES
DRSEL 20 20 DRSEL
WYE DRSEL/ 21 21 DRSEL/ 90–30
CABLE DRPERR 12 12 DRPERR BASEPLATE
EXPANSION
DRPERR/ 13 13 DRPERR/
SINGLE DRMRUN 8 8 DRMRUN PORT
CONNECTOR DRMRUN/ 9 9 DRMRUN/
END DFRAME 2 2 DFRAME OR
DFRAME/ 3 3 DFRAME/
0V 7 7 0V WYE
NC NC CABLE
FGND 1 1 FGND
25–PIN 25– PIN SHIELD DRAIN WIRE 25– PIN 25– PIN
Figure 10-18. Point-To-Point Cable Wiring Diagram for Applications Requiring Less Noise
Immunity
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
10
TWISTED SHIELDED a47076
Î ÎÎ
ÎÎ
PIN PAIRS PIN
Î ÎÎ
DIODT 16 16 DIODT
DIODT/ 17 17 DIODT/
Î ÎÎ
DIOCLK 24 24 DIOCLK
CABLE DIOCLK/ 25 25 DIOCLK/
Î ÎÎÎ
TO DRSEL 20 20 DRSEL
DOWNSTREAM DRSEL/ 21 21 DRSEL/
REMOTE
Î Î
RACK DRPERR 12 12 DRPERR EXPANSION
DRPERR/ 13 13 DRPERR/ BASEPLATE
OR DRMRUN
Î ÎÎ
DRMRUN 8 8 CONNECTOR
DRMRUN/ 9 9 DRMRUN/
TERMINATION
2 2 DPFRAME
Î ÎÎ
PLUG DPFRAME
Î ÎÎ
0V 7 7 0V
NC NC
FGND 1 1 FGND
NC
25–PIN 25-PIN 25–PIN 25–PIN

Metallized Shell Metallized Shell
SHIELD DRAIN WIRE OR CUT PIN 1 HERE IN
SHIELD DRAIN WIRE NOT CONNECTED FACTORY MADE WYE CABLES
ONLY FOR REMOTE BASEPLATES IC693CHS393E,
IC693CHS399D (AND EARLIER REVISIONS OF EACH)
ÎÎ
PIN
16 DIODT
17 DIODT/
24 DIOCLK
ÎÎ
25 DIOCLK/
20 DRSEL
21 DRSEL/
12 DRPERR CABLE
Î
13 DRPERR/ FROM
DRMRUN UPSTREAM
8
RACK
Î
9 DRMRUN/
2 DPFRAME
DPFRAME/
Î
3
7 0V
Î
NC
1 FGND
25-PIN 25–PIN
MALE FEMALE
NOTE:
Figure 10-19. Earlier Versions of Remote Baseplate Custom WYE Cable Wiring Diagram
Note
In remote baseplates, IC693CHS393E (and earlier) and IC693CHS399D (and earlier), it is
necessary to remove pin 1 of the mating cable where the cable plugs into the baseplate.
This means that when using a factory made Wye cable, IC693CBL300, you must break
pin 1 out of the male end where it plugs into the remote baseplate before using it with
one of these baseplates. Custom built Wye cables for these baseplates should be built using
Figure 10-20. See the section “Alert to Users of Early Remote Baseplate Versions” for
more details.
10
Remote baseplates IC693CHS393F (and later( and IC693CHS399E (and later) have a
change inside the baseplate which alleviates the need to remove pin 1 from the mating
cable. When using factory made Wye cable with these baseplates, it is not necessary to
remove pin 1 from the cable. Custom built Wye cables for these baseplates can be made
using either Figure 10-20 or Figure 10-21. Figure 10-21 shows how the factory made Wye
cable are made.
Î ÎÎÎ
TWISTED SHIELDED a47087
PIN PAIRS PIN
Î ÎÎÎ
DIODT 16 16 DIODT
DIODT/ 17 17 DIODT/
Î ÎÎ
DIOCLK 24 24 DIOCLK
CABLE DIOCLK/ 25 25 DIOCLK/
Î ÎÎ
TO DRSEL 20 20 DRSEL
DOWNSTREAM DRSEL/ 21 21 DRSEL/
Î ÎÎ
RACK REMOTE
DRPERR 12 12 DRPERR EXPANSION
DRPERR/ 13 13 DRPERR/ BASEPLATE
Î ÎÎÎ
OR DRMRUN
DRMRUN 8 8 CONNECTOR
DRMRUN/ 9 9 DRMRUN/
TERMINATION
Î
ÎÎ
PLUG DPFRAME 2 2 DPFRAME
Î Î
0V 7 7 0V
NC NC
FGND 1 1 FGND
25–PIN 25-PIN 25–PIN 25–PIN

SHIELD DRAIN WIRE
SHIELD DRAIN WIRE CONNECTED
FOR REMOTE BASEPLATES IC693CHS393F,
IC693CHS399E (AND EARLIER REVISIONS OF EACH)
ÎÎ
PIN
16 DIODT
17 DIODT/
DIOCLK
Î
24
25 DIOCLK/
20 DRSEL
Î
21 DRSEL/
12 DRPERR CABLE
Î
13 DRPERR/ FROM
DRMRUN UPSTREAM
8
Î
RACK
9 DRMRUN/
2 DPFRAME
ÎÎ
3 DPFRAME/
7 0V
NC
1 FGND
25-PIN 25–PIN
MALE FEMALE
NOTE:
Figure 10-20. Current Remote baseplate (IC693CHS393/399) Custom Wye Cable Wiring
Diagram
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls Chapter 10 Cables 10-31
10
Application Examples
Expansion System Cable Connections

The following example shows cable connections in a system that has expansion
baseplates but no remote baseplates.
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
PROGRAMMER CPU BASEPLATE a47057
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
SERIAL C
P
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
U NOTE
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î
TOTAL MAXIMUM
DISTANCE FROM
ÎÎÎÎ
DISCRETE/ANALOG/OPTION CPU BASEPLATE
TO LAST EXPANSION
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
EXPANSION BASEPLATE BASEPLATE IS
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
50 FEET (15 METERS)
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
I/O EXPANSION CABLES
IC693CBL300, 3 FT. (1 METER)
IC693CBL301, 6 FT. (1.8 METERS)
ÎÎ
Î Î
EXPANSION BASEPLATE IC693CBL302/314, 50 FT. (15 METERS
ÎÎ
Î Î
IC693CBL312, 0.5 FT. (.15 METERS)
IC693CBL313, 25 FT. (8 METERS)
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
* See NOTE
ÎÎÎÎ
*NOTE EXPANSION BASEPLATE
Each signal pair on the I/O bus must

ÎÎÎÎ
Î
be terminated at the end of the I/O
bus with120 ohm resistors. This ter-
mination can be done with the I/O
Bus Terminator Plug (IC693ACC307),
ÎÎÎ
by using the 50 foot (15 meter) cable
Î Î
(IC693CBL302/314) with built-in termi- EXPANSION BASEPLATE
nating resistors, or by building a cus- I/O BUS
Î Î
tom cable with the resistors installed TERMINATOR
PLUG (See *NOTE)
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
in the connector at the end of the bus.
IC693ACC307
Figure 10-21. Example of Connecting Expansion Baseplates
10
Remote and Expansion System Cable Connection Example

The following example shows cable connections in a system that includes both remote
and expansion baseplates. A system can have a combination of remote and expansion
baseplates as long as the distance and cable requirements are followed.
CPU
C
BASEPLATE P
IC693CHS391/397 U
1
EXPANSION
BASEPLATE
EXPANSION BASEPLATE
IC693CHS392/398
MAXIMUM DISTANCE
FROM CPU 50 FEET
(15 METERS)
REMOTE BASEPLATE
REMOTE 3
BASEPLATE
IC693CHS393/399
ÎÎ REMOTE BASEPLATE
REMOTE
ÎÎ 3
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
BASEPLATE
IC693CHS393/399
2
REMOTE
BASEPLATE
REMOTE BASEPLATE
IC693CHS393/399 3
MAXIMUM DISTANCE
FROM CPU= 700 FEET 4
(213 METERS)
1 Standard Wye Cable
2 Custom Built Point-to-Point Cable
3 IC693CBL300 Standard Wye Cable, Used as Wye Jumper
4 IC693ACC307 Bus Terminator
Figure 10-22. Example of Connecting Expansion and Remote Baseplates
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
10
IC693CBL303
Hand-Hand Programmer and Converter (IC690ACC900) Cable
Function of cable
The Hand-Held Programmer cable provides the connections that allow the Hand-Held
Programmer and the Programmable Logic Controller to communicate. This cable also
provides the power connections for the HHP, and a signal which indicates to the PLC
that the HHP is attached to the PLC serial port. It can also be used to connect the
RS-485 serial port on the PLC to the RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 converter (IC690ACC900).
The prewired cable (IC693CBL303) is 6 feet (2 meters) long. If a different length cable is
required for connection to the converter, refer to the information below for specifications
and wiring information.
This information is essential if you intend to build your own cable. The recommended
cable types for this cable are listed below and depend on the length of the cable.
Specifications for IC693CBL303 Prewired cable

Item Description
Connectors 15-pin male, D-Subminiature Type, Canon DA15S (solder pot)
Same connector is on
both ends
Hood AMP 207470-1 connector shell
Hardware kit AMP 207871-1 Kit includes 2 metric screws and 2 screw clips
Cable Type Belden 9508:
AWG #24 (.22 mm2)
CableLength 6 feet (2 meters)
Wire Types for Custom Cables

Cable Length Wire Size Catalog Number
30 feet (10m) 22 (.36 mm2) Belden 9309
>30 (10m) feet to 22 (.36 mm2) Same as for 30 feet. In addition, the+5 VDC logic power source for the
980 feet (300m) converter cannot be supplied by the PLC. It must be provided by an
external power supply connected to the +5V and SG pins at the converter
end of the connector. The +5V pin at the PLC connector must not be con-
nected to the cable. The +5V and SG connections from the power supply
must be isolated from its own power line ground connection. Be sure that
there is no connection between the external supply and the PLC except the
SG cable connection.
1. Catalog numbers are provided as suggestions only. Any cable having the same electrical characteristics is
acceptable. It is strongly recommended that you use stranded wire. Since it is sometimes hard to find a
cable with the desired number of twisted pairs (the Belden 9309 has an extra pair), you may end up with a
cable with extra pairs.
2. A greater cable length between the PLC and the converter increases the possibility of noise coupling into
the data and converter logic power circuits within the cable. The cable should be as short as possible in
noisy environments. In extreme cases, additional noise protection measures, such as double-shielded
cables, may be required.
10
Wiring Diagram
The following wiring diagram applies to the IC693CBL303 cable and to custom-built
cables.
RS–422
RS–232/RS–485
TWISTED SHIELDED PAIRS a44750
CONVERTER
Î Î ÎÎÎ
(IC690ACC900) PIN PIN
Î Î ÎÎ
SHLD 1 1 SHLD
ATTCH 4 4 ATTCH
Î Î Î
DCD (A) 2 2 DCD (A)
DCD (B) 3 3 DCD (B)
Î Î ÎÎ
ÎÎ
RT 9
RD (A’) 10 12 SD (A)
Î Î Î Î
RD (B’) 11 13 SD (B) SERIES
Î Î ÎÎ
9 RT 90 PLC
SD (A) 12 10 RD (A’)
Î Î ÎÎÎ
SD (B) 13 11 RD (B’) RS–422
PORT
Î Î Î
+5V 5 5 +5V
Î Î Î Î
0V 7 7 0V
RTS (A) 6 15 CTS (A’)
Î Î Î
ÎÎÎ
RTS (B) 14 8 CTS (B’)
CTS (A’) 15 6 RTS (A)
CTS (B’) 8 14 RTS (B)
25–PI 15–PIN 15–PIN 15–PIN 15–PIN

FEMALE FEMALE MALE MALE FEMALE
RS–232 PORT RS–485 PORT
PINS 9 AND 10 ARE JUMPERED AT BOTH ENDS OF CABLE TO CONNECT TERMINATING

NOTE:
RESISTORS FOR THE RD SIGNAL WHICH IS INSIDE THE PLC POWER SUPPLY.
Figure 10-23. Wiring Connections for IC693CBL303 and Custom-Built Cables
Connecting the Cable

H Attach the 15-pin male D connector to the serial port connector on the PLC power
supply.
H Attach the D connector on the other end to the mating connector on the HHP.
These connections are shown in the following figure.
a47062
HAND–HELD
PROGRAMMER
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
SERIES 90–30
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
C
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î Î Î
CABLE P
U
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
(IC693CBL303)
Figure 10-24. Hand-Held Programmer Cable Connection to a Series 90-30 PLC
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
10
IC693CBL304/305
Port Expansion (WYE) Cables for PCM, ADC, and CMM
Function of cable
A WYE cable (IC693CBL304 for PCM300; IC693CBL305 for PCM301/311, ADC311, CMM311,
AD693CMM301, and SLP300) is supplied with each PCM, ADC, and CMM module. The
WYE cable is used to separate two ports available on a single physical connector; the cable
separates the RS-232 from the RS-485 signals. In addition, the WYE cable allows cables used
with the Series 90-70 PCM to be fully compatible with the Series 90-30 PCM. The WYE
cable and cable connections are shown below and on the following page.
Each WYE cable is 1 foot in length and has a right angle male connector on one end that
connects to the PCM module. The other end has a dual female connector with one
connector for port 1 and the other for port 2.
a44225
RS–232
25–PIN FEMALE
1 FOOT CONNECTOR PIN 1
ÎÎ
(+2.0 INCH, –0 INCH)
ÎÎ Î
LABEL
PORT 1
ÎÎ
PORT 2
PCM COMM. CABLE
IC693CBL305B
PIN 1 RS–232 RS–232/RS–485 PIN 1

25–PIN MALE 25–PIN FEMALE
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
Figure 10-25. Wye Cable
CableLength 1 foot (0.3 meters)
25 Pin Male Connector: Crimp Plug = Amp 207464-1; Pin = Amp 66506-9
Solder Plug = Amp 747912-2
25 Pin FemaleConnector: Crimp Receptacle = Amp 207463-2; Pin = Amp 66504-9
Solder Receptacle = Amp 747913-2
ConnectorShell: Kit - Amp 207908-7
Separate Shell = Amp 207345-1;
Male Screw Retainer = Amp 205980-1
Cable Type 27 conductor cable, 28 AWG (.09 mm2), with overall shield, extra
flexible
10
Wiring Information
The following figure shows the pin configuration for each of the connectors on the WYE
cable.
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
a44357
SHIELD
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
1
14 RS–232 TD ( PORT 2 )
ÎÎÎ
( PORT 1 ) RS–232 TD 2
15 RS–232 CTS ( PORT 2 )
( PORT 1 ) RS–232 RD 3
16 RS–232 RD ( PORT 2 )
( PORT 1 ) RS–232 RTS 4
17 RS–232 DTR ( PORT 2 )
( PORT 1 ) RS–232 CTS 5
18 RS–232 DCD ( PORT 2 )
NO CONNECTION 6
19 RS–232 RTS ( PORT 2 )
SIGNAL GROUND 7
20 RS–232 DTR ( PORT 1 )
( PORT 1 ) RS–232 DCD 8
21 RS–485 SD ( B ) (PORT 2 )
( PORT 2 ) RS–485 SD ( A ) 9
22 RS–485 RTS ( B ) ( PORT 2 )
( PORT 2 ) RS–485 RTS ( A ) 10
23 RS–485 CTS ( B’ ) ( PORT 2 )
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
( PORT 2 ) RS–485 CTS ( A’ ) 11
24
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
TERMINATION ( RD ) (PORT 2)
( PORT 2 ) TERMINATION ( CTS ) 12
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
25 RS–485 RD ( B’ ) ( PORT 2 )
( PORT 2) RS–485 RD ( A’ ) 13
MALE CONNECTOR
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎPORT 1
ÎÎÎPORT 2 a44358
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
SHIELD 1 SHIELD 1
14 14
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
RS–232 TD 2 RS–232 TD 2
15 15
RS–232 RD 3 RS–232 RD 3
16 16
RS–232 RTS 4 RS–232 RTS 4
17 17
RS–232 CTS 5 RS–232 CTS 5
18 18
6 6
19 19
SIGNAL GROUND 7 SIGNAL GROUND 7
20 20
RS–232 DTR RS–232 DTR
RS–232 DCD 8 RS–232 DCD 8
21 21
RS–485 SD ( B )
9 RS–485 SD ( A ) 9
22 22
RS–485 RTS ( B )
10 RS–485 RTS ( A ) 10
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
23 23
RS–485 CTS ( B’ )
11 RS–485 CTS ( A’ ) 11
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
Î
24 24
TERMINATION ( RD )
12 TERMINATION ( CTS ) 12
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
25 25
RS–485 RD ( B’ )
13 13
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
RS–485 RD ( A’ )
DUAL FEMALE CONNECTORS
Figure 10-26. Wye Cable Connections
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
10
The WYE cable is 1 foot in length and has a right angle male connector on one end that
connects to the PCM module. The other end has a dual female connector with one
connector for port 1 and the other for port 2.
In order to use an RS-232 cable on port 2 of the Series 90-30 PLC, either a special cable
must be made following the serial port pin assignments shown above or a WYE cable
must be used. The WYE cable allows use of standard Series 90-70 cables
(IC690CBL701/702/705) for the PCM or ADC. When installing the CMM module, use the
WYE cable in conjunction with cables that you build for the CMM module according to
directions in Chapter 8 of GFK-0582, the Series 90 PLC Serial Communications Manual.
10
IC693CBL306/307
Extension Cables (50-Pin) for 32 Point Modules
Function of cable
This cable is used with 32 point High Density modules that have a 50-pin male Honda
connector mounted on the front of the module. The extension cables have a 50-pin
male connector on one end and a 50-pin female connector on the other end. This cable
provides a connection from the module to a connector mounted on a DIN-rail-mounted
terminal block assembly. This cable is wired pin-to-pin (That is, pin 1 to pin 1, pin 2 to
pin 2, etc.). The modules that use these cables are: IC693MDL652, IC693MDL653,
IC693MDL750, and IC693MDL751.
The connector on the module is oriented with the notch towards the top of the module
with pin 1 at the top of the the right row of pins as you are looking at it, as shown below:
a45149
33 1
19
32
50 18
CableLength
IC693CBL306 3 feet (1 meter),
IC693CBL307 6 feet (2 meters)
Connectors 50-pin female Honda on end that connects to male connector on module.
50-pin male connector on end that connects to Connector InterfaceAssembly.
We recommend the use of a terminal block for connecting field wiring to the 50-pin
high-density I/O modules. The use of a connector interface provides a convenient
method of terminating field wiring to the modules.
Weidmuller Electrical and Electronic Connection Systems makes a suitable terminal
block assembly RS-MR 50 B, catalog number 912263 (female Honda connector). An
example of using an IC693CBL306 or 307 cable to connect a 32 point I/O module to one
of these terminal blocks is shown in the following figure.
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
10
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
50-Pin, 32-Point
Extension Cable
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
I/O Module a44838A
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î
SERIES 90–30 PLC
Weidmuller
Terminal BlocK
(DIN-Rail Mounted)
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
50
END
VIEW ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ1
ÎÎ Î
Î Î
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
ÎÎ Î Mounts on
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
TOP
25
VIEW
DIN–Rail
Figure 10-27. 32 Point I/O Module to Weidmuller Terminal Block Assembly
10
IC693CBL308/309
I/O Cables (50-Pin) for 32 Point Modules
Function of cable
This cable is used with 32 point High Density modules that have a 50-pin Honda
connector mounted on the front of the module. The modules that use these cable are:
IC693MDL652, IC693MDL653, IC693MDL750, and IC693MDL751.
The I/O cables have a female connector on one end, and stripped and tinned wires on
the other end. Each of the stripped and tinned wires has a label attached to it for ease of
identification. The numbers on these labels correspond with the pin number of the
connector wired to the opposite end.
Specifications
Cable Length
IC693CBL308 3 feet (1 meter)
Connectors 50-pin female Honda on end that connects to male connector on module. Opposite end
has stripped and tinned labeled wires for connection to Connector InterfaceAssembly
Wiring Information
Table 10-3. Wire List for 32 Point I/O Cables
Connector Label Connector Label

Pin Color Code Number Pin Color Code Number
Number Loose End Number Loose End
1 Black 1 26 White/Black/Violet 26
2 Brown 2 27 White/Black/Gray 27
3 Red 3 28 White/Brown/Red 28
4 Orange 4 29 White/Brown/Orange 29
5 Yellow 5 30 White/Brown/Y ellow 30
6 Green 6 31 White/Brown/Green 31
7 Blue 7 32 White/Brown/Blue 32
8 Violet 8 33 White/Brown/V iolet 33
9 Gray 9 34 White/Brown/Gray 34
10 White 10 35 White/Red/Orange 35
11 White/Black 11 36 White/Red/Yellow 36
12 White/Brown 12 37 White/Red/Green 37
13 White/Red 13 38 White/Red/Blue 38
14 White/Orange 14 39 White/Red/Violet 39
15 White/Yellow 15 40 White/Red/Gray 40
16 White/Green 16 41 White/Orange/Y ellow 41
17 White/Blue 17 42 White/Orange/Green 42
18 White/Violet 18 43 White/Orange/Blue 43
19 White/Gray 19 44 White/Orange/V iolet 44
20 White/Black/Brown 20 45 White/Orange/Gray 45
21 White/Black/Red 21 46 White/Yellow/Green 46
22 White/Black/Orange 22 47 White/Yellow/Blue 47
23 White/Black/Y
ellow 23 48 White/Yellow/Violet 48
24 White/Black/Green 24 49 White/Yellow/Gray 49
25 White/Black/Blue 25 50 White/Green/Blue 50
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
10
IC693CBL310
I/O Interface Cable (24-Pin) for 32 Point Modules
Note: This cable is obsolete. Please use IC693CBL327 and IC693CBL328. See
the data sheet for these cables for details. The replacement cables have right-
angle connectors to reduce the clearance space required in front of the PLC.
Function of cable
This 10’ (3 meter0 prewired cable was used with all Series 90-30 high-density (32 point) I/O
modules that use the Fujitsu 24-pin user I/O connector. Each of these modules has two of
these connectors mounted side-by-side. I/O Interface cables have a 24-pin female connector
on one end for connection to the module, and stripped and tinned wires on the other end.
Catalog numbers for 32 point modules having two 24-pin connectors are: IC693MDL654,
IC693MDL655, IC693MDL752, and IC693MDL753.
Connections to module input circuits are made from the user’s input devices to two male
(pin-type) 24-pin connectors (Fujitsu FCN-365P024-AU) mounted on the front of the
module. The connector mounted on the right of the module (front view) interfaces with
groups A and B; the connector on the left side of the module interfaces with groups C and
D. If a different length cable is required for connections to these modules, you can build
your own cable (information on building your own cable is found in the data sheet for cable
IC693CBL315).
A1 B1
A12 B12
Length = 10’ (3 meters) Connector: FujitsuFCN-365S024-AU
Figure 10-28. IC693CBL310 Cable
10
Table 10-4. Wire List for 24-Pin Connectors
Pin Number Pair # Wire Color Code Pin Number Pair # Wire Color Code
A1 1 BLACK B1 7 BLUE
A2 1 WHITE B2 7 WHITE
A3 2 BROWN B3 8 VIOLET
A5 3 RED B5 9 GRAY
A7 4 ORANGE B7 10 BROWN
A8 4 WHITE B8 10 BLACK
A9 5 YELLOW B9 11 RED
A11 6 GREEN B11 12 ORANGE
a45144
ÎÎ Î
B ROW 12 321
Î
CONNECTOR
A ROW 12 321
NOTE
Each pair of wires should be tied together with heat
shrink tubing for identification purposes. For example,
a short piece of heat shrink tubing should be placed
around the BLACK and WHITE wire pair (Pair #1)
that connect to Pins A1 and A2, etc.
Replacement/Obsolescence Information
H This cable became obsolete and was replaced by cable IC693CBL315 (now obsolete
also). The only difference between these two cables is in the wire color coding.
H When cable IC693CBL315 became obsolete, the replacement for these cables became
IC693CBL327 and IC693CBL328. Cables IC693CBL310/315 have straight connectors.
Cables IC693CBL327/328 have right angle connectors. The right angle connectors
require less depth in front of the PLC, so allow the use of a smaller enclosure in some
applications.
H Data sheets for cables IC693CBL315 and IC693CBL327/328 can be found in this
chapter.
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
10
Connector Depth for Cable IC693CBL310

The following illustration shows the space required in front of the PLC when this cable is
connected to a module. The depth of the cabinet that the PLC is mounted in should
allow for the depth added by this connector.
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
PLC (Side View)
ÇÇÇ
1.5–2.5”
Typical 2.187”
Figure 10-29. Dimensions for Depth of Connector in front of PLC
10
IC693CBL311/317/319/320
I/O Interface Cables for Power Mate APM Modules
Function of cable
The I/O Interface Cable assembly consists of a 24-pin I/O connector, a cable, and a 25-pin
D-type terminal block connector. This cable is used to connect the Power Mate APM
Modules (IC693APU301 and IC693APU302) to drives and machines. There are two male
24-pin connectors mounted on the front of each Power Mate APM. Two of these I/O
Interface cables are required for connections to and from the drive and machine. Catalog
number IC693CBL311 is 10 feet (3 meters) in length and IC693CBL319 is 3 feet (1 meter) in
length. The cable wire code list for these cables is provided in Table H-4.
An I/O cable assembly similar to IC693CBL311 and IC693CBL319, but with the drain shield
wire disconnected from pin B12 and brought outside of the cable housing through an 8”
pigtail, is also available in two lengths. Catalog number IC693CBL317 is 10 feet (3 meters)
in length and IC693CBL320 is 3 feet (1 meter) in length. This cable improves the Power Mate
APM’s noise immunity. The cable wire code list for these cables is provided in Table 10-5.
To make wiring to the drive and machine easier, each connector on the module is
typically connected by a a short cable (the I/O Interface cable) to a terminal block. The
cable that connects from the I/O connector to an external terminal block can be
shortened to meet the requirements of your installation. See manuals GFK-0840
(standard moed) or GFK-0781 (follower mode) for details on APM terminal blocks.
Î
ÎÎ
a45119
Î Î Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
1 or 3 METERS
ÎÎ Î Î
B1 A1
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ Î
B12 A12
ÎÎ
I/O
CONNECTOR
TERMINAL BLOCK
CONNECTOR ÎÎ
* Cable for IC693CBL311/319 shown. Cables IC693CBL317/320 have 8” external wire connected to drain shield.
Figure 10-30. I/O Connector Cable Specifications
Specifications
CableLength 10 feet (3 meters) and 3 feet (1 meter)
Connector 24-pin female, Fujitsu part number FCN-363J024 (crimp wire type.
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
10
Wiring Information
You must purchase the mating female (socket type) 24-pin connectors (which mate with
the I/O Connector on the faceplate of the APM). This connector is available under catalog
number IC693ACC317. This connector has a solder eyelet receptacle and is part of an
accessory kit. Optionally, other types of the 24-pin connector (for different physical
connections) are also available.
Catalog numbers for these connectors and their associated parts are listed in the following
table. The list includes catalog numbers for three types of connectors: solder pin, crimp pin,
and ribbon cable. Each accessory kit contains enough components (D-connectors, backshells, contact
pins, etc.) to assemble ten single-ended cables of the type specified for each kit.
Table 10-5. Catalog Numbers for 24-Pin Connector Kits
GE Fanuc Vendor
Catalog Number Catalog Number Description
IC693ACC316 FCN-361J024-AU Solder eyelet receptacle
(Solder Eyelet Type) FCN-360C024-B Backshell (for above)
IC693ACC317 FCN-363J024 Crimp wire receptacle
(Crimp Type) FCN-363J-AU Crimp pin (for above, 24 needed)
FCN-360C024-B Backshell (for above)
IC693ACC318 FCN-367J024-AUF IDC (ribbon) receptacle, closed cover
(Ribbon or IDC Type) FCN-367J024-AUH IDC (ribbon) receptacle, open cover
NOTE: Wire for cables is 12 twisted pairs, #24 AWG (0.22mm2).
Additional tools from Fujitsu are required to properly assemble the crimped contact and
ribbon cable type connectors. The solder eyelet connectors (as provided in IC693ACC316) do
not require any special tooling.
Crimped Contact Connectors (as provided in IC693ACC317) require :
Hand Crimping Tool FCN-363T-T005/H
Contact Extraction Tool FCN-360T-T001/H
Ribbon Cable Connectors (as provided in IC693ACC318) require :
Cable Cutter FCN-707T-T001/H
Hand Press FCN-707T-T101/H
Locator Plate FCN-367T-T012/H
These tools need to be ordered from an authorized Fujitsu distributor. Three of the
largest US distributors for Fujitsu connectors are Marshall at (800)522-0084, Milgray at
(800)MILGRAY, and Vantage at (800)843-0707. If none of these distributors service your
area, then contact Fujitsu Microelectronics in San Jose, California, USA via telephone at
(408) 922-9000 or via fax at (408) 954-0616 for further information.
It is recommended that you order any necessary connector tooling with sufficient lead
time to meet your assembly requirements for these connectors. These tools are generally
not stock items and can have significant lead times from distribution. If you have any
further questions about this issue, please feel free to contact the GE Fanuc PLC Hotline
at 1-800-GE FANUC (1-800-433-2682) or 804-978-6036.
10
The following tables provides wiring information for the I/O Interface cables:
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Table 10-6. I/O Cable Wire Coding for IC693CBL311 and IC693CBL319
I/O Connector
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ 25-Pin Connector
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Pin Number Cable Wire Terminal Number*
no connection Wire 1 Pair 1 25
A1 Wire 2 Pair 1 12
B1 Wire 1 Pair 2 24
A2 Wire 2 Pair 2 11
B2 Wire 1 Pair 3 23
A3 Wire 2 Pair 3 10
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
B3 Wire 1 Pair 4 22
A4
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Wire 2 Pair 4 9
B4 Wire 1 Pair 5 15
A5 Wire 2 Pair 5 2
B5 Wire 1 Pair 6 14
A6 Wire 2 Pair 6 1
B6 Wire 1 Pair 7 16
A7 Wire 2 Pair 7 3
B7 Wire 1 Pair 8 17
A8 Wire 2 Pair 8 4
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
B8 Wire 1 Pair 9 21
A9
B9 Wire 1 Pair 10 20
A10 Wire 2 Pair 10 7
A11 Wire 2 Pair 11 6
A12
B12 Drain Wire (Shield) 13
* Same as Terminal Block Terminal Number. See manuals GFK-0840 (standard mode) or GFK-0781 (follower
mode) for terminal block details.
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
10
Table 10-7. I/O Cable Wire Coding for IC693CBL317 and IC693CBL320
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
I/O Connector 25-Pin Connector
Pin Number Cable Wire Color Codes Terminal Number 1
no connection Wire 1 Pair1(Brown/Black) 25
A1 Wire 2 Pair 1 (Brown) 12
B1 Wire 1 Pair 2 (Red/Black) 24
A2 Wire 2 Pair 2 (Red) 11
B2 Wire 1 Pair3(Orange/Black) 23
A3 Wire 2 Pair 3 (Orange) 10
B3 Wire 1 Pair 4 (Yellow/Black) 22
A4 Wire 2 Pair 4 (Yellow) 9
B4 Wire 1 Pair5(Green/Black) 15
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
A5 Wire 2 Pair 5 (Green) 2
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
B5 Wire 1 Pair 6 (Blue/Black) 14
A6 Wire 2 Pair 6 (Blue) 1
B6 Wire 1 Pair 7 (Violet/Black) 16
A7 Wire 2 Pair 7 (Violet) 3
B7 Wire 1 Pair 8 (White/Black) 17
A8 Wire 2 Pair 8 (White) 4
B8 Wire 1 Pair9(Gray/Black) 21
A9 Wire 2 Pair 9 (Gray) 8
B9 Wire 1 Pair 10 (Pink/Black) 20
A10 Wire 2 Pair 10 (Pink) 7
B10 Wire 1 Pair 11 (Light Blue/ 19
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Black)
A11
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Wire 2 Pair 11 (Light Blue) 6
B11 Wire 1 Pair 12 (Light Green/ 18
Black)
A12 Wire 2 Pair 12 (Light Green) 5
1
2
External Ring Terminal Drain Wire (Shield) 2
Same as Terminal Block Terminal Number.
13
16 gauge wire, green w/yellow tracer. 8” length (from back of connector), terminates with a
#10 ring terminal.
10
IC693CBL315
I/O Interface Cable (24-Pin) for 32 Point Modules
Note: This cable became obsolete in late 1998. It was replaced by two cables:
IC693CBL327 and IC693CBL328. See the data sheet for these cables for details.
The replacement cables have right-angle connectors to reduce the clearance
space required in front of the PLC.
Function of cable
This prewired cable is available for use with all Series 90-30 high-density (32 point) I/O
modules that use the Fujitsu 24-pin user I/O connector. Each of these modules has two of
these connectors mounted side-by-side. I/O Interface cables have a 24-pin connector on one
end for connection to the module, and stripped and tinned wires on the other end. Catalog
numbers for 32 point modules having two 24-pin connectors are: IC693MDL654,
IC693MDL655, IC693MDL752, and IC693MDL753.
Connections to input circuits are made from the user’s input devices to two male (pin-type)
24-pin connectors (Fujitsu FCN-365P024-AU) mounted on the front of the module. The
connector mounted on the right of the module (front view) interfaces with groups A and B;
the connector on the left side of the module interfaces with groups C and D. If a different
length cable is required for connections to these modules, you can build your own cable.
A1 B1
A12 B12
Length = 10’ (3 meters) Connector: FujitsuFCN-365S024-AU
Figure 10-31. IC693CBL315 Cable
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
10
Building Custom Length Cables for 24-Pin Connectors

Cables connecting the module to field devices can be built to length as required for
individual applications. You must purchase the mating female (socket type) 24-pin
connectors. The 24-pin connector kit can be ordered as an accessory kit from GE Fanuc.
GE Fanuc Vendor

It is recommended that you order any necessary connector tooling with sufficient lead time
to meet your assembly requirements for these connectors. These tools are generally not
stock items and can have significant lead times from distribution. If you have any further
questions about this issue, please feel free to contact the GE Fanuc PLC Technical Support
Hotline at 1-800-GE FANUC (1-800-433-2682), or International dial direct 804-978-6036.
Pin connections with color codes are shown in the following table. Cables are made of 12
twisted pairs; wire size is #24 AWG (0.22mm2).
10
A2 1 BROWN/BLA
CK B2 7 VIOLET/BLA
CK
A3 2 RED B3 8 WHITE
A4 2 RED/BLACK B4 8 WHITE/BLACK
A5 3 ORANGE B5 9 GRAY
A6 3 ORANGE/BLA
CK B6 9 GRAY/BLA
CK
A7 4 YELLOW B7 10 PINK
A8 4 YELLOW/BLACK B8 10 PINK/BLACK
A9 5 DARKGREEN B9 11 LIGHT BLUE
A10 5 DARKGREEN/BLACK B10 11 LIGHT BLUE/BLA
CK
A11 6 DARK BLUE B11 12 LIGHTGREEN
A12 6 DARK BLUE/BLACK B12 12 LIGHTGREEN/BLACK
ÎÎ Î
a45144
B ROW 12 321
A ROW 12 321
Î CONNECTOR
NOTE
Each wire pair has a solid color wire and that same
color wire with a black tracer. For example, Pair 1 has
a solid brown wire paired with a brown wire with a
black tracer.
Replacement/Obsolescence Information
H Cable IC693CBL315 (now obsolete also) replaced cable IC693CBL310 when that
cable became obsolete. The only difference between these two cables is in the wire
color coding.
H When cable IC693CBL315 became obsolete, the replacement for these cables became
IC693CBL327 and IC693CBL328. Cables IC693CBL310/315 have straight connectors.
Cables IC693CBL327/328 have right angle connectors. The right angle connectors
require less depth in front of the PLC, so allow the use of a smaller enclosure in some
applications.
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
10
Connector Depth for IC693CBL315

ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
PLC (Side View)
ÇÇÇ
1.5–2.5”
Typical 2.187”
10
IC693CBL316
Serial Cable, 9-Pin D-Shell to RJ-11 Connector
Description
The IC693CBL316 cable is a 3-feet (1 meter) long, shielded cable with a 9-pin D-shell
connector one one end and a 6-pin RJ-11 connector on the other. This cable is also
known as a “Station Manager Cable.” This cable can interconnect RS-232 ports without
the need for a converter.
Typical Applications
D Connect a Personal Computer’s 9-pin serial port to the RJ-11 faceplate serial port on
CPUs 351, 352, and 363 for programming, configuring, firmware updating, and
monitoring purposes.
D Connect a Personal Computer’s 9-pin serial port to the Station Manager port on an
IC693CMM321 Ethernet module or on an IC693CPU364 CPU module, which has a
built-in Ethernet interface.
D Connect a Personal Computer’s 9-pin serial port to an IC693DSM302 module’s RJ-11
COMM port for loading motion programs (1 - 10) and firmware.
D Connect a Personal Computer’s 9-pin serial port to an IC693DSM314 module’s RJ-11
COMM port for loading firmware (motion programs for this module are loaded
across the PLC backplane).
a45485
RJ-11
CONNECTOR
9-PIN
FEMALE
CONNECTOR
9-Pin Connector RJ-11Connector

Pin Number Pin Number
7 1 (Red)
2 2 (Yellow)
5 3 (Green)
5 4 (Brown)
3 5 (Black)
8 6 (Orange)
Figure 10-33. IC693CBL316A Serial Cable Illustration and Connector Pinouts
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
10
IC693CBL321/322/323
I/O Faceplate Connector to Terminal Block Connector, 24-Pin
Note: These cables became obsolete in late 1998. They were replaced by six
cables: IC693CBL329, IC693CBL330, IC693CBL331, IC693CBL332,
IC693CBL333, and IC693CBL334. See the data sheet for these cables for details.
The replacement cables have right-angle connectors to reduce the clearance
space required in front of the PLC.
Function of cable
These cables are used with 16-point I/O modules that are equipped with a TBQC I/O
faceplate adaptor. Each cable has a straight 24-pin female connector on both ends. Each
cable provides a connection from the module to a connector mounted on a terminal
block assembly. These cables are wired pin-to-pin (that is, pin A1 to pin A1, pin A2 to
pin A2, etc.). An I/O faceplate assembly (catalog number IC693ACC334) is required
which snaps onto the module in place of the module’s standard 20-pin terminal block
assembly. Five different terminal blocks are available to allow a variety of I/O modules
to use this accessory (see Appendix J for details on the TBQC assemblies).
Item Description
Cable Length [
IC693CBL321 3 feet (1 meter),
IC693CBL323 1.5 feet (0.5 meters)
Cable Type: 12 twisted pairs with overall aluminum polyester shield and #24
AWG drain wire.
24 Pin Female Connectors (2): Equivalent to Fujitsu FCN-363J024, or equivalent.
[ Length of cable is measured from backs of connector shells as shown in figure on next page.
The connector on the I/O faceplate is oriented as shown below, with the rows labeled
A1-A12 and B1-B12. A1 and B1 are towards top of module faceplate.
10
Top of I/O Faceplate
Pin A1 Pin B1
Pin A12 Pin B12
Figure 10-34. Connector Orientation on I/O Faceplate
B1 A1 A1 B1
B12 A12 A12 B12
Length*
IC693CBL321 3 feet (1 meter)

IC693CBL323 1.5 feet (0.5 meter)
* Length is measured from backs of connector shells as shown above
Figure 10-35. I/O Faceplate to Terminal Block Cable
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
10
Connector Depth
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
PLC (Side View)
ÇÇÇ
1.5–2.5”
Typical 2.187”
10
IC693CBL327/328
I/O Interface Cables with Right Angle 24-Pin Connector
Note: These cables replace obsolete I/O Interface cable IC693CBL315. These
replacement cables have right-angle connectors to reduce the clearance space
required in front of the PLC. These replacement cables use the same pin-outs as
the obsolete cables.
Description
These cables each have a right-angle 24-pin connector on one end and a set of stripped
wire ends on the other. These two cables are identical except for their opposite
connector orientations. This difference in the cables’ connector orientations is for the
purpose of matching the opposing connector orientations on the dual-connector type of
32-point I/O modules.
10 Feet (3 Meters)
Figure 10-37. IC693CBL327/328 Cables
Note
Each conductor in these 24-conductor cables has a current rating of 1.2
Amps. If using these cables with a 16-point Output module with a
higher output current rating, you must use the lower value of 1.2 for the
maximum load current rating . If you have field devices that require
more than 1.2 Amps, do not use a TBQC assembly. Use the standard
Terminal Board instead.
Applications
These cables are for use with Series 90-30 I/O modules that have the Fujitsu 24-pin user I/O
connector. There are two categories of these modules:
D 32 point modules with two 24-pin connectors (IC693MDL654, IC693MDL655,
IC693MDL752, and IC693MDL753). The IC693CBL327 cable is for the modules’ left side
connector (front view), and the IC693CBL328 cable is for the modules’ right side
connector. The modules’ right side connector interfaces with I/O circuit groups A and B;
the modules’ left side connector interfaces with groups C and D. See Chapter 7, “Input
and Output Modules” for a drawing of these modules. See GFK-0898, the Series 90-30
PLC I/O Module Specifications Manual, for details about these modules.
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
10
D 16-point modules that are equipped with the TBQC I/O faceplate adaptor. See
Appendix J for information on the TBQC (Terminal Block Quick Connector). Use the
IC693CBL328 right side cable for this application.
If a different length cable is required, you can build your own cable, but only straight
connector kits are currently available. See “Building Custom Length Cables” below.
Specifications
CableLength 10 feet (3 meters)
Connector FujitsuFCN-365S024-AU
Connector Depth for Cables IC693CBL327/328

The following figure shows that these cables extend 2” out from the face of the modules
they are connected to. The depth of the cabinet that the PLC is mounted in should allow
for the 2” depth added by this connector.
Series 90-30
I/O Module
2.0”
Figure 10-38. Dimension for Depth of Connector for IC693CBL327/328
10
Building Custom Length 24-pin Connector Cables

Cables connecting the module to field devices can be built to length as required for
individual applications. You must purchase the mating female (socket type) 24-pin
connectors. The 24-pin connector kit can be ordered as an accessory kit from GE Fanuc.
GE Fanuc Vendor

It is recommended that you order any necessary connector tooling with sufficient lead time
to meet your assembly requirements for these connectors. These tools are generally not
stock items and can have significant lead times from distribution. If you have any further
questions about this issue, please feel free to contact the GE Fanuc PLC Technical Support
Hotline at 1-800-GE FANUC (1-800-433-2682), or International dial direct 804-978-6036.
Pin connections with color codes are shown in the following table. Cables are made of 12
twisted pairs; wire size is #24 AWG (0.22mm2).
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
10
A2 1 BROWN/BLA
CK B2 7 VIOLET/BLA
CK
A3 2 RED B3 8 WHITE
A4 2 RED/BLACK B4 8 WHITE/BLACK
A5 3 ORANGE B5 9 GRAY
A6 3 ORANGE/BLA
CK B6 9 GRAY/BLA
CK
A7 4 YELLOW B7 10 PINK
A8 4 YELLOW/BLACK B8 10 PINK/BLACK
A9 5 DARKGREEN B9 11 LIGHT BLUE
A10 5 DARKGREEN/BLACK B10 11 LIGHT BLUE/BLA
CK
A11 6 DARK BLUE B11 12 LIGHTGREEN
A12 6 DARK BLUE/BLACK B12 12 LIGHTGREEN/BLACK
ÎÎ Î
a45144
B ROW 12 321
12 321
Î CONNECTOR
A ROW
NOTE
Each wire pair has a solid color wire and that same
color wire with a black tracer. For example, Pair 1 has
a solid brown wire paired with a brown wire with a
black tracer.
10
Connector Depth for Custom Built Cables

Because custom built cables use a straight connector, they require more space in front of
the PLC than is required for a factory built cable, which has a right-angle connector. The
following figure shows the space required in front of the PLC when this cable is
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
PLC (Side View)
ÇÇÇ
1.5–2.5”
Typical 2.187”
Figure 10-39. Dimensions for Depth of Connector in front of PLC for Custom Built Cables
Possible Uses for These Cables (Factory or Custom Built)

D Connecting from the 24-pin connectors on a 32-point module to either a
user-supplied terminal strip/block or directly to I/O field devices (switches, lights,
etc.).
D Connecting from the 24-pin connector on a 16-point module that has a TBQC I/O
faceplate adapter to either a user-supplied terminal strip/block or directly to I/O field
devices (switches, lights, etc.). Use the right side cable, IC693CBL328, for this
purpose. See Appendix J for information about TBQC (Terminal Block Quick
Connect) options.
D Connecting from the 24-pin connectors on a 32-point module through a conduit to a
Terminal Block Quick Connect terminal block. This can be accomplished by
attaching one of the optional 24-pin connectors to the stripped end after pulling the
cable through the conduit. See the section “Building Custom Length Cables” for
information on the connector options. See Appendix J for information about TBQC
(Terminal Block Quick Connect) options.
D Connecting from the connector on a 16-point module that has a TBQC I/O faceplate
adapter through a conduit to a TBQC terminal block. This can be accomplished by
attaching one of the optional 24-pin connectors to the stripped end after pulling the
cable through the conduit. Use the right side cable, IC693CBL328, for this purpose.
See the section “Building Custom Length Cables” for information on the connector
options. See Appendix J for information about TBQC (Terminal Block Quick
Connect) options.
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
10
IC693CBL329/330/331/332/333/334 Cables
24-Pin I/O Faceplate Connector to Terminal Block Connector
Note: These cables replace obsolete cables IC693CBL321/322/323. The
obsolete cables had straight connectors. These replacement cables have
right-angle connectors to reduce the clearance space required in front of the
PLC. They use the same pin-outs as the obsolete cables.
Description
These cables all have a right-angle 24-pin connector on each end. They are identical
except for connector orientation (right side and left side types) and cable length. The
difference in connector orientation is to allow them to work with the dual-connector
type of 32-point I/O modules. These cables are wired pin-to-pin (that is, pin A1 to pin
A1, pin A2 to pin A2, etc.). Similar cables are available in a 3 meter length that have a
right angle connector on one end and stripped leads on the other (see the data sheet for
the IC693CBL327/328 cables for further information).
Cable Length (see table)
Figure 10-40. IC693CBL329/330/331/332/333/334 Cables
Note
Each conductor in these 24-conductor cables has a current rating of 1.2
Amps. If using these cables with a 16-point Output module with a
higher output current rating, you must use the lower value of 1.2 for the
maximum load current rating . If you have field devices that require
more than 1.2 Amps, do not use a TBQC assembly. Use the standard
Terminal Board instead.
10
Table 10-12. TBQC Cable Cross-Reference Table
Cable Catalog Cable Description Replaces Obsolete

Number and Length Cable Number
IC693CBL329 Dual 24-pin, 90 deg. connectors, Left Side IC693CBL321
Cable length = 1.0 Meter
IC693CBL330 Dual 24-pin, 90 deg. connectors, Right Side IC693CBL321
Cable length = 2.0 Meters
Cable Kits
IC693CBK002 Cable Kit. Includes both the IC693CBL329 (left side) and
IC693CBL330 (right side) cables
Connector Depth
The following figure shows that the cable connectors extend 2” out from the face of the
Series 90-30 modules they are connected to. The depth of the cabinet that the PLC is
mounted in should allow for the 2” depth added by this connector.
Series 90-30
I/O Module
2.0”
Figure 10-41. Dimension for Depth of Connector
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
10
Applications
These cables connect from Series 90-30 I/O modules that use the Fujitsu 24-pin I/O
connector to Terminal Block Quick Connect (TBQC) blocks. There are two categories of
these modules:
D 32 point modules with two 24-pin connectors: IC693MDL654, IC693MDL655,
IC693MDL752, and IC693MDL753. The IC693CBL329/331/333 cables are for the
modules’ left side connector (front view), and the IC693CBL330/332/334 cables are for
the modules’ right side connector. The modules’ right side connector interfaces with
I/O circuit groups A and B; the modules’ left side connector interfaces with groups C
and D. The other end of the cables connect to the TBQC IC693ACC337 terminal block.
See GFK-0898, the Series 90-30 PLC I/O Module Specifications Manual, for details about
these modules. See Appendix J for information on the TBQC components.
D 16-point modules that are equipped with the TBQC I/O faceplate adaptor. Use the
IC693CBL330/332/334 right side cables for this application. See Appendix J for
information on the TBQC (Terminal Block Quick Connector) components.
10
IC693CBL340/341
PTM Interface Cables –Preliminary Information
Note
change by the time the PTM is released. The PTM is expected to be
available in late 1999. Please contact your distributor for up-to-date
information.
These cables connect the PTM Processor Module (PTMPM) to the PTM Interface Module
(PTMIM).
Length*
PTM Interface Cable
*Length of IC693CBL340 Cable is 19” (0.50 meter)

*Length of IC693CBL341 Cable is 39” (1 meter)
Figure 10-42. IC693CBL340/341 PTM Interface Cables
Series 90-30 PLC

PTM
PM
IC693CBL340/341 PTM Cable
PTMIM
Figure 10-43. IC693PTM100 PTM Component Mounting
Warning
The PTMIM board connects to hazardous voltages. Before installing,

testing, or troubleshooting this board, you should refer to the complete
instructions in the PTM User’s Manual, GFK-1734 (see
“Documentation” section below). Failure to follow the guidelines in
the PTM User’s Manual may result in personal injury, equipment
damage, or both.
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
10
Checking the IC693CBL340/341 Cables

The following information is supplied for the purpose of troubleshooting only (making
continuity checks of the cable). These cables have straight through connections (pin 1
connects to pin 1, pin 2 connects to pin 2, etc.), although some pins have no connections.
One end is connected to a male, all plastic DB-25 connector. The other end is connected
to a female, all plastic DB-25 connector. The cable is a twisted-pair type, connected to
minimize noise and crosstalk between signals.
Warning
These cables connect to a circuit board that has hazardous voltages

present. These cables are carefully made to ensure the safety of the
user and associated equipment. Therefore, we recommend you use
only factory-built cables.
Connector Pin
Number (Either End) Signal Name and Function
1 VG+, Voltage Generator positive lead
2 IN+, Current Neutral positive lead
3 VA+, Voltage phase A positive lead
4 IA+, Current phase A positive lead
5 No Connection
6 VB+, Voltage phase B positive lead
7 IB+, Current phase B positive lead
8 VC+, Voltage phase C positive lead
9 IC+, Current phase C positive lead
10 Cable shield
11 No Connection
12 Frame Ground
13 No Connection
14 VG–, Voltage Generator negative lead
15 IN–, Current Neutral negative lead
16 VA–, Voltage phase A negative lead
17 IA–, Current phase A negative lead
18 No Connection
19 VB–, Voltage phase B negative lead
20 IB–, Current phase B negative lead
21 VC–, Voltage phase C negative lead
22 IC–, Current phase C negative lead
23 No Connection
24 No Connection
25 Frame Ground
10
PTM Products Ordering Information

The PTMPM module and its PTMIM interface board are considered to be a matched set.
Therefore, they are not sold separately. The two cables, however, may be ordered as
separate items. There are four catalog numbers in the PTM product line:
H IC693PTM100 – This contains the PTMPM, its matched PTMIM, and the 19” (0.5
meter) interface cable.
H IC693PTM101 – This contains the PTMPM, its matched PTMIM, and the 39” (1
meter) interface cable.
H IC693CBL340 – The 19” (0.5 meter) interface cable.
H IC693CBL341 – The 39” (1 meter) interface cable.
Documentation
The PTM user’s manual will not be available until early in the year 2000. It will be
GFK-1734, Series 90-30 PLC Power Transducer Module User’s Manual.
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
Chapter Programmer Hardware Products
11
Products Discussed in this Chapter

The following table lists the programmer hardware products discussed in this chapter.
Some of the items are no longer available but are documented here for the convenience
of customers still using them.
Catalog Number Description Comment

IC640WMI310 Work Station Interface (WSI) For Workmaster or IBM PC and
Board compatibles.
IC640WMI320 Work Station Interface (WSI) For Workmaster II or IBM PS/2
Board and compatibles.
IC690ACC900 RS-422/485 to RS-232 Converter No longer available. Use
IC690ACC901 Miniconverter.
IC690ACC901 Miniconverter Converts RS-422/485 to RS-232.
IC693PRG300 Hand-Held Programmer (HHP) Used to configure and program
Series 90-30 PLCs.
IC693ACC303 Memory card for HHP Plugs into HHP. Used for file
storage.
IC693PIF301 Personal Computer Interface Installs in PC. Enables PC to
Card control PLC I/O.
IC693PIF400 Personal Computer Interface More “powerful” than the
Card IC693PIF301.
IC655CCM590 IsolatedRepeater/Converter No longer available. Use
(IC630CCM390) (also know as the “Brick”) IC690ACC903 Port Isolator.
IC690ACC903 Port Isolator Provides isolation for PLC serial
port.
GFK-0356P 11-1
11
IC640WMI310/320 Work Station Interface Boards

The Work Station Interface (WSI) board provides an RS-485 serial interface between a
Series 90-30 PLC and a PC-compatible programmer runningLogicmaster90-30/20/Micro
software. This board is available in two versions.
H IC640WMI310 (serial operation only) for Workmaster or IBM PC XT or AT or

compatible personal computers.
H IC647WMI320 (serial operation only) for Workmaster II or IBM PS/2 or compatible

personal computers.
The WSI board can be ordered as part of a package with Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro
programming software. When a Workmaster II computer was ordered as the
programming device, the WSI board was installed at the factory. The WSI resides in a
full length computer slot. The computer can be a Workmaster, Workmaster II, Cimstar
industrial computer, or a PC-compatible personal computer.
a44734
Î
Î
Î
Î
SERIAL OPERATION ONLY
ÎÎÎ
Î
Î
IC647WMI320
Figure 11-1. WSI Board for the Workmaster II Computer
ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
a43060
WSI
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
SERIAL
SERIES 90-30
SERIAL
CABLE
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
PROGRAMMER
Figure 11-2. Location of WSI in a Series II 90-30 PLC System
11-2
FANUC CNC Controls
11
Replacing Workmaster Computers

The Workmaster and Workmaster II computers are no longer available. However, the
Work Station Interface boards are still sold, largely to support customers still using the
Workmaster and related products. GE Fanuc currently sells industrially hardened
programming computer/software packages that are updated replacements for the
Workmaster computers. For details, please contact the GE Fanuc Hotline at 1-800-GE
FANUC (1-800-433-2682), or for international customers, direct dial 804-978-6036.
GFK-0356P Chapter 11 Programmer Hardware Products 11-3

11
IC690ACC900 RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 Converter

This item is no longer available. The information provided in this manual is for the
convenience of those still using this product.
Note
GE Fanuc offers the IC690ACC901 Miniconverter kit, documented in
the next section of this chapter, as a replacement for the IC690ACC900
Converter.
This Converter lets you connect a standard RS-232 serial port, such as found on a
PC-compatible computer, to the RS-422/RS-485 ports in a Series 90-30 PLC.
If using a Workmaster II computer, this converter eliminates the need to have a Work
Station Interface board.
This converter is a small, self-contained device which requires only a cable connection to
the Series 90-30 RS-422/RS-485 port on one end and a cable connection to the RS-232
port on the opposite end.
a44681
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
SERIES 90-30 PROGRAMMER
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
RS-485 RS-232
CONVERTER
Figure 11-3. Example of IC690ACC900 Converter Connection
The converter operates from a +5 VDC source, which is provided from the PLC
backplane +5 VDC bus through the cable connection. The pin assignments for the
connections on the cable required for the RS-232 connection are compatible with
available PCM compatible serial cables (IC690CBL701, PCM to Workmaster;
IC690CBL705, PCM to Workmaster II; and IC690CBL702, PCM to PC-AT). The
RS-422/RS-485 connection at the Series 90-30 serial port on the power supply can be
made with an available cable (same cable that is used with the Hand-Held Programmer),
IC693CBL303.
The three PCM compatible cables (IC690CBL701/702/705) are 10 feet (3 meters) in length,
and the HHP compatible cable (IC693CBL303) is 6 feet (2 meters) in length. For those
user’s who may want to build their own cables, pin assignments and recommended
cable types for both cables required for use with the converter are provided in the
“Cables” chapter of this manual. For detailed information on this converter, refer to
Appendix D.
The IC690ACC903 Port Isolator is available for applications requiring ground isolation or
for connection distances up to 4,000 feet. For detailed information, refer to Appendix G.
11-4
FANUC CNC Controls
11
IC690ACC901 Miniconverter Kit

The Miniconverter Kit consists of an RS-422 (SNP) to RS-232 Miniconverter, a 6 foot (2
meter) serial extension cable, and a 9-pin to 25-pin adapter. The 15-pin SNP port
connector on the Miniconverter plugs directly into the serial port connector on the
Series 90-30 power supply, Series 90-70 CPU, or Series 90-20 CPU. The 9-pin RS-232 port
connector on the Miniconverter connects to an RS-232 compatible device.
When used with an IBM PC-AT or compatible computer, one end of the extension cable
plugs into the Miniconverter’s 9-pin serial port connector, the other end plugs into the
9-pin serial port of the computer. The adapter (supplied with kit) is required to adapt
the 9-pin serial port connector on the Miniconverter to the 25-pin serial port connector
on the GE Fanuc Workmaster II computer, or an IBM PC-XT or PS/2 Personal Computer.
The GE Fanuc Workmaster computer requires an additional adapter (not supplied with kit
- please contact your local GE Fanuc PLC distributor) for use with the Miniconverter.
The Miniconverter is shown in the following figure. For more information on the
Miniconverter, refer to Appendix F.
a44985
RS-422 RS-232
PORT PORT
Figure 11-4. IC690ACC901 Series 90 SNP Port to RS-232 Adapter

11
IC693PRG300 Hand-Held Programmer (HHP)

Some models of the Series 90-30 PLC can be programmed with the GE Fanuc Hand-Held
Programmer (HHP). The HHP uses the Statement List Language. With the HHP, you
can develop, debug, and monitor logic programs, monitor data tables, and configure
PLC and I/O parameters.
Note
The user logic program in Series 90-30 CPU numbers 350 and above
cannot be viewed or edited with the Hand-Held Programmer. You must
use Logicmaster 90-30, Control, or VersaPro programming software with
those CPUs.
The HHP connects to the CPU serial port through a 15-pin D-type connector on the
Series 90-30 PLC power supply in the CPU baseplate. The physical connection is
through a 6-foot (2-meters) long cable (IC693CBL303). This cable also provides power
connections to the HHP, and provides a signal that tells the PLC that an HHP is attached.
The HHP can be connected or disconnected while the PLC is powered-up. The HHP
does not require communications parameter configuration in order to communicate
with a PLC. This makes it useful for troubleshooting a communications problem
between a PC and the PLC.
a43052
GEFanuc
SERIES 90–30
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER
HAND HELD PROGRAMMER
OUT SETM RSTM TMR

LD MODE
OUTM SET RST ONDTR
D E F UPCTR
AND OR NOT BLK DNCTR
RUN
A I BQ CM G FUNC DEL
AI AQ T S
7 8 9 R # SRCH
SLOT
4 5 6
FOR
WRITE INS
MEMORY
READ CARD
1 2 3
VRFY
HEX ENT
0 CLR
DEC
SERIAL PORT CONNECTOR

TO CPU SERIAL PORT
Figure 11-5. Hand-Held Programmer for the Series 90-30 PLC
11-6
FANUC CNC Controls
11
HHP Features
The keypad for the HHP is a sealed type with tactile feedback, and has 42 keys, arranged
in a matrix of six keys across by seven keys down. It has a two-line by 16 character LCD
display screen.
HHP Memory Card (IC693ACC303)

The HHP has a slot for a removable memory card , which provides a means for
non-volatile, off-line program storage and restoration. The memory card can only be
used with CPU numbers 311 through 341. CPU numbers 350 and above do not support
either the HHP or the memory card. The memory card plugs into a connector accessed
through a slot on the lower right side of the HHP (see previous figure).
HHP Modes of Operation

The HHP functionality is basically divided into four modes of operation which are
selected through a key sequence on the keypad. These modes are: program mode,
protection mode, data mode, and configuration mode.
Program Mode:
Allows you to create, change, monitor, and debug Statement List logic. This
mode also allows read, write, and verify functions with the memory card,
EEPROM, or flash memory.
ProtectionMode
Provides a way to control access to (protection of) certain PLC functions,
including program logic, reference data, and configuration information. The
use of this function is optional; however, it is convenient in that it allows you to
protect parts of the PLC system from accidental or deliberate modification.
Protection is provided through four levels of passwords assigned by the user.
Data Mode
Allows you to view, and optionally alter values in various reference tables.
Several display formats can be selected in which to view this data: binary,
hexadecimal, signed decimal, and timer/counter.
Configuration Mode
Allows you to define the types of I/O modules that are installed or will be
installed in the PLC system. You can also assign I/O module addresses to these
modules. This feature is convenient in that it allows you to write and test logic
programs using discrete references assigned to I/O modules that are not yet
installed. In this mode, you can also configure CPU data, such as real-time
clock , coil check, and HHP characteristics, such as keyclick on or off.
Documentation
For detailed information about the Hand-Held Programmer, refer to GFK-0402,
the Series 90-30/20/Micro Hand-Held Programmer User’s Manual.

11
IC693PIF301/400 Personal Computer Interface (PCIF) Cards

These two Personal Computer Interface cards (PCIF and PCIF2) provide an alternative
method of controlling Series 90-30 I/O. Either card can be used in place of a Series 90-30
PLC CPU. These ISA-compatible cards can be installed in any IBM-PC/AT ISA bus
computer. The cards are implemented using computer language software (for example, C),
or PC control software, such as Total Control Products’ FrameworX Automation Software.
Table 11-1. Personal Computer Interface Card Comparison Table
ITEM PCIF PCIF2

Catalog Number IC693PIF301 IC693PIF400
Amount of I/O controlled 1,280 bytes 25,886 bytes
Number of Series 90-30 Up to four Expansion or Up to seven Expansion or
racks controlled Remote racks Remote racks
Slot requirement IBM-PC/AT ISA, 8-bit, half IBM-PC/AT ISA, 16-bit, full
size size
Documentation GFK-0889 (IPI) GFK-1540 (data sheet)
47016
DOS-BASED MICROSOFT C/TURBO C WINDOWS-BASED
SOFTWARE PROGRAMS SOFTWARE
DOS TSR ROUTINE OR C LIBRARY WINDOWS DLL
OR
MS-DOS MS-DOS MS WINDOWS
I/O EXPANSION CABLE PCIF or PCIF2
I/O EXPANSION CABLE I/O EXPANSION CABLE I/O EXPANSION CABLE
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ Î ÎÎÎÎ
SERIES 90-30 I/O
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ
Î Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
SERIES 90-30 I/O SERIES 90-30 I/O SERIES 90-30 I/O
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î Î ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
5 OR 10 SLOT
BASEPLATE
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
5 OR 10 SLOT
BASEPLATE
5 OR 10 SLOT
BASEPLATE
5 OR 10 SLOT
BASEPLATE
Figure 11-6. Example of PCIF Interface to Series 90-30 I/O
Both of these PCIF cards have a 25-pin I/O expansion connector that connects to standard
Series 90-30 Expansion and Remote baseplates (see the “Baseplates” chapter) via I/O
expansion cabling. Remote racks can be located up to 700 feet ( 213 meters) and Expansion
racks up to 50 feet (15 meters) from the personal computer. Several standard prewired I/O
expansion cables are available from GE Fanuc. Alternately, custom length cables can be
built. Please refer to the “Cables” chapter of this manual for information on standard and
custom I/O expansion cables.
11-8
FANUC CNC Controls
11
These cards also provide connections to an internal watchdog-supervised RUN output relay
contact. This contact is closed under normal operating conditions, but opens if the
computer or software application fails, which makes it useful for interfacing with external
safety circuits.
These cards support all Series 90-30 discrete and analog I/O modules (except 16-channel
analog modules). A variety of smart modules from Horner Electric, Inc. are also
supported.
A C Language Interface software product, available from Horner Electric, works with both
Borland Turbo C and Microsoft C. The source code for this interface is available from
Horner Electric (catalog number HE693SRC844).
Documentation
Documentation for these cards is noted in the table above. Additional user’s
documentation is available from Horner Electric, Inc.

11
IC655CCM590 Isolated Repeater/Conver ter

This item is no longer available. The information provided in this manual is for the
convenience of those still using this product. This product also went by an earlier
catalog number, IC630CCM390, and is nicknamed, the “Brick.” Details can be found in
Appendix E.
Note
In most applications, the newer IC690ACC903 Port Isolator can be used
in place of the IC655CCM590 Isolated Repeater/Converter.
IC690ACC903 Port Isolator

This product was produced to fill the need created when the IC655CCM590 Isolated
Repeater/Converter became obsolete. It provides 500 volts of isolation between
connected RS-485 ports. It can be used in either single or multi-drop applications, and
has a cable length working distance of 4,000 feet (1,219 meters). It is physically smaller
than the IC655CCM590. For details about this product, please refer to Appendix G.
11-10
FANUC CNC Controls
Chapter System Design
12
Introduction
This chapter does not pretend to cover every possible aspect of designing a Series 90-30
system, but it does provide you with basic product selection guidelines and with help in
finding the information you need. You will also find the GE Fanuc Automation Solutions
Catalog to be a valuable tool for system design.
Step 1: Planning Your System

Planning is an important part of designing a system. The better you plan the system, the
less trouble you will have installing and implementing it. The following list discusses
some basic things to know or have when planning your system:
H Expectations. If a new system, what is it expected to do? If retrofitting an existing
system, what does it do now, and what is it expected to do after it is retrofitted.
H Specifications (preferably in writing). These include such things as operating
environment information, speed, accuracy, repeatability, size, conformance to
standards, cost restrictions, time requirements, etc.
H Technical documentation. If retrofitting existing equipment, you can refer to its
documentation (layout drawings, schematics, etc.). If the documentation is lost,
perhaps a copy is available from the manufacturer. Additional information may be
gathered from discussions with the equipment operators and maintenance
technicians. For a new design, there are probably mechanical or process drawings of
the equipment.
Step 2: Determining I/O Requirements

This step comes next because other Series 90-30 component choices are dependent on
the number of I/O points required. In particular, the number of modules required, and
their locations, determines what type and how many baseplates are needed and also is a
major factor in CPU selection. Note that there are some restrictions on the maximum
number of certain types of modules (Analog I/O and Option) that can be supported in
one PLC system. See the table “Maximum Number of Modules Per System” for data.
H To start, determine how many I/O points, both analog and discrete, are needed for
your system. If retrofitting an existing system, use the schematic diagrams for the
system. If designing a new system, use the mechanical drawings or specifications to
determine what inputs and outputs are needed. List these on a piece of paper (or on
GFK-0356P 12-1
12
your drawing software screen). Separate them into four type, to correspond to the
four types of modules you will use: Discrete Input, Discrete Output, Analog Input,
Analog Output. If there are any special requirements, such as fast response, etc.,
make a note of them on the page. Also, if parts of your system are physically
separated from other parts, meaning you will probably be using Expansion or
Remote Racks, create a separate list for each location.
H When you have finished developing your I/O lists, determine how many I/O
modules of each type you need. Although there is an abbreviated ”I/O Modules”
chapter in this manual, you should refer to publication GFK-0898, Series 90-30 PLC
I/O Module Specifications User’s Manual for complete details. If you are using Remote
Racks, create a separate list for each location.
Additional I/O Module Selection Factors

H Voltage/Current Requirements – A wide variety of possible operating voltage and
current requirements can be met with Series 90-30 I/O modules.
H Positive or Negative Logic – The applicable type can be selected to match sink or
source signal requirements. See GFK-0898, Series 90-30 PLC I/O Module Specifications
User’s Manual, for details.
H Isolation Requirements – Isolated discrete I/O and relay output modules may be
selected to meet isolation requirements.
H Hard Contact Requirements – Relay output modules can be applied.
H Cost – The selection of certain modules can possibly reduce the number of racks
required in your system. For example, 32-point discrete I/O modules can save rack
space compared to lower density modules.
H Standardization – Sometimes a company will standardize on particular types of
modules to simplify training or stocking of spare parts.
H Response Time and Noise immunity – I/O modules have different response time
and noise immunity capabilities. These factors should be considered when selecting
I/O modules. In general, higher response speed is usually attained at the sacrifice of
some noise immunity. Therefore, if high response speed is not a requirement, it
would be better to select a slower I/O module that has higher noise immunity.
However, all I/O modules, regardless of their response time rating, have a
reasonable level of noise immunity. Note that the IC693APU305 I/O Processor
Option module, with its 500 us update time, can handle I/O signals that are too fast
for the CPU to handle directly (see GFK-1028, Series 90-30 I/O Processor Module User’s
Manual).
Step 3: Selecting Option Modules

There are several application requirements that determine Option module selection.
However, note that there are some restrictions on the maximum number of certain types
of modules (Analog and Option) that can be supported in one PLC system. See the table
“Maximum Number of Modules Per System” for data.
H Interfacing with a Particular Protocol or Standard – CCM, Ethernet, FIP, Genius,
RTU, SNP, etc.
H Interfacing with GE Fanuc CNC controls– Use the IC693BEM320 and
IC693BEM321 I/O Link modules.
12-2
FANUC CNC Controls
Series 90-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual–October 1999 GFK-0356P
12
H Distance – Genius controller modules can communicate at distances up to 7,500

feet (2,286 meters). Serial communications using the RS-485 standard can cover up
to 4,000 feet (1,219 meters). FIP networks are rated for 1,640 feet (500 meters).
Modules with serial ports communicating via modems and telephone lines or
satellite links can cover unlimited distances.
H High speed inputs – The IC693APU300 High Speed Counter can be used with
encoders to count high speed pulse trains. The IC693APU305 I/O Processor module
is an intelligent module that can satisfy high speed input and output requirements
independent of the PLC scan.
H Motion needs – The IC693APM301/302 and IC693DSM302 (and the future
IC693DSM314) are motion control modules that work with servo motor controllers
and other motion devices. The IC693APU300 High Speed Counter module can count
high speed pulses from encoders for use in measuring motion-related data.
H Temperature control – The IC693TCM302 Temperature Control Module (TCM) has
thermocouple inputs and PWM outputs.
H Extended features – Where there are two or more Option module choices for a
particular application, often an extended feature requirement determines which one
to choose. For example, there are two Ethernet choices, the IC693CMM321 and the
IC693CPU364, but only the IC693CPU364 has Ethernet Global Data (EGD) capability.
Another example: There are three Genius controller modules, the IC693CMM301
Genius Communications Module (GCM), the IC693CMM302 Enhanced Genius
Communications Module (GCM+), and the IC693BEM331 Genius Bus Controller
module (GBC). While all three are capable of basic Genius communications, only
the Genius Bus Controller module can control Genius Blocks.
H Remote or distributed I/O needs – One distributed I/O solution is the use of GE
Fanuc’s Genius Blocks, which can be mounted at the point of use and connected
with a PLC’s Genius Bus Controller (GBC) module via a twisted-pair cable. The
Genius Bus Controller is the only Series 90-30 module that can control Genius
Blocks. Other modules (GCM, GCM+) can read input data broadcast by Genius
Blocks, but cannot send commands to them. By selecting the applicable bus
interface unit (BIU), you can use GE Fanuc Field Control distributed I/O to interface
to Series 90-30 WorldFIP, Profibus, and Genius buses.
H State Logic – These products allow “Natural Language programming” as an
alternative to ladder logic. This makes program creation, documenting, and editing
easier for those not trained in ladder logic programming. Industries that are
required by law to thoroughly document any changes to their system find State
Logic to be especially useful.
H Cost – Sometimes an Option module choice can be made based on the basis of cost.
This is the case where either of two modules are capable of filling a need. For
example, if you only need the capabilities of the IC693CMM302 Enhanced Genius
Communications Module (GCM), you wouldn’t have to purchase the more capable,
but more expensive, IC693BEM331 Genius Bus Controller module (GBC).
H Performance – Higher data transfer rate or amount of data often dictates which
Option module will be used. For example, the IC693CMM302 Enhanced Genius
Communications Module can transmit and receive many times more data than the
IC693CMM301 Genius Communications Module, and it transfers data to the PLC
CPU at a faster rate. A comparison table for these two modules is found in
Appendix A of GFK-0695.
GFK-0356P Chapter 12 System Design 12-3

12
H Standardization – Sometimes a company will standardize on particular types of

modules to simplify training or stocking of spare parts.
H Display requirements – Several options are available for interfacing with GE Fanuc
Human to Machine Interface (HMI) devices.
H Third-party solutions – Many automation solutions result from combining GE
Fanuc product with third-party products. There are dozens of third-party modules
and other products that work with GE Fanuc PLC products. Example s of
third-party Series 90-30 modules are Profibus, DeviceNet, SDS, LonWorks,
Interbus-S, RTU/Modbus, ASCII Basic, RTD, and Millivolt/Strain Gauge Input.
Contact your GE Fanuc distributor for further information, or check the GE Fanuc
Web site for third-party product information and links.
Step 4: Selecting a CPU

Once you have determined how many and what type of I/O and Option modules you
require, you can select a CPU. Many of the factors that apply to selecting Option
modules, such as performance, cost, standardization, etc. also apply to selecting a CPU.
Details on CPU capabilities are found in the “CPUs” chapter.
H Number of modules required by the system – Embedded CPUs come in 5-slot or
10-slot sizes and they do not support Extension or Remote baseplates. Therefore, if
a system requires only a few modules, these may be an option. If more than 10
modules are required, you must select a Modular CPU. The CPU331–341 CPUs
support up to 5 total baseplates, and the CPU350–364 CPUs support up to 8 total
baseplates. If you need more than 49 total Option and I/O modules, you will need
to use one of the CPU350–364 group of CPUs.
H Modules with Quantity Restrictions– Many modules are restricted as to how many
may be used in one system. This number also varies by CPU. For example, in the
case of an 8-channel Analog Output module, the maximum number per system is:
H 4 if using a 311, 313, or 323 CPU
H 8 if using a 331, 340,or 341 CPU
H 79 if using a 360–364 CPU
Please see the section “Maximum Number of Modules Per System” table for data.
H Types of Option Modules – The PCM, ADC, CMM, and SLP modules can only work
in a Modular CPU baseplate. Use of these modules would, therefore, rule out the
use of Embedded CPUs (311, 313, 323). See the section “Location of Modules in the
PLC Racks” for more information.
H Performance – as shown in the “CPUs” chapter, the CPU350 – 364 CPUs use a more
powerful microprocessor than the lower numbered CPUs. For applications where
higher performance is required, one of these would be a good choice. For
math-intensive applications, the CPU352, with its built-in math coprocessor, would
give the best performance. For Ethernet applications, the CPU364 with its built-in
Ethernet interface, provides faster performance than separate CPU and Ethernet
modules because they have to communicate over the PLC backplane, which is
slower than the CPU364’s internal path. For serial communications, the CPUs 351,
352, and 363 (using Ports 1 and 2) perform faster than an IC693CMM311 module.
H Extended features – The IC693CPU364 has a built-in Ethernet interface which
would eliminate the need for a separate Ethernet module. This would save a PLC
12-4
FANUC CNC Controls
12
slot. The CPU351, CPU352, and CPU353 each have two additional built-in serial
ports which eliminate the need for a separate serial communications Option module.
The CPUs 350–364 have extra features and capabilities that the other CPUs do not
have such as, Floating Point Math, Sequential Event Recorder, and Memory Protect
Key Switch. Also, CPUs 351–364 have larger total memory size, as well as
configurable analog and register memory.
H Memory requirements – The CPU351–364 CPUs have configurable analog and
register memory. This makes them more capable of meeting the needs of (1) Option
modules that require this type of memory and (2) user programs that require larger
amounts of register or analog memory. The CPU360 does not have configurable
memory and has a lower base memory size than the CPU351–364 CPUs. The
CPU360-364 CPUs have standard Flash PROM for user data storage. This is not
available in some of the other CPUs. See the “CPU Firmware and PROM
Configurations” table in the “CPUs” chapter for details.
H Expandability and Upgradeability – The Embedded CPUs do not support
Expansion or Remote racks and do not allow changing CPU type. Therefore, they
have limited expandability or upgradeability options. Modular CPUs can be
upgraded to more powerful CPUs. The type of modular CPU determines whether a
system can have a total of 5 or 8 baseplates, which can have a direct bearing on the
future expansion capabilities of a system. For example, if you only need 49 total
Option and I/O Modules, you could use one of the CPU331–341 CPUs. However,
you would be at the maximum module limit and would not be able to add any more
to the system without changing the CPU. If you used, instead, one of the
CPU360–364 CPUs, you could later add up to 30 more modules while keeping the
same CPU. This would simplify expanding the system.
H Cost – If some of the other factors such as performance or extended features are
not major issues, one of the lower cost CPUs can be applied. However, sometimes
purchasing a more expensive CPU with extended features can be less costly than
purchasing a lower cost CPU and an additional Option module to cover the feature
needed. Besides the direct cost of the modules, using the single CPU would save a
PLC slot, which could help eliminate the need for, and cost of, an extra Baseplate,
Power Supply, I/O Bus Expansion Cable, etc. Since prices are subject to change, it
would not be practical to give an example of this. Please check with your distributor
for current pricing information.
H Display requirements – The CPU351, CPU352, CPU363, and CMM311 have serial
ports that are often used to communicate with Human to Machine Interface (HMI)
or Operator Interface (OI) devices.
H Time of day (TOD) clock requirements – The Embedded CPUs do not have one,
the Modular CPUs do.
H System size limitation – If you are close to the maximum number of modules
limitation of your system, you can use modules that have dual functions to conserve
rack slots. For example, the CPU364 has CPU and Ethernet communications
capability in one module. The CPUs 351, 352, and 363 have CPU and Serial
Communications capability in one module. There are discrete and analog
combination I/O modules that provide a limited number of both inputs and outputs
in one module. Also, the 32-point discrete I/O modules conserve rack slots
compared with lower density (16-point and less) I/O modules. You may also be able
to use Genius Blocks or Field Control distributed I/O to accommodate the need for
additionalI/O, since these do not require a PLC slot; they communicate with the

12
PLC over a communications bus. Genius Blocks communicate over a Genius Bus,
and Field Control can communicate over Genius, FIP, or Profibus busses.
H Protection against unauthorized changes. CPUs 360 – 364 have a keylock switch
that can be locked to protect against unauthorized changes to the PLC. CPUs 311 –
341 do not have a keylock switch. However, all CPUs have the capability of
password protection for the application program.
Step 5: Selecting Baseplates

The requirements determined in the previous steps will largely dictate what baseplates
to select. Please refer to the “Baseplates” chapter for additional details.
H Embedded CPU baseplate – If the previous selections dictate the use of an
Embedded CPU, you have three choices. The CPU311 and CPU313 are 5-slot sizes,
and the CPU323 is a 10-slot size. The CPU311 has 6K Bytes of memory and the
CPU313 has 12K Bytes.
H Modular CPU Baseplate – If you need a modular CPU, you must use a Modular
CPU baseplate. There can be only one CPU baseplate per system. There are just
two types, 5-slot and 10-slot. If you only need a 5-slot size, you may want to
consider whether the extra slots that a 10-slot size would provide would be
advantageous for possible future expansion. On the other hand, the 5-slot size
requires less space.
H Expansion and Remote baseplates – These also come in 5-slot and 10-slot sizes. In
general, it is best to use Expansion baseplates where possible instead of Remote
baseplates because of the better speed performance of the Expansion baseplates.
Where a total cable distance of over 50 feet is required, Remote baseplates must be
used. In cases where you only need a 5-slot size, you may want to consider whether
it would be advantageous to use a 10-slot size in order to have open slots for future
expansion. That factor should be weighed against the fact that the 5-slot size
requires less space and costs less.
H Physical size – For locations with size limitations, one or more 5-slot baseplates may
be a good choice. See the “Baseplates” chapter for baseplate dimensions and
clearance requirements.
H Number of Modules Required – The number of modules need at each location will
have a bearing on the sizes of racks required. You may choose to use a smaller rack
(5-slot), if possible, to save cost and space. However, as noted below, a larger rack
(10-slot) with unused slots will leave some room for future expansion, if desired.
H Expandability – For future expansion, you might wish to leave some unused slots in
certain baseplates.
Step 6: Selecting Power Supplies

The following factors will affect your Power Supply selection decisions. See the “Power
Supplies” chapter for additional details.
H Power capacity – All Series 90-30 Power Supplies have three individual outputs:
+5VDC, +24VDC (Relay), and +24VDC (Isolated). Although all of these Power
Supplies are rated at 30 Watts maximum total output, the rating of the +5VDC
output varies from supply to supply, as shown in the following table. For
applications requiring heavy loading of the +5VDC supply, choose one of the “High
Output” power supplies: IC693PWR330 or IC693PWR331.
12-6
FANUC CNC Controls
12
H Input voltage – As seen in the next table, nominal input voltage choices are 24VDC,
48VDC, 120VAC, 125VDC, and 240VAC.
Table 12-1. Power Supply Feature Comparison Table

Reducing PLC Module Count by Using Other GE Fanuc Products

If system size limitations (more than 79 modules are needed) are a problem in a system
using Remote racks, a possible solution could be the use of GE Fanuc Genius Blocks,
Field Control, or VersaMax products. These distributed I/O devices can be used instead
of Remote racks in remote locations in some cases, and their use would not add to the
Series 90-30 module count.
Genius Blocks
These are intelligent distributed I/O blocks that are panel-mounted at the point of use.
They communicate with a Genius Bus Controller (GBC) module in the PLC via a
shielded, twisted-pair cable. They are not included in the PLC module count, but do
require I/O memory allocation. A single GBC module in a PLC rack can control up to 31
Genius Blocks. Genius Blocks come in discrete and analog I/O, high speed counter, RTD,
and thermocouple interface types. For more information on using Genius Blocks, see
GEK-90486-1, Genius I/O System and Communications User’s Manual, and GEK-90486-2,
Genius I/O Discrete and Analog Blocks User’s Manual.
Field Control
These are intelligent distributed I/O units that mount at the point-of-use on a 35mm x
7.5mm DIN-rail. They can communicate over Genius, FIP, or Profibus buses. They are
not included in the PLC module count, but do require I/O memory allocation. A Field
Control unit consists of a Bus Interface Unit (BIU) that interfaces to the applicable bus,
from one to eight I/O modules, and cabling. I/O modules come in various discrete,
analog, and RTD types. A local logic processor module (MFP) is also available. For
further information on Field Control, see the following:
H GFK-0826, Field Control Distributed I/O and Control System I/O Modules User’s Manual
H GFK-0825, Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual
H GFK-1175, Field Control FIP Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual
H GFK-1291, Field Control Profibus Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual

12
VersaMax
VersaMax I/O modules can be used as distributed I/O, communicating with a Series
90-30 PLC over one of three bus types: Genius, Profibus, or Device Net. This
arrangement would require an Option module for the desired bus type in the Series
90-30 PLC as well as the applicable Network Interface Module in the VersaMax system.
For more information on the VersaMax products, please see GFK-1504, VersaMax Modules,
Power Supplies, and Carriers Manual.
Designing For Safety

A good design should not only function properly and efficiently, but must also protect
personnel and equipment from harm. Although some basic guidelines are found in the
“Installation” chapter of this manual, it is not possible to cover every aspect of safety
because of the diversity of applications. Additionally, it is not practical for this manual to
try to cover all the possible codes and regulations that may apply to your locality or type
of equipment. You have the ultimate responsibility to consult applicable safety codes
for your locality, or that pertain to the particular type of equipment you are designing,
and ensure that your design complies with these standards. In the United States, the
National Electric Code (NEC) has been adopted by many localities. The United States
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) regulations also contain many
safety regulations that apply to all industrial equipment in the United States. In the
absence of local regulations, the NEC and OSHA regulations should be followed when
designing your system, in addition to the information contained in this manual. OSHA
regulations can be accessed on-line at www.osha.gov. Some key safety issues are
outlined below:
Protection From Electrical Shock

Proper wiring design, including grounding and circuit protection issues, should be
followed. Personnel should be prevented from accidentally coming in contact with
hazardous voltages. Also, unauthorized personnel should be prevented from gaining
access to high voltage cabinets and panels. Interlock circuits are often used for this
purpose.
Fire Prevention
The guidelines in the NEC and OSHA regulations protect against fires, especially those
caused by faulty electrical design.
Protection From Mechanical Hazards

Personnel should be protected from physical hazards, such as moving mechanisms like
conveyors or index tables or mechanical pinch points. The use of interlocked safety
gates, light curtains, safety mat switches, dual hand buttons, physical barriers (guards),
etc. can be used for this purpose. See the applicable section of the OSHA regulations for
details.
Protection From Electrical Failure

In the event of a system component failure, the design should be an acceptable
“fail-safe” one in which the failure does not cause a safety hazard such as a runaway
12-8
FANUC CNC Controls
12
condition or a disabling of emergency stop circuits. Emergency stop and other safety
circuits should consist of hard-wired components that tend to fail in a harmless manner.
For example, in a Master Control Relay (MCR) circuit, use series-wired, normally closed
Emergency Stop pushbutton switches and interlocks to control an electro-mechanical
Master Control Relay (see next figure). This relay should directly disable motor starters,
PLC output circuits, etc. This type of circuit tends to fail “open,” which disables the
equipment. For example, if a wire breaks or a contact wears out, the circuit opens and
the MCR drops out. If solid state devices fail, they tend to fail “shorted,” which in the
case of PLC output circuits would cause the controlled device to turn on or stay on.
In the circuit below, the MCR is an electro-mechanical relay. It is energized by the

application of power to its solenoid coil which magnetically pulls the contacts to their
energized states. When de-energized, the contacts move to their normal, at rest states
by the pull of a mechanical spring. When the Reset pushbutton is pressed, and if all four
of the E-Stop and Gate switches are closed, the MCR relay will energize and “latch” in
the energized state through its MCR contact in parallel with the Reset pushbutton. Its
other MCR contact applies power to the motor starter and PLC output circuits. If any
one of the E-Stop or Gate switches opens, or if a wire breaks in this circuit, or if the MCR
coil becomes defective, MCR will de-energize and open the circuit to the motor starters
and PLC output circuits.
As shown, the PLC’s main power and input circuits are not controlled by the MCR since
they do not directly control any outputs. Keeping these circuits energized is desirable
because this allows the PLC to continue gathering data, recording fault information, and
controlling communications, even if its Output module outputs are disabled by the
MCR.
If an additional margin of safety were desired, two MCR relays could be used. Their
coils would be wired in parallel, their normally open contacts wired in series, and their
normally closed contacts wired in parallel. This would help guard against the possibility
of a “welded contact” on a single MCR relay.
Master Control
Reset E-Stop 1 E-Stop 2 Gate 1 Gate 2
Relay (MCR)
MCR
MCR
PLC Main Power and
Input Power Circuits
MCR
To Motor Starters, PLC

Output Module Circuits, etc.
Figure 12-1. Hard-Wired MCR Circuit Example

12
Protection From Design Changes or Overrides

Only authorized personnel should be allowed to make changes that could impact the
safe operation of the equipment. Passwords and lockout circuits may be used to
accomplish this. Some Series 90-30 CPUs have keylock switches to protect against
program changes (see “CPUs” chapter for keylock switch details).
Safety Documentation
H PLC Program Documentation. Thorough documentation will help you and others
who work on the equipment remember and understand how the safety circuits and
features work. (In some industries, applicable regulations may require this type of
documentation.) The PLC programming software gives you extensive
documentation abilities.
For example, you can create Nicknames such as “PSTOP,” Descriptions such as
“Program Stop Coil,” and Comments such as “This coil is used to stop the program
cycle, but it does not turn off power to the main hydraulic circuit. However, if the
operator opens the safety gate, the Safety Gate Interlock switch will open and shut
off the hydraulic pump.” These Nicknames, Descriptions, and Comments become
part of the PLC program and can be viewed with the applicable software.
As an alternative to ladder logic programming, the State Logic programming

language makes it easier to document PLC program design because it uses “Natural
Language” expressions instead of ladder logic symbols.
H Electrical and mechanical prints should contain notations pertaining to safety
issues.
H Written operating and maintenance instructions as well as training should be
provided to operators and maintenance personnel. These should address any
applicable safety issues.
Guarding Against Unauthorized Operation

Keylock switches and passwords are frequently used for this purpose.
Labeling, Guarding, and Lighting Issues

H Labeling. Operator devices such as pushbuttons, switches, or on-screen (software)
buttons should be clearly labeled as to their function.
H Guarding. Operator devices should be guarded, where applicable, to prevent them
from being activated accidentally. Recessed pushbutton designs or pushbuttons
with surrounding guard rings might help prevent the pushbutton from being
depressed if, for example, a tool were dropped or laid upon it. Mounting
pushbutton stations to vertical surfaces also may help avoid this problem.
H Lighting. Illumination levels in the working area should be adequate so that all
labels can be clearly seen.
Equipment Accessibility Issues

The equipment should be laid out so as to give operators sufficient room to perform
their tasks safely. Also, sufficient clearance should be provided so that maintenance
personnel have safe access to electrical panels, control boxes, etc. These minimum
clearances are specified in the NEC and OSHA requirements.
12-10
FANUC CNC Controls
12
Number of Modules Per Series 90-30 PLC System

The following table lists the maximum number of each type of I/O and option modules
that can be installed in a Series 90-30 PLC system. The number of modules that can be
installed in a system depends on several factors, including available references for each
CPU model, the current rating for each module to be installed in the system, and other
installed modules. Before installing modules in a baseplate, verify that the total current
rating of all of those modules does not exceed the power rating of the power supply.
Table 12-2. Maximum Number of Modules Per System
CPU CPU CPU

Module Type Model311/313/323 Model331/340/341 Model 350 – 364
Input and Output, Discrete 5 (5-slot baseplate) 49
(331/340/341) 79
10 (10-slot baseplate)
Input Module, Analog , 4-Channel 5 (5-slot baseplate) 40 64
8 (10-slot baseplate)
Input Module, Analog, 16-Channel 4 8 (Model 331) 51
12(Model340/341)
Output Module (Voltage), Analog, 2-Channel 5 (5-slot baseplate) 16 (Model 331) 48
6 (10-slot baseplate) 30(Model340/341)
Output Module (Current), Analog, 2-Channel 3 (5-slot baseplate) 15 (Model 331) 24
Output Module, Analog, 8-Channel 4 8 (Model 331) 79
32(Model340/341)
Combination Input/Output Module, Analog 5 (5-slot baseplate) 21(Model331/40/341) 79
4-ChIn/2-Ch Out 10 (10-slot baseplate)
Programmable Coprocessor Module n/a 4 4
Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor Module n/a 4 4
Communications Control Module n/a 9 9
State Logic Processor Module n/a Refer to the State Logic User’s Guide, GFK-0726.
Genius Communications ModulE (1) 1 1 1
Enhanced Genius Communications ModulE (1) 2 2 2
High Speed Counter 4 (5/10-slot baseplate) 8 (Model 331) 79
32(Model340/341)
I/O Link Interface Module 5(5/10-slotbaseplate) 49 79
I/OProcessor Module 2 (5-slot baseplate) 8 (Model 331) 64
Genius Bus Controller (2) 8 8 8
Ethernet Interface Module Refer to the Series 90-30 TCP/IP Ethernet Communications User’s Manual,
GFK-1084 for details.
Motion Mate APM300 Module Refer to the Motion Mate APM300 User’s Manuals, GFK-0840 or GFK–0781
for details.
Motion Mate DSM302 Module Refer to the Motion Mate DSM302 User’s Manual, GFK-1464 , for details.
Motion Mate DSM314 Module Refer to the Motion Mate DSM314 User’s Manual, GFK-1742 , for details
Temperature Control Module Refer to the Temperature Control User’s Manual, GFK-1466 for details
Power Transducer Module Refer to the Power Transducer Module User’s Manual, GFK-1734, for details
(1) The Enhanced Genius Communications Module and the Genius Communications Module cannot be
installed in the same PLC baseplate; however, both modules can be present on the same bus.
(2) Refer to GFK-1034, Series 90-30 Genius Bus Controller User’s Manual for details.

12
Calculating Power Supply Loading

The load placed on a power supply in a Series 90-30 PLC baseplate is the sum of the
internal and external loads placed on it by all of the hardware components in the
baseplate (backplane, modules, etc.), as well as external loads connected to the Isolated
+ 24 VDC supply. Use of the Isolated +24 Volt power supply output is optional;
however, this output can be used to drive a limited number of input devices. The
maximum total power output rating of the Power Supplies is 30 watts; however, the
individual +5VDC outputs can be rated for either 15 or 30 Watts, depending on the
Power Supply catalog number. See Table 12-1, “Power Supply Feature Comparison
Table,” for details.
Load Requirements for Hardware Components

The following table shows the DC load required by each module and hardware component.
All ratings are in milliamps (except where noted). Input and Output module current
ratings are with all inputs or outputs on. Three voltages are listed in the table:
H +5 VDC provides primary power to operate most internal circuits
H + 24 VDC Relay Power provides power for circuits that drive the relays on Relay
modules
H +24 VDC Isolated provides power to operate a number of input circuits (input
modules only), and any external circuits connected to the 24 VDC Output terminals
on the power supply terminal strip.
Note that the figures listed in the following table are maximum (worst case)
requirements , not typical requirements.
12-12
FANUC CNC Controls
12
Table 12-3. Load Requirements (in milliamps)

Catalog +24 VDC +24 VDC
Number Description +5 VDC Relay Power Isolated
AD693SLP300 State Logic Processor Module 425 - -
IC693ACC300 Input Simulator, 8/16 Points 120 - -
IC693ACC307 Expansion Bus Termination Plug 72 - -
IC690ACC900 RS-422/RS-485toRS-232Converter 170 - -
IC690ACC901 RS-422 (SNP) to RS-232, Miniconverter Kit (Version A) 150 - -
(version B, or later ) 100 - -
IC693ADC311 Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor Module 400 - -
IC693ALG220 Analog Input, Voltage, 4 Channel 27 - 98
IC693ALG221 Analog Input, Current, 4 Channel 25 - 100
IC693ALG222 Analog Input, Voltage, High Density (16 Channel) 112 41
IC693ALG223 Analog Input, Current, High Density (16 Channel) 120 - -
IC693ALG390 Analog Output, Voltage, 2 Channel 32 - 120
IC693ALG391 Analog Output, Current, 2 Channel 30 - 215
IC693ALG392 Analog Current/Voltage Output, 8 Channel 110 -
IC693ALG442 Analog Current/Voltage Combination 4 Ch In/2 Ch Out 95 - 129
IC693APU300 High Speed Counter 250 - -
IC693APU301 Motion Mate APM300, 1-Axis 800 - -
IC693APU302 Motion Mate APM300, 2-Axis 800 - -
IC693APU305 I/OProcessor Module 360 - -
IC693BEM320 I/O Link Interface Module (slave) 205 - -
IC693BEM321 I/O Link Interface Master Module (w/o optical adapter) 415 - -
(with Optical Adapter) 615
IC693BEM330 FIP Remote I/O Scanner 609 - -
IC693BEM331 Genius Bus Controller 300 - -
IC693BEM340 FIP Bus Controller (maximum) 1.2A
(typical) 800
IC693CHS391 10-slot Modular CPU Baseplate 250 - -
IC693CHS392 10-slot Expansion Baseplate 150 - -
IC693CHS393 10-slot Remote Baseplate 460 - -
IC693CHS397 5-slot Modular CPU Baseplate 270 - -
IC693CHS398 5-slot Expansion Baseplate 170 - -
IC693CHS399 5-slot Remote Baseplate 480 - -
IC693CMM301 Genius Communications Module 200 - -
IC693CMM302 Enhanced Genius Communications Module 300 - -
IC693CMM311 Communications Control Module 400 - -
IC693CMM321 Ethernet Interface Module 750 - -
IC693CPU311 Series 90-30 5-Slot Embedded CPU Baseplate 410 - -
IC693CPU331 CPU (Model 331) 350 - -
IC693CPU340 CPU (Model 340) 490 - -
IC693CPU341 CPU (Model 341) 490 - -
IC693CPU350 CPU (Model 350) 670 }
IC693CPU351 CPU (Model 351) 890 }
IC693CPU352 CPU (Model 352) 910 }
IC693CPU360 CPU (Model 360) 670 }
IC693CPU363 CPU (Model 363) 890 }
IC693CPU364 CPU (Model 364) 1.51 A }
IC693CSE313 State Logic CPU, 5-slot baseplate 430 - -
IC693CSE323 State Logic CPU, 10-slot baseplate 430 - -

12
Catalog +24 VDC +24 VDC

Number Description +5 VDC Relay Power Isolated
IC693CSE340 State Logic CPU Module 490 - -
IC693DSM302/314* Motion Mate DSM302 or DSM314 Module 1.3A - -
IC693MAR590 120 VAC Input, relay Output, 8 In/8 Out 80 70 -
IC693MDL230 120 VAC Isolated, 8 Point Input 60 - -
IC693MDL231 240 VAC Isolated, 8 Point Input 60 - -
IC693MDL240 120 VAC, 16 Point Input 90 - -
IC693MDL241 24 VAC/DCPos/Neg logic, 16 Point 80 - 125
IC693MDL310 120 VAC, 0.5A, 12 Point Output 210 - -
IC693MDL330 120/240VAC, 1A, 8 Point Output 160 - -
IC693MDL340 120 VAC, 0.5A, 16 Point Output 315 - -
IC693MDL390 120/240VAC Isolated, 2A, 5 Point Output 110 - -
IC693MDL630 24 VDC Positive Logic, 8 Point Input 2.5 - 60
IC693MDL632 125 VDC Pos/Neg Logic, 8 Point Input 40 - -
IC693MDL633 24 VDC Negative Logic, 8 Point Input 5 - 60
IC693MDL634 24 VDC Pos/Neg Logic, 8 Point Input 80 - 125
IC693MDL640 24 VDC Positive Logic, 16 Point Input 5 - 120
IC693MDL641 24 VDC Negative Logic, 16 Point Input 5 - 120
IC693MDL643 24 VDC Positive Logic, FAST, 16 Point Input 5 - 120
IC693MDL644 24 VDC Negative Logic, FAST, 16 Point Input 5 - 120
IC693MDL645 24 VDC Pos/Neg Logic, 16 Point Input 80 - 125
IC693MDL646 24 VDC Pos/Neg Logic, FAST, 16 Point Input 80 - 125
IC693MDL652 24 VDC Pos/Neg Logic 32 Point Input 5 - -
IC693MDL653 24 VDC Pos/Neg Logic, FAST, 32 Point Input 5 - -
IC693MDL654 5/12 VDC (TTL) Pos/Neg Logic, 32 Point 195/440{ - -
IC693MDL655 24 VDC Pos/Neg, 32 Point Input 195 - 224
IC693MDL730 12/24 VDC Positive Logic, 2A, 8 Point Output 55 - -
IC693MDL731 12/24 VDC Negative Logic, 2A, 8 Point Output 55 - -
IC693MDL732 12/24 VDC Positive Logic, 0.5A, 8 Point Output 50 - -
IC693MDL733 12/24 VDC Negative Logic, 0.5A, 8 Point Output 50 - -
IC693MDL734 125 VDC Pos/Neg Logic, 6 Point Output 90 - -
IC693MDL741 12/24 VDC Negative Logic, 0.5A, 16 Point Output 110 - -
IC693MDL742 12/24 VDC Pos. Logic ESCP, 1A, 16 Point Output 130 - -
IC693MDL750 12/24 VDC Negative Logic, 32 Point Output 21 - -
IC693MDL751 12/24 VDC Positive Logic, 32 Point Output 21 - -
IC693MDL752 5/24 VDC (TTL) Negative Logic, 0.5A, 32 Point 260 - -
IC693MDL930 Relay, N.O., 4A Isolated, 8 Point Output 6 70 -
IC693MDL931 Relay, N.C. and Form C, 8A Isolated, 8 Point Out 6 110 -
IC693MDL940 Relay, N.O., 2A, 16 Point Output 7 135 -
IC693MDR390 24 VDC Input, Relay Output, 8 In/8 Out 80 70 -
IC693PCM300 Programmable Coprocessor Module, 65K 425 - -
IC693PRG300 Hand-Held Programmer 170 - -
IC693PTM100* Power Transducer Module 400
IC693TCM302 Temperature Control Module 150 - -
{ Refer to module specifications in GFK-0898, Series 90-30 I/O Module Specifications Manual for more details.
} Note that the model 350–364 CPUs do not support the A version (IC690ACC901A) of the Miniconverter.
* Note that this is preliminary information. The IC693DSM314 and IC693PTM100 will not be available until late 1999.
12-14
FANUC CNC Controls
12
Power Supply Loading Calculation Examples

Following are examples of calculations for determining the total load placed on a Series
90-30 PLC power supply by the Series 90-30 PLC hardware. All current figures are
expressed in milliamps. Note that although each output is rated at 15 or 20 watts (with the
exception that the +5 VDC output for the High Capacity power supply is rated at 30 watts),
the total combined output can be no more than 30 watts. The power required by external
circuits connected to the 24 VDC OUTPUT terminals on the power supply terminal strip
should be added to the calculation.
Example 1: Series 90-30, Model 323 Embedded CPU (10-slot baseplate)
Component +5V +24V Isolated +24V Relay
Baseplate
IC693PRG300 Hand-Held Pro- 170
grammer
IC693ALG390 Analog Output 32 120
IC693ALG220 Analog Input 27 98
IC693APU300 HS Counter 190
24 VDC Input (16 points) 5 120
IC693MDL340 Input Module 5 120
IC693MDL740 Output Module 110
IC693MDL240 Input Module 90
IC693MDL940 Relay Out. Mod. 7 135
Totals (milliamps) 1281 458 205
(Watts) 6.41 10.99 4.92
Total Watts = 22.32
Example 2: Series 90-30, Model 351 Modular CPU (10-slot baseplate)

Component +5V +24V Isolated +24V Relay
Baseplate
IC693CPU351 CPU Module 890
IC690ACC901 Miniconverter Kit 100
IC693PCM301 PCM Module 425
IC693ALG390 Analog Output 32 120
IC693ALG220 Analog Input 27 98
IC693APU300 HS Counter 190
IC693MDL340 Input Module 5 120
IC693MDL240 Input Module 90
Totals (milliamps) 2336 338 135
(Watts) 11.68 8.11 3.24
Total Watts = 23.03

12
Scan (Sweep) Time Calculation

Scan or Sweep time is the time it takes the PLC CPU to perform all of its tasks one time.
Scan time contribution is the amount of time added to the PLC scan by the software and
hardware components of the system. For systems that may be time-sensitive, this factor
should be made part of the design specification. To help avoid timing issues, the
theoretical scan time should be calculated so that appropriate solutions can be designed
into the system up-front.
Major Design Factors Affecting Scan Time

H Size of ladder program
H Type of CPU. Some CPUs have faster clock speeds and architecture than others.
H Types of instructions used in ladder program
H Number of modules
H Types of modules. Some modules, such as several of the Option modules, have a
much greater impact than others such as discrete I/O modules.
H Location of modules. This refers to the type of rack (CPU, Expansion, or Remote)
that they are installed in.
H Connections to other devices such as an HMI, or to other systems via
communications modules or ports.
H Cable types. Cable type can have a significant impact on scan time, especially when
connecting Remote racks or communicating over long distances. Propagation time of
data should be minimized to ensure proper system timing and margins. Suggested
cable types for I/O Bus Expansion and communication cables are documented in the
“Cables” chapter. Any deviation in cable types from those recommended may
result in erratic or improper system operation.
Where to Find Scan Time Information

For information on calculating scan time, please refer to the “Sweep Time Calculation”
section of GFK-0467, Series 90-30/20/Micro PLC CPU Instruction Set Reference Manual.
Calculating PLC Heat Dissipation

The amount of heat dissipated by a PLC mounted in an enclosure can be an important
factor in determining the enclosure size needed for the system. This is because the
enclosure must be able to adequately dissipate the heat generated by all of the
components mounted inside so that no components overheat. PLC heat dissipation is
also a factor in determining the need for enclosure cooling options such as fans and air
conditioning. Enclosure manufacturers generally consider enclosure heat dissipation as
a factor in their enclosure selection guidelines. Instructions for calculating Series 90-30
PLC heat dissipation can be found in Appendix H, “Series 90-30 Heat Dissipation.”
12-16
FANUC CNC Controls
12
System Layout Guidelines

Because of the differences from one system to another, it is not practical to try to discuss
every possible layout. Instead, this section offers guidelines and an example to help you
lay out your system.
Benefits of a Good Layout – Safe, Reliable, and Accessible

The layout of your system has a lot to do with how reliably your system will operate,
how easy it will be to install, how well it will look, and how easy and safe it will be to
maintain:
H Safety and Maintenance – A good layout helps minimize the chance of electrical
shock to personnel working on the system. It lets maintenance technicians easily
access the unit to make measurements, load software, check indicator lights, remove
and replace modules, etc. It also makes it easier to trace wiring and locate
components while troubleshooting.
H Reliability –Proper layout promotes good heat dissipation and helps eliminate
electrical noise from the system. Excess heat and noise are two major causes of
electronic component failure.
H Installation Efficiency– A well designed layout allows sufficient room to mount
and wire the unit. This saves time and frustration.
H Appearance – A neat and orderly layout gives others a favorable impression of your
system. It lets others know that careful thought went into the design of the system.
PLC Rack Location and Clearance Requirement

The following list provides PLC rack mounting location guidelines. For an example
layout, see the figure “Series 90-30 Example Layout” later in this chapter.
H Locate PLC racks away from other components that generate a lot of heat, such as
transformers, power supplies, or power resistors.
H Locate PLC racks away from components that generate electrical noise such as
relays and contactors.
H Locate PLC racks away from high voltages components and wiring such as circuit
breakers and fusible disconnects, transformers, motor wiring, etc. This not only
reduces electrical noise, but makes it safer for personnel working on the PLC.
H Locate PLC racks at a convenient level that allows technicians reasonable access for
maintaining the system.
H Route sensitive input wires away from electrically noisy wires such as discrete
output and AC wiring. This can be facilitated by grouping I/O modules to keep
Output modules separated from sensitive Input modules.
H The PLC racks each require a 4” clearance space on all four sides (6 inches on the
right end if using I/O Bus Expansion Cables) to ensure adequate ventilation/cooling.
See the “Baseplates” chapter for baseplate size and clearance requirement
information.

12
Location of Modules in the PLC Racks

There are several factors to consider when when laying out your PLC racks.
H Location restrictions – Although most modules can be located in any type of
baseplate, a few of the Option modules (PCM, ADC, CMM, SLP) will only work in a
CPU baseplate. The next figure identifies where you can locate the modules in your
system.
H Power Supply capacity – Since some modules draw considerably more power than
others, it is possible to overload the power supply by placing many of the modules
requiring higher power in one rack. Therefore, before finalizing your rack layout
you should calculate the power supply loading to ensure that you will not overload
the power supply. See the section “Calculating Power Supply Loading.”
H Noise Reduction – Group I/O modules to keep Output modules separated from
sensitive Input modules. This will facilitate keeping noisy wiring separated from
sensitive wiring, as recommended in a previous section.
12-18
FANUC CNC Controls
12
Allowable Module Locations

DISCRETE INPUT/OUTPUT a43086A
ANALOG INPUT/OUTPUT
HIGH SPEED COUNTER
MODEL 311/313 I/O PROCESSOR
(5–SLOT) GENIUS COMMUNICATIONS
ENHANCED GENIUS COMM.
MOTION MATE APM300/DSM302
I/O LINK INTERFACE
GENIUS BUS CONTROLLER
ETHERNET INTERFACE
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
DISCRETE INPUT/OUTPUT
ANALOG INPUT/OUTPUT
HIGH SPEED COUNTER
I/O PROCESSOR
MODEL 313 GENIUS COMMUNICATIONS
(10–SLOT) ENHANCED GENIUS COMM.
MOTION MATE APM300/DSM302
I/O LINK INTERFACE
ETHERNET INTERFACE
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
ANALOG INPUT/OUTPUT
HIGH SPEED COUNTER
MODEL 331/340/341 I/O PROCESSOR C
and 350/351/352/360/
GENIUS COMMUNICATIONS
ENHANCED GENIUS COMM.
P
MOTION MATE APM300/DSM302 U
363/364 5-Slot CPU
I/O LINK INTERFACE
PCM / ADC / CMM / SLP
ETHERNET INTERFACE
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
ANALOG INPUT/OUTPUT
HIGH SPEED COUNTER
C
MODEL 331/340/341 I/O PROCESSOR
and 350/351/352/360/ GENIUS COMMUNICATIONS P
ENHANCED GENIUS COMM. U
363/364 10-Slot CPU MOTION MATE APM300/DSM302
I/O LINK INTERFACE
ETHERNET INTERFACE
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
PCM / ADC / CMM / SLP
ANALOG INPUT/OUTPUT
HIGH SPEED COUNTER
I/O PROCESSOR
MODEL 331/340/341 GENIUS COMMUNICATIONS
and 350/351/352/360/ ENHANCED GENIUS COMM.
363/364 5-Slot Expansion MOTION MATE APM300/DSM302
I/O LINK INTERFACE
ETHERNET INTERFACE
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
ANALOG INPUT/OUTPUT
HIGH SPEED COUNTER
I/O PROCESSOR
GENIUS COMMUNICATIONS
MODEL 331/340/341 ENHANCED GENIUS COMM.
and 350/351/352/360/ MOTION MATE APM300/DSM302
I/O LINK INTERFACE
363/364 10-Slot Expansion GENIUS BUS CONTROLLER
ETHERNET INTERFACE
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
* For location of FIP modules in baseplates, refer to the applicable FIP module user’s manual.
Figure 12-2. Allowable Location of Modules

12
Series 90-30 PLC Layout Example
1 10
3 4
Figure 12-3. Series 90-30 Example Layout

1. Series 90-30 PLC, 10-slot rack
2. Wireway (Wire Duct)
3. Field device connection terminal block
4. Motor connection terminal block
5. Motor starters
6. Circuit board
7. Power supply
8. Control transformer
9. Fusible disconnect or circuit breaker
10. Control relays
12-20
FANUC CNC Controls
12
PLC Mounting Position

Power supply load rating depends on the mounting position of the baseplate and the
ambient temperature.
Recommended Upright Mounting Orientation

The load rating with the baseplate mounted upright on a panel is:
H 100% at 60_C (140_F)
ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
Figure 12-4. Recommended PLC Mounting Orientation
Derated Horizontal Mounting Orientation

Power supply load ratings with the baseplate mounted horizontally are:
H temperature at 25_C (77_F) - full load
H temperature at 60_C (140_F) - 50% of full load
Figure 12-5. Derated PLC Mounting Orientation

Chapter Maintenance and Troubleshooting
13
Troubleshooting Features of Series 90-30 Hardware
Indicator Lights (LEDs) and Terminal Board

The following figure shows how the indicator LEDs correspond to the circuit connection
points on an I/O Module’s terminal board. The terminal board terminals are numbered
from the top, with the top terminal in the left row being number 1 and the top terminal
in the right row being number 2. The numbers alternate between rows with even
numbers on the right and odd numbers on the left, as shown in the circuit diagram on
the back of the hinged cover.
LED A6 corresponds to circuit A6:
A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
F Fuse Indicator LED
B1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ OUTPUT
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
RELAY N.O. 2 AMP
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
1
2 A1
A1
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
3 A2
A2 V
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Circuit A6 connects 4 A3
A3
to terminal 8 5 A4
A4
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
6
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
7 A5
8 A6 V
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
9 A7
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
10 A8
11
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
12 B1
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
13 B2 V
14 B3
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Hinged Cover
15 B4
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
16
17 B5
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
18 B6 V Indicates External
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Power Supply
19 B7
20 B8
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ 44A726782–015
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
FOR USE WITH
IC693MDL940 a43082B
Figure 13-1. Relationship of Indicator Lights to Terminal Board Connections
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls 13-1
13
Module LED Indicators

Input Module LED Indicators
When a discrete input device closes, the corresponding input LED should light to
indicate that the signal reached the module. If the light does not turn ON, a voltage
check can be made on the module’s terminal board or block:
D If the correct voltage is present at the terminal, the corresponding input bit can
be checked in the PLC with your programming software. If the software shows
that the input bit is at logic 1, the module’s LED circuit is defective.
D If the correct voltage level is not present at the terminal, a check can be made at
the input field device to determine if the device or interconnecting wiring is
defective.
If none of an input module’s inputs are working, it may be that the external (field) input
power supply is defective, is not powered up, or is not connected properly. (As indicated
in the connections diagram in the previous figure, input and output devices are powered
from an external power supply, not from inside the module). Input modules are not
fused, so the Fuse Indicator LED in the previous picture does not apply to them.
Output Module LED Indicators
When a discrete output address (%Q) is turned on in the ladder program, the
corresponding output LED should light to indicate that the signal reached the module.
D If the light does not turn ON, the module may be defective or the LED light may
be bad.
D If the light turns on but the output device doesn’t operate, a voltage check can
be made on the module’s terminal board or block. If the correct voltage level is
present there, a check could be made of the output device or wiring.
If none of an output module’s outputs are working, it may be that the external (field)
output power supply is defective, is not powered up. or is not connected properly. (As
indicated in the connection diagram in the previous figure, input and output devices are
powered from an external power supply, not from inside the module). If the output
module is a type that has built-in fuses (some have electronic short circuit protection
instead), the Fuse Indicator LED (labeled “F”), shown in the previous picture, will light if
a fuse blows.
Power Supply LED Indicators
The power supplies have four LED indicators. Their functions are explained in the
“Power Supplies” chapter.
CPU LED Indicators
There are several different LED arrangements on the various CPUs. These are explained
in the “CPUs” chapter.
Option Module LED Indicators
There are numerous LED arrangements on the various option modules. The “Option
Modules” chapter has some information on this subject. It also directs you, for each
module, to further information in the “Documentation” heading for each module. Also,
Appendix I contains a catalog number to documentation cross-reference.
13
Troubleshooting Features of Programming Software

Detailed information about the following items are found in GFK-0467, Series
90-30/20/Micro PLC CPU Instruction Set Reference Manual, and GFK-0466, Series
90-30/20/Micro Programming Software User’s Manual.
Ladder Screens
Contacts, connections, and coils displayed on the ladder screens that are ON (passing
power or energized) are displayed in enhance brightness, allowing the tracing of signals
through the program. Addresses that refer to physical input (%I and %AI) and output
signals (%Q and %AQ) can be checked against module status lights, voltages, etc. to
verify that the hardware is working properly.
Configuration Screens
Normally, the following information is obtained from the system documentation.
However, if they are not available, the configuration screens can be used to determine:
D If the software configuration matches the actual hardware. Sometimes, while
troubleshooting, a module is installed in an incorrect slot by mistake. This will create
a fault in one of the two fault tables. The correct configuration can be determined
from the Configuration Screens.
D The memory addresses that a particular module is using.
Fault Tables
There are two fault tables, the “PLC Fault Table,” and the “I/O Fault Table.” The fault
tables can be viewed using the PLC programming software. These fault tables will not
report such things as a defective limit switch, but will identify system faults such as:
D Loss of or Missing Modules, System Configuration Mismatch.
D CPU hardware failure, Low Battery
D PLC Software Failure, Program Checksum Failure, No User Program, PLC Store
Failures.
System Status References

These discrete references (%S, %SA, %SB, and %SC) can be viewed in the System
Reference (Status) Table, or on-screen if used in the ladder program, for determining the
status of various conditions and faults. For example, the %SC0009 bit turns on if a fault
is logged in either fault table. Another example is that bit %SA0011 will turn on if the
CPU memory backup battery is low. The Series 90-30 PLC CPU Instruction Set Reference
Manual, GFK-0467, includes a “System Status Reference Table.”
Reference Tables
There are two types of reference tables, standard and mixed. These tables show groups
of memory addresses and their status. For discrete addresses, the status of these will be
shown as either logic 1 or logic 0. For analog and register addresses, values will be
displayed. Standard tables display only one type of memory address, such as all of the
%I bits. Mixed reference tables are created by the user, who selects what addresses to
display in the tables. These mixed tables can contain discrete, analog, and register
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
Chapter 13 Maintenance and Troubleshooting 13-3
13
references all in one table. This makes them useful for gathering numerous related
addresses on one screen where they can all be viewed or monitored at the same time.
This saves time compared with searching or scrolling through the ladder logic screens to
find these addresses.
Override feature
This feature must be used with caution to ensure the safety of personnel and
equipment. Normally, the machine should not be cycling, and all conditions should be
such that the output device can be turned on without any harm being done. This
method can be used to check an output circuit from the ladder screen all the way to the
device being controlled. For example, when overriding and toggling a %Q output to an
ON state, the relay, solenoid, or other device being controlled should turn on or pick up.
If it does not, the status light on the output module could be checked, then voltage
checks could be made at the module terminal board, the system terminal strip, the
machinery terminal strip, the solenoid or relay connections, etc. until the source of the
fault is found.
Sequential Event Recorder (SER), DOIO functional instruction

These can be set up to capture the status of specified discrete addresses upon receiving a
trigger signal. They may be used to monitor and capture data about certain portions of
the program, even when unattended. They can be useful for locating the cause of an
intermittent problem. For example, a contact in a string of contacts that maintain power
to a coil may, from time to time, momentarily open and interrupt normal operation.
However, when maintenance personnel attempt to locate the problem, all of these
contacts may test OK. By using the SER or DOIO instruction, the status of all of these
contacts can be captured within milliseconds of the time the fault occurs, and the contact
that opened will show a status of logic 0 at the moment of capture.
Replacing Modules
Modules do not contain configuration switches. The slot in each baseplate (rack) is
configured (using the configuration software) to hold a particular module type (catalog
number). This configuration information is stored in CPU memory. Therefore, when
replacing a module, you do not have to make any hardware settings on the module
itself. You do, however, have to ensure that you install the correct module type in a
particular slot.
Be aware that some “intelligent” modules, such as the CPU, PCM, APM, or DSM302,
may contain application programs that will need to be reloaded after the module is
replaced. For such modules, make sure that up-to-date copies of the application
programs are maintained in case they have to be restored later.
For I/O modules with terminal boards, you do not have to rewire a new terminal board
in order to replace the module. If the old terminal board is not defective, it can be
removed from the old module and reinstalled on the new module without removing
any of the wiring. Procedures for removing and installing modules and terminal boards
are found in Chapter 2.
Series 90-30 Product Repair

The Series 90-30 products are, for the most part, not considered to be field-repairable.
The one major exception are the few modules that have replaceable fuses. The next
section, “Module Fuse List,” identifies these modules and their applicable fuses.
GE Fanuc offers a repair/product warranty service through your local distributor.
Contact you distributor for details.
13
Module Fuse List
Warning
Replace fuse only with the correct size and type. Using an incorrect
fuse can result in harm to personnel, damage to equipment, or both.
Table 13-1. Fuse List for Series 90-30 Modules
Module Current Quantity GE Fanuc Fuse Third Party Sources

Catalog Module Type Rating on Module Part Number and Part Numbers
Number
IC693CPU364 CPU Module with 1A 1 44A725214–001 Littlefuse - R454 001

embedded Ethernet
interface
IC693DVM300 Digital Valve Driver 1A 1 N/A Bussman - GDB-1A
2A 4 N/A Littlefuse - 239002
IC693MDL310 120 VAC, 0.5A 3A 2 44A724627-111(1) Bussman - GMC-3
Littlefuse - 239003
IC693MDL330 120/240VAC, 1A 5A 2 44A724627-114(1) Bussman - GDC-5
Bussman S506-5
IC693MDL340 120 VAC, 0.5A 3A 2 44A724627-111(1) Bussman - GMC-3
Littlefuse - 239003
IC693MDL390 120/240VAC, 2A 3A 5 44A724627-111(1) Bussman - GMC-3
Littlefuse - 239003
IC693MDL730 12/24VDCPositive 5A 2 259A9578P16(1) Bussman - AGC-5
Logic, 2A Littlefuse - 312005
IC693MDL731 12/24VDCNegative 5A 2 259A9578P16(1) Bussman, AGC-5
Logic, 2A Littlefuse - 312005
IC693PWR321 120/240VAC or 125 2A 1 44A724627-109(2) Bussman - 215-002
and VDC Input, 30 Watt (GDC-2 or GMC-2)
IC693PWR330 Power Supply Littlefuse - 239-002
IC693PWR322 24/48 VDC Input, 5A 1 44A724627-114(2) Bussman - MDL-5
30 Watt Power Supply Littlefuse - 313005
IC693PWR328 48 VDC Input 5A 1 44A724627-114(2) Bussman - MDL-5
IC693PWR331 24 VDC Input, 5A 1 44A724627-114(2) Bussman - MDL-5
IC693TCM302 Temperature Control 2A 1 N/A Littlefuse - 273002

Module
(1) Mounted in clip. Accessible by removing circuit board from module housing.
(2) Line fuse. Mounted in clip - accessible by removing module front.
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
13
Spare/R eplacement Parts

Two kits (IC693ACC319 and IC693ACC320) provide mechanical spare parts for Series
90-30 modules. One covers I/O CPU, PCM, and other modules; the other is for power
supply modules. These kits provide parts such as module levers, front covers, cases, etc.
The following table describes the contents of each kit.
Table 13-2. Spare/Replacement Parts
Spare Parts Contents

IC693ACC319: (qty. 10) I/O, CPU, PCM case lever
Spare parts kit for I/O, (qty. 10) Spring pins cap
CPU,and PCM modules (qty. 2) PCM module front cover
(qty. 2) PCM lens cap
(qty. 2) CPU module case
IC693ACC320: (qty. 2) Power supply lever
Spare parts kit for power (qty. 2) Spring pin for power supply lever
supplies (qty. 2) Spring for power supply lever
(qty. 2) Power supply lens cap
(qty. 2) Power supply terminal cover
IC693ACC301 (see Note) (qty. 2) Memory backup battery for CPU and PCM
Memory Backup Battery modules
Fuses See “Fuse List For Series 90-30 Modules“ table in this
chapter.
Modules You may wish to maintain spare PLC modules. Many
systems have more than one of a particular catalog
number, such as power supplies (each rack has one) and
I/O modules. In these cases, one of each type would serve
as backups for several modules.
IC693ACC311 (qty. 6) Removable terminal boards used on many I/O
RemovableModule modules and some Option modules.
Terminal Board
44A736756-G01 Kit contains 3 sets (6 keys). Same key fits all applicable
CPU (CPU350 - 364) Key Kit CPUs.
Note: The IC693ACC301 batteries have a shelf life of 5 years (see Chapter 6 for instructions on how to read
battery date codes). Periodically, outdated batteries should be removed from stock and disposed of
according to the battery manufacturer’s recommendations.
13
Preventive Maintenance Suggestions

Series 90-30 PLC Preventive Maintenance
Item Description Recommendation
No.
1 Safety ground Check frequently to ensure that safety ground connections
and electrical are secure and that electrical cables and conduits are secure
system and in good condition.
2 CPU Memory Replace annually or as appropriate for your application.*
backup battery Check Chapter 5 for instructions on how to avoid loss of
memory contents when replacing battery.
3 Option Module Replace annually. Check user’s manual for additional
backup battery instructions. Check Chapter 5 for instructions on how to
avoid loss of memory contents when replacing battery.
4 Ventilation If using ventilation fan in enclosure, check for proper
operation. Keep fingers and tools away from moving
fans. Clean or replace ventilation air filter, if using one, at
least monthly.
5 Mechanical With power OFF, check that connectors and modules are
tightness seated securely in their sockets and that wire connections
are secure. For low vibration installations, perform
annually. For high vibration installations, check at least
quarterly.
6 Enclosure Check annually. With power OFF, remove manuals, prints,
or other loose material that could cause shorts or
ventilation blockage, or that are flammable, from inside of
enclosure. Gently vacuum dust and dirt that has collected
on components. Use vacuum cleaner, not compressed air,
for this task.
7 Program backup Do this initially after creating any application programs,
such as the ladder logic program, motion programs, etc.
Then, any time a change is made to a program, make at
least one (several is better) new backup copy. Keep old
copies (clearly marked) for a reasonable period of time in
case you need to go back to the old design.
Document each backup copy as to what equipment it is for,

date it was created or modified, version number (if any),
and author’s name.
Keep master backup copies in a safe place. Make working

copies available to those responsible for maintaining the
equipment.
*See “Factors Affecting Battery Life” in Chapter 5.
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
13
Getting Additional Help and Information

There are several ways to get additional help and information:
GE Fanuc Web Site

There is a large amount of information on the Technical Support section of the GE Fanuc
Web site. Sections such as Technical Documentation, Application Notes, Revision
Histories, Frequently Asked Questions, and Field Service Bulletins may have the exact
information you need. You can access this site at:
http://www
.gefanuc.com/support/
Fax Link System

This system lets you choose technical help documents to be sent to you on your Fax
machine. To use this system follow these steps:
D Call Fax Link at (804) 978-5824 on a touch tone type phone (rotary dial phones will
not work for this application).
D Follow the instructions to have a master list (called “Document 1”) of Fax Link
documents Faxed to you. A master Fax Link list is also available on the GE Fanuc
Web site in the Technical Support section (see the “GE Fanuc Web Site” section
above).
D Select desired document(s) from the master list, then call Fax Link and specify the
document number(s) you want to be Faxed to you. Up to three documents can be
ordered per call.
GE Fanuc Telephone Numbers

If you need to speak with a GE Fanuc technical help person, use the applicable
telephone number from the following list.
Location Telephone Number

North America, Canada, Mexico (Technical Support Toll Free: 800 GE Fanuc
Hotline) Direct Dial: 804 978-6036
Latin America (for Mexico, see above) Direct Dial: 804 978-6036
France, Germany, Luxembourg, Switzerland, and Toll Free: 00800 433 268 23
United Kingdom
Italy Toll Free: 16 77 80 596
Other European Countries +352 727 979 309
Asia/Pacific - Singapore 65 566 4918
India 91 80 552 0107
section level 1
figure_ap level 1
table_ap level 1
Appendix A Glossary
A
Glossary of Terms for the Series 90-30 PLC

Address Consists of a letter followed by a number, which together refer to a
specific memory location. For example, %I00005 refers to the fifth
location in input (%I) memory.
Analog An electrical signal activated by physical variables representing

force, pressure, temperature, flow, etc. It’s a signal represented by a
value rather than a simple on or off state.
Application Program A program written by the user to control a particular machine or

process.
ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange)

An 8-bit (7 bits plus 1 parity bit) code used for data.
Backplane A circuit board consisting of a group of connectors and associated

circuitry. The connectors accept plug-in modules.
Baseplate A frame that contains and protects the backplane circuit board. In
the Series 90-30 PLC Models 311, 313, and 323 the baseplate also
contains the CPU.
Battery Connector
A connector wired to a lithium battery which connects the battery to
the CMOS RAM memory devices. The battery connector is plugged
into a receptacle accessed through a door on the power supply face-
plate.
Baud A unit of data transmission. Baud rate is approximately equal to the

number of bits per second transmitted.
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls A-1
A
Bit (Binary Digit)

The smallest unit of memory. It can be used to store only one piece
of information that has two states (for example, One/Zero, On/Off,
Good/Bad,Yes/No). Data that requires more than two states (e.g.,
numerical values 000to 999) requires multiple bits (see Word).
Bus An electrical path, usually shared by two or more devices, for trans-
mitting and receiving data or power.
Byte A group of binary digits operated on as a single unit. In the Series

90-30 PLC, a byte consists of eight contiguous bits.
Circuit Wiring Diagram

Field wiring information that provides a guide to users for connect-
ing field devices to input and output modules. Each I/O module has
a circuit wiring diagram printed on the inside surface of an insert in
the module’s hinged door.
Configuration Software
That portion of a programming software package that provides the
tools for configuring the hardware scheme as well as certain system
parameters.
CPU (Central Processing Unit)

The central device or controller that interprets user instructions,
makes decisions, and executes the functions based on a stored ap-
plication program.
CPU Baseplate The baseplate in a Series 90-30 PLC system in which the CPU is
installed. This rack must always be included in a system and is al-
ways rack 0. There can only be one CPU per PLC.
Data Memory User references within the CPU which are accessible by the applica-
tion program for storage of discrete or register data.
Discrete Refers to devices that are either on or off.
Expansion Baseplate (Local)

A 5 or 10-slot baseplate added to a Series 90-30 PLC when the ap-
plication calls for more modules than the CPU baseplate can con-
tain. CPU models 331 – 341 support up to four expansion base-
plates. CPU models 350 – 364 support up to seven expansion
baseplates. The last expansion baseplate in the system can be no
more than 50 feet from the CPU baseplate.
Expansion Cable (I/O Bus)

A cable that propagates the parallel I/O bus signals between expan-
sion baseplates. The total length of all expansion cables, from the
main baseplate to the last expansion baseplate in the system, can be
no more than 50 feet (15 meters).
Field Devices Input or output devices external to the PLC such as pushbutton or
limit switches, relays, pilot lights, solenoids.
A-2 Series 90-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual – October 1999 GFK-0356P
A
Firmware A series of operating system instructions contained in PROM (Pro-

grammable Read Only Memory) which are used for internal proces-
sing functions. These instructions provide the structure for applica-
tion program operations.
Flash Memory A non-volatile EEPROM type memory device.
Genius I/O An intelligent I/O system consisting of I/O blocks, bus controllers,
and other devices.
Grounding Terminal
A terminal on each power supply which must be connected to earth
ground (through the AC power source) to ensure that the power
supply is properly and safely grounded.
Hardware All of the physical (mechanical, electrical, and electronic) devices

that comprise the Series 90-30 PLC and its applications.
Hinged Door A plastic door on the front of a module which, when open, allows
access to certain module hardware features.
Input Module An I/O module that converts signals from user devices to logic lev-
els that can be used by the CPU.
Input Scan Time The time required for the CPU to scan all input devices for new in-
put values.
I/O (Input/Output)
That portion of the PLC to which field devices are connected and
which isolates the CPU from electrical noise.
I/O Electrical Isolation

A method of separating field wiring from logic level circuitry. Typi-
cally, this is accomplished through the use of solid-state optical isola-
tion devices.
I/O Fault Table A fault table listing I/O faults. These faults are identified by time,
date, and location.
I/O Module A plug-in module containing a printed circuit assembly that inter-
faces between user devices and the Series 90-30 PLC.
K (Kilo) An abbreviation for kilo or exactly 1024 in the language of comput-

ers.
LED (Light Emitting Diode) Status Display

A display consisting of LEDs located at the top of many Series 90-30
modules. The LEDs indicate such things as On or Off status of dis-
crete points, OK status of Option modules, or the transfer of data
over communication ports.
Main Baseplate Same as CPU Baseplate.
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
Appendix A Glossary A-3
A
Memory Card A memory cartridge continuing EEPROM memory which is inserted

into a slot in the Hand-Held Programmer. This memory cartridge,
provides the Hand-Held Programmer with a means for off-line
storage and retrieval of the application program and system config-
uration data.
Microsecond One millionth of a second. 1 x 10 (-6) or 0.000001 second. Microse-

cond may be abbreviated as micros.
Millisecond One thousandth of a second. 1 x 10 (-3) or 0.001 second. Millisec-

ond may be abbreviated as ms.
Mnemonic An abbreviation given to an instruction. The mnemonic is often an

acronym, formed by combining initial letters or parts of words.
Model 30 I/O The Series 90-30 I/O subsystem consisting of discrete, analog, and
intelligent input and output modules.
Module A replaceable electronic subassembly usually plugged into connec-

tors on a backplane and secured in place, but easily removed in case
of a failure or system redesign. In the Series 90-30 PLC, a combina-
tion of a printed circuit board and its associated faceplate (and re-
movable terminal connector on I/O modules) which, when com-
bined, form a complete assembly.
Noise Undesirable electrical disturbances to normal signals, generally of

high frequency content.
Non-Volatile Memory
A memory (for example, EPROM) capable of retaining its stored in-
formation under no-power conditions (power removed or turned off).
Off-Line Mode Off-Line mode is used for program development. The programmer
does not communicate with the PLC in Off-Line mode; the physical
communications link may be intact, but the programmer is specifi-
cally not performing communications with the PLC. Power flow
display and reference values are not updated.
On-Line Mode On-Line mode provides full CPU communications, allowing data to
be both read and written.
Output Data transferred from the CPU, through an Output interface mod-
ule to an external device or process.
Output Devices Physical devices such as motor starters, solenoids, etc., that are
switched by the PLC. See “Field Devices.”
Output Module An I/O module that converts logic level signals within the CPU to
usable output signals for controlling a machine or process.
Parallel Communications
A method of data transfer, whereby data is transferred on several
wires simultaneously.
A
Peripheral Equipment
External devices that can communicate with a PLC (for example,
programmers and printers).
PLC (Programmable Logic Controller)

A solid-state industrial control device which receives signals from
user-supplied control devices, such as switches and sensors, imple-
ments them in a precise pattern determined by ladder diagram
based application programs stored in user memory, and provides
outputs for control of processes or user-supplied devices such as re-
lays or motor starters. It is usually programmed in relay ladder logic
and is designed to operate in an industrial environment.
PLC Fault Table A fault table listing PLC faults. These faults are identified by time,
date, and location.
Programmer Usually consists of a personal computer running the PLC program-

ming software.
Programmer Port
The serial port on the power supply module, accessible through a
15-pin connector, to which the programmer must be connected in
order to communicate with the PLC. Both the PC-based program-
mer and the Hand-Held Programmer connect to this port.
Programming Software
That portion of the programming software package that is used to
create ladder logic programs.
PROM (Programmable Read Only Memory)

A retentive digital device programmed at the factory and not easily
changed by the user. PROM usually contains operating system
instructions for internal system use.
Rack A Series 90-30 baseplate when it has modules installed in it.
Rack Number A unique number, assigned to each rack for identification purposes.
The numbers range from 0 to 4, assigned for a system with a Model
331 – 341 CPU, or from 0 to 7 for a Model 351 – 364 CPU. The CPU
(main) rack is always rack 0.
Rack Number DIP Switch

A three-position DIP switch, located on an Expansion or Remote base-
plate directly behind the power supply, used to assign a rack number.
RAM (Random Access Memory)

A solid-state memory that allows data to be stored and accessed at
random locations. This memory stores program files and related
data while power is applied to the system. This type of memory,
however, is volatile. Because data stored in RAM is lost under no-
power conditions, a backup battery is usually used to retain the con-
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
A
tents under those conditions. The backup battery used in the Series
90-30 PLC is a long-life lithium battery mounted on the power sup-
ply, PCM, and ADC modules.
Reference Type A specific group of memory types in the Series 90-30 PLC (for example,
%I references discrete inputs and %Q references discrete outputs).
The % symbol is used to distinguish machine references (memory ad-
dresses) from nicknames.
Register A group of 16 consecutive bits in register memory, referenced as a

%R address. Each register is numbered, beginning at %R00001.
Register memory is used for temporary storage of numerical values
and for bit manipulation.
Release Lever A molded lever on the bottom of each Model 30 I/O module, which
when depressed upwards, releases the module in its slot to allow
removal of the module.
Remote Baseplate
A 5 or 10-slot baseplate added to a system when the application calls
for the presence of a baseplate more than 50 feet from the CPU base-
plate. CPU models 331, 340, or 341 support up to four remote base-
plates (or a combination of remote and expansion baseplates as long as
the distance and cable requirements are followed) with the last remote
baseplate no more than 700 feet (213 meters) from the CPU baseplate.
CPU models 350 – 364 support up to seven expansion baseplates.
Removable Terminal Block

The removable assembly which attaches to the front of an I/O mod-
ule, and contains the screw terminals to which field wiring is con-
nected.
Restart Pushbutton
A pushbutton on the front of the module used to reinitialize the
PCM, ADC, or GDC module, or to initiate a hard or soft reset of the
module. The TCP/IP Ethernet Interface module also has a restart
pushbutton which has multiple functions.
RUN Mode A condition or state of the Series 90-30 PLC, where the CPU
executes the application program. RUN mode executes in the RUN/
OUTPUTS ENABLED mode only. In RUN/OUTPUTS ENABLED,
all portions of the program sweep are executed.
Scan Also called “Sweep.” The routine that the CPU performs repeatedly
in performing its sequence of tasks. The basic scan runs in this se-
quence: housekeeping tasks, input tasks, ladder logic solving, out-
put tasks, programmer communications, and option module com-
munications. Once the CPU reaches the end of a scan, it begins
another one and continues this sequence until stopped by a fault or
by human intervention. Each scan takes a measurable amount of
time (milliseconds) , which may having an impact on time-critical
tasks.
A
Serial Communications
A method of data transfer, whereby the bits are handled sequential-
ly rather than simultaneously, as in parallel data transmission.
Serial Port An RS-485/422 port on the PLC, accessible through a 15-pin connec-
tor, to which the programmer must be connected in order to com-
municate with the PLC. Both the Logicmaster 90 programmer and
the Hand-Held Programmer connect to this port. The PLC can
communicate with other serial devices through this port. A convert-
er is needed when communicating with an RS-232 device through
this port.
STOP Mode A condition or state of the Series 90-30 PLC, where the CPU no
longer executes the application program. STOP mode can be STOP/
NO IOSCAN or STOP/IOSCAN. In STOP/NO IOSCAN mode, the
PLC only communicates with the programmer and other devices
(GBC, PCM, etc.), recovers faulted boards, reconfigures boards and
executes background tasks. All other portions of the sweep are
skipped. In STOP/IOSCAN mode, the PLC CPU can monitor I/O.
This feature provides a way to monitor and debug I/O without
executing the application program.
Storage Used synonymously with memory.
Sweep See “Scan.”
Termination Resistor Pack

A resistor pack used to properly terminate the I/O Expansion Bus
signals. It is physically installed inside of a terminator plug
(IC693ACC307), or termination resistors are connected internally in
the 50 foot I/O bus expansion cable (IC693CBL302).
Terminator Plug A connector containing a resistor pack which must be installed at

the end of the I/O Expansion Bus chain to properly terminateI/O
bus signals. This plug must be installed on the unused connector
on the last I/O expansion cable in the I/O Expansion Bus chain. Un-
expected system operation may occur if the bus is not properly ter-
minated.
User Memory The portion of system memory in which the application program
and data is stored. This memory is battery-backed CMOS RAM.
User Reference Type

A reference assigned to data which indicates the memory in which it
is stored in the PLC. References can be either bit-oriented (discrete)
or word-oriented (register).
Volatile Memory A type of memory that will lose the information stored in it if power
is removed from the memory devices. It requires a backup battery
for retention of contents of memory. In the Series 90-30 PLC, a lithi-
um battery is used for this purpose.
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
A
Watchdog Timer A timer in the CPU used to ensure that certain hardware conditions
are met within a predetermined time. If the CPU scan runs longer
than the time setting of the Watchdog Timer, a fatal fault will occur
which will stop PLC operation.
Word A measurement of memory length. In the Series 90-30 PLC, a word

is 16-bits in length.
Wye A circuit or connection point with three branches, sometimes drawn

schematically in the shape of a letter Y. A cable with a double con-
nector on one end and a single connector on the other.
Appendix B Acronyms and Abbreviations
B section level 1
figure_ap level 1
table_ap level 1
AAUI Apple Attachment Unit Interface

ADC Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor module
ADS Alphanumeric Display System
AIA/NAS Aerospace Industries of America
ANSI American National Standards Institute
API American Petroleum Institute
APM Axis Positioning Module
AREA American Railway Engineering Association
ASCII American National Standard Code for Information Interchange
ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
BCD/BCDD Binary Coded Decimal and Binary Coded Decimal Digit
CCM Communications Control Module (protocol). Originally developed as a
communications protocol for the Communications Control Module in
the Series Six PLC. This protocol is also used on the Series 90-30.
CMM Abbreviation for the Series 90-30 Communications Control Module,
based on the module’s catalog number (IC693CMM311).
CMOS Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor
CPU Central Processing Unit
COM Serial COMmunications Port
C-UL-US Dual Canadian and US listing mark of Underwriter’s Laboratories.
DER Digital Event Recorder
DIN Deutches Institute for Normung
DIP Dual-In-Line Package (DIP switch)
DSM Digital Servo Module
DVD/DVDM Digital Valve Driver and Digital Valve Driver Module
EGD Ethernet Global Data
EIA Electronic Industries Association
EPROM Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory
EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory
EU European Union
FIP Factory Instrumentation Protocol
GBC Genius Bus Controller
GCM Genius Communications Module
GCM+ Enhanced Genius Communications Module
H (or Hex) Hexadecimal
HHP Hand-Held Programmer
HSC High Speed Counter
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls B-1
B
I/O Input/Output
ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
IOP Input/OutputProcessor
ISO International Organization for Standardization
IOC Input/OutputController
ISCP Instruction Sequencer Coprocessor
JIS Japanese Industrial Standards
K 1024 (Abbreviation for Kilobyte)
Kbyte Kilobyte (1024 bytes)
LAN Local Area Network
LED Light Emitting Diode
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
Mbyte Megabyte (1,048,576 bytes)
NEC National Electrical Code (by National Fire Protection Association)
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NFPA National Fire Protection Association or National Fluid Power Association
NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology
OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration
PC Personal Computer
PCIF Personal Computer Interface card
PCM Programmable Coprocessor Module
PE Protective Earth (ground)
PLC Programmable Logic Controller
PROM Programmable Read Only Memory
PS Power Supply
PTM Power Transducer
PTMPM Power Transducer Processor Module
PTMIM Power Transducer Interface Module
RAM Random Access Memory
RTD Resistive Temperature Detector
RTU Remote Terminal Unit
SER Sequential Event Recorder
SL Statement List Language (also refers to SL Series Servo products)
SLP State Logic Processor
SNP Series 90 Protocol
TBQC Terminal Block Quick Connect
TCM Temperature Control Module
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TOD Time-Of-Day
TP Twisted Pair
UDP User Datagram Protocol
UL Underwriter’s Laboratories
UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair
WSI Work Station Interface
B-2 Series 90-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual – October 1999 GFK-0356P
Appendix C Serial Port and Cables
section level 1
C figure_ap level 1
table_ap level 1
This appendix describes the serial port, converter, and cables used to connect Series 90
PLCs for Series 90 Protocol (SNP). This information is included for reference and for
those users who have applications that require cable lengths different than the
factory-supplied cables.
What this Appendix Contains

Information in this section includes:
H Communications Interface
H Cable and Connector Specifications
H Serial Port Configuration
H RS-232/RS-485 Converter (Catalog No. IC690ACC900)
H Serial Cable Diagrams
h Point-to-Point Connection
h Multidrop Connection
RS-422 Interface
The Series 90 PLC family of products are compatible with EIA RS-422 specifications.
RS-422 drivers and receivers are utilized to accomplish communications between several
system components using multiple driver/receiver combinations on a single cable with
five twisted pairs. The cable length between master and any slave cannot exceed 4,000
(1,219 meters) feet.
A multi-drop system of eight drivers and receivers can be configured. The maximum
common mode voltage between each additional drop is the RS-422 standard of +7 Volts
to –7 Volts. The driver output must be capable of " 2 V minimum into 100 ohms. The
driver output impedance must be at least 120 K ohms in the high impedance state. The
receiver input resistance is 12 K ohms or greater. Receiver sensitivity is " 200 millivolt.
Caution
Care must be taken that common mode voltage specifications are met.
Common mode conditions that exceed those specified will result in
errors in transmission and/or damage to Series 90 PLC components.
When the common mode voltage specification is exceeded, a port
isolator such as the GE Fanuc IC690ACC903 must be used. See
Appendix G for details on this port isolator.
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls C-1
C
Cable and Connector Specifications

The cable assembly presents one of the most common causes of communication failure.
For best performance construct the cable assemblies according to the recommended
connector parts and specifications.
Table C-1. Connector/Cable Specifications
Item Description
Series 90 PLC: Serial (RS-422) port with metric hardware
Connector: 15-pin male, D-Subminiature Type, Cannon DA15S (solder pot)
Hood: AMP 207470-1 connector shell
Hardware Kit: AMP 207871-1 Kit includes 2 metric screws and 2 screw clips
Workmaster II: Serial (RS-232) port with standard RS-232 connector
Mating Connector: 25-pin female, D-Subminiature Type, Cannon DB25S (solder pot)
Connectors: with DB110963-3 hood or equivalent (standard RS-232 connector)
Workmaster: Serial (RS-232) port with standard RS-232 connector
Connector: 9-pin female, D-Subminiature Type, Cannon DE9S (solder pot) with
DE110963-1 hood or equivalent (standard RS-232 connector)
IBM-AT/XT: Serial (RS-232) port with standard RS-232 connector
Connector: 9-pin female, D-Subminiature Type, Cannon DE9S (solder pot) with
DE110963-31 hood or equivalent (standard RS-232 connector)
RS-232/RS-485 Converter: one 15-pin male, and one 25-pin male
connector
15-pin male connector requires metric hardware (same connector, hood, and
hardware as for Series 90 PLC listed above)
25-pin male D-Subminiature Type, Cannon DA25S (solder pot) with DB110963-3
hood or equivalent (standard RS-232 connector)
Computer grade, 24 AWG (.22 mm2), minimum with overall shield
Catalog Numbers: Belden 9505, Belden 9306, Belden 9832
Cable: These cables provide acceptable operation for data rates up to 19.2 Kbps
as follows:
RS-232: 50 feet (15 meters) maximum cable length
RS-422/RS-422: 4000 feet (1200 meters) maximum length. Must not
exceed the maximum RS-422 Common Mode specifi-
cation of +7V to -7V. Isolation at the remote end may
be used to reduce or eliminate Common Mode voltages.
For distances under 50 feet (15 meters), almost any twisted pair or shielded
twisted pair cable will work, as long as the wire pairs are connected correctly.
When using RS-422/RS-422, the twisted pairs should be matched so that both
transmit signals make up one twisted pair and both receive signals make up the
other twisted pair. If this is ignored, cross-task resulting from the mismatching
will affect the performance of the communications system.
When routing communication cables outdoors, transient suppression devices can

be used to reduce the possibility of damage due to lightning or static discharge.
Care should be exercised that all connected devices are grounded to a common point.
Failure to do so could result in damage to the equipment.
C-2 Series 90-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual – October 1999 GFK-0356P
C
Series 90 PLC Serial Port

The Series 90 PLC serial port is compatible with RS-422. An RS-232 to RS-422 converter
is required to interface to systems that provide RS-232 compatible interfaces. The Series
90 PLC, RS-422 serial port provides the physical connection for SNP communication.
This port is a 15-pin D-type female connector located as follows:
H Series 90-70 PLC and Series 90-20 – CPU Module
H Series 90-30 PLC – Power Supply
Figure C-1 shows the serial port orientation and connector layout for the Series 90 PLC
types (note that the orientation of the connector on the Series 90-20 CPU is rotated 90
degrees from the Series 90-30 connector with pin 1 to the upper right). Table C-2 shows
the pin numbering and signal assignment applicable to both PLCs.
SERIES 90–70 PLC SERIES 90–30 PLC a44521
PIN
15 8 1 9
PIN
9 15
1 8
NOTE
SERIES 90 PLC CONNECTORS
USE METRIC HARDWARE.
(SEE CONNECTOR SPECIFICATIONS)
Figure C-1. Series 90 PLC, RS-422 Serial Port Connector Configuration
FANUC CNC Controls

GFK-0356P Appendix C Serial Port and Cables C-3
C
Table C-2. Series 90 PLC, RS-422 Serial Port Pin-out

Pin Number Signal Name Description
1 Shield
2 No Connection
3 No Connection
4 ATCH * Hand-Held Programmer attach signal
5 +5V * +5V Power for: HHP and RS-232/485 Converter
6 RTS (A) Request To Send
7 Signal Ground Signal Ground, OV
8 CTS (B’) Clear To Send
9 RT * Terminating Resistor for RD **
10 RD (A’) Receive Data
11 RD (B’) Receive Data
12 SD (A) Send Data
13 SD (B) Send Data
14 RTS (B) Request To Send
15 CTS (A’) Clear To Send
* Signals available at the Connector but are not included in the RS-422 specification.
SD (Send Data) and RD (Receive Data) are the same as TXD and RXD (used in the Series Six PLC).
(A) and (B) are the same as - and + . A and B denote outputs, and A’ and B’ denote inputs.
** Termination resistance for the Receive Data (RD) signal needs to be connected only on units at the
end of the lines. This termination is made on the Series 90 PLC products by connecting a jumper
between pins 9 and 10 inside the 15-pin D-shell with the following exception. For Series 90-70
PLCs with Catalog Numbers IC697CPU731J, and IC697CPU771G and earlier the termination for
RD at the PLC is implemented by a jumper between pins 9 and 11.
C
Workmaster Serial Port

The Workmaster II industrial computer, RS-232 serial port is a 25-pin D-type male
connector, and the early model Workmaster is a 9-pin male connector.
Figure C-2 shows the serial port connector layout for both computers. Table C-3 shows
the pin numbering and signal assignment for both connector types.
a44522
WORKMASTER II WORKMASTER
(EARLY MODEL)
13 5
25 9
PIN
6
1
PIN
12
1
Figure C-2. Workmaster RS-232 Serial Port Connector Configuration
Table C-3. Workmaster RS-232 Serial Port Pins-out
Workmaster II (25-pin connector) Workmaster (9-pin connector)

Pin No. Signal Description Pin No. Signal Description
1 NC 1 NC
2 TD Transmit Data 2 TD Transmit Data
3 RD Receive Data 3 RD Receive Data
4 RTS Request to Send 4 RTS Request to Send
5 CTS Clear to Send 5 CTS Clear to Send
6 NC 6 NC
7 GND Signal Ground 7 GND Signal Ground, 0V
8 DCD Data Carrier Detect 8 DCD Data Carrier Detect
9,10 NC 9 DTR Data Terminal Ready
11 Tied to line 20 NC = Not Connected
12-19 NC
20 DTR Data Terminal Ready
21 NC
22 Ring Indicate
23-25 NC
For more information about the Workmaster industrial computer serial port refer to the
following manuals:
GFK-0401 Workmaster II PLC Programming Unit Guide to Operation
GEK-25373 Workmaster Programmable Control Information Center Guide to Operation
FANUC CNC Controls

C
IBM-AT/XT Serial Port

The IBM-AT, IBM-XT or compatible computer’s RS-232 serial port is a 9-pin D-type male
connector as shown in the figure below.
a44523
IBM-AT/XT
5
9
PIN
1 6
Figure C-3. IBM-AT/XT Serial Port
Table C-4. IBM-AT/XT Serial Port Pins-out
IBM-AT IBM-XT
Pin No. Signal Description Pin No. Signal Description
1 DCD Data Carrier Detect 1 NC
2 RD Receive Data 2 TD Transmit Data
3 TD Transmit Data 3 RD Receive Data
4 DTR Data Terminal Ready 4 RTS Request to Send
5 GND Signal Ground 5 CTS Clear to Send
6 NC 6 NC
7 RTS Request to Send 7 GND Signal Ground
8 CTS Clear to Send 8 DCD Data Carrier Detect
9 NC 9 DTR Data Terminal Ready
NC = Not Connected
C
RS-232/RS-485 Converter
IC690ACC901 Miniconverter Kit

This kit consists of an RS-422 to RS-232 miniconverter, a 6 foot (2 meter) serial cable, and
a 9-pin to 25-pin serial port converter plug. This miniconverter is documented in
Appendix F. This miniconverter has replaced the older, larger, obsolete IC690ACC900
converter.
IC690ACC900 Obsolete Converter

The obsolete RS-232/RS-485 Converter (IC690ACC900) converts from RS-232 to
RS-422/RS-485 communications. The converter has one 15-pin female D-type port, and
one 25-pin female D-type port.
This converter is no longer available. Please substitute the IC690ACC901 miniconverter.
Information about this converter is included in this manual for reference and
troubleshooting purposes.
For detailed information on the converter, refer to Appendix D. Examples of serial cable
diagrams, which include the converter, are provided in the remainder of this appendix..
Serial Cable Diagrams

This section describes only a few of the many and various Point-to-Point, and Multidrop
serial port connections for Series 90 PLCs.
In the point-to-point configuration only two devices can be connected to the same
communication line. The communication line can be directly connected using RS-232 (50
feet, 15 meters maximum) or RS-485 (4000 feet, 1200 meters maximum). Modems can be
used for longer distances.
Note
The cable connector for the Series 90-70 and Series 90-30 PLCs serial port
must be a right angle connector in order for the hinged door on the
module to close properly. Refer to Table C-1Connector/Cable
Specification.
RS-232 Point-to-Point Connections

The next three figures illustrate typical RS-232 point-to-point connection to Series 90 PLCs.
FANUC CNC Controls

C
IC690CBL705 OR EQUIVALENT RS–232/RS–485 RS–422 a44506

RS–232 CONVERTER TWISTED SHIELDED
Î ÎÎÎÎ Î
SHIELDED PAIRS (IC690ACC900) PAIRS
PIN PIN PIN PIN
TD 2 3 RD DCD ( B ) 2 2
Î ÎÎÎÎ Î
RD 3 2 TD DCD ( A ) 3 3
RTS 4 5 CTS RD ( B’ ) 10 12 SD ( A )
Î ÎÎÎÎ Î
CTS 5 4 RTS RD ( A’ ) 11 13 SD ( B )
DCD 8 8 DCD SD ( B ) 12 10 RD ( A’ ) SERIES
WORKMASTER DTR 20 SD ( A ) 13 11 RD ( B ’ ) 90 PLC
Î ÎÎÎÎ Î
RT 9 ** 9 RD
RS–232 CTS ( B’ ) 15 6 RTS ( B ) RS–422
PORT CTS ( A’ ) 8 14 RTS ( A )
Î Î ÎÎ
Î Î
PORT
RTS ( A ) 6 15 CTS ( A’ )
RTS ( B ) 14 8 CTS ( B’ )
*
Î ÎÎÎ Î
+5V 5 5 +5V
GND 7 7 GND 0V 7 * 7 0V
25–PIN 25–PIN 25–PIN 25–PIN 15–PIN 15– PIN 15– PIN 15– PIN
RS–232 RS–485
PORT PORT
* POWER SOURCE FOR POINT–TO–POINT CONNECTION 10 FEET (3 METERS) ONLY. CONVERTER POWER SOURCE BEYOND 10 FEET (3 METERS) AND FOR MULTIDROP
CONNECTION MUST BE EXTERNAL SOURCE.
** TERMINATION RESISTANCE FOR THE RECEIVE DATA (RD) SIGNAL NEEDS TO BE CONNECTED ONLY ON UNITS AT THE END OF THE LINES. THIS TERMINATION IS MADE ON
THE SERIES 90 PLC PRODUCTS BY CONNECTING A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 10 INSIDE THE 15–PIN D–SHELL WITH THE FOLLOWING EXCEPTION. FOR SERIES

a44507
Î Î Î Î
PIN PIN PIN PIN
Î Î Î Î
RD 2 2 TD DCD ( A ) 2 2
IBM–AT TD 3 3 RD DCD ( B ) 3 3
Î Î Î ÎÎ
(COMPATIBLE) RTS 7 5 CTS RD ( A’ ) 10 12 SD ( A )
CTS 8 20 DTR RD ( B’ ) 11 13 SD ( B )
RS–232 DCD 1 8 DCD SD ( A ) 12 10 RD ( A’ ) SERIES
Î Î
PORT DTR 4 SD ( B ) 13 11 RD ( B ) 90 PLC
GND 5 7 GND RT 9 ** 9 RD
Î Î ÎÎ
CTS ( A’ ) 15 6 RTS ( A ) RS–422
9–PIN 9–PIN CTS ( B’ ) 8 14 RTS ( B )
MALE FEMALE PORT
RTS ( A ) 6 15 CTS ( A’ )
Î Î
RTS ( B ) 14 8 CTS ( B’ )
+5V 5 * 5 +5V
1 SHLD 0V 7 * 7 0V
25–PIN SHLD 1 1 SHLD
MALE 25–PIN 15–PIN 15– PIN 15– PIN 15– PIN
RS–232 RS–422
PORT PORT
* POWER SOURCE FOR POINT–TO–POINT CONNECTION 10 FEET (3 METERS) ONLY. CONVERTER POWER SOURCE BEYOND 10 FEET (3 METERS) AND FOR MULTIDROP CONNECTION
MUST BE EXTERNAL SOURCE.
** TERMINATION RESISTANCE FOR THE RECEIVE DATA (RD) SIGNAL NEEDS TO BE CONNECTED ONLY ON UNITS AT THE END OF THE LINES. THIS TERMINATION IS MADE ON THE
SERIES 90 PLC PRODUCTS BY CONNECTING A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 10 INSIDE THE 15–PIN D–SHELL WITH THE FOLLOWING EXCEPTION. FOR SERIES 90–70 PLCs,
CATALOG NUMBERS IC697CPU731 AND IC697CPU771, THE TERMINATION FOR RD AT THE PLC IS IMPLEMENTED BY A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 11.
Figure C-4. IBM-AT (compatibles) Personal Computer to Series 90 PLCs
C
IC690CBL701 OR EQUIVALENT RS–232/RS–422 RS–422 a44508

Î Î Î Î ÎÎÎ
PIN PIN PIN PIN
Î ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
TD 2 3 RD DCD ( A ) 2 2
IBM–XT RD 3 2 TD DCD ( B ) 3 3
OR RTS 4 5 CTS RD ( A’ ) 10 12 SD ( A )
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
WORKMASTER CTS 5 20 DTR RD ( B’ ) 11 13 SD ( B )
DCD 8 8 DCD SD ( A ) 12 10 RD ( A’ ) SERIES
RS–232
ÎÎ
Î Î Î ÎÎ
ÎÎ
DTR 9 SD ( B ) 13 11 RD ( B’ ) 90 PLC
PORT GND 7 7 GND RT 9 ** 9 RD
CTS ( A’ ) 15 6 RTS ( A ) RS–422
ÎÎ
Î Î Î ÎÎÎ
Î
9–PIN 9–PIN CTS ( B’ ) 8 14 RTS ( B )
MALE FEMALE PORT
RTS ( A ) 6 15 CTS ( A’ )
ÎÎ ÎÎ
RTS ( B ) 14 8 CTS ( B’)
ÎÎ ÎÎ
+5V 5 * 5 +5V
1 SHLD 0V 7 * 7 0V
25–PIN SHLD 1 1 SHLD
MALE 25–PIN 15–PIN 15– PIN 15– PIN 15– PIN
RS–232 RS–422
PORT PORT
* POWER SOURCE FOR POINT–TO–POINT CONNECTION 10 FEET (3 METERS) ONLY. CONVERTER POWER SOURCE BEYOND 10 FEET (3 METERS) AND FOR MULTIDROP
CONNECTION MUST BE EXTERNAL SOURCE.
** TERMINATION RESISTANCE FOR THE RECEIVE DATA (RD) SIGNAL NEEDS TO BE CONNECTED ONLY ON UNITS AT THE END OF THE LINES. THIS TERMINATION IS MADE ON
THE SERIES 90 PLC PRODUCTS BY CONNECTING A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 10 INSIDE THE 15–PIN D–SHELL WITH THE FOLLOWING EXCEPTION. FOR SERIES 90–70
PLCs, CATALOG NUMBERS IC697CPU731 AND IC697CPU771, THE TERMINATION FOR RD AT THE PLC IS IMPLEMENTED BY A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 11.
Figure C-5. Workmaster or IBM-XT (compatibles) Personal Computer to Series 90 PLCs
FANUC CNC Controls

C
RS-422 Point-to-Point Connection

If your host device is equipped with a RS-422 card you can connect directly to Series 90
PLCs as illustrated in Figure C-7.
HOST a44509
COMPUTER PLC
PIN SHIELDED TWISTED PAIRS PIN
RD (A’) 12 SD ( A )
RD (B’) 13 SD ( B )
SD (A) 10 RD ( A’ )
SD (B) 11 RD ( B ’ )
CTS (A’)
* 9
6
RD
RTS ( A )
CTS (B’) 14 RTS ( B )
RTS (B’) 8 CTS ( B’ )
RTS (A) 15 CTS ( A’ )
3
2
GND 7 GND
SHLD 1 SHLD
UP TO A MAXIMUM OF 50 FEET (15.2 METERS)
(WITHOUT ISOLATION)
* TERMINATION RESISTANCE FOR THE RECEIVE DATA (RD) SIGNAL NEEDS TO BE

CONNECTED ONLY ON UNITS AT THE END OF THE LINES. THIS TERMINATION IS MADE
ON THE SERIES 90 PLC PRODUCTS BY CONNECTING A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND
PIN 10 INSIDE THE 15–PIN D–SHELL WITH THE FOLLOWING EXCEPTION. FOR SERIES
90–70 PLCs, CATALOG NUMBERS IC697CPU731 AND IC697CPU771, THE TERMINATION
FOR RD AT THE PLC IS IMPLEMENTED BY A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 11.
Figure C-6. Typical RS-422, Host to PLC Connection, with Handshaking
C
Multidrop Connections
In the multidrop configuration, the host device is configured as the master and one or
more PLCs are configured as slaves. This method can be used when the maximum
distance between the master and any slave does not exceed 4000 feet (1200 meters). This
figure assumes good quality cables and a moderately noisy environment. A maximum of
8 slaves can be connected using RS-422 in a daisy chain or multidrop configuration. The
RS-422 line must include handshaking and use wire type as specified in the “Cable and
Connector Specifications” section.
The following illustrations shows wiring diagrams and requirements for connecting a
Workmaster II or IBM-PS/2, Workmaster, IBM-AT/XT or compatible computer to Series 90
PLCs in an 8-wire multidrop, serial data configuration.

Î ÎÎÎ Î
SLAVE
Î ÎÎÎ Î
TD 2 3 RD DCD ( A ) 2 2
RD 3 2 TD DCD ( B ) 3 3
RTS 4 5 CTS RD ( A’ ) 10 12 SD ( A ) SERIES
Î ÎÎ
Î Î Î Î
CTS 5 20 DTR RD ( B’ ) 11 13 SD ( B ) 90–70
DCD 8 8 DCD SD ( A ) 12 10 RD ( A’ )
WORKMASTER DTR 20 SD ( B ) 13 11 RD ( B’ ) CPU
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ Î
RT 9 * 9 RD RS–422
RS–232 CTS ( A’ ) 15 6 RTS ( A ) PORT
PORT CTS ( B’ ) 8 14 RTS ( B )
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ Î
RTS ( A ) 6 15 CTS ( A’ )
RTS ( B ) 14 8 CTS ( B’ )
+5V 5 5 +5V
GND 7 7 GND 0V 7 7 0V
ÎÎ
25– PIN 25– PIN 25– PIN 25–PIN 15–PIN 15– PIN 15– PIN 15– PIN
RS–232 RS–422
LAST
PORT PORT
PIN STATION
POWER 5V 2
NOTE
ÎÎ ÎÎ
SOURCE 3
WHEN WIRING RS–422 /485 MULTIDROP CABLES REFLECTIONS ON THE FOR 12 SD ( A ) SERIES
TRANSMISSION LINE CAN BE REDUCED BY CONFIGURING THE CABLE IN A CONVERTER 0V 13 SD ( B ) 90–30
ÎÎ
DAISY CHAIN FASHION AS SHOWN BELOW. 10 RD ( A’ )
MASTER CONVERTER SLAVE STATION LAST STATION 11 RD ( B’ ) PS
* 9 RD RS–422
PLC 15–PIN CONNECTOR
ÎÎ ÎÎ
6 RTS ( A ) PORT
15 CTS ( A’ )
5 +5V
Figure C-7. Workmaster II/Series 90 PLC Multidrop Connection
Note
The cable connector for the Series 90-70 serial port must be a right angle
connector in order for the hinged door on the module to close properly.
Refer to Table C-1, “Connector/CableSpecification.”
FANUC CNC Controls

C

ÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
SLAVE
TD 2 3 RD DCD ( A ) 2 2
ÎÎ
Î Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î
RD 3 2 TD DCD ( B ) 3 3
WORKMASTER RTS 4 5 CTS RD ( A’ ) 10 12 SD ( A ) SERIES
CTS 5 20 DTR RD ( B’ ) 11 13 SD ( B )
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
RS–232 90–70
DCD 8 8 DCD SD ( A ) 12 10 RD ( A’ )
PORT DTR 9 SD ( B ) 13 11 RD ( B’ )
GND 7 7 GND RT 9 9 RD CPU
*
Î Î
ÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
CTS ( A’ ) 15 6 RTS ( A ) RS–422
9– PIN 9– PIN
CTS ( B’ ) 8 14 RTS ( B ) PORT
MALE FEMALE RTS ( A ) 6 15 CTS ( A’ )
ÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
RTS ( B ) 14 8 CTS ( B’ )
+5V 5 5 +5V
0V 7 7 0V
25– PIN 25–PIN 15–PIN 15– PIN 15– PIN 15– PIN
ÎÎ
Î
MALE FEMALE FEMALE MALE MALE FEMALE
RS–232 RS–422 LAST
ÎÎ
Î
PORT PORT PIN STATION
POWER 5V 2
NOTE 3
SOURCE
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î Î
WHEN WIRING RS–422 /485 MULTIDROP CABLES REFLECTIONS ON THE 12 SD ( A )
TRANSMISSION LINE CAN BE REDUCED BY CONFIGURING THE CABLE FOR SERIES
0V 13 SD ( B )
IN A DAISY CHAIN FASHION AS SHOWN BE- CONVERTER 90–30
LOW. 10 RD ( A’ )
Î ÎÎ
ÎÎ
MASTER CONVERTER SLAVE STATION LAST STATION 11 RD ( B’ )
* 9 RD PS
6 RTS ( A ) RS–422
ÎÎ
Î Î
14 RTS ( B ) PORT
ON POWER SUPPLY
15 CTS ( A’ )
SERIES 90–70 LOCATED 8 CTS ( B’ )
ÎÎ
ON THE CPU BOARD
5 +5V
* TERMINATION RESISTANCE FOR THE RECEIVE DATA (RD) SIGNAL NEEDS TO BE CONNECTED ONLY ON UNITS AT THE END OF THE LINES. THIS TERMINATION IS MADE ON THE
Figure C-8. Workmaster/Series 90 PLC Multidrop Connection
Î ÎÎ Î ÎÎ
SLAVE
PIN
Î ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
PIN PIN PIN STATION
TD 2 2 RD DCD ( A ) 2 2
IBM-AT RD 3 3 TD DCD ( B ) 3 3
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ Î
(COMPATIBLE) RTS 7 5 CTS RD ( A’ ) 10 12 SD ( A ) SERIES
CTS 8 20 DTR RD ( B’ ) 11 13 SD ( B )
RS–232 90–70
DCD 1 8 DCD SD ( A ) 12 10 RD ( A’ )
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ Î
PORT DTR 4 SD ( B ) 13 11 RD ( B’ )
CTS ( A’ ) 15
* 6 RTS ( A ) RS–422
Î ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ
9– PIN 9– PIN
RTS ( B ) 14 8 CTS ( B’ )
ÎÎ Î
+5V 5 5 +5V
0V 7 7 0V
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
POWER 5V 2
NOTE 3
SOURCE
FOR SERIES
Î
TRANSMISSION LINE CAN BE REDUCED BY CONFIGURING THE CABLE
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
0V 13 SD ( B )
LOW. 10 RD ( A’ )
Î Î ÎÎÎÎ
* 9 RD PS
6 RTS ( A ) RS–422
14 RTS ( B ) PORT
ÎÎÎ
Î
ON POWER SUPPLY
15 CTS ( A’ )
ON THE CPU BOARD
5 +5V
Figure C-9. IBM-AT/Series 90 PLC Multidrop Connection
C

a44514
Î Î Î Î
RS–232 SHIELDED PAIRS CONVERTER MAKE CONNECTIONS
SLAVE
PIN PIN PIN PIN
Î Î Î Î
STATION
TD 2 3 RD DCD ( A ) 2 2
IBM-XT RD 3 2 TD DCD ( B ) 3 3
(COMPATIBLE)
Î Î Î Î
RTS 4 5 CTS RD ( A’ ) 10 12 SD ( A ) SERIES
CTS 5 20 DTR RD ( B’ ) 11 13 SD ( B )
RS–232 90–70
DCD 8 8 DCD SD ( A ) 12 10 RD ( A’ )
Î Î Î
PORT DTR 9 SD ( B ) 13 11 RD ( B’ )
CTS ( A’ ) 15
* 6 RTS ( A ) RS–422
9– PIN 9– PIN
Î Î Î
RTS ( B ) 14 8 CTS ( B’ )
Î Î Î
+5V 5 5 +5V
0V 7 7 0V
Î
5V
Î
POWER 2
NOTE 3
SOURCE
TRANSMISSION LINE CAN BE REDUCED BY CONFIGURING THE CABLE FOR SERIES
Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
0V 13 SD ( B )
LOW. 10 RD ( A’ )
Î Î Î
* 9 RD PS
6 RTS ( A ) RS–422
14 RTS ( B ) PORT
ON POWER SUPPLY
Î
15 CTS ( A’ )
ON THE CPU BOARD
5 +5V
Figure C-10. IBM-XT/Series 90 PLC Multidrop Connection
FANUC CNC Controls

Appendix D IC690ACC900 Converter
section level 1
D figure_ap level 1
(ObsoleteProduct)
table_ap level 1
NOTE: This product is no longer available. This appendix is for

reference for those already using this converter. We recommend the
IC690ACC901 as a replacement for most applications (see Appendix F
for details).
This appendix provides a detailed description of the RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 Converter
(IC690ACC900) for the Series 90 Programmable Logic Controllers.
Features
D Provides the Series 90 PLCs with an interface to devices that use the RS-232
interface.
D Allows connection to programming computer without a Work Station Interface
board.
D Easy cable connection to either a Series 90-70 PLC or a Series 90-30 PLC.
D No external power needed; operates from +5 volt DC power on the Series 90 PLC
backplane.
D Convenient, light weight self-contained unit.
Functions
The RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 Converter provides an RS-232 serial interface for the Series
90-70 and Series 90-30 PLCs, which have a built-in RS-422/RS-485 interface. Specifically,
it provides a serial connection between a Series 90-30 or Series 90-70 PLC serial port and
the serial port on the programming computer without the need for a Work Station
Interface to be installed in the computer. The programming computer can be a
Workmaster II computer, or IBM PS/2 or compatible computer.
Location in System
The RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 converter is a free-standing device which requires two
cables as the connections between the PLC and the programmer. Its location is limited
only by the length of the connecting cables as listed in the interface specifications (see
GFK-0356P D-1
D Obsolete Product
Table 5). The cable at the PLC end that connects to the RS-422/RS-485 connector on the
converter can be up to 10 feet in length (without an external source of +5 VDC) and up
to 1000 feet (300m) in length with an external source of +5 VDC. The cable from the
RS-232 connector on the converter to the programming computer’s serial port can be up
to 50 feet (15m) in length.
a44694
FRONT VIEW REAR VIEW
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
GE Fanuc
IC690ACC900A
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
CABLE ADAPTER
MADE IN USA
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Figure D-1. Front and Rear View of Converter
Installation
Installation of the RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 Converter consists of connecting two cables.
Select the proper cables for your installation. Prewired cables (see below) are available
from GE Fanuc, or if cables of different lengths are required by your application, you can
build your own cables. Specifications for building these cables are provided later in this
appendix.
You do not need to connect an external source of power to the converter for a cable
length of 10 feet, or less, since the necessary power connections of +5 VDC and signal
ground are derived from the PLCs backplane bus through the cable which connects to
the Series 90-30 or 90-70 PLC.
1. Select one of the three RS-232 compatible cables (10 feet in length) that will connect
the programmer’s (or other serial device) RS-232 serial port to the RS-232 port on
the converter. The catalog numbers of these cables are: IC690CBL701 (use with
Workmaster industrial computer, or IBM PC-XT or compatible personal computer),
IC690CBL702 (use with IBM PC-AT or compatible personal computer), and
IC690CBL705 (use with Workmaster II industrial computer, or IBM PS/2 or
compatible personal computer).
2. A standard 6-foot cable (HHP compatible) is available to connect the RS-422/RS-485
port on the converter to the RS-485 port on the Series 90-30 or Series 90-70 PLC. The
catalog number of this cable is IC693CBL303.
Installation of these cables should be done with the PLC powered-down.
D Connect the 25-pin male connector on the 10 foot cable to the 25-pin female
connector on the converter.
D-2
FANUC CNC Controls
Series 90-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual– October 1999 GFK-0356P
Obsolete Product D
D Connect the female connector (9-pin or 25-pin) on the opposite end of this cable to
the male RS-232 connector (serial port) on the selected programming (or other serial)
device. If you build you own cable, use a connector that is compatible with your
serial device.
D Notice that both ends of the 6-foot RS-422/RS-485 compatible cable are the same; a
15-pin male connector is attached at both ends. Connect one end of this cable to the
15-pin female connector on the RS-422/RS-485 connector on the converter.
D Connect the other end of this cable to the 15-pin female connector, which interfaces
to the RS-485 compatible serial port on the Series 90-30 or Series 90-70 PLC. For the
Series 90-30 PLC, this connector is accessed by opening the hinged door on the
power supply. The serial port connector for the Series 90-70 PLC is on the CPU
module, and is accessed by opening the hinged door on the module.
Cable Description
The serial connection to the Series 90-70 PLC (see Figure D-1) is to the RS-422/RS-485
compatible serial port connector, located at the bottom of the CPU module behind the
hinged door, through an available 6 foot (2 meter) serial interface cable - IC693CBL303.
Wiring information and recommended cable and connectors are provided for those who
may want to build their own cable having a different length.
The serial connection to the Series 90-30 PLC is to the RS-485 compatible serial port
connector located behind the hinged door on the right front of the power supply,
through the same 6 foot serial interface cable, IC693CBL303, or equivalent, Figure D-2).
SERIES 90–70 a44695
Î ÎÎ
P
U PROGRAMMER
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
RS–485 RS–232
ÎÎÎ
CONVERTER
Figure D-2. Typical Configuration with Series 90-70 PLC
GFK-0356P Appendix D IC690ACC900 Converter D-3

D Obsolete Product
a44681
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
SERIES 90–30 PROGRAMMER
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
RS–485 RS–232
CONVERTER
Figure D-3. Typical Configuration with Series 90-30 PLC
RS-232 Interface Pin Assignments

Pin assignments and signal definitions for the RS-232 interface are listed below.
Table D-1. RS-232 Interface for Converter
Pin Signal Name Function I/O

1 Shield Cable shield -
2 SD Transmitted Data Out
3 RD Received Data In
4 RTS Request To Send Out
5 CTS Clear To Send In
6 - No connection -
7 SG Signal Ground -
8 DCD Data Carrier Detect In
9/19 - No connection -
20 DTR Data Terminal Ready Out
21 to 25 - No connection -
D-4
FANUC CNC Controls
Obsolete Product D
RS-422/RS-485 Interface Pin Assignments

Pin assignments and signal definitions for the RS-422/RS-485 interface are listed below.
Table D-2. RS-422/RS-485 Interface for Converter
Pin Signal Name Function I/O

1 Cable Shield
2 DCD(A) Differential Data Carrier Detect Out
3 DCD(B) Differential Data Carrier Detect Out
4 ATCH/ Attach (used with HHP) n/a
5 +5 VDC Logic Power In
6 RTS(A) Differential Request To Send Out
7 SG Signal Ground, 0V In
8 CTS(B’) Differential Clear To Send In
9 RT Resistor Terminator n/a
10 RD(A’) Differential Receive Data In
11 RD(B’) Differential Receive Data In
12 SD(A) Differential Send Data Out
13 SD(B) Differential Send Data Out
14 RTS(B) Differential Request To Send Out
15 CTS(A’) Differential Clear To Send In

D Obsolete Product
Logic Diagram
The following figure shows the logic diagram for the RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 Converter.
RS–232/RS–485 a44539
RS–232 CONVERTER RS–485

25–PIN (IC690ACC900) 15–PIN
1 1
SHIELD SHIELD
9
TERMINATOR
RESISTOR
120 Ω
11
RD ( B’ )
2
SD
10
RD ( A’ )
13
SD (B )
3
RD
12
SD (A )
Î
8
CTS ( B’ )
Î
MODEM
Î
4 15
RTS
CTS ( A’ )
14
RTS ( B )
5
CTS
6
RTS ( A )
Î
Î
8 DCD 3
DCD DCD ( B )
Î
Î LOGIC
2
5
DCD ( A )
+5
POWER
7 7
Î
SG SG
NC
20
Î 4
Î
DTR ATTACH ATCH/
Figure D-4. RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 Converter Logic Diagram
D-6
FANUC CNC Controls
Obsolete Product D
Jumper Configuration
There are three jumper locations on the converter board for selection of user options.
Each jumper position has three pins, as shown in the following illustration. These
jumper positions, labeled JP2, JP3, and JP4, are accessed by removing the square plastic
cover on the top of the converter. Configuration can be changed as required by
carefully removing one or more of the jumpers with a pair of needle nose pliers and
placing it on the desired pair of pins.
Refer to the description of these selectable jumper positions in the following table and
place the jumper on the selected pair of pins. The pin numbers are 1, 2, and 3. Default
jumper locations are indicated by a rectangle around the pins to be jumpered for each
position. The default pin numbers are 1 and 2.
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ a44680
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
RS–422/RS485 RS–232
Î Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
1
2
3
Figure D-5. Location of Jumpers for User Options

D Obsolete Product
Table D-3. Jumper Configuration for RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 Converter
Jumper Jumper
Position Label Position Description [
JP2 DCD 1 2 3 Default position 1 and 2 is used when the device

communicating with the PLC does not supply the
Carrier Detect signal. JP2 forces the DCD signal
active on the RS-485 port.
1 2 3 Use jumper positions 2 and 3 if the device does

supply the Carrier Detect signal. This allows the
programming device to control DCD.
JP3 MODEM 1 2 3 Default position 1 and 2 is used when an attached
Modem does not require the Clear To Send (CTS)
signal. This allows the programming device to
control the RTS signal.
1 2 3 Jumper positions 2 and 3 are used when the
attached Modem does require the CTS signal (most
modems require this signal). Forces RTS to be
continually active.
JP4 ATTACH 1 2 3 Default position 1 and 2 is used for most
applications communicating with the PLC via a
serial programming device.
1 2 3 Jumper positions 2 and 3 are used if the device
communicating with the PLC is intended to
emulate the HHP protocol.
[ Refer to the documentation for your serial device for signal requirements.
D-8
FANUC CNC Controls
Obsolete Product D
Example of Cable Configurations

Examples of cable configurations required when using the converter can be found in
Appendix C. Specifications for the converter are shown in the following table.
Table D-4. Specifications for IC690ACC900 Converter
Power Requirements:
Voltage 5 volts DC, +5%
Current 170 mA, ±5%
RS-422/RS-485 Interface Cables:

Maximum cable length 1000 feet(300m)
Cable Type: [
6 feet (2m) Cable type: Belden 9508, AWG #24 (0.22 mm2)
30 feet (10m) ] Cable type: Belden 9309, AWG #22 (0.36 mm2)
≥30 feet, up to 1000 feet (300m) ] Same cable as for 30 feet.
Connector Type 15-pin D-type Male Subminiature (both ends)
RS-232 Interface Cable:

Maximum cable length 50 feet (15m)
Up to 50 feet (15m)
Connector Type 25-pin D-type Female Subminiature (converter
end) 9-pin, 15-pin, or 25-pin (depending on
type of connector on your serial device) D-type
Female Subminiature (programming device
end)
[ Catalog numbers are provided as suggestions only. Any cable having the same
electrical characteristics is acceptable. It is strongly recommended that you use
stranded wire. Since it is sometimes hard to find a cable with the desired number of
twisted pairs (the Belden 9309 has an extra pair), you may end up with a cable with
extra pairs.
] For distances over 10 feet, the +5 volt DC logic power source must be provided
externally by connecting an external power supply to the +5V and SG (0V)
connections at the converter end of the cable. The +5V pin at the PLC connector end of
the cable must not be connected to the cable. The +5V and SG connections from the
external power supply must be isolated from its own power line ground connection.
Ensure that there is no connection between the external supply and the PLC except
the SG cable connection.

Appendix E IC655CCM590 Isolated Repeater/Converter
section level 1
E figure_ap level 1
(ObsoleteProduct)
table_ap level 1
NOTE: This product is no longer available. This appendix is for

reference by those already using this product. It has been replaced by
catalog number IC690ACC903 (see Appendix G for details).
This appendix describes how to use the Isolated Repeater/Converter (IC655CCM590) with
Series 90 PLCs. The following topics are covered in this appendix.
D Description of the Isolated Repeater/Converter
D System Configurations
D Cable Diagrams
Note
The catalog number for the Isolated Repeater/Converter was previously
IC630CCM390.
Description of the Isolated Repeater/Conver ter

The Isolated Repeater/Converter (IC655CCM590) can be used for the following
purposes.
D To provide ground isolation where a common ground cannot be established
between components.
D To boost RS-422 signals for greater distance and more drops.
D To convert signals from RS-232 to RS-422 or RS-422 to RS-232.
The figure on the next page shows the appearance of the unit and the location of
features that are of interest to the user.
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls E-1
E Obsolete Product
Î
(TOP VIEW) a42418
ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ Î
Î
Î Î Î
RS422
RS422
POWER GE Fanuc FUSE
Î Î
CORD H
115VAC
N RS232C
Î Î
230VAC
N
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ Î
ISOLATED RS232
ADAPTOR UNIT
Î
ÎÎ
J1
ÎÎ
POWER
J2
SWITCH
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
FUSE
POWER
CORD
(BACK VIEW)
FUSE–1AMP
(SIDE VIEW)
Figure E-1. Isolated/Repeater Converter
Items of interest to the user on the Isolated Repeater/Converter are described below.
D Two 25-pin female D-type connectors (Two 25-pin male, D-type connectors (solder
pot), are included for user cabling.)
D 115/230VAC power connection (internal) 4-position terminal block.
D Fused 1 Amp power protection.
D Power ON (green) indicator LED.
D Three-position toggle switch, recessed in the back of the unit, is set according to the
system configurations shown later in this appendix.
E-2 Series 90-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual – October 1999 GFK-0356P
Obsolete Product E
Logic Diagram of the Isolated Repeater/Conver ter

The figure below provides a functional look at the unit. Note the 3-position switch for
controlling the J1 port transmitters. This switch is discussed in System Configurations later in
this appendix..
a44782
OPTICAL RS–422/RS–232C
RS–422 J2
ISOLATION
J1 2
SD (RS–232C)
22 22
RD ( B’ ) SD (B )
14 14
15 15
RD ( A’ ) SD (A )
23 23
8 4
RTS (RS–232C)
CTS ( B’ )
10
10
RTS (B )
RESISTOR
150 11
11 RTS (A )
CTS ( A’ ) 19
9
RD ( B’ )
17
25
ÎÎ
SD ( B ) 16
17
ÎÎ
RD ( A’ )
18
16
SD ( A ) 3
24 RD (RS–232C)
CTS ( B’ )
12
ÎÎ
12
RTS (B )
ÎÎ
13
13
RTS (A )
CTS ( A ’)
9
5
CTS (RS–232C)
( CTS)
(ON)
(SE)
ISOLATED 25
POWER SE (RS–232C)
115 SUPPLIES
VAC
Figure E-2. RS-422 Isolated Repeater/RS-232 Converter Logic Diagram
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
Appendix E IC655CCM590 Isolated Repeater/Converter E-3
E Obsolete Product
Note
All inputs are biased to the inactive state. Inputs left unconnected will
produce a binary 1 (OFF) state on the corresponding output.
Pin Assignments for the Isolated Repeater/Conver ter

Table E-1. Isolated Repeater/Conver ter Pin Assignments
J1 RS-422 Port (25-pin female connector) J2 RS-422/RS-232 Port (25-pin female connector)
Pin Signal Description Pin Signal Description
1 NC 1 NC
2 NC 2 SD Send Data (RS-232)
3 NC 3 RD Receive Data (RS-232)
4 NC 4 RTS Request to Send (RS-232)
5 NC 5 CTS Clear to Send (RS-232)
6 NC 6 NC
7 0V Ground Connection 7 0V Ground Connection
8 CTS(B’) Clear to Send (Optional Termination) 8 CTS(B’) Clear to Send Optional Termination)
9 CTS(A’) Clear to Send (Optional Termination) 9 CTS(A’) Clear to Send (Optional Termination)
10 CTS(B’) Clear to Send 10 RTS(B) Request to Send
11 CTS(A’) Clear to Send 11 RTS(A) Request to Send
12 RTS(B) Request to Send 12 CTS(B’) Clear to Send
13 RTS(A) Request to Send 13 CTS(A’) Clear to Send
14 RD(B’) Receive Data 14 SD(B) Send Data
15 RD(A’) Receive Data 15 SD(A) Send Data
16 SD(A) Send Data 16 RD(A’) Receive Data
17 SD(B) Send Data 17 RD(B’) Receive Data
18 NC 18 RD(A’) Receive Data (Optional Termination)
19 NC 19 RD(B’) Receive Data (Optional Termination)
20 NC 20 NC
21 NC 21 NC
22 RD(B’) Receive Data 22 SD(B) Send Data (Optional Termination)
23 RD(A’) Receive Data 23 SD(A) Send Data (Optional Termination)
24 SD(A) Send Data 24 NC
NC=No Connection
SD (Send Data) and RD (Receive Data) are the same as TXD and RXD (used in the Series Six PLC).
(A) and (B) are the same as - and + A and B denote outputs, and A’ and B’ denote inputs.
Caution
The signal ground connections (pin 7 on each connector) must be made

between the Isolated Repeater/Converter and the PLC for J1, and the
Isolated Repeater/Converter and the host computer for J2.
Pin 7 of the J1 port is connected to the metal shell of the J1 connector. Pin
7 of the J2 port is connected to the metal shell of the J2 connector. These two
signal ground connections are isolated from each other and from the power
system ground (green wire on the terminal block). To maintain proper
isolation, these signal grounds cannot be tied together.
Obsolete Product E
RS–232 RS–422 ISOLATED REPEATER RS–422 a44783

SHIELDED RS–232 CONVERTER TWISTED SHIELDED
PAIRS (IC655CCM590) PAIRS
Î ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
PIN PIN J2 J1 PIN PIN
150 Ω
TD 3 RD RD (B’) 22 2
**
Î ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
RD 2 SD RD (A’) 23 3
RTS 5 CTS RD ( A’ )15 12 SD ( A )
Î ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
CTS 4 RTS RD ( B’ )14 13 SD ( B )
DCD SD ( A )16 10 RD ( A’ ) SERIES
HOST DTR SD ( B )17 11 RD ( B’ ) 90 PLC
Î ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
COMPUTER CTS ( A’ )11
* 9
6
RT
RTS ( A ) RS–422
CTS ( B’ )10 14 RTS ( B )
Î ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
RTS ( A )13 15 CTS ( A’ ) PORT
RTS ( B )12 8 CTS ( B’ )
Î
GND 7 GND 0V 7 7 0V
1 SHLD
25–PIN 25–PIN 25–PIN 25– PIN 15– PIN 15– PIN
RS–232/ RS–422
RS–422 PORT ** SWITCH IN CENTER POSITION
PORT
115VAC
* TERMINATION RESISTANCE FOR THE RECEIVE DATA (RD) SIGNAL NEEDS TO BE CONNECTED ONLY ON UNITS AT THE END OF THE LINES.
THIS TERMINATION IS MADE ON THE SERIES 90 PLC PRODUCTS BY CONNECTING A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 10 INSIDE THE
15–PIN D–SHELL WITH THE FOLLOWING EXCEPTION. FOR SERIES 90–70 PLCs, CATALOG NUMBERS IC697CPU731 AND IC697CPU771,
THE TERMINATION FOR RD AT THE PLC IS IMPLEMENTED BY A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 11.
Figure E-3. Example RS-422 Isolated Repeater/RS-232 Converter Connection
System Configurations
The figures below show various ways you can connect the Isolated Repeater/Converter
to convert signals, expand the number of drops, and obtain greater distance. Any sys-
tem configuration can be reduced to a minimum number of cables each covering a part
of the overall system configuration. The following examples of system configurations
refer to these cables as Cables A through E which are described in Cable Diagrams later in
this section.
Downstream and Upstream Contention. In this section, simple multidrop configura-
tions are those where a single Isolated Repeater/Converter is used. Complex multidrop
configurations contain one or more multidrop sections where an Isolated Repeater/
Converter is included as one of the drops. In both simple and complex multidrop config-
urations, the transmitters directed downstream from the master can be on at all times.
There will be no contention for the communication line because only one device (the
master) transmits downstream.
In simple multidrop configurations, there will be no contention when transmitting up-
stream as long as devices tri-state their drivers when idle and turn them on only when
they have something to transmit. This is the case for the Series 90-70 and Series 90-30
CMMs.
In complex multidrop configurations, however, special steps must be taken to switch the
upstream transmitters of the Isolated Repeater/Converter.
Switching Upstream Transmitters. For the RS-422 drivers to be active at the J2 port of
the Isolated Repeater/Converter, the RTS input at J1 must be true. The state of the
RS-422 drivers at the J1 port depends on the position of the switch on the unit. When
the switch is in the center position, the J1 transmitters will always be turned on. When
the switch is in the CTS position, (toward the power cable), then either the RS-232 or
RS-422 CTS signal must be true to turn on the J1 drivers.
Note
Note the position of the switch on the Isolated/Repeater Converter in the
system configurations below.
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
E Obsolete Product
Simple Multidrop Configuration

This configuration shows how to connect a single Isolated Repeater/Converter for signal
conversion or greater distance.
RS–232 RS–422 RS–422 a44927

SERIES 90 PLC (CABLE A) (CABLE B) (CABLE D)
OR * BRICK SERIES 90 PLC
HOST J2 J1
SW ON
SERIES 90 PLC
* BRICK IS THE NICKNAME FOR THE

ISOLATED REPEATER/CONVERTER
Figure E-4. Simple System Configuration Using the Isolated Repeater/Conver ter
Complex Multidrop Configuration

This configuration shows how to connect multiple Isolated Repeater/Converters for sig-
nal conversion, greater distance, and more drops.
RS–422 a44928
(CABLE C)
SERIES 90 PLC
SERIES 90 PLC
OR
HOST
SERIES 90 PLC
RS–422 RS–422
(CABLE D) (CABLE D)
*BRICK *
BRICK SERIES 90 PLC
J1 J1
J2 J2
RS–232 SW ON SW ON
(CABLE A)
SERIES 90 PLC
RS–422
(CABLE B)
RS–422 RS–422
(CABLE D) (CABLE D)
*BRICK *BRICK SERIES 90 PLC
J1 J1
J2 J2
SW ON SW ON
SERIES 90 PLC
RS–232
(CABLE E)
*BRICK SERIES 90 PLC
* BRICK IS THE NICKNAME FOR THE
ISOLATED REPEATER/CONVERTER J1
J2
SW CTS
Figure E-5. Complex System Configuration Using the Isolated Repeater/Conver ter
Rules for Using Repeater/Conver ters in Complex Networks

When designing a complex multidrop network including PLCs and RS-422 repeater/con-
verters (bricks), the following rules apply:
Rule 1: When using a brick as a repeater, port J2 should always be directed toward the
host device, and Port J1 should always be directed away from the host device. The
switch located on the side of the brick should always be in the center position (ON). The
only case in which Port J1 is directed toward the host is when the brick is used as a con-
verter (RS-232) at the slave. The switch is in the right position (CTS).
Rule 2: If a Series 90 CMM slave device is located downstream of a brick, set the config-
uration of the CMM serial port to NONE flow control with a 10 ms Modem Turnaround
Delay (Applies to CCM, SNP, and SNP-X protocols only).
Rule 3: Do not place more than 3 bricks in a single communication path between the
host and the slave devices.
Obsolete Product E
Cable Diagrams
The cable diagrams below are referred to as Cables A-E from the system configurations
in the previous figures. These diagrams show the principles for constructing your own
cables and can be modified to fit your specific application.
Î Î ÎÎÎ
a44929
PIN PIN J2 SW ON J1
Î Î ÎÎÎ
TD 2 3 RD
RD 3 2 SD
Î Î ÎÎÎ
RTS 4 4 RTS
SERIES 90 CTS 5 5 CTS
ISOLATED
Î Î ÎÎÎ
CMM DCD 8 REPEATER/
DTR 20 CONVERTER
PORT
Î Î ÎÎÎ
(BRICK)
1 OR 2
25– PIN
FEMALE
Î GND
SHLD
25– PIN
MALE
7
1
7 GND
25– PIN
MALE
Î ÎÎ
25– PIN
FEMALE
Figure E-6. Cable A; RS-232 CMM To Converter
a44930
Î Î ÎÎ Î
PIN PIN J2 SW ON J1
Î Î ÎÎÎ
SD (A) 9 16 RD (A’)
SD (B) 21 17 RD (B’)
RD (A’) 13 15 SD (A)
Î Î ÎÎÎÎ
SERIES 90 RD (B’) 25 14 SD (B)
ISOLATED
TERM 12 19 TERM
CMM *
Î Î
REPEATER/
ÎÎ
TERM 24 18 TERM
CONVERTER
PORT RTS (A) 10 10 RTS (B)
* (BRICK)
Î Î ÎÎ Î
1 OR 2 CTS (A’) 11 12 CTS (B’)
RTS (B) 22 11 RTS (A)
CTS (B’) 23 13 CTS (A’)
Î ÎÎ
GND 7 7 GND
SHLD 1
25– PIN 25– PIN 25– PIN 25– PIN

* TERMINATE CONNECTION: ON THE CMM, INSTALL JUMPER TO CONNECT INTERNAL 120 OHM RESISTOR.
ON THE ISOLATED REPEATER/CONVERTER, INSTALL 150 OHM RESISTOR (SUPPLIED).
Figure E-7. Cable B; RS-422 CMM To Converter
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
E Obsolete Product
SUBSTITUTE APPROPRIATE UP STREAM DEVICE a44931

(WITHIN DOTTED BOX) PER SYSTEM DIAGRAMS. SHIELDED MAKE CONNECTIONS
Î Î Î
TWISTED INSIDE D–CONNECTORS
PIN PAIRS PIN
Î Î Î
SD (A) 9 13 RD (A’)
SD (B) 21 25 RD (B’)
SERIES 90
RD (A’) 13 9 SD (A)
Î
CMM
Î Î
RD (B’) 25 21 SD (B) SERIES 90
CMM
PORT
TERM 12
* * 12 TERM
TERM 24 24 TERM
Î Î
1 OR 2 PORT
RTS (A) 10 10 RTS (A)
CTS (A’) 11 11 CTS (A’) I
RTS (B) 22 22 RTS (B) OR
**
Î Î
CTS (B’) 23 23 CTS (B’) 2
GND 7 7 0V
SHLD 1 1 SHLD
25– PIN 25– PIN 25– PIN 25– PIN
Î Î Î Î
ÎÎ
J2 SW ON J1 PIN PIN J1 SW CTS J2
Î Î Î ÎÎ
ÎÎ
SD (A) 16 15 RD (A’)
SD (B) 17 14 RD (B’)
RD (A’) 15 16 SD (A)
Î Î Î Î
ÎÎÎ
RD (B’) 14 17 SD (B) ISOLATED
ISOLATED RTS (B) 12 22 TERM REPEATER/
REPEATER/ CONVERTER
CTS (B’) 10 *150 OHMS
Î Î Î ÎÎ
CONVERTER RTS (A) 13 23 (BRICK)
TERM
(BRICK) CTS (A’) 11
TERM 22 (USED AS A
Î Î Î ÎÎ
*150 OHMS CONVERTER)
TERM 23
GND 7 7 GND
25– PIN 25– PIN 25– PIN 25– PIN
NOTE
Î ÎÎ
Î
WHEN WIRING RS–422 /485 MULTIDROP CABLES,
REFLECTIONS ON THE TRANSMISSION LINE CAN BE J2 J1
PIN SW ON
Î ÎÎ
REDUCED BY CONFIGURING THE CABLE IN A DAISY
ÎÎ
J
CHAIN FASHION AS SHOWN BELOW. 16 RD (A’)
MASTER CMM SLAVE 1 17 RD (B’) 1
Î Î Î
15 SD (A)
14 SD (B) ISOLATED
19 TERM REPEATER/
Î ÎÎ
*150 OHMS CONVERTER
18 TERM (BRICK)
CPU BUILT–IN PORT CMM SLAVE 2
Î Î
ÎÎ
(USED AS A
REPEATER)
7 GND
25– PIN 25– PIN
ALSO IT IS RECOMMENDED TO MAKE ANY NECESSARY MALE FEMALE
CONNECTIONS INSIDE THE CABLE CONNECTOR TO BE TO OTHER DEVICES
MOUNTED ON THE CMM. IT IS NOT RECOMMENDED TO
(MAXIMUM OF 8 DEVICES ON A MULTIDROP)
USE TERMINAL STRIPS OR OTHER TYPES OF
CONNECTORS ALONG THE LENGTH OF THE TERMINATE THE RD (B’) SIGNAL ONLY AT END
TRANSMISSION LINE. OF MULTIDROP CABLE
* TERMINATE CONNECTION ON FIRST AND LAST DROPS ONLY: ON THE CMM, INSTALL JUMPER TO CONNECT INTERNAL 120 OHM
RESISTOR. ON THE ISOLATED REPEATER/CONVERTER, INSTALL 150 OHM RESISTOR (SUPPLIED)
** ON THE CMM311, ONLY PORT 2 CAN SUPPORT RS–422/RS–485.
Figure E-8. Cable C; RS422 Twisted Pair
Obsolete Product E
SHIELDED MAKE CONNECTIONS a44932
Î ÎÎÎ Î Î Î
TWISTED INSIDE D–CONNECTORS
J2 SW ON J1 PIN PAIRS PIN
SD (A) 16 13 RD (A’)
Î ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎ
SD (B) 17 25 RD (B’)
RD (A’) 15 9 SD (A)
RD (B’) 14 21 SD (B) SERIES 90
Î ÎÎÎ Î Î Î
ISOLATED CTS (A’) 11 10 RTS (A) CMM
REPEATER/ CTS (B’) 10 22 RTS (B)
CONVERTER PORT
Î ÎÎÎ Î Î
ÎÎÎ
(BRICK) TERM 22 I
*150 OHMS OR
* **
TERM 23 24 TERM 2
GND 7 7 GND
1 SHLD
25– PIN 25– PIN 25– PIN 25– PIN
NOTE
WHEN WIRING RS–422 /485 MULTIDROP CABLES,
ÎÎ ÎÎ
REFLECTIONS ON THE TRANSMISSION
PIN J1 SW CTS J2
LINE CAN BE REDUCED BY CONFIGURING THE
CABLE IN A DAISY CHAIN FASHION AS 15
ÎÎ
RD (A’)
SHOWN BELOW. 14 RD (B’)
MASTER CMM SLAVE 1 16 SD (A)
ISOLATED
ÎÎ ÎÎ
17 SD (B)
13 RTS (A) REPEATER/
12 RTS (B) CONVERTER
(BRICK)
CPU BUILT–IN PORT CMM SLAVE 2 *150

22 TERM
ÎÎ
Î Î (USED AS A
ÎÎ Î
OHMS CONVERTER)
23 TERM
7 GND
25– PIN 25– PIN

MALE FEMALE
ALSO IT IS RECOMMENDED TO MAKE ANY
NECESSARY CONNECTIONS INSIDE THE
CABLE CONNECTOR TO BE MOUNTED ON
Î
ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
THE CMM. IT IS NOT RECOMMENDED TO
USE TERMINAL STRIPS OR OTHER TYPES
OF CONNECTORS ALONG THE LENGTH OF PIN J2 SW ON J1
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
THE TRANSMISSION LINE.
16 RD (A’)
17 RD (B’)
15
Î
SD (A)
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
14 SD (B) ISOLATED
11 RTS (A) REPEATER/
CONVERTER
ÎÎ
Î Î
10 RTS (B)
(BRICK)
(USED AS A
ÎÎ
Î Î
19 TERM
*150 OHMS
REPEATER)
18 TERM
7 GND
25– PIN 25– PIN

MALE FEMALE
TO OTHER DEVICES
(MAXIMUM OF 8 DEVICES ON A MULTIDROP)
TERMINATE THE RD (B’) SIGNAL ONLY AT END OF MULTIDROP CABLE
* TERMINATE CONNECTION ON FIRST AND LAST DROPS ONLY: ON THE CMM, INSTALL JUMPER TO CONNECT INTERNAL
120 OHM RESISTOR. ON THE ISOLATED REPEATER/CONVERTER, INSTALL 150 OHM RESISTOR (SUPPLIED)
** ON THE CMM311, ONLY PORT 2 CAN SUPPORT RS–422/RS–485.
Figure E-9. Cable D; RS-422 Twisted Pair
ÎÎ
Î Î ÎÎÎ
J1 SW CTS J2 PIN PIN a45239
ÎÎ
Î Î ÎÎÎ
SD 2 3 RD
RD 3 2 SD
Î
ÎÎ Î ÎÎÎ
5 CTS SERIES 90
CTS 5 4 RTS CMM
ISOLATED
GND 7 7 GND
Î
ÎÎ Î ÎÎÎ
REPEATER/ PORT
CONVERTER 1
(BRICK) OR
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
8 DCD 2
20 DTR
Î 25– PIN
FEMALE
25– PIN
MALE
1 SHLD
25– PIN
MALE
Î 25– PIN
FEMALE
Figure E-10. Cable E; RS-232 Converter to CMM
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
Appendix F IC690ACC901 Miniconverter Kit
section level 1
F figure_ap level 1
table_ap level 1
Description of Miniconverter
The Miniconverter Kit (IC690ACC901) consists of an RS-422 (SNP) to RS-232
Miniconverter, a 6 foot (2 meter) serial extension cable, and a 9-pin to 25-pin Converter
Plug assembly. The 15-pin SNP port connector on the Miniconverter plugs directly into
the serial port connector on the Series 90-30 power supply, Series 90-70 CPU or Series
90-20 CPU. The 9-pin RS-232 port connector on the Miniconverter connects to an RS-232
compatible device.
a44985
RS–422 RS–232
PORT PORT
Figure F-1. Series 90 SNP to RS-232 Miniconverter
When used with an IBM PC-AT, or compatible computer, one end of the extension cable
plugs into the Miniconverter’s 9-pin serial port connector, the other end plugs into the
9-pin serial port of the computer. The Converter plug (supplied with kit) is required to
convert the 9-pin serial port connector on the Miniconverter to the 25-pin serial port
connector on the GE Fanuc Workmaster II computer, or an IBM PC-XT or PS/2 Personal
Computer.
The GE Fanuc Workmaster computer requires an additional adapter (not supplied with kit - please
contact your local GE Fanuc PLC distributor) for use with the Miniconverter.
Pin Assignments
The pinouts of the Miniconverter are shown in the following two tables. The first table
shows the pinout for the RS-232 port, the second table shows the RS-422 port.
Pin Assignments, RS-232 Port

Table F-1 is for the RS-232 port. The direction of signal flow is with respect to the
Miniconverter.
GFK-0356P F-1
F
Table F-1. Miniconverter RS-232 Port
Pin Signal Name Direction

2 SD - Send Data Output
3 RD - Receive Data Input
5 GND - Ground n/a
7 CTS - Clear To Send Input
8 RTS - Request To Send Output
The pinouts were chosen to allow direct connection (using a straight through, or 1 to 1 cable
(as provided with kit)) to the IBM PC-AT. Most IBM compatible computers equipped with
an RS-232 port will provide a pinout compatible with the one shown above.
Pin Assignments, RS-422 Port

Table F-2 is the pinout for the Miniconverter’s RS-422 serial port. The direction of signal
flow is also with respect to the Miniconverter.
Table F-2. Miniconverter RS-422 Port
Pin Signal Name Direction

1 SHLD - Shield n/a
5 +5 VDC - Power Input
6 CTS(A’) - Clear To Send Input
7 GND - Ground n/a
8 RTS(B) - Request To Send Output
9 RT - Receive Termination Output
10 SD(A) - Send Data Output
11 SD(B) - Send Data Output
12 RD(A’) - Receive Data Input
13 RD(B’) - Receive Data Input
14 CTS(B’) Clear To Send Input
15 RTS(A) - Request To Send Output
System Configurations
The Miniconverter can be used in a point-to-point configuration as described above, or in a
multidrop configuration with the host device configured as the master and one or more
PLCs configured as slaves.
The multidrop configuration requires a straight through (1 to 1) cable from the
Miniconverter’s RS-422 port to the first slave PLC’s SNP port. Other slaves will require a
daisy chain connection between slaves. A maximum of eight devices can be connected in
an RS-422 multidrop configuration. All of the devices must have a common ground. If
ground isolation is required, you can use the GE Fanuc Isolated Repeater/Converter
(IC655CCM590) in place of the Miniconverter.
F-2
FANUC CNC Controls
F
When using the Miniconverter with a modem connection, it may be necessary to jumper
RTS to CTS (consult the user’s manual for your modem).
Cable Diagrams (Point-To-Point)

When connecting the Miniconverter to IBM PC and compatible computers with
hardware handshaking, the following cable connections should be used.
a44982
PIN PIN
TXD 2 2 RXD
RXD 3 3 TXD
CTS 7 7 RTS
RTS 8 8 CTS
GND 5 5 GND
1 DCD
6 DSR
4 DTR
MINICONVERTER IBM PC–AT
RS–232 PORT 9–PIN
9–PIN CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
Figure F-2. Miniconverter to PC-AT
a44983
PIN PIN
TXD 2 3 RXD
RXD 3 2 TXD
CTS 7 4 RTS
RTS 8 5 CTS
GND 5 7 GND
8 DCD
6 DSR
20 DTR
MINICONVERTER WORKMASTER II,
RS–232 PORT IBM PC–XT, PS/2
9–PIN 25–PIN
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
Figure F-3. Miniconverter to Workmaster II, PC-XT, PS/2
a44984
PIN PIN
TXD 2 3 RXD
RXD 3 2 TXD
CTS 7 4 RTS
RTS 8 5 CTS
GND 5 7 GND
MINICONVERTER WORKMASTER
RS–232 PORT 9–PIN
9–PIN CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
Note: Additional adapter required
Figure F-4. Miniconverter to 9-Pin Workmaster or PC-XT Computer
GFK-0356P Appendix F IC690ACC301 Miniconverter Kit F-3

F
Table F-3. Miniconverter Specifications
Mechanical:
RS-422 15-pin D shell male for direct mounting to Series 90
serial port.
RS-232 9-pin D shell male for connection to RS-232 serial port
of a Workmaster II computer or Personal Computer.
Electrical and General:
Voltage Supply +5 VDC (supplied by PLC power supply)
Typical Current Version A (IC690ACC901A) - 150 mA
Version B (IC690ACC901B) - 100 mA
Operating Temperature 0 to 70_ C (32 to 158_ F)
Baud Rate 38.4K Baud maximum
Conformance EIA-422 (Balanced Line) or EIA-423 (Unbalanced Line)
Ground Isolation Not provided
F-4
FANUC CNC Controls
Appendix IC690ACC903 Port Isolator
The IC690ACC903 RS-485 Port Isolator replaces the IC655CMM590 Isolated Repeater/Converter
(also referred to as the “Brick”). The device features 500 volts of isolation in a compact package
servicing all IC693, IC697, and IC200 PLC product lines. The product connects directly to an RS-
485 serial port or though a short extender cable provided with the device. The extension cable is
intended for use in applications where direct connection to the port is obstructed by surrounding
equipment or when it is not acceptable for the device to protrude from a PLC module. The Port
Isolator can operate in either single- or multi-drop mode, which is selected by a slide switch on the
top of the module.
The Port Isolator provides the following features:
• Four opto-isolated signal channels: SD, RD, RTS, and CTS
• Electrical compatibility with RS-485
• Single- or multi-drop operation
• Input termination consistent with standard for serial channels
• A 5V DC/DC converter for power isolation
• Hot insertion is supported
FRONT VIEW
Multidrop
Switch
1.7 in TOP VIEW FRONT VIEW
2.6 in 0.7 in
Figure G-1. RS485 Port Isolator
GFK-0356P G-1
G
Connectors
The Isolator provides two connectors, one 15 pin male D-type (PL1) and one
15 pin female D-type (PL2).
RS-485 Connectors
Pin Pin Name Pin Type Description
PL1 1 SHLD - Chassis Ground
2 NC -
3 NC -
4 NC -
5 5V - +5V power
6 CTS (A') In Clear to send -
7 0V - Signal Ground
8 RTS (B) Out Request to send +
9 NC -
10 SD (A) Out Send data -
11 SD (B) Out Send data +
12 RD (A') In Read data -
13 RD (B') In Read data +
14 CTS (B') In Clear to send +
15 RTS (A) Out Request to send -
Pin Pin Name Pin Type Description

PL2 1 NC -
2 NC -
3 NC -
4 NC -
5 5V - +5V power
6 RTS (A) Out Request to send -
7 0V - Signal Ground
8 CTS (B') In Clear to send +
9 RT - Terminating Resistor*
10 RD (A') In Read data -
11 RD (B') In Read data +
12 SD (A) Out Send data -
13 SD (B) Out Send data +
14 RTS (B) Out Request to send +
15 CTS (A') In Clear to send -
* Use the terminating resistor if the Port Isolator is used in port-to-port mode or at the end of a multi-drop
configuration. To terminate the RD balanced line, place a jumper wire from pin 9 to pin 10.
* A denotes – and B denotes +. A and B denote outputs and A' and B' denote inputs.
G-2
FANUC CNC Controls
G
Logic Diagram
Optical Isola tion
15-pin male D-connector 15-pin female D-connector

PL1 PL2
11 11
SD(B) RD(B')
SD(A) 10 10 RD(A')
9
121 ohms RT
RD(B') 13 13 SD(B)
RD(A') 12 12 SD(A)
Output Enable
Always on
(single port mode)
+5V
Multidrop
RTS Driven
Switch
(multidrop mode)
Output Enable
CTS(B') 14 14 RTS(B)
CTS(A') 6 6 RTS(A)
RTS(B) 8 8 CTS(B')
RTS(A) 15 15 CTS(A')
+5Vdc DC/DC +5Vdc

Converter
GND GND
Ground 1 Ground 2
Figure G-2. IC690ACC903 Block Diagram
GFK-0356P Appendix G IC690ACC903 Port Isolator G-3

G
Installation
The Isolator is packaged in a contoured plastic enclosure designed for either direct attachment to a
serial port or through a 12” extender cable for panel mounted applications. Two M3 thumbscrews
secure the device to its mating connector. The device can be easily inserted into an existing
communication channel with no additional hardware. In Figure 2, the Isolator is shown connected
directly to a CPU module. Alternatively, the Isolator can be mounted separately from the PLC
system using the extender cable provided. For mounting separately to a panel, you will need to
provide two #6-32 (4 mm)mounting screws (Figure 3).
When installing the Isolator, tighten the connector screws and panel mounting screws (if used) to
the following torque values:
Screws Type Torque
Connector Thumbscrews (supplied with M3 8 in./lbs. (0.9 Newton-meter)
Isolator)
Panel Mounting Screws (user-supplied) #6/32 (4 mm) 12 in./lbs. (1.4 Newton-meters)
PLC 1 PS CPU
RS-485 Port
Isolator
4000 ft
SNP
Cable
PLC 2 PS CPU
Figure G-3. RS-485 Port Isolator in PLC Network

#6-32 (4 mm) screw
Multidrop Switch
TOP
VIEW
#6-32 (4 mm) screw
Figure G-4. Mounting Port Isolator to Panel
G-4
FANUC CNC Controls
G
The RS485 Port Isolator supports both port-to-port and multi-drop configurations (Figure 4). For
installation information, refer to section 3 of the Serial Communications User's Manual (GFK-
0582). One configuration not covered in the User's Manual is the case where the Isolator is
powered by a source other than the host port. This configuration is used to prevent an interrupt in
communications if the host system requires a power cycle. It also prevents power loss to equipment
using the port for power. For this, you will need to build a custom cable as shown in Figure 5.
Terminate at first
and last drop only Slave Device
Master PLC
Make connectons 15 pin port
Twisted Pairs
RT 9 inside D connectors 9 RT
15 pin Female D-connector
SD(B) 13 11 RD(B')
15 pin Male D-connector
SD(A) 12 10 RD(A')
RD(B') 11 13 SD(B)
Isolator
RD(A') 10 12 SD(A)
RTS(B) 14 8 CTS(B')
RTS(A) 6 15 CTS(A')
CTS(B') 8 14 RTS(B)
CTS(A') 15 6 RTS(A)
1 SHLD
+5V 5 5 +5V
GND 7 7 GND
Slave Device
15 pin port
9 RT
11 RD(B')
10 RD(A')
13 SD(B)
12 SD(A)
8 CTS(B')
15 CTS(A')
14 RTS(B)
6 RTS(A)
1 SHLD
5 +5V
7 GND
Slave Device
25 pin port
24 RT
25 RD(B')
13 RD(A')
21 SD(B)
9 SD(A)
23 CTS(B')
11 CTS(A')
22 RTS(B)
10 RTS(A)
7 GND
1 SHLD
To Other Slave Devices

(Maximum of 8 devices on a multidrop)
Figure G-5. Multidrop Configuration Connecting Devices with 15-Pin Ports and 25-Pin Ports

G-6
G
Terminate at first Terminate at first

and last drops only and last ports only
Master PLC Make connections Make connections

Slave Device
inside D-connector inside D-connector
RT 9 Twisted Pair
RT 9 9 RT
Twisted Pair
SD(B) 13 13 RD(B') SD(B) 13 11 RD(B')
SD(A) 12 12 RD(A') SD(A) 12 10 RD(A')
RD(B') 11 11 SD(B) RD(B') 11 13 SD(B)
RD(A') 10 10 SD(A) RD(A') 10 12 SD(A)
RTS(B) 14 14 CTS(B') RTS(B) 14 8 CTS(B')
RTS(A) 6 6 CTS(A') RTS(A) 6 15 CTS(A')
CTS(B') 8 8 RTS(B) CTS(B') 8 14 RTS(B)
Isolator
CTS(A') 15 15 RTS(A) CTS(A') 15 6 RTS(A)
+5V 5 5 +5V +5V 5 5 +5V
15 pin Male D-connector

GND 7 7 GND GND 7 7 GND
15 pin Female D-connector

SHLD 1 1 SHLD 1 SHLD
+5VDC To device
requiring
Ground external
RT 9 power 9 RT
RD(B') 11 11 RD(B')
RD(A') 10 Note: Do not daisy chain +5VDC pins.
10 RD(A')
SD(B) 13 13 SD(B)
SD(A) 12 12 SD(A)
CTS(B') 8 8 CTS(B')
Series 90-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual – October 1999

CTS(A') 15 15 CTS(A')
RTS(B) 14 14 RTS(B)
RTS(A) 6 6 RTS(A)
Figure G-6. Cable for Supplying External Power Through the Port Isolator
+5V 5 5 +5V
GND 7 7 GND
SHLD 1 1 SHLD
FANUC CNC Controls

Slave Device Slave Device
To Other Slave Devices To Other Slave Devices

(Maximum of 8 devices on a multidrop) (Maximum of 8 devices on a multidrop)
GFK-0356P
G
Specifications
Mechanical
RS-485 15-pin D shell male for direct mounting to serial port on the programmable
controller
15-pin D shell female for communication cable
Installation Hardware Two M3 thread connector thumbscrews. Recommended torque: 8 in./lbs. (0.9
Newton-meter). These are supplied with Isolator.
Two user supplied #6/32 (4mm) thread panel mounting screws. Recommended
torque: 12 in./lbs. (1.4 Newton-meter)
Electrical
Voltage Supply +5VDC (supplied by port)
Typical Current 25 mA
100 mA available for external equipment
Ground Isolation 500 Volts
Conformance EIA-422/485 Balanced Line
Operating 0° - 60°C (32° - 140° F)
Temperature
Baud Rate Those supported by PLC
Note: This appendix is based upon Data Sheet GFK-1663.

Appendix Series 90-30 Heat Dissipation
Overview
Most PLCs are mounted in an enclosure. The enclosure should be capable of properly dissipating
the heat produced by all of the devices mounted inside it. This appendix describes how to calculate
heat dissipation for a Series 90-30 PLC. The strategy is to calculate a heat dissipation value, in
Watts, for each individual module in the PLC. Then these individual values will be added together
to obtain a total heat dissipation figure for the PLC. When making your calculations, don’t forget
the following:
• To convert percent to a decimal, move the decimal two places to the left. For example, 40%
would be expressed as 0.40, and 100% would be 1.00.
• To convert milliamps (mA) to Amperes (A or Amps), move the decimal three places to the
left. For example, 10mA would convert to .010A, and 130mA would convert to 0.130A.
Information Required
• In addition to the information in this manual, you will need GFK-0898, Series 90-30 I/O
Module Specifications Manual.
• You will need operating current values for the discrete output devices connected to the
PLC’s discrete output modules. These include control relays, motor starters, solenoids, pilot
lights, etc. Each device manufacturer publishes these values. If an exact value is not
available for a device, you can make a close estimate by obtaining the value for a similar
device from a catalog. These values are also needed for selecting Output modules during the
design process in order to ensure that the modules’ maximum ratings are not exceeded.
Step 1: Basic Method to Calculate Module Dissipation

Note that this step does not apply to Power Supply Modules, which are covered in Step 2. The
values needed for this calculation are found in the “Load Requirements” table in Chapter 12. We
will use the basic electrical power formula in these calculations
Power (in Watts) = Voltage (in Volts) x Current (in Amps).
We will assume that all input power to these modules is eventually dissipated as heat. The
procedure is:
FANUC CNC Controls

GFK-0356P H-1
H
• Look up the module in the “Load Requirements” table (Chapter 12) and obtain the current
values for each of the three power supply voltages listed. The voltage is printed at the head
of each column. All modules use the 5VDC supply, and a relatively few modules also use
one or both of the two 24VDC supplies.
• For a given module, calculate the power dissipation for each column in the table that contains
a current value by multiplying the current value (in Amps) times the voltage for that column.
For modules using more than one voltage, add the calculated power values to arrive at the
total for the module.
Example 1:
The “Load Requirements” table shows that the IC693CPU352 module draws:
• 910 mA from the +5VDC supply.
• No current from either of the two 12VDC supplies
To calculate power dissipation, multiply 0.910 Amps times 5 Volts. The answer is:
4.55 Watts (of heat dissipated by this module)
Example 2:
The “Load Requirements” table shows that the IC693MDL241 module draws:
• 80 mA from the +5VDC supply
• 125 mA from the +24VDC Isolated supply
To calculate power dissipation from the +5VDC supply:
Multiply 0.08 Amps times 5 Volts to arrive at a value of 0.40 Watts.

To calculate power dissipation from the +24VDC supply:
Multiply 0.125 Amps times 24 Volts to arrive at a value of 3.0 Watts.

Adding the two together, we find the total heat dissipated by this module is 3.4 Watts.
Step 2: Calculation for PLC Power Supplies

A basic rule for Series 90 power supplies is that they are 66% efficient. Another way of stating this
is that the power supply dissipates 1 Watt of power in the form of heat for every 2 Watts of power
it delivers to the PLC. Therefore, you can calculate the total power requirement for all of the
modules in the rack served by a particular power supply using the method in Step 1 above, then
divide that figure by 2 to arrive at the power supply dissipation value. You cannot simply use the
rating of the power supply (such as 30 Watts) for this calculation because the application may not
H-2 Series 90-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual – October 1999 GFK-0356P
H
require the full capacity of the power supply. If you are using the +24VDC output on the power
supply’s terminal strip, you should calculate the power drawn, divide the value by 2, and add it to
the total for the power supply. Since each Series 90-30 rack has its own power supply, each rack
should be calculated on an individual basis.
Step 3: Output Calculations for Discrete Output Modules

Discrete solid state Output modules require two calculations, one for the module’s signal-level
circuits, which was already done in Step 1, and one for the output circuits. (This output circuit
calculation is not required for the Relay Output modules.) Since the solid state output switching
devices in these modules will drop a measurable amount of voltage, their power dissipation can be
calculated. Note that the power dissipated by the output circuits comes from a separate power
source, so it is not included in the figure used to calculate PLC power supply dissipation in Step 2.
To calculate output circuit power dissipation:

• In the Series 90-30 I/O Module Specifications Manual, GFK-0898, find the value for the
Output Voltage Drop for your particular module.
• Obtain the required current value for each device (such as a relay, pilot light, solenoid, etc.)
connected to an output point on the module and estimate its percent of “on-time.” To obtain
the current values, check the device manufacturer’s documentation or an electronics catalog.
The percent of on-time can be estimated by someone familiar with how the equipment
operates or will operate.
• Multiply the Output Voltage Drop times the current value times the estimated percent of on-
time to arrive at average power dissipation for that output.
• Repeat for all outputs on the module. To save time, you could determine if several outputs
were similar in current draw and on-time so that you would only have to make their
calculation once.
• Repeat these calculations for all Discrete Output modules in the rack.
Discrete Output Module Example:

The Series 90-30 PLC I/O Module Specifications Manual, GFK-0898, lists the following for the
IC693MDL340 16-Point Discrete 120VAC Output Module:
Output Voltage Drop: 1.5 Volts maximum
Use that value for all of the calculations for this module.
In this example, two of the Output module’s output points drive solenoids that control the advance
and retract travel of a hydraulic cylinder. The solenoid manufacturer’s data sheet shows that each
solenoid draws 1.0 Amp. The cylinder advances and retracts once every 60 seconds that the
machine is cycling. It takes 6 seconds to advance and 6 seconds to retract.
Since the cylinder takes equal time to advance and retract, both solenoids are on for equal lengths
of time: 6 seconds out of every 60 seconds, which is 10% of the time. Therefore, since both
FANUC CNC Controls

GFK-0356P Appendix H Series 90-30 Heat Dissipation H-3
H
solenoids have equal current draws and on-times, our single calculation can be applied to both
outputs.
Use the formula Average Power Dissipation = Voltage Drop x Current Draw (in Amps) x Percent
(expressed as a decimal) of on-time:
1.5 x 1.0 x 0.10 = 0.15 Watts per solenoid
Then multiply this result by 2 since we have two identical solenoids:
0.15 Watts x 2 Solenoids = 0.30 Watts total for the two solenoids
Also in this example, the other 14 output points on this 16-point module operate pilot lights on an
operator’s panel. Each pilot light requires .05 Amps of current. Seven of the pilot lights are on
100% of the time and seven are on an estimated 40%.
For the 7 lights that are on 100% of the time:

1.5 x .05 x 1.00 = 0.075 Watts per light
Then multiply this value by 7:
0.075 Watts x 7 lights = 0.525Watts total dissipation for the first 7 lights
For the 7 lights that are on 40% of the time:

1.5 x .05 x 0.40 = .03 Watts per light
Then multiply this value by 7:
.03 Watts x 7 lights = 0.21 Watts total dissipation for the other 7 lights
Adding up the individual calculations, we get:

0.30 + 0.525 + 0.21 = 1.035 Watts for the module’s total output calculation
Step 4: Input Calculations for Discrete Input Modules

A Discrete Input Module requires two calculations, one for the module’s signal-level circuits,
which was already done in Step 1, and one for the input circuits. Note that the power dissipated by
the input circuits comes from a separate power source, so are not included in the figure used to
calculate PLC power supply dissipation in Step 2. We will assume that all input circuit power
delivered to these modules is eventually dissipated as heat. The procedure is:
• Find the value for the Input Current in the “Specifications” table for your input module in the
Series 90-30 I/O Module Specifications Manual, GFK-0898.
H
• Multiply the input voltage times the current value times the estimated percent of on-time to
arrive at average power dissipation for that input.
• Repeat for all inputs on the module. To save time, you could determine if several inputs
were similar in current draw and on-time so that you would only have to make their
calculation once.
• Repeat these calculations for all Discrete Input modules in the rack.
Discrete Input Module Example:

The “Specifications” table for the IC693MDL240 16-Point Discrete 120 VAC Input Module in the
Series 90-30 PLC I/O Module Specification Manual, GFK-0898, gives the following information:
Input Current: 12 mA (typical) at rated voltage
Use this value for all of the input calculations for this module.
In this example, eight of the Input Module’s points are used for switches that, for normal operation,
stay on (closed) 100% of the time. These include the Emergency Stop, Over Temperature, Lube
Pressure OK, and similar switches.
Use the formula Average Power Dissipation = Input Voltage x Input Current (in Amps) x Percent
(expressed as a decimal) of on-time:
120 x .012 x 1.0 = 1.44 Watts per input
Then multiply this result by 8:
1.44 Watts x 8 inputs = 11.52 Watts total for the 8 inputs
Also in this example, two input points on this 16-point module are for the Control On and Pump
Start pushbuttons. Under normal conditions, these pushbuttons are only pressed once per day for
about one second – just long enough to start up the control and pump. Therefore, their effect on
our power calculation is negligible and we will assume a power dissipation of zero for them:
0.0 Watts total for 2 inputs
For the remaining six inputs of our sixteen point module, it is estimated that they will be on for an
average of 20% of the time. So the following calculation is made for these six inputs:
Using the formula of Average Power Dissipation = Input Voltage x Input Current (in Amps) x
Percent (expressed as a decimal) of on-time:
120 x .012 x 0.20 = 0.288 Watts per input
Then multiply this result by 6:

0.288 Watts x 6 inputs = 1.728 Watts total for the 6 inputs
FANUC CNC Controls

GFK-0356P Appendix H Series 90-30 Heat Dissipation H-5
H
Finally, adding up the individual calculations, we get:

11.52 + 0.0 + 1.728 = 13.248 Watts for the module’s total input calculation
Step 5: Final Calculation

Once the individual power dissipations have been calculated, add them all to obtain total PLC heat
dissipation. Note that the PLC baseplate, analog input modules, and analog output modules have
been ignored in this procedure because their power dissipation values are negligible when
compared with the total. Also, since each Series 90-30 rack has its own power supply, each rack
should be calculated on an individual basis. The following table summarizes the final calculation:
Series 90-30 Rack Heat Dissipation Calculation Summary

Step Description Value (Watts)
1 Calculate total of dissipation values for all modules in the rack
2 Divide value obtained in Step 1 by 2 to obtain Power Supply value
3 Calculate total of all Output modules’ output dissipation values
4 Calculate total of all Input modules’ input dissipation values
5 Add the above four values to obtain the total dissipation of the rack
Other Information Related to Enclosure Sizing

The “Baseplates” chapter of this manual contains rack dimensions and minimum ventilation
clearance distances required around the racks. The “Cables” chapter contains clearance dimensions
for cables that mount on the front of modules.
Appendix Catalog Number to Publication Cross-Reference
Purpose
Manuals are not shipped with many of the Series 90-30 products; they must be
ordered separately. This appendix can help you identify the correct documentation to
order and use. Products are arranged in this appendix by categories such as Analog
I/O Modules, Baseplates, Communications Modules, etc. The category headings are
listed in alphabetical order. Modules that share common documentation are grouped
under a generic catalog number, such as IC693ALGxxx for the Analog I/O modules.
Note that you may not need every publication listed for a particular product. Your
need for some of the publications depends on your application. For example, if you
intend to use Logicmaster Programming software to configure and program your
PLC, you will not need the Control, VersaPro, or Hand Held Programmer manuals.
Or, if you are going to program your Programmable Coprocessor module using the C
computer language, you will not need the MegaBasic language manual. For your
convenience, a list of publication titles is included at the end of this data sheet.
Abbreviations Used
• HHP stands for Hand-Held Programmer.
• LM90 stands for Logicmaster, a DOS-based programming and configuration
software.
• Control stands for GE Fanuc Control, a Windows-based programming and
configuration software.
• SFC stands for Sequential Function Chart.
General System Information

90-30 PLC System Installation: GFK-0356
Installation for Conformance to Standards: GFK-1179
Configuration Options:
• Configuration (HHP): GFK-0402
• Configuration (LM90): GFK-0466
• Configuration (Control): GFK-1295
• Configuration (VersaPro): GFK-1670
GFK-0356P FANUC CNC Controls I-1

I
Analog I/O Modules

Task: Publication Number (revision letters not
Catalog Number
included)
All Analog Input, Installation, Configuration, Specifications: GFK-0898
Output, and
Combination. Modules
(IC693ALGxxx)
Baseplates
All Series 90-30 Installation: GFK-0356
Baseplates Configuration Options:
(IC693CHSxxx)
Communications Modules
IC693BEM320 Installation, Configuration, User’s Guide: GFK-0631
I/O Link Interface
Module (slave)
I/O Link Master
Module
FIP Remote I/O Related Publications:
Scanner Module
• Interfacing to Series 90-70: GFK-1038
• Hand Held Programmer User’s Manual: GFK-0402
• FIP Bus Controller User’s Manual: GFK-1213
FIP Bus Controller Related Publications:
Module
• Hand Held Programmer User’s Manual: GFK-0402
• FIP Bus Interface Unit: GFK-1175
• FIP Remote I/O Scanner: GFK-1037
I-2 Series 90-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual – October 1999 GFK-0356P
I
IC693CMM311 Installation, Configuration, User’s Guide: GFK-0582

Comm. Coprocessor
Module
IC693CMM321 Installation, Configuration, User’s Guide: GFK-1541
Ethernet Module Programming Options:
• Ethernet Station Manager: GFK-1186
• Host Communications Toolkit, C/C++: GFK-0870
• Host Communications Drivers, MS Windows: GFK-
1026
• Host Communications Toolkit, Visual Basic: GFK-
1063
CPU Modules, CPU311-CPU341

Series 90-30 CPUs Installation: GFK-0356
(IC693CPU311 - Configuration and Programming Options:
IC693CPU341)
• Configuration and Programming (HHP): GFK-0402
• Programming (LM90): GFK-0467
• SFC Programming (LM90): GFK-0854
• Configuration / Programming (VersaPro): GFK-1670
CPU Modules, CPU350 - CPU364

IC693CPU350 Installation: GFK-0356
CPU Module Configuration and Programming Options:
• Configuration / Programming (HHP): GFK-0402
• Programming (Control): GFK-1411
• SFC Programming (Control): GFK-1385
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
Appendix I Catalog Number to Publication Cross-Reference I-3
I
IC693CPU351 • Installation: GFK-0356

IC693CPU352 • Serial Communications: GFK-0582
CPU Modules • Configuration and Programming Options:
IC693CPU360 Installation: GFK-0356

CPU modules Configuration and Programming Choices:
IC693CPU363 Installation: GFK-0356P or later
CPU Module Configuration and Programming Options:
• Configuration and Programming (HHP): GFK-0402
• Serial Communications: GFK-0582
I
IC693CPU364 Installation, Configuration, User’s Guide: GFK-1541

CPU Module Specifications: GFK-0356P or later
Configuration and Programming Options:
• Ethernet Station Manager: GFK-1186
• Host Communications Toolkit, C/C++: GFK-0870
• Host Communications Drivers, MS Windows:
GFK-1026
• Host Communications Toolkit, Visual Basic:
GFK-1063
Digital Valve Driver Module

IC693DVM300 Installation and Specifications: GFK-0356P or later
Configuration Options:
• This module does not connect to PLC backplane;
therefore, it mounts in an unconfigured slot.
Discrete I/O Modules

All Discrete Input, Installation and Specifications: GFK-0898
Output, and Configuration Options:
Combination Modules • Configuration (HHP): GFK-0402
(IC693MDLxxx) • Configuration (LM90): GFK-0466
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
I
Genius Modules
IC693BEM331 Installation, Configuration, User Guide: GFK-1034
Genius Bus Controller Related Publication:
• Genius I/O System User’s Manual: GEK-90486-1
• Genius Blocks User’s Manual: GEK-90486-2
IC693CMM301 Installation, Configuration, User Guide: GFK-0412
Genius Comm. Related Publication:
Module
Genius I/O System User’s Manual: GEK-90486-1
IC693CMM302 Installation, Configuration, User Guide: GFK-0695
Genius Comm. Related Publication:
Module + (Enhanced) Genius I/O System User’s Manual: GEK-90486-1
Motion Modules
IC693APU300 Installation, Configuration, User Guide: GFK-0293
High Speed Counter
IC693APU301 Installation, Configuration, User’s Guide:

IC693APU302 • Standard Mode: GFK-0840
Axis Positioning • Follower Mode: GFK-0781
Modules • Motion Programming: GFK-0664
IC693DSM302 Installation, Configuration, User’s Guide (standard and
follower modes): GFK-1464
Digital Servo Module
Motion Programming: GFK-0664
IC693DSM314 Installation, Configuration, Local Logic, Motion
Digital Servo Module Programming User’s Guide (standard and follower modes):
(Available late 1999) (Manual will not be available until late 1999) GFK-1742
I
Other Option Modules

IC693ADC311 Installation, Configuration, User’s Guide: GFK-0499
Alphanumeric Programming Options:
Coprocessor Module
• Programming, PCOP Development Software:
GFK-0487
• ADS Display System Reference Manual: GFK-0641
IC693TCM302 Installation, Configuration, User’s Guide: GFK-1466
Temperature Control
Module
IC693APU305 Installation, Configuration, User’s Guide: GFK-1028
I/O Processor Module
IC693PCM300 Installation, Configuration, User’s Guide: GFK-0255

IC693PCM301
Programming Options:
IC693PCM311
• Programming, PCOP Development Software: GFK-
Programmable
0487
Coprocessor Modules
• Programming, MegaBasic: GFK-0256
• Programming, C Language: GFK-0771
• PCM C Function Library Reference: GFK-0772
• PCM Quick Reference Guide: GFK-0260
• PCOP Quick Reference Guide: GFK-0657
• TERMF Quick Reference Guide: GFK-0655
IC693PTM100 Installation, configuration, user’s guide: GFK-1734
Power Transducer (Not available until late 1999.)
Module (PTM)
(Not available until
late 1999.)
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
I
Power Supply Modules

All Series 90-30 Installation: GFK-0356 (Version P required for
Power Supply preliminary information on IC693PWR332.)
Modules Configuration Options:
(IC693PWRxxx)
Programming Device
IC693PRG300 User’s Manual (using the HHP for configuration and
programming): GFK-0402
Hand-Held
Programmer
State Logic Products

IC693CSE311 Installation, Configuration, User’s Guide: GFK-1056
IC693CSE313 Programming Options:
IC693CSE323
• ECLiPS English Control Language: GFK-0732
IC693CSE331
• OnTOP User’s Guide: GFK-0747
IC693CSE340
• OnTOP Troubleshooting Manual: GFK-0750
State Logic CPUs
AD693SLP300 Installation, Configuration, User’s Guide: GFK-0726
State Logic Processor Software Options:
(SLP) Module
• ECLiPS English Control Language: GFK-0732
• OnTOP Troubleshooting Manual: GFK-0750
AD693CMM301 Installation, Configuration, User’s Information Data Sheet:
State Logic Serial GFK-1529
Communications See also: GFK-1056
(SCM) Module
I
Understanding Publication Revision Letters

When a GE Fanuc publication is revised, a letter is placed at the end of the
publication number. For example, in the publication number GFK-0356N, the
revision letter N at the end indicates the version of the manual. Manuals are revised
when there are changes or additions to the products or product lines covered in the
manual. Since this is a continual process, we decided that, except in a few special
cases, we would not include revision letters in this appendix in order to prevent
confusion. Therefore, when ordering these publications, ask for the latest version.
Note: Under normal circumstances, if a publication number does not have an ending
letter (suffix), such as GFK-1581, it is an indication that the publication has never
been revised.
Other Sources of Information

• GE Fanuc InfoLink PLC CD. This CD contains a collection of GE Fanuc
PLC manuals for Series 90-30, Series 90-70, Genius, VersaMax, etc. There is
also an InfoLink available for GE Fanuc CNC products. Be sure to specify
which one you need when ordering from your PLC distributor.
• GE Fanuc web site. This web site, at http://www.gefanuc.com, contains not
only an on-line version of the InfoLink CD, but also recently revised
publications, product revision histories, the GE Fanuc Automation Solutions
Catalog, and Third-Party product information.
Note: The information in this appendix is based upon Data Sheet GFK-1661.
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls
I
Publication No. Titles of Series 90-30 Publications Cited in this Appendix

GFK-0255 Series 90 Programmable Coprocessor Module and Support Software User’s Manual
GFK-0256 MegaBasic Language Reference and Programmer’s Guide Reference Manual
GFK-0260 Programmable Coprocessor Module Quick Reference Guide
GFK-0293 Series 90-30 PLC High Speed Counter User’s Manual
GFK-0356 Series 90-30 PLC Installation Manual
GFK-0402 Hand-Held Programmer for Series 90-30/20/Micro PLC User’s Manual
GFK-0412 Series 90-30 Genius Communications Module User’s Manual
GFK-0466 Logicmaster 90, Series 90-30/20/Micro Programming Software User’s Manual
GFK-0467 Series 90-30/20/Micro PLC Reference Manual
GFK-0487 Series 90 PCM Development Software (PCOP) User’s Manual
GFK-0499 CIMPLICITY 90-ADS Alphanumeric Display System User’s Manual
GFK-0582 Series 90 PLC Serial Communications Driver User’s Manual
GFK-0631 Series 90-30 I/O Link Slave Interface User’s Manual
GFK-0641 CIMPLICITY 90-ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual
GFK-0655 Series 90 PCM Support Software (TERMF) Quick Reference Guide
GFK-0657 Series 90 PCM Development Software (PCOP) Quick Reference Guide
GFK-0664 Series 90-30 Axis Positioning Module Programmer’s Manual
GFK-0695 Series 90-30 Enhanced Genius Communications Module User’s Manual
GFK-0726 State Logic Processor For Series 90-30 PLC User’s Guide
GFK-0732 ECLiPS English Control Language Prog. System for Series 90-30 PLC User’s Guide
GFK-0750 OnTOP for Series 90-30 Online Troubleshooting and Operator Prog. User’s Manual
GFK-0771 C Programmer’s Toolkit for Series 90 PCMs User’s Manual
GFK-0772 PCM C Function Library Reference Manual
GFK-0781 Motion Mate APM for Series 90-30 PLC Follower Mode User’s Manual
GFK-0823 Series 90-30 I/O Link Master Module User’s Guide
GFK-0840 Power Mate APM for Series 90-30 PLC Standard Mode User’s Manual
GFK-0854 Series 90 Sequential Function Chart Programming Language User’s Manual
GFK-0870 Host Communications Toolkit for C/C++ Applications User’s Manual
GFK-0898 Series 90-30 PLC I/O Module Specifications Manual
GFK-1026 Host Drivers &Comm. Config. Software for Windows Environments User’s Manual
GDK-1028 Series 90-30 I/O Processor Module User’s Manual
GFK-1034 Series 90-30 Genius Bus Controller User’s Manual
GFK-1037 Series 90-30 FIP Remote I/O Scanner User’s Manual
GFK-1038 Series 90-70 FIP Bus Controller’s User’s Manual
GFK-1056 Series 90-30 State Logic Control System User’s Manual
GFK-1063 Host Communications Toolkit for Visual Basic Applications User’s Manual
GFK-1175 Field Control Distributed I/O & Control Sys. FIP Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual
GFK-1179 Installation Requirements for Conformance to Standards
GFK-1186 TCP/IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 PLC Station Manager Manual
GFK-1213 Series 90-30 FIP Bus Controller User’s Manual
GFK-1295 Using GE Fanuc Control
GFK-1385 GE Fanuc Control: Using the Sequential Function Chart Editor
GFK-1411 Series 90-30 System Manual
GFK-1464 Motion Mate DSM 302 for Series 90-30 PLCs User’s Manual
GFK-1466 Temperature Control Module for the Series 90-30 PLC User’s Manual
GFK-1541 TCP/IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 PLC User’s Manual
GFK-1670 VersaPro User’s Guide
GEK-90486-1 Genius I/O System and Communications User’s Manual
GEK-90486-2 Genius I/O Discrete and Analog Blocks User’s Manual
GHIGHIGHI
Appendix J Terminal Block Quick Connect Components

section level 1
J figure_ap level 1
table_ap level 1
This appendix describes the optional terminal block components for Series 90-30 discrete I/O
modules. This system is referred to as the Terminal Block Quick Connect (TBQC) system.
The advantage of this system, is that it allows the listed discrete I/O modules to be quickly
connected to TBQC terminal blocks. In this system, the TBQC terminal block (shown
below) is snapped onto a standard DIN-rail. Then, a factory-made cable is connected
between the terminal block’s connector and the I/O module’s connector. An I/O module
that has a terminal board instead of a connector is converted into a connector type using an
adapter faceplate.
The TBQC system is not recommended for use with Analog modules because it does not
meet the shielding recommendations for Analog module connections. (See the Series 90-30
PLC I/O Module Specifications Manual, GFK-0898, for Analog module wiring information.)
This appendix contains two sections, one for discrete 16-point I/O modules and one for
discrete 32-point I/O modules.
Connector (Male Pins)
a45586A
2 20
1 19
Top View
“Box” Terminals
Front View
Figure J-1. Typical TBQC Terminal Block
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls J-1
J
Terminal Block Quick Connect Components for 16-Point Modules

Installing a 16 point module typically takes 2 1/2 hours to wire from a PLC to a terminal
blocks or strip. With the TBQC, you simply snap the terminal block onto a DIN rail, remove
the I/O module’s terminal assembly, snap in the I/O faceplate, and connect the cable. This
reduces wiring time to about two minutes, thereby reducing wiring costs and errors.
Complete assemblies consist of a terminal block, an I/O Face Plate, and a cable.
Terminal Blocks
Terminal blocks have three rows of terminals, arranged in three levels, as shown in
Figure J-1. These terminal blocks feature an easy to use captive-screw, “rising cage” type
connection system. Catalog numbers for the terminal blocks and the modules they can
be used with are listed below.
Table J-1. TBQC Terminal Block Selection Table
Catalog Use With Module

Number These Modules Description
IC693ACC3291 IC693MDL240 Input, 120 VAC – 16 points
IC693MDL645 Input, 24 VDC Pos./Neg Logic– 16 points
IC693MDL646 Input, 24 VDC Pos./Neg,Logic,FAST – 16 points
IC693ACC330 IC693MDL740 Output, 12/24 VDC Pos Logic, 0.5A – 16 points
IC693MDL742 Output, 12/24 VDC Pos Logic ESCP, 1A– 16 points
IC693ACC331 IC693MDL741 Output, 12/24 VDC Neg Logic, 0.5A– 16 points
IC693ACC332 IC693MDL940 Output, Relay, N.O. – 16 points
IC693ACC333 IC693MDL340 Output, 120 VAC, 0.5A – 16 points
1 This Terminal Block may be used with most I/O modules that have up to 16 I/O points (can
not be used with 32 point modules). Jumpers may have to be added; for details of required
wiring connections, refer to module specifications in GFK-0898.
Cable Current Rating

Each conductor in these 24-conductor cables has a current rating of 1.2 Amps. If using
these cables with a 16-point Output module with a higher output current rating, you
must use the lower value of 1.2 Amps for the maximum load current rating . If you have
field devices that require more than 1.2 Amps, do not use a TBQC assembly – use the
standard Terminal Board that comes with the module instead.
J-2 Series 90-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual – October 1999 GFK-0356P
J
Cable Selection and Cross-Reference

Three cables are available for connecting between the module’s faceplate connector and
the terminal block. The only difference in these cables is their length. These cables have
right-angle connectors on the module end to minimize the space required in front of the
modules. These three cables replace three obsolete cables that had straight connectors.
Use the following table to select the correct cable.
Cable Catalog Description Replaces Obsolete

Number Cable Number
IC693CBL330 CBL Assembly, 24-pin, 90 Deg, Right Side, IC693CBL321
1.0 Meter length
2.0 Meter length
0.5 Meter length
I/O Face Plate for 16-Point Modules

The I/O Face Plate (catalog number IC693ACC334) has a 24-pin connector, which
provides the connection to the applicable terminal block through a 0.5, 1, or 2 meter
cable. This face plate replaces the standard terminal board on the listed modules.
I/O Face Plate Installation
Step 1: Install terminal block assembly on DIN rail

Place the terminal block over the desired location on the DIN rail and snap into place.
Step 2: Remove 20-pin terminal assembly from module
ÎÎ Î
a43061 a43715
ÎÎ ÎÎ
PULL
TAB
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
JACKING
LEVER
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î
Open the plastic terminal board cover. Grasp pull-tab towards you until contacts have
Push up on the jacking lever to release separated from module housing and hook has
disengaged for full removal.
the terminal block.
FANUC CNC Controls

GFK-0356P Appendix J Terminal Block Quick Connect Components J-3
J
Step 3: Snap I/O Face Plate assembly on module

a47118
A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
F F
B1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 B1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Installing the I/O Face Plate Module with I/O Face Plate Installed
Step 4: Connect cable to connector on terminal block

Finally, connect the selected length cable from the connector on the I/O Face Plate to the
connector on the interposing terminal block.
Module Wiring Information
Refer to GFK-0898, Series 90-30 PLC I/O Module Specifications Manual for wiring
connections for each module.
Cable Information
Data sheets for the cables are found in the “Cables” chapter of this manual.
J
Connector Pin Orientation and Connection to Module Terminal

a47119
Module Connector
Terminal # Pin#
A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
F 1 . . . . . . . . B1
B1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2 . . . . . . . . A1
3 . . . . . . . . B2
4 . . . . . . . . A2
5 . . . . . . . . B3
6 . . . . . . . . A3
7 . . . . . . . . B4
8 . . . . . . . . A4
9 . . . . . . . . B5
10 . . . . . . . . A5
. . . . . . . . B6 (N.C.)
Pin B1 . . . . . . . . A6 (N.C.)
Pin A1
. . . . . . . . B7 (N.C.)
. . . . . . . . A7 (N.C.)
11 . . . . . . . . B8
12 . . . . . . . . A8
13 . . . . . . . . B9
14 . . . . . . . . A9
15 . . . . . . . . B10
16 . . . . . . . . A10
Pin A12 17 . . . . . . . . B11
Pin B12
18 . . . . . . . . A11
19 . . . . . . . . B12
20 . . . . . . . . A12
Connector Pin Orientation
Figure J-2. TBQC Faceplate
Terminal Block Information

Terminal block data sheets are found on the next several pages.
FANUC CNC Controls

J
IC693ACC329 TBQC Terminal Block
Use with the following 16-point I/O modules:

IC693MDL240
IC693MDL645
IC693MDL646
a45586
2 20
1 19
Maximum wire size

per terminal: one
#14 AWG (2.10 mm2)
Width 4.44” (112mm)
Height (all blocks) 2.25” (57mm)

Depth (all blocks) 1.7716” (45mm)
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
TERMINAL
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19
BLOCK
C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C (See Note 1
Below)
Figure J-3. IC693ACC329 TBQC Terminal Block
Note
The common row terminals (labeled with the letter C) are provided for wiring
convenience. Their use is optional. They are electrically isolated from the
numbered terminals. You may use them as is, or jumper them to a numbered
terminal. Refer to GFK-0898, Series 90-30 PLC I/O Module Specifications Manual for
wiring diagrams of the modules.
Mounting
These terminal blocks are mounted on a standard, user-supplied 35 mm DIN-rail.
J
Use with the following 16-point I/O modules:

IC693MDL740
IC693MDL742
a45587
2 20
1 19
Maximum wire size

per terminal: one
#14 AWG (2.10 mm2)
Width 4.64” (117.86mm)

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 TERMINAL
BLOCK
C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C
Note
Refer to GFK-0898, Series 90-30 PLC I/O Module Specifications Manual for required
wiring connections.
Mounting
FANUC CNC Controls

J
Use with the following 16-point I/O module:

IC693MDL741
a45588
2 20
1 19
Maximum wire size

per terminal: one
#14 AWG (2.10 mm2)
Width 4.64” (117.86mm)

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 TERMINAL
BLOCK
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
Note
Refer to GFK-0898, Series 90-30 PLC I/O Module Specifications Manual for required
wiring connections.
Mounting
J

IC693MDL940
a45589
2 20
1 19
Maximum wire size

per terminal: one
#14 AWG (2.10 mm2)
Width 5.04” (128mm)

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 TERMINAL
BLOCK
C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C (See Note 1
Below)
Note
Mounting
FANUC CNC Controls

J

IC693MDL340
a45590
2 20
1 19
Maximum wire size

per terminal: one
#14 AWG (2.10 mm2)
Width 4.64” (117.86mm)

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
TERMINAL
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19
BLOCK
N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N (See Note 1
Below)
Note
The neutral row terminals (labeled with the letter N) are provided for wiring
Mounting
J
Terminal Block Quick Connect Components for 32-Point Modules

The 32-point modules do not require a new faceplate since they are equipped with a
dual-connector faceplate as a standard feature. Since each module has two 24-pin
connectors, they each require two cables and two terminal blocks. Also, since the
modules’ two connectors are oriented differently (see example in figure below), the two
cables are different. One is called a “right side” cable and the other, a “left side” cable.
Note: These terminal blocks will not work with the 32-point I/O modules that have
50-pin connectors.
A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
F
B1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
C1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
INPUT
5/12 VDC
POS/NEG LOGIC
3.0 mA/Pt at 5VDC
8.5 mA/Pt at 12VDC
CD AB
Pin B12 Pin B1
“Left Side” “Right Side”

Connector Connector
Pin B1 Pin B12
Figure J-8. IC693MDL654 32-Point Module
Terminal Block
Terminal blocks have three rows of terminals, arranged in three levels, as shown in
Figure J-1. The terminals feature an easy to use captive-screw, “rising cage” type
connection system. Catalog numbers for the terminal block and the modules it can be
used with are listed below.
Catalog Use With Module

Number These Modules Description
IC693ACC337 IC693MDL654 Input, 5/12 VDC (TTL) Pos/Neg Logic– 32 points
IC693MDL655 Input, 24 VDC Pos/Neg Logic – 32 points
IC693MDL752 Output, 5/24 VDC Neg Logic–32 points
IC693MDL753 Output, 12/24 VDC Pos Logic, 0.5A – 32 points
FANUC CNC Controls

J
Cable Selection and Cross-Reference

Six cables are available for connecting between the modules’ faceplate connectors and
the terminal blocks. These cables have right-angle connectors on the module end to
minimize the space required in front of the modules. These six cables replace three
obsolete cables that had straight connectors. Since the modules’ two connectors are
oriented differently (see previous figure), a right-side and left-side cable is required. Use
the following table to select the correct cables. The table also lists cable kits that consist
of a pair of same length, right side and left side cables.
Cable Current Rating

Each conductor in these 24-conductor cables has a current rating of 1.2 Amps, which is
more than adequate to handle the current requirement of any of the 32-point I/O
modules listed in the previous table.
Cable Catalog Cable Description Replaces Obsolete

Number and Length Cable Number
Cable Kits
Cable Data
Data sheets for these cables are found in the “Cables” chapter of this manual.
Terminal Block Data

Data for the terminal block is found on the next page.
J
Use with the following 32-point I/O modules (2 required per module):
IC693MDL654
IC693MDL655
IC693MDL752
IC693MDL753
2 24
1 23
Maximum wire size

per terminal: one
#14 AWG (2.10 mm2)
Width 4.45” (112mm)

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12

24-Pin
Connector
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
TERMINAL
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23
BLOCK
C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C (See Note 1
Below)
Note
Mounting
FANUC CNC Controls

Appendix K SNP Multidrop
section level 1
K figure_ap level 1
table_ap level 1
SNP Multidrop Overview

As used in this appendix, the term “SNP Multidrop” refers to a system that allows a
programmer (called the “master or host”), such as a personal computer running GE
Fanuc programming software, to connect to two or more PLCs or intelligent Option
modules (called “slaves“) via a single connection. In this arrangement the programmer
is able to program, configure, test, troubleshoot, etc., any one of the multidropped
devices from one connection point.
Physically, a typical SNP multidrop system consists of a programmer and two or more
PLCs interconnected by a “daisy-chain“ type cabling arrangement, as shown in the
figure below. It is necessary to assign each slave device (PLC or Option module) a
unique SNP (Series Ninety Protocol) address, using programming software such as
Logicmaster or VersaPro. The SNP address is used by the programmer to designate
which PLC it will communicate with. The SNP protocol uses the RS-422
communications standard. Note that the PLCs or Option modules do not communicate
with each other over the multidrop system. They only communicate with the
programmer. And only one device, the one designated by the programmer, can
communicate with the programmer at a time.
Multidrop Connector Multidrop Connector Multidrop Connector
15-pin Male 15-pin Male 15-pin Male
Series 90-30 PLC (slave) Series 90-30 PLC (slave) Series 90-30 PLC (slave)
Multidrop
Connector
15–pin Fe-
male
Multidrop Cable Multidrop Cable
IC690ACC901
Miniconverter
Serial Cable Programmer (master)
Figure K-1. Series 90-30 Multidrop Example
GFK-0356P K-1
K
Multidrop Cables
There are two sources of multidrop cables:
D GE Fanuc cable, catalog number IC690CBL714A – This pre-made cable can be
purchased for applications where the PLCs are mounted in the same cabinet, such as
in the case of redundant systems. The length of this cable is 40 inches (1 meter).
D Custom built – For PLCs that are more than 40 inches (1 meter) apart, it is necessary
to build a custom length cable. The specifications are provide below.
Limitations
D The maximum cable length between a master (programmer) and slave device (PLC
or Option module) in a multidrop system is 4,000 feet (1,219 meters).
D The maximum number of slave devices is limited to eight.
Cable and Connector Specifications

The cable assembly presents one of the most common causes of communication failure.
For best performance, construct the cable assemblies using the recommended connector
parts and specifications.
Table K-1. Connector and Cable Specifications

Item Description
Series 90 PLC: Serial (RS-422) port with metric hardware
Connectors Connector: 15-pin male, D-Subminiature Type, Cannon DA15S (solder pot)
Hood: AMP 207470-1 connector shell
Hardware Kit: AMP 207871-1 Kit includes 2 metric screws and 2 screw clips
Miniconverter: For connecting to IC690ACC901 miniconverter
Connector: 15-pin female, DB15F,

Hood: AMP #207470-1 or equivalent
M3 Latchblocks: AMP #208101 or equivalent
Computer grade, 24 AWG (.22 mm2), minimum with overall shield
Catalog Numbers: Belden 9505, Belden 9306, Belden 9832
Cable These cables provide acceptable operation for data rates up to 19.2 Kbps
as follows:
RS-422/RS-422: 4000 feet (1200 meters) maximum length. Must not

exceed the maximum RS-422 Common Mode specifi-
cation of +7V to -7V. Isolation at the remote end may
be used to reduce or eliminate Common Mode voltages.
When using RS-422/RS-422, the twisted pairs should be matched so that both
transmit signals make up one twisted pair and both receive signals make up the
other twisted pair. If this is ignored, cross-task resulting from the mismatching
will affect the performance of the communications system.
When routing communication cables outdoors, transient suppression devices can

be used to reduce the possibility of damage due to lightning or static discharge.
Care should be exercised that all connected devices are grounded to a common point.
Failure to do so could result in damage to the equipment.
K-2
FANUC CNC Controls
K
MultiDrop Cable Wiring Diagram
RS–422
MAKE CONNECTIONS
INSIDE D–CONNECTORS
PIN PIN
DCD ( A ) 2 2
DCD ( B ) 3 3
RD ( A’ ) 10 12 SD ( A )
RD ( B’ ) 11 13 SD ( B )
SD ( A ) 12 10 RD ( A’ )
To Miniconverter on SD ( B ) 13 11 RD ( B’ )
Programmer Serial RT 9 * 9 RD To First Slave PLC
Cable CTS ( A’ ) 15 6 RTS ( A )
CTS ( B’ ) 8 14 RTS ( B )
RTS ( A ) 6 15 CTS ( A’ )
RTS ( B ) 14 8 CTS ( B’ )
+5V 5 5 +5V
0V 7 7 0V
SHLD 1 1 SHLD
15– PIN 15– PIN
FEMALE MALE
NOTE
WHEN WIRING RS–422 /485 MULTIDROP CABLES, REFLECTIONS ON THE PIN
TRANSMISSION LINE CAN BE REDUCED BY CONFIGURING THE CABLE IN A 2
DAISY CHAIN FASHION, AS SHOWN BELOW. 3
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
12 SD ( A )
13 SD ( B )
MINI– FIRST SLAVE LAST SLAVE 10 RD ( A’ )
Î Î
PROGRAMMER CONVERTER STATION (PLC) STATION (PLC) 11 RD ( B’ )
* 9 RD To Second Slave PLC
6 RTS ( A )
15 CTS ( A’ )
5 +5V
CONNECTORS ALONG THE LENGTH OF THE TRANSMISSION LINE. 15– PIN
TO OTHER PLC’s MALE
If applicable
Figure K-2. Multidrop Cable Wiring Diagram
GFK-0356P Appendix K SNP Multidrop K-3

K
SNP Multidrop Examples

Conn. B Conn. C to APM Comm. Port
Series 90-30 PLC
PS CPU APM
Conn. A
IC690CBL714A Cable
IC690ACC901
Miniconverter
Serial Cable
Figure K-3. Connecting CPU and APM to Programmer with IC690CBL714A Cable
a47100
Conn. B Conn. B Conn. C

PLC A PLC B PLC C
C C C
P P P
U U U
IC690CBL714A IC690CBL714A
Conn. C Conn. A
Conn. A
RS–232/422
Converter
Figure K-4. Multidrop Arrangement for Series 90-70 TMR Redundant System
K-4
FANUC CNC Controls
K
Conn. B Conn. C
Conn. A
IC690CBL714A Cable
IC690ACC901
Miniconverter
Serial Cable
Figure K-5. Multidrop Arrangement for Series 90-30 Redundant System
Configuring and Connecting a Programmer to a Multidrop Network

Each slave device on a multidrop system must have its own unique SNP ID
(identification). The SNP ID assignment is made with a programmer running GE Fanuc
programming software, or with the Hand Held Programmer. Logicmaster, Control, or
Versa Pro software packages all can be used for this purpose. The following example
uses Logicmaster. Please see your software user’s manual or on-line help screens for
instructions. Regardless of what software you use, the basic steps are:
D Connect your programmer to each individual PLC or module on the multidrop
system and assign each one a unique SNP ID.
D Connect your programmer to the multidrop system and select Multidrop for the
programmer ’s connection method.
D In the programming software, select the SNP ID of the PLC or module you wish to
connect to.
Assigning a PLC SNP ID to a PLC with Logicmaster

D Take your programmer to the first PLC to be assigned, and connect directly to its
programmer port.
D From the Logicmaster Main Menu, select F2, “Logicmaster 90 Configuration
Package.“
D Select F2, “CPU Configuration.”
D Put the software in the ONLINE mode.
D Select F3, “Assign PLC ID.” On the ASSIGN PLC ID screen, the CURRENT PLC ID
field will display an ID if the PLC has one. If the PLC does not currently have an
SNP ID, this field will be blank. (In the OFFLINE mode it will display a series of
asterisks.)

K
D Key in the new PLC ID. For newer CPUs, it may be from one to seven
alpha-numeric characters long. For older CPUs, it is limited to a maximum of six
characters. For example, it could be PLC1, APM001, A1, B00001, etc.
D Press the Enter key. The new SNP ID will be written to the PLC and the CURRENT
PLC ID field on your screen will update to show this new SNP ID.
D Repeat the above steps for each PLC that is on the multidrop system. If assigning
an SNP ID to a module, you must use the appropriate software. See the user’s
manual for the module for instructions.
Connecting your Logicmaster Programmer to a PLC on a Multidrop System

D Connect your programmer to the programmer connection for the multidrop system.
D From the Logicmaster Main Menu, select F2, “Logicmaster 90 Configuration
Package.”
D Select F7, “Programmer Mode and Setup.”
D Select F3, “Select PLC Connections.”
D In the SELECTED SNP ID field, enter the SNP ID of the PLC or device you wish to
communicate with.
D In the PORT CONNECTION field, select MULTIDROP.
D Press F6, “setup,” to connect to the selected PLC. You should connect to the selected
PLC within a few seconds. If you cannot connect, see the next section.
SNP Multidrop Troubleshooting

If you are having trouble connecting to a PLC or module over the multidrop system,
check the following:
D Is there a problem with all PLCs or only one? Try connecting to other PLCs over
the multidrop system. If you cannot connect to any, check for a common problem
such as a defective cable. If you can connect to all but one PLC, use the direct
connection method described in the next paragraph. Also, if you only have a
problem with the last PLC on the multidrop link, the last section of cable may have a
problem. Or, perhaps you can connect to all PLCs up to a certain point, but none
beyond that point. This would also strongly suggest that there is a problem in a
section of cable.
D SNP ID may be incorrect. You may not be able to connect because you are
specifying the wrong SNP ID. If you are not sure of a PLC’s correct SNP ID and
would like to check it, you can connect your programmer directly to the PLC’s
programmer port and read its SNP ID from the software’s ASSIGN PLC ID screen,
(as described in “Assigning an SNP ID to a PLC with Logicmaster,” above). Make
sure you change the programming software’s connection method to Direct for this
test. When set for Direct connection, the software will communicate with a directly
connected PLC without regard to its SNP ID.
D Communications settings may not match. If the PLC’s serial port communication
settings and the programming software’s communication settings do not match,
they will not be able to communicate. These settings include such things as BAUD
Rate, Parity, Stop Bits, etc. If you suspect this to be the problem, try connecting
directly to the PLC as described above in “SNP ID may be incorrect.” If you cannot
K-6
FANUC CNC Controls
K
connect directly, there may be a communication settings mismatch. If so, try setting
the programming software to its default communication settings.
D Multidrop may not be selected as the connection method. The default connection
method in the programming software is Direct, which requires that you be
connected directly to a PLC or module’s programmer port. If this default setting is
not changed to Multidrop, you will not be able to connect to a selected SNP ID over
a multidrop system.
D You may have a hardware problem. Inspect the multidrop cable; it may be wired
incorrectly, damaged, or disconnected. A wire may be loose on one of the
connectors. Also check the status of the PLC you are trying to connect to. It may not
be powered up; it may be stopped; or it may have some other problem. Eliminate
the PLC itself as a possible problem by connecting your programmer directly to the
PLC’s programmer port. You should be able to communicate with a PLC using this
direct connection even if the programming software is configured for Multidrop, as
long as the SNP IDs match.

Appendix L Ethernet Transceivers
section level 1
L figure_ap level 1
table_ap level 1
IC649AEA102 Ethernet 10BASE-T Transceiver

D Compliant with the IEEE 802.3 Ethernet specification for 10BASE-T.
D Connector on transceiver body is standard RJ-45 type for connection to unshielded
twisted pair (UTP) Ethernet cable. .
D This unit has an attached 40” (1 meter) cable with standard 14-pin AAUI connector
for connecting to a Series 90-30 Ethernet module (IC693CMM321) or CPU with
Ethernet interface (IC693CPU364).
D SQE option is enabled.
D Power and Link Integrity LED indicator lights.
1”
(25mm) 3.5” (89 mm) 40 inches (1 meter)
1.8”
LI
(46mm)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8-Pin RJ-45 14-Pin AAUI
Connector Connector
8 9 1011 12 13 14
Figure L-1. IC649AEA102 Ethernet 10BASE-T Transceiver
Power Requirement
This unit draws 60 mA @ 5Vdc from the Ethernet interface via the AAUI connector.
LED Indicator Lights

These are located on the end of the unit next to the RJ-45 connector. The one labeled LI
stays on as long as Link Integrity is maintained. The one marked with a “jagged arrow”
symbol indicates the presence of 5Vdc power to the unit.
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls L-1
L
IC649AEA103 Ethernet 10BASE2 Transceiver

Note: This transceiver replaces obsolete catalog number IC649AEA101
D Compliant with the IEEE 802.3 Ethernet specification for 10BASE2.

D A standard BNC connector is mounted on the body of the transceiver for connection
to thin coaxial Ethernet cable.
D This unit has an attached 10” (254 mm) cable with standard 14-pin AAUI connector
for connecting to a Series 90-30 Ethernet module (IC693CMM321) or CPU with
Ethernet interface (IC693CPU364).
D SQE slide switch is set to enabled position at the factory. It must be in this position
for proper operation with GE Fanuc Ethernet products IC693CMM321 and
IC693CPU364 (see figure below).
D Power LED indicator light.
3.2 inches (81 mm) 10 inches (254mm)

0.9”
(23 mm) Slide Switch in this Direction to Enable SQE.
SQE Slide Switch (recessed in housing)

14-Pin AAUI
Connector
2 inches
(51 mm)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Green LED
BNC Connector Power Indicator 8 9 1011 12 13 14
Figure L-2. IC649AEA103 Ethernet 10BASE2 Transceiver
Power Requirement
This unit draws 400 mA @ 5Vdc from the Ethernet Interface via the AAUI connector.
LED Indicator Light

Located on the side of the unit as shown in the figure. This green LED turns on to
indicate the presence of 5Vdc power to the unit.
L-2 Series 90-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual – October 1999 GFK-0356P
Appendix Tables and Formulas
Table M-1. Standard ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) Codes
Char. Dec. Hex. Char. Dec. Hex. Char. Dec. Hex.
NUL 0 00 + 43 2B V 86 56
SOH 1 01 , 44 2C W 87 57
STX 2 02 - 45 2D X 88 58
ETX 3 03 . 46 2E Y 89 59
EOT 4 04 / 47 2F Z 90 5A
ENQ 5 05 0 48 30 [ 91 5B
ACK 6 06 1 49 31 \ 92 5C
BEL 7 07 2 50 32 ] 93 5D
BS 8 08 3 51 33 ^ 94 5E
HT 9 09 4 52 34 _ 95 5F
LF 10 0A 5 53 35 ` 96 60
VT 11 0B 6 54 36 a 97 61
FF 12 0C 7 55 37 b 98 62
CR 13 0D 8 56 38 c 99 63
SO 14 0E 9 57 39 d 100 64
SI 15 0F : 58 3A e 101 65
DLE 16 10 ; 59 3B f 012 66
DC1 17 11 < 60 3C g 103 67
DC2 18 12 = 61 3D h 104 68
DC3 19 13 > 62 3E i 105 69
DC4 20 14 ? 63 3F j 106 6A
NAK 21 15 @ 64 40 k 107 6B
SYN 22 16 A 65 41 l 108 6C
ETB 23 17 B 66 42 m 109 6D
CAN 24 18 C 67 43 n 110 6E
EM 25 19 D 68 44 o 111 6F
SUB 26 1A E 69 45 p 112 70
ESC 27 1B F 70 46 q 113 71
FS 28 1C G 71 47 r 114 72
GS 29 1D H 72 48 s 115 73
RS 30 1E I 73 49 t 116 74
US 31 1F J 74 4A u 117 75
SP 32 20 K 75 4B v 118 76
! 33 21 L 76 4C w 119 77
” 34 22 M 77 4D x 120 78
# 35 23 N 78 4E y 121 79
$ 36 24 O 79 4F z 122 7A
% 37 25 P 80 50 { 123 7B
& 38 26 Q 81 51 | 124 7C
′ 39 27 R 82 52 } 125 7D
( 40 28 S 83 53 ~ 126 7E
) 41 29 T 84 54 “ 127 7F
* 42 2A U 85 55
FANUC CNC Controls

GFK-0356P M-1
M
AWG to Metric Wire Size Conversion

Since there is not an exact correspondence between American AWG wire sizes and metric sizes,
the metric values in the following table are close approximations. If you need greater precision,
contact your wire supplier.
Table M-2. AWG to Metric Wire Size Conversion
AWG to Metric Wire Size Conversion
AWG Size Metric Cross Section in

square millimeters (mm2 )
1 42.4
2 33.6
4 21.2
6 13.2
8 8.37
10 5.26
12 3.31
14 2.08
16 1.31
18 0.82
20 0.52
22 0.32
24 0.21
26 0.13
28 0.081
30 0.051
M-2 Series 90-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual - October 1999 GFK-0356P
M
Temperature Conversion
Formulas
°C = 5/9(°F – 32)
°F = (9/5 x °C) + 32
Table M-3. Celsius to Fahrenheit Conversion
Celsius to Fahrenheit Conversion (to nearest degree)
Degrees Degrees Degrees Degrees Degrees Degrees

Celsius Fahrenheit Celsius Fahrenheit Celsius Fahrenheit
-50 -58 50 122 145 293
-45 -49 55 131 150 302
-40 -40 60 140 155 311
-30 -22 65 149 160 320
-25 -13 70 158 165 329
-20 -4 75 167 170 338
-15 5 80 176 175 347
-10 14 85 185 180 356
-5 23 90 194 185 365
0 32 95 203 190 374
5 41 100 212 195 383
10 50 105 221 200 392
15 59 110 230 205 401
20 68 115 239 210 410
25 77 120 248 215 419
30 86 125 257 220 428
35 95 130 266 225 437
40 104 135 275 230 446
45 113 140 284 235 455
FANUC CNC Controls

GFK-0356P Appendix M Tables and Formulas M-3
M
Conversion Information
Table M-4. General Conversions
1 ounce (weight) = 28.35 grams
1 pound (weight) = 453.6 grams
1 pound (weight) = 16 ounces

1 pound (force) = 4.448 newtons
1 short ton (weight)= 907.2 kilograms
1 short ton (weight)= 2,000 pounds
1 horsepower (power)= 550 foot-pounds per second

1 horsepower (power) = 746 watts of electrical power
1 kilowatt (power) = 1.341 horsepower
1 kilowatt-hour (energy or work) = 3,412.142 Btu

1 kilowatt-hour (energy or work) = 1,000 watts/hr.
1 watt (power) = 3.412 Btu/hr.
1 watt (power) = 1 joule/sec.

1 joule/sec. (power) = 1 watt
1 joule (energy)= 1 newton-meter
1 Btu = 0.293 watt

1 Btu = 778.2 foot-pounds
1 Btu = 252 gram-calories
1 Btu (energy)= 1055 joules

1 newton-meter (torque or work) = 0.7376 pound-feet
1 newton-meter (torque or work) = 8.851 pound-inches
1 pound-foot (torque or work) = 1.3558 newton-meters

1 pound-inch (torque or work) = 0.113 newton-meters
1 ounce-inch (torque or work) = 72 gram-centimeters
1 degree (angular) = 0.0175 radians
1 minute (angular) = 0.01667 degrees
1 radian (angular) = 57.3 degrees

1 quadrant (angular) = 90 degrees
M
English and Metric Equivalents

This section is based upon information published on the World Wide Web by the U.S.
government’s National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). For further information,
visit their web site at www.nist.gov.
Table M-5. Length Equivalents
Units of Length (Underlined Figures are Exact)
Units Inches Feet Yards Millimeters Centimeters Meters
1 inch = 1 0.083 333 0.027 777 25.4 2.54 0.025 4
1 foot = 12 1 0.333 333 304.8 30.48 0.304 8
1 yard = 36 3 1 914.4 91.44 0.914 4
1 mile = 63,360 5,280 1,760 1,609,344 160,934.4 1,609.344
1 mm = 0.0393 700 0.003 280 8 0.001 093 6 1 .1 .001
1 cm = 0.393 700 8 0.032 808 0.010 936 10 1 0.01
1 meter = 39.370 08 3.280 840 1.093 613 1000 100 1
Table M-6. Area Equivalents
Units of Area (Underlined Figures are Exact)
Units Square Square Feet Square Square Square Meters

Inches Yards Centimeters
1 square inch = 1 0.006944 0.000 771 604 9 6.451 6 0.000 645 16
1 square foot = 144 1 0.111111 929.030 4 0.092 903 04
1 square yard = 1296 9 1 8,361.273 6 0.836 127 36
1 square mile = 4,014,489,600 27,878,400 3,097,600 25,899,881,103.36 2,589,988.110 336
1 square 0.155 000 3 0.001 076 391 0.0001195990 1 0.0001

centimeter =
1 square meter = 1,550.003 10.763 91 1.195 990 10,000 1
FANUC CNC Controls

GFK-0356P Appendix M Tables and Formulas M-5
M
Table M-7. Volume Equivalents I
Units of Volume (Underlined Figures are Exact)
Units Cubic Inches Cubic Feet Cubic Yards
1 cubic inch = 1 0.000 578 703 7 0.000 021 433 47
1 cubic foot = 1,728 1 0.037 037 04
1 cubic yard = 46,656 27 1
1 cubic centimeter = 0.061 023 74 0.000 035 314 67 0.000 001 307 951
1 cubic decimeter = 61.023 74 0.035 314 67 0.001 307 951
1 cubic meter 61,023.74 35.314 67 1.307 951
Table M-8. Volume Equivalents II
Units of Volume (Underlined Figures are Exact)
Units Milliliters Liters Cubic Meters

(Cubic Centimeters) (Cubic Decimeters)
1 cubic Inch = 16.387 064 0.016 387 064 0.000 016 387 064
1 cubic foot = 28,316.846 592 28.316 846 592 0.028 316 846 592
1 cubic yard = 764,554.857 984 764.554 857 984 0.764 554 857 984
1 cubic centimeter = 1 0.001 0.000 001
1 cubic decimeter = 1,000 1 0.001
1 cubic meter = 1,000,000 1,000 1
Appendix N 44A720084-001 EMI Line Filter
section level 1
N figure_ap level 1
table_ap level 1
44A720084-001 Optional EMI Line Filter
Note
This product is not required on later versions of the Series 90-30 PLC. This
information is provided as a reference for those already using this product.
This item is still available for purchase from GE Fanuc.
Early versions of the Series 90-30 PLC and its associated hardware components were
designed primarily for use in industrial applications which are, in general, exempted
from FCC requirements. The AC power supply in those early PLCs may not comply
with FCC requirements in non-industrial applications for conducted EMI on AC power
lines. In a situation where it was desired to satisfy the FCC requirements for
non-industrial applications, a line filter was used in series with the AC power line input.
Later versions of the Series 90-30 PLC meet FCC requirements and do not require a
separate line filter.
A line filter that satisfies the FCC requirements for non-industrial applications is
available from GE Fanuc as part number 44A720084-001. A wiring diagram for
connecting the line filter in a Series 90-30 PLC system is shown below.
POWER
TERMINAL SUPPLY
STRIP FILTER
BROWN
H L BROWN H
GRN/YEL L
N G BLUE N
BLUE N
G N G
NOTE:
FILTER CASE AND ENCLOSURE SHOULD ALSO
BE GROUNDED, IF POSSIBLE.
Figure N-1. 44A720084-001 Line Filter Connections to Series 90-30 Power Supply
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls N-1
N
The equivalent circuit for the line filter is shown below. This is provided in case you
wish to specify or design a line filter as an alternative to the one mentioned above.
a43834
L L
7.06
mH
1M .33 µf .0033µf
G
.33 µf .0033µf
7.06
mH
N N
Figure N-2. Equivalent Circuit for 44A720084-001 Line Filter
44A720084-001 Line Filter Mounting Dimensions

E a45626
D
Oty.2 A C
Mtg. Holes
BLU BLU
B
GRN/YEL
BRN BRN
Dimension A B C D E Mounting Holes

Inches 2.09 1.84 1.29 2.375 .010 2.75 (2) .187 .008
Millimeters 53.09 46.74 32.77 60.32 .25 69.85 (2) 4.75 .0.20
Figure N-3. 44A720084-001 Line Filter Mounting Dimensions
N-2 Series 90-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual – October 1999 GFK-0356P
Index
Analog I/O modules

Numbers Figure, 7-11
10BASE–T, Ethernet transceiver, L-1 Wiring methods, 2-21, 7-11
APM
10BASE2, Ethernet transceiver, L-2
Axis Positioning Module, 8-15
32–P oint modules Cable data sheets, 10-45
figure, 7-6, 7-7
Appendices
installation, 2-20
acronyms and abbreviations, B-1
installing, 2-19
Catalog num to pub num, I-1
TBQC, J-11
Ethernet transceivers, L-1
wiring, 7-8
glossary of terms, A-1
44A720084–001, EMI line filter, N-1 IC690ACC903 Port Isolator, G-1
isolatedrepeater/converter, E-1
miniconverter kit, F-1
A RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 converter, D-1
serial port and cables, C-1
AAUI Series 90–30 heat dissipation, H-1
connector on CPU364, 5-23 SNP multidrop, K-1
connector on transceiver, L-2 Tables and Formulas, M-1
Terminal Block Quick Connect, J-1
AAUI (transceiver) port, 8-31
Axis Positioning Module, (APM), 8-15
AC/DC high capacity power supply
illustration of, 4-4
overvoltage protection devices, 2-24
specifications, 4-5
B
AC/DC power supplies Backplane
overcurrent protection, 4-19 Baseplate, 3-14
status indicators, 4-17 Definition, 3-3
timing diagram, 4-19 Backup, User program, 6-3
AC/DC standard power supply Backup battery, 4-20
ac power source connections, 4-5
Baseplate
dc power source connections, 4-5
Comparison table, 3-24
illustration of, 4-2
expansion dimensions, 3-19
overvoltage protection devices, 2-24,
Grounding, 2-12
4-5, 4-17
Modular CPU dimensions, 3-19
specifications, 4-3
Mounting, 2-8
Accompany Program, 8-1 remote 10-slot, 3-11
Acronyms and abbreviations, B-1 remote 5–slot, 3-10
remote dimensions, 3-19
AD693CMM301 selecting, 12-6
module drawing, 9-2
Baseplate adapter bracket
State Logic Serial Module, 9-2
for 10–slot baseplate, 2-8, 3-22
AD693SLP300, State Logic processor, 9-4 installation, 2-9, 3-22
Adapter bracket for 10–slot baseplate, 2-8, Baseplate installation, 3-18
3-22 mounting requirements, model
ADC 311/313/323,3-18
Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor, Baseplate, remote, figure, 3-10
8-35
Baseplates
Wye cable, 10-36
adapter bracket, 2-8, 3-22
Address, Memory, 5-11 Common features, 3-1
GFK-0356P
FANUC CNC Controls Index-1
Index
dimensions for mounting, 10-slot, 3-19, IC690CBL714A multidrop, 10-19
3-20 Programmer, 10-13, 10-15, 10-17
dimensions for mounting, 5-slot, 3-18, PTM interface, 10-65
3-19 WSI, 10-9
Embedded CPU dimensions, 3-18 Wye port expansion, 10-36
Expansion, 3-8
Cable and connections for serial port, C-2
Expansion and Remote in same system,
multidrop cable, K-2
3-13
Expansion, features, 3-8 Cable diagrams for isolated repeater/con-
Mounting dimensions, 3-18 verter, E-7
mounting in 19” rack, 2-9, 3-23 Cable diagrams, serial connection, C-7
number in FIP Nest, 8-12
Cable for Series 90-30 installations
power supply location, 4-2
extension cable for 32 point modules,
Remote, features, 3-10
10-39, 10-54, 10-62
Serial number location, 3-2 hand-held programmer cable, 10-34
Sizes, 3-2 I/O cable for 32 point modules, 10-41
Terminology, 3-3 I/O cable for Power Mate APM to termi-
Types, 3-1 nal block, 10-45
Battery I/Ointerface cable for 32 point I/O mod-
CPU memory backup, 6-1 ules, 10-42, 10-49, 10-57
Date code, 6-6 pcm to PC-AT, 10-15
Determining age, 6-6 pcm to Workmaster (PC-XT), 10-13
installation, accessory kit, 6-9 pcm to Workmaster II (PS/2), 10-17
Life, 6-4 work station interface cable, 10-9
Low warning, 6-4 wye cable wiring diagram, earlier ver-
Memory backup, 4-20 sion baseplates, 10-30
Operating without, 6-5 wye cables, 10-36
RAM backup path, 6-6 Cable for Series 90-30 Installations, shield
Replacement strategy, 6-3 treatment, 10-27
Battery accessory kit, For embedded Cables
CPUs, 6-8 APM, 8-16
building I/O Bus Expansion, 10-23
Blocks, Genius, 8-6
I/O Expansion Bus, 3-12
Bracket, adapter, 2-8, 3-22 SNP multidrop, K-2
Bus, connectors, 8-11 Calculations for power supply loads, ex-
amples, 12-15
Bus controller, FIP, 8-10
Catalog, Automation Solutions, 7-2, 8-1
Bus interface, 8-13
Catalog number, CPU, 5-7
Catalog number location, Baseplate, 3-2
C Catalog numbers, cables
IC647CBL704, 10-9
Cable IC693CBL304, 10-36
32–point I/O, 10-42, 10-49 IC693CBL305, 10-36
APM, 10-45
Building 32–point, 10-59 CCM, 8-34
cross-reference table, 10-1 CCM communications protocol, 8-34
Data sheet list, 10-8 CCM protocol, PCM module, 8-32
Extension for I/O module, 10-39
HHP, 10-34 Clearance requirements, PLC rack, 12-17
I/O bus expansion, 10-23 CMM
I/O for 32–point modules, 10-41 Comm. Coprocessor Module, 8-34
I/Ointerface, 10-54, 10-57 Wye cable, 10-36
Index-2 GFK-0356P
Index
CNC, 8-25 Serial ports, 5-15

speed, 5-10
Color coding, Wires, 2-17
State Logic, 9-8
COM port, standard serial, 11-4 state logic, model CSE 331, 9-10
Comm. Coprocessor Module, state logic, model CSE 340, 9-10
IC693CMM311, 8-34 Time of day clock accuracy, 5-12
Types, 5-1
Communications, using datagrams, 8-6
CPU 350–364, Features table, 5-14
Compatibility, User program to CPU type,
5-12 CPU 351, grounding information, 2-14
CPU 360–364, Features table, 5-14
Configurable, Memory, 5-14
CPU baseplate
Configuration, Software, 8-19, 8-22
Defined, 3-3
Conformance to standards, 2-1 Types, 3-4
Connector, serial port, 4-20, 5-3, 9-10 CPU baseplates
Embedded, 3-4
Converter
Modular, 3-6
IC690ACC900, 11-4
IC690ACC901, 11-5 CPU data sheets
CPU311, 5-25
Converter board jumper configuration, CPU313, 5-26
D-8
CPU323, 5-27
Converter, RS-232/RS-485, C-7 CPU331, 5-28
CPU340, 5-29
Converters
CPU341, 5-30
IC655CCM590, E-1
CPU350, 5-31
IC690ACC900, D-1
CPU351, 5-32
IC690ACC901, F-1
CPU352, 5-33
IC690ACC903, 11-4
CPU360, 5-34
CPU CPU363, 5-35
350 hardware features, 5-18 CPU364, 5-36
350–364 features, 5-13 CSE 311, 9-14
351 hardware features, 5-19 CSE 313, 9-15
364 hardware features, 5-22 Cross reference, product to documenta-
capacities, 5-10 tion, I-1
Compatibility with HHP, 5-13
Data sheets contents, 5-24, 9-13 Current draw, module, 12-12
Embedded features figure, 5-2 Customer service, telephone number, 2-1
Embedded overview, 5-1
Firmware, 5-6
Firmware upgrade, 5-6 D
jumpers for EPROM/EEPROM selec-
tion, model 331, 5-8 Data, global, 8-8
Keyswitch, 5-15 Datagrams, 8-6
Memory size table, 5-11
Microprocessors, 5-3 Date code, Battery, 6-6
Modular features figure, 5-3 DC high capacity power supply
Modular overview, 5-2 5 vdc current derating diagram, 4-14
Revision level, 5-7 calculating input power requirements,
selecting, 12-4 4-15
serial port connector, 4-20, 5-3, 9-10 capacities, 4-13
GFK-0356P
Index
illustration of, 4-13 Ethernet
output voltages to backplane, 4-18 CPU364 embedded, 5-17
specifications, 4-14 transceiver, L-1, L-2
transceiver, obsolete, L-2
DC power supply
dc power connections, 4-16 Ethernet interface, restart pushbutton,
input power requirements, calculating, 8-31
4-8, 4-11, 4-15 Ethernet interface module, 8-30
isolated +24 vdc supply connections, board indicators, 8-31
4-6, 4-16
overcurrent protection, 4-19 Ethernet transceiver
specifications, 4-8, 4-11 IC649AEA102, L-1
status indicators, 4-17 IC649AEA103, 8-30, L-2
timing diagram, 4-19 Expansion
DC power supply (24/48 VDC), illustra- baseplates, 3-8
tion of, 4-7 bus termination, 3-13, 10-26
extension cables, description of, 10-39,
DC power supply (48 VDC), illustration 10-54, 10-62
of, 4-10 port pin assignments, 10-26
Default station address label, 8-31 Expansion baseplate
Diagram, timing, 4-19 defined, 3-3
IC693CHS392 figure, 3-9
Digital Servo Module IC693CHS398 figure, 3-8
DSM302, 8-17
DSM314, 8-20 Expansion system
example, 3-16
Direct processing, definition, 8-28 remote connections, 3-17, 10-33
Documentation, cross–reference, I-1 requirements of, 12-16
DOIO, instruction, 13-4 Extension cables, I/O, 10-39, 10-54, 10-62
Drops, remote, 8-6

DSM F
Digital Servo Module (DSM302), 8-17
Digital Servo Module (DSM314), 8-20 Faceplate,I/O, J-3
Fax Link system, 13-8
FBC, FIP Bus Controller, 8-10
E Features of the DSM302
Easy to Use, 8-18, 8-21
EEPROM, 5-5
High Performance, 8-18, 8-21
Embedded baseplates, State Logic, 9-8
Field Control, using with PLC, 12-7
Embedded CPU baseplates, 3-4 Field control, 8-10
Features (figure), 3-5
Field wiring, to AC/DC power supplies,
EMI, filter requirement, N-1 2-23
EMI line filter, 44A720084-001, N-1 Field wiring connections
Enhanced Genius Comm. Module, 8-4 to dc input power supply, 4-16
to standard ac/dc power supply, 4-5
EPROM, 5-5
Creating, 5-9 FIP bus, 8-12
EPROM/EEPROM catalog numbers FIP bus controller, 8-10

IC693ACC305, 5-9 description, 8-11
IC693ACC306, 5-9 FIP nest, description, 8-12
Index-4 GFK-0356P
Index
FIP remote I/O scanner, 8-12 Genius I/O blocks, 8-8

connectors, 8-13 Global data, 8-6, 8-8
ground lug on module, 8-13 receiving, 8-9
LEDs, 8-13 sending, 8-9
Firmware Glossary of terms, A-1
CPU, 5-6
Ground bracket, CPU351, 352 figure, 2-15
CPU table, 5-6
CPU upgrade, 5-6 Ground conductor installation, 2-11
CPU Version 9.0, 5-14 Ground connections
Upgrading 350–364 CPUs, 5-14 equipment, 2-12
Firmware upgrade procedure for flash programming device, 2-13
memory, 5-7 safety and reference, 2-12
shield ground, 2-14
Flash, Memory protection, 5-15
Ground wire, CPU363, 364 figure, 2-16
Flash memory, 5-5, 5-10, 5-15
Grounding procedures, 2-11
firmware upgrade procedure, 5-7
Baseplate, 2-12
Floating neutral (IT) systems, 2-25 CPU shield, 2-14
Floating–point math, 5-15 Module shield, 2-14
Option modules, 2-16
Fuse, table of, 13-5 System, 2-11
Grounding prodecures, Programmer, 2-13
G
H
GBC, Genius Bus Controller, 8-6
Hand-held programmer cable, description
GCM of, 10-34
Example (figure), 1-9
Genius Comm. Module, 8-2 Hand–Held Programmer
Cable data sheet, 10-34
GCM+, Enhanced Genius Comm. Mod- general description, 11-6
ule, 8-4
Hand–held programmer, CPU compati-
Genius Blocks, using with PLC, 12-7 bility, 5-13
Genius blocks, 8-6 Hand-held monitor (Genius), compatibili-
ty, 8-7
Genius bus controller, 8-6
compatibility Hand-held monitor, Genius, 8-6
hand-held monitor, 8-7 Hand-held Programmer, function with
Logicmaster90-30/20/microsoftware, FIP I/O nest, 8-12
8-7 Hand-held programmer
Series 90-30 plc, 8-7 features of, 11-7
Series Six plc, 8-7 GBC configuration, 8-8
datagrams, 8-8 modes of operation, 11-7
diagnostics, 8-8
global data operation, 8-8 Hardware, load requirements, 12-12
number in system, 8-7 Heat, dissipation calculations, H-1, M-1
status LEDs, 8-2, 8-5, 8-7 Heat dissipation, calculating, 12-16, H-1
COM, 8-2, 8-5, 8-7
OK, 8-2, 8-5, 8-7 Help, from GE Fanuc, 13-8
Genius bus scan, 8-8 HHP, 11-6

Cable data sheet, 10-34
Genius Comm. Module, (GCM), 8-2
High capacity AC/DC power supply
Genius hand-held monitor, 8-6, 8-7 illustration of, 4-4
GFK-0356P
Index
overvoltage protection devices, 2-24 Standard density, 7-3
specifications, 4-5 Wire routing, 7-12
High capacity DC power supply, specifica- I/Omodules
tions, 4-14 32–point figure, 7-6
High Capacity DC power supply (24 32–point wiring figure, 7-8
VDC), illustration of, 4-13 basic types, 7-1
inserting a module, 2-3
High speed counter, 8-24 installing a terminal board, 2-5
Horner Electric, Inc., 11-9 number in FIP Nest, 8-12
removing a module, 2-4
Host CPU, 8-12 removing a terminal board, 2-6
Hotline, PLC, 2-1 Wiring 32–point modules, 7-8
wiring to modules, 2-18
HSC, High Speed Counter, 8-24
I/OProcessor Module, 8-28
I/O processor module
I changing configuration parameters,
8-29
I/O bus expansion cable configuration
description of, 10-23 using Logicmaster 90 configurator,
I/O bus terminator plug requirements, 8-28
10-24 using the hand-held programmer,
maximum cable distance, 10-24 8-28
maximum number in system, 10-24 features, 8-29
threshold voltage, 8-29
I/O Bus Expansion cables
watchdog timer circuit, 8-29
Application examples, 10-32
building, 10-23 I/Oterminal block
wiring diagrams, 10-29 IC693ACC329, J-6
IC693ACC330, J-7
I/O bus termination information, 10-32
IC693ACC331, J-8
I/O cables for 32-point modules, 10-41 IC693ACC332, J-9
I/Oexpansion IC693ACC333, J-10
bus termination, 3-13, 10-26 IC693ACC377, J-13
system connections, 10-32 IBM-AT/XT serial port, C-6
I/O Expansion Bus cables, 3-12 IC640WMI310, WSI board, 11-2
I/O faceplate, J-3 IC640WMI320, WSI board, 11-2
I/Ointerface cables IC647CBL704, Cable, WSI, 10-9
for 32-point modules, 10-42, 10-49, 10-57
IC649AEA101, Obsolete Ethernet trans-
for Power Mate APM modules, 10-45 ceiver, L-2
I/O link interface module, slave, 8-25 IC649AEA102, Ethernet transceiver, 5-23,
I/O link master module, 8-26 8-30, 8-31, L-1
compatibility, 8-27 IC649AEA103, Ethernet transceiver, 5-23,
restart pushbutton, 8-27 8-30, 8-31, L-2
serial port, 8-27
IC655CCM590
I/O Module, Relay protection, 7-5 isolatedrepeater/converter, E-1
I/O module, Figure, standard density, 7-4 obsolete repeater/converter, E-1
I/OModules IC655CMM590, Obsolete repeater/con-
32–point features, 7-6 verter, 11-10
50–pin, 32–point figure, 7-7 IC690ACC900, RS–232 to RS–485 Con-
Analog features, 7-10 verter, 11-4
Index-6 GFK-0356P
Index
IC690ACC901, Miniconverter, 11-5 IC693CBL300, Cable, I/O Bus Expansion,

10-23
IC690ACC903
port isolator, G-1 IC693CBL301, Cable, I/O Bus Expansion,
Port Isolator overview, 11-10 10-23
IC690CBL701, Cable, programmer, 10-13 IC693CBL302, Cable, I/O Bus Expansion,
10-23
IC690CBL702
Cable, programmer, 10-15 IC693CBL303, Data sheet, 10-34
use on PCM modules, 8-33, 8-36 IC693CBL304, Wye cable, 10-36
IC690CBL705, Cable, programmer, 10-17 IC693CBL305
IC690CBL714A use on CMM module, 8-34
Cable, multidrop, 10-19 use on PCM modules, 8-33, 8-36
multidrop cable, K-2 Wye cable, 10-36
IC693CBL306, Cable, 32–point I/O, 10-39
IC693ACC301, Memory backup battery,
6-1 IC693CBL307, Cable, 32–point I/O, 10-39
IC693ACC303, HHP memory card, 11-7 IC693CBL308, Cable, 32-point I/O, 10-41
IC693ACC308, baseplate adapter bracket, IC693CBL309, Cable, 32-point I/O, 10-41
2-8, 3-22 IC693CBL310, Cable, 32–point I/O, 10-42
IC693ACC308 Bracket, 19” rack mounting, IC693CBL311
2-9, 3-23
APM cable, 8-16
IC693ACC313 Bracket, recessed 19” rack Cable, APM I/O, 10-45
mount, 2-10, 3-23
IC693CBL312, Cable, I/O Bus Expansion,
IC693ACC315, Battery accessory kit, 6-8 10-23
IC693ACC329, TBQC, J-6 IC693CBL313, Cable, I/O Bus Expansion,
10-23
IC693ACC330, TBQC, J-7
IC693CBL314
IC693ACC331, TBQC, J-8 Cable, I/O Bus Expansion, 10-23
IC693ACC332, TBQC, J-9 use with DSM302, 8-17
IC693ACC333, J-10 IC693CBL315, Cable, 32–point I/O, 10-49
IC693ACC377, TBQC, J-13 IC693CBL316
use on Ethernet module, 8-31
IC693ADC311, Alphanumeric Coproces-
use with DSM314, 8-20
sor, 8-35
IC693CBL317
IC693APU300, High Speed Counter, 8-24
APM cable, 8-16
IC693APU301/302,AxisPositioning Mod- Cable, APM I/O, 10-45
ule, 8-15
IC693CBL319
IC693APU305, I/O Processor Module, 8-28 APM cable, 8-16
IC693BEM320, I/O link, slave, 8-25 Cable, APM I/O, 10-45
IC693CBL320
IC693BEM321, I/O Link, master, 8-26
APM cable, 8-16
IC693BEM330, FIP Remote I/O Scanner, Cable, APM I/O, 10-45
8-12
IC693BEM331, Genius Bus Controller, 8-6
IC693BEM340, FIP Bus Controller Mod-
ule, 8-10 IC693CBL323, Cable, 32–point I/O, 10-54
IC693CBK002/003/004,cablekitsfor
TBQC, 10-63 IC693CBL328, Cable, 32–point I/O, 10-57
GFK-0356P
Index
IC693CBL329, Data sheet, 10-62 Hardware features, 5-19
IC693CBL330, Data sheet, 10-62 IC693CPU364
Data sheet, 5-36
IC693CBL331, Data sheet, 10-62
Hardware features, 5-22
IC693CSE311, Data sheet, 9-14
IC693CSE311 baseplate, drawing, 9-9
IC693CBL340/341, Cable, PTM interface,
10-65
IC693CHS392, figure, 3-9
IC693CHS393
figure, 3-11 IC693CSE331
remote baseplate, 3-11 Data sheet, 9-17
drawing, 9-10
State Logic CPU, 9-10
IC693CSE340
IC693CMM302, Genius Comm. Module Data sheet, 9-18
+, 8-4 drawing, 9-10
IC693CMM311, Comm. Coprocessor, 8-34 State Logic CPU, 9-10
IC693CMM321, Ethernet Interface mod- IC693DSM302

ule, 8-30 Digital Servo Module, 8-17
module drawing, 8-17
IC693CPU311
Data sheet, 5-25 IC693DSM314
figure, 3-5 Digital Servo Module, 8-20
module drawing, 8-20
IC693CPU313, Data sheet, 5-26
IC693DVM300
IC693CPU313 figure, 3-5 connections, 7-16
IC693CPU323 module drawing, 7-14
Data Sheet, 5-27 specifications table, 7-15
figure, 3-5 valve driver module, 7-14
IC693CPU331, Data sheet, 5-28 IC693GCM301, Genius Comm. Module,
8-2
IC693CPU340, Data sheet, 5-29
IC693PCM300/301/311,Prog. Coprocessor,
IC693CPU341, Data sheet, 5-30 8-32
IC693CPU350 IC693PRG300, Hand–Held Programmer,
Data sheet, 5-31 11-6
Hareware features, 5-18
IC693PTM100/101,Power Transducer, 8-40
IC693CPU351
IC693PWR321, power supply, 4-2
Data sheet, 5-32
Hardware features, 5-19 IC693PWR322, power supply, 4-7
IC693CPU352 IC693PWR328, power supply, 4-10
Data sheet, 5-33 IC693PWR330, power supply, 4-4
Hardware features, 5-19
IC693PWR331, power supply, 4-13
IC693CPU360
Data sheet, 5-34 IC693SLP300, module drawing, 9-4
Hareware features, 5-18 IC693TCM302, Temperature Contol Mod-
IC693CPU363 ule, 8-37
Data sheet, 5-35 IC693TCM302/303, module drawing, 8-37
Index-8 GFK-0356P
Index
Illustration of the DSM302 Module, 8-18,

8-21
K
Indicator lights Key, CPU, replacement, 5-16, 13-6
relating to I/O terminals, 13-1 Keyswitch, CPU, 5-15
see LED indicators also, 13-2
Kits, spare parts, mechanical, 13-6
Inspection, new system, 2-1
Installation
32–P oint modules, 2-20 L
baseplate adapter bracket, 2-8, 3-22
Layout PLC system, good layout benefits,
baseplate, model 311/313, 3-18 12-17
baseplate, model 323, 3-19
Basic procedure, 2-28 Layout, PLC, figure, 12-20
grounding procedures, 2-11 Layout, PLC system, guidelines, 12-17
I/Oexpansion system, 10-32
LED indicators
load requirements for components,
12-12 CPU, 13-2
Input modules, 13-2
multidrop configuration, 10-10
Option modules, 13-2
pcm to programmer cables, 10-14, 10-16,
10-18 Output modules, 13-2
remote expansion system, 3-17, 10-33 P1 (CPU 351/352), 5-20
P2 (CPU 351/352), 5-20
Installing, I/O Module Term Board, 2-5 power supplies, 4-17
relating to terminal board, 13-1
Instructions for floating neutral (IT) sys-
SNP (CPU 351/352), 5-20
tems, 2-25
LEDs, 8-11, 8-31
Internet, GE Fanuc site, 13-8
List of fuses, 13-5
Interposing terminal blocks, 2-19, J-2, J-11
Lithium battery, 4-20
IsolatedRepeater/Conv., overview (obso-
Load capacity, power supply, 12-12
lete), 11-10
Load requirements
Isolatedrepeater/converter, 11-4 hardware, 12-12
cable diagrams, E-7 sample calculations, 12-15
complex multidrop configuration, E-6 table of, 12-13
description of, E-1
illustration of, E-2 Local expansion system, example, point-
logic diagram, E-3 to-point wiring, 10-29
pin assignments, E-4 Location
rules for using, E-6 of modules in racks, 12-18
simple multidrop configuration, E-6 rack, 12-17
system configurations, E-5 Logicmaster 90–30 Configuration Soft-
ware, 8-19, 8-22
Low battery warning, 4-21, 6-1
J
Jumper strap for overvoltage protection M
devices, 4-6, 4-18
Machine references (% symbol), 5-11
Jumpers for EPROM/EEPROM selection,
5-8 Maintenance, preventive, table, 13-7
Jumpers, converter board, D-7 Making a 100% shielded cable, 10-28

configuration of, D-8 Math, Floating point feature, 5-15
GFK-0356P
Index
Maximum number of modules per sys- Motion Mate DSM302, Illustration of, 8-18,
tem, 12-11 8-21
Mechanical spare parts kits, 13-6 Mounting, Baseplates, 2-8
Megabasic, 8-32 Multidrop
configuring, K-5
Memory system limitations, K-2
Comparing PROM devices, 5-9
Configurable, 5-14 Multidrop cables
CPU table, 5-11 specfication table, K-2
Flash, 5-10, 5-15 types, K-2
Flash, protection, 5-15 Multidrop configuration, 10-12
Maintaining during storage, 6-7 with converter, 10-10
PROM types, 5-5 with isolated repeater/converter, E-6
Protection strategy, 6-3 Multidrop connections, C-11
RAM, 5-5
User options, 5-8 Multidrop, SNP
Volatility, 5-4 connecting, K-6
examples, K-4
Memory card, HHP, 11-7 overview, K-1
Microprocessor types, CPU, 5-3 setting SNP ID, K-5
troubleshooting, K-6
Miniconverter kit wiring diagram, K-3
cable diagrams, F-3
IC690ACC901, 11-5 Multiple hosts, Genius, 8-6
RS-232 port pin assignments, F-1
RS-422 port pin assignments, F-2
RS-422 (SNP) to RS-232, F-1 N
specifications, F-4
system configurations, F-2 Nickname, Compared to address, 5-11
Model 331, jumpers for EPROM/EE-

PROM, 5-8
O
Module
fuse list, 13-5 Operation without battery, 6-6
location, 12-18 Operator interface terminal, 8-35
Module count, 12-7 Option module, list, 8-1
maximum table, 12-11
Option modules
Module features figure, 2-2 alphanumeric display coprocessor, 8-35
Comm. Coprocessor, 8-34
Module load requirements, table, 12-13
DSM302, 8-17
Module location DSM314, 8-20
Defined, 3-3 enhanced genius communications, 8-4
figure, 12-19 Ethernet interface, 8-30
FIP bus controller, 8-10
Module location in baseplate, number of,
FIP remote I/O scanner, 8-12
valid, 12-11
Genius bus controller, 8-6
Modules, replacing, 13-4 Genius communications, 8-2
high speed counter, 8-24
Motion Mate APM300, 8-15
I/O link interface, slave, 8-25
Axis Postioning Module, 8-15
I/O link master, 8-26
Motion Mate DSM I/Oprocessor, 8-28
DSM302, 8-17 Motion Mate APM300, 8-15
DSM314, 8-20 personal computer interface card, 11-8
Index-10 GFK-0356P
Index
Power Transducer, 8-40 24/48 VDC input, 4-7

programmable coprocessor modules, 48 VDC input, 4-10
8-32 ac power source connections, 2-23
state logic processor, 9-5 AC/DC input, 4-2
Temperature Control (TCM), 8-37 Backup battery, location, 4-20
Output module fuses, 13-5 comparison table, 12-7
Feature comparison, 4-1
Overvoltage protection devices, 4-5, 4-17 field wiring to DC input supply, 4-16
jumper strap installation, 2-24 field wiring to standard AC/DCsupply,
2-23, 4-5
high capacity 120/240 VAC or 125 VDC,
P 4-4
high capacity 24 VDC input, 4-13
Parts kits, mechanical, spare, 13-6 isolated +24 vdc supply connections,
4-6, 4-16
PCIF/PCIF2, description, 11-8 load calculation, 12-12
PCM, Wye cable, 10-36 load capacity, 12-12
load ratings, 3-21
Personal Computer Interface, Data sheet, location in baseplate, 4-2
11-8
mounting orientation, 3-21
Planning your system, 12-1 serial port connector, location of, 4-20,
5-3, 9-10
PLC, mounting orientation, 12-21
standard 120/240 VAC or 125 VDC, 4-2
PLC Basics, 1-1 temperature, 3-21, 12-21
PLC customer service, 2-1 Power supply capacities
PLC hotline, 2-1 dc supply, 4-7, 4-10, 4-13
high capacity AC/DCsupply, 4-4
PLC mounting, mounting orientation, standard AC/DCsupply, 4-2
12-21
Power supply output voltages, 4-18
Point-to-point RS-232 connections, C-7
Power supply rating, affect of mounting
Point-to-point RS-422 connections, C-10 position, 12-21
Port, 8-11 Power Supply slot, 3-3
Port expansion, Cables for PCM, ADC, Power supply specifications
CMM, 10-36 dc supply, 4-8, 4-11
Port expansion cable, 10-36 high capacity ac/dc supply, 4-5
high capacity dc supply, 4-14
Port Isolator standard ac/dc supply, 4-3
IC690ACC903, G-1
overview, 11-10 Power Transducer, IC693PTM100/101, 8-40
Port, serial, CPU351, 352, 353, 5-21 Powering down, Expansion and remote
racks, 3-14
Port, serial, Series 90, C-3
Preinstallation check, 2-1
Ports, ethernet interface
AAUI, 8-31 Preventive maintenance, table, 13-7
firmware upgrade, 8-31 Product support
serial, ethernet interface, 8-31 customer service, 2-1
station manager port, 8-31 technical help, 2-1
Posts, terminal board, 2-7 Program compatibility, 5-12
Power Supply, DC input only, 4-7 Programmable coprocessor modules, 8-32
Power supply Programmer, Hand–Held, IC693PRG300,
+24 vdc output connections, 2-27 11-6
GFK-0356P
Index
PROM features of, 8-12
Configuration table, 5-6 Repeater/converter, isolated, 11-4
Types, 5-5 cable diagrams, E-7
Use in Series 90–30, 5-5 complex multidrop configuration, E-6
PROM option, EPROM/EEPROM selec- description of, E-1
tion, model 331, 5-8 illustration of, E-2
logic diagram, E-3
Protection devices, overvoltage, 2-24, 4-5,
pin assignments, E-4
4-17
rules for using, E-6
Protocol simple multidrop configuration, E-6
CMM, 8-34 system configurations, E-5
RTU (Modbus), 8-34 Replacing modules, 13-4
SNP, 8-34
Restart pushbutton
PTM, Power Transducer, 8-40 alphanumeric display coprocessor, 8-35
Publication, cross–reference, I-1 communications control, 8-34
ethernet interface, 8-31
I/O link master, 8-27
Q RS-232 point-to-point connections, C-7
RS-232/RS-485converter, C-7
Quick connect terminal block, J-2
RS-422 point-to-point connections, C-10
RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 converter
R cable description, D-3
features, D-1
Rack, Definition, 3-3 functions, D-1
installation procedures, D-2
Rack number, Selection switch, 3-14 jumper configuration, user options, D-7
RAM, Memory, 5-5 location in system, D-1
logic diagram, D-6
RAM memory backup battery, 4-20, 6-1 RS-232 interface pin assignments, D-4
Reference types, user, 5-11 RS-422/RS-485interface assignments,
D-5
References, not used, 8-7
RS-485 compatible serial port, 4-20, 5-3
Relay output module, Protection, 7-5
RS–232, converter, obsolete, 11-4
Remote, baseplates, 3-10
RS–422
Remote baseplate cable specs., C-2
10–slot, 3-11 pin–out, C-4
Defined, 3-3 Serial interface, C-1
IC693CHS399, 3-10 RS–485, converter, obsolete, 11-4
Remote baseplates, Features, 3-10 RTU (Modbus) communications protocol,
Remote drops, 8-6, 8-10 8-34
Remote expansion system RTU master protocol, PCM module, 8-32
connections, 3-17, 10-33
example of using wye cables, 10-31
example, point-to-point wiring, applica- S
tions requiring less noise immunity, Scan time, factors affecting, 12-16
10-29
wye cable wiring diagram, earlier ver- SCM, State Logic Serial Module, 9-2
sion baseplates, 10-30 Sequential Event Recorder, 5-16
Remote I/O scanner, FIP SER, 5-16
description of, 8-12 instruction, 13-4
Index-12 GFK-0356P
Index
Serial number standard ac/dc supply, 4-2

Baseplates, 3-2 Series Six PLC, 8-7
Ethernet interface module, 8-31
locating on modules, 2-2 Shield ground, CPU351, 352 figure, 2-14
Serial numbers, recording, 2-1 Shield grounding

CPUs 351 and 352, 2-14
Serial Port, ethernet interface, 8-31 CPUs 363 and 364, 2-15
Serial port, 8-11 general information, 2-14
351 connectors, 5-20 Shield treatment, cables, 10-27
352 connectors, 5-20
Shielded cable, making a, 10-28
363 connectors, 5-20
I/O link master module, 8-27 Slot number, Defined, 3-3
IBM-AT/XT , C-6 SLP, State Logic Processor, 9-4
LED indicators, 5-20
SNP communications protocol, 8-34
pin-out, IBM-AT/XT , C-6
pin-out, Workmaster, C-5 SNP ID, for multidrop, K-5
Series 90, C-3 SNP multidrop, overview, K-1
Workmaster, C-5
SNP port connection, 4-20, 5-3
Serial port and cables, workmaster serial
port, C-5 Software, Configuration, 8-19, 8-22
Spare parts, kits, 13-6
Serial port and cables, appendix C
cable and connector specifications, C-2 Spare parts kits, mechanical, 13-6
IBM-AT/XT serial port, C-6 Specifications
multidrop connections, C-11 24 vdc high capacity power supply, 4-14
RS-232 point-to-point connections, C-7 24/48 vdc power supply, 4-8
RS-232/RS-485converter, C-7 48 vdc power supply, 4-11
RS-422 interface, C-1 high capacity ac/dc power supply, 4-5
RS-422 point-to-point connection, C-10 IC690ACC900 converter, D-9
serial cable diagrams, C-7 serial port cables, C-2
Serial port connector standard ac/dc power supply, 4-3
location of, 9-10 SQE, Ethernet products, L-1, L-2
on power supply, 4-20, 5-3
Standard AC/DC power supply
when functional, 4-20, 5-4, 9-11
ac power source connections, 4-5
Serial Port Pin Assignments, CPU351, 352, dc power source connections, 4-5
363, 5-21 illustration of, 4-2
Serial ports, CPU, 5-15 overvoltage protection devices, 4-5, 4-17
specifications, 4-3
Series 90–30, 48 VDC supply, 4-10
Standard serial COM port, 11-4
Series 90–30 PLC
State Logic
backplane, 3-14
CPU table, 9-12
baseplate installation, 3-18 CPUs, 9-8
CPU capacities, 5-10 Processor module (SLP), 9-4
recording serial numbers, 2-1 product listing, 9-1
user references, 5-11 Serial Comm. module, 9-2
visual inspection of new system, 2-1
Sweep time
Series 90-30 factors, 12-16
125 vdc supply, 4-2, 4-4 factors affecting, 12-16
24/48 VDC supply, 4-7
high capacity 24 VDC supply, 4-13 Symbol, %, use of, 5-11
high capacity ac/dc supply, 4-4 System design
power supplies, 4-2, 4-4 baseplate selection, 12-6
GFK-0356P
Index
CPU selection, 12-4 User references
I/O requirements, 12-1 description of, 5-11
Option module requirements, 12-2 range and size, models 311–341, 5-11
power supply selection, 12-6 types of, 5-11
T V
Tables and formulas, M-1 Version, CPU firmware, 5-7
TBQC Visual inspection of new system, 2-1
cables and kits, 10-63
Volatility, Memory, 5-4
for 32–point modules, J-11
TCM, Temperature Control Module, 8-37
TCM comparison table, 8-39 W
Technical support telephone number, 2-1
Warranty claims, 2-1
Telephone numbers, GE Fanuc help, 13-8
Web site, GE Fanuc, 7-2, 8-1, 13-8
Terminal Block Quick Connect, J-1
Weidmuller, 912263 terminal block, 2-19
32–point cables, J-12
cables, J-3 Wire routing, I/O Modules, 7-12
I/O face plate, J-3
Wire size, power supply wiring, 2-23
installation, J-3
terminal blocks, J-2, J-11 Wiring
Color coding, 2-17
Terminal block quick connect assembly,
General guidelines, 2-17
for 16–Point modules, 2-19
I/O module routing, 7-12
Terminal blocks, interposing, J-2, J-11 I/O modules, 2-18
Terminal board Power supplies, 2-23
connecting to, 2-18 Routing wires, 2-17
Installing, 2-5 Wiring methods
posts, 2-7 32–point modules, 7-8
Removing, 2-6 Analog I/O modules, 2-21, 7-11
With holding screws, 2-7 Standard density I/O modules, 7-5
Termination, I/O bus, 10-32 Work station interface, board, 11-2
Terms, glossary of, A-1 Workmaster computers
Third–party modules, 8-1 replacing, 11-3
WSI board, 11-3
Time of day clock, Accuracy, 5-12
Workmaster serial port, C-5
Timing diagram, 4-19
WSI, board, 11-2
Troubleshooting
features of hardware, 13-1 WYE cable, 8-34
multidrop problems, K-6 connection to PCM modules, 10-14,
using software, 13-3 10-16, 10-18
wiring diagram, 10-36
wiring diagram for current remote base-
plates, 10-31
U wiring diagram for earlier version base-
plates, 10-30
Upgrading, CPU firmware, 5-6 wiring diagram, remote system, 10-31
User PROM option, EPROM/EEPROM wiring diagram, remote system (for ear-
selection, model 331, 5-8 lier version baseplates), 10-30
Index-14 GFK-0356P

Series 90-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Series 90-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Series 90-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Î

Programmable Control Products

GFK-0356P October 1999

FANUC CNC Controls

Warnings, Cautions, and Notes

Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that

Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is

The following are trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

Alarm Master Genius ProLoop Series Three

The following note is required to be published by the Canadian Department of

iv Series 90-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual GFK-0356P

What’s New in This Manual

FANUC CNC Controls

Content of this Manual

vi Series 90-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual GFK-0356P

FANUC CNC Controls

We Welcome Your Comments and Suggestions

FANUC CNC Controls

x Series 90-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual GFK-0356P

Chapter 1 Overview of the Series 90-30 PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Chapter 2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

FANUC CNC Controls

Chapter 3 Baseplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Chapter 4 Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Chapter 5 CPUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Chapter 6 Memory Backup and Backup Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

FANUC CNC Controls

Chapter 7 Input and Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Chapter 8 Option Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Chapter 9 State Logic Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Chapter 10 Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Cable Data Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8

FANUC CNC Controls

Chapter 11 Programmer Hardware Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Chapter 12 System Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Chapter 13 Maintenance and Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Appendix A Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

Appendix B Acronyms and Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

Appendix C Serial Port and Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

Appendix D IC690ACC900 Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1

Appendix E IC655CCM590 Isolated Repeater/Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1

Appendix F IC690ACC901 Miniconverter Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1

Appendix G IC690ACC903 Port Isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1

Appendix H Series 90-30 Heat Dissipation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-1

Appendix I Catalog Number to Publication Cross-Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-1

Appendix J Terminal Block Quick Connect Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-1

Appendix K SNP Multidrop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-1

Appendix L Ethernet Transceivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-1

Appendix M Tables and Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-1

Appendix N 44A720084-001 EMI Line Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-1

Figure 1-1. Five-Slot CPU Baseplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Figure 3-12. Example of Connecting Expansion Baseplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

Figure 8-2. Genius Bus Wiring Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Figure 11-1. WSI Board for the Workmaster II Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

Figure F-1. Series 90 SNP to RS-232 Miniconverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1

Table 3-1. Rack Number Selection Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

Table 11-1. Personal Computer Interface Card Comparison Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Chapter Overview of the Series 90-30 PLC

The Basic Parts of a Series 90-30 PLC